Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


19 9 1 


19 9 3 



1991 — 1993 University Catalog 

Available from: Titan Shops Bookstore on the University campus 
or by mail order to: 

Titan Shops 
CSU Fullerton 
2875 Orange/Olive Road 
Orange, CA 92665 

Price: $4. 94 plus sales tax and shipping. 


University Address 

When corresponding with the university, write to the specific 
office, school or department — 


California State University, Fullerton 
RO. Box 34080 
Fullerton, CA 92634-9480 
Telephone information (714) 773-2011 


Changes in Rules and Policies 

Although every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the 
information in this catalog, students and others who use this 
catalog should note that laws, rules and policies change from 
time to time and that these changes may alter the information 
contained in this publication. Changes may come in the form of 
statutes enacted by the Legislature or rules and policies adopted 
by the Board i>f Trustees of The California State University, by 
the chancellor or designee of The California State University, or 
by the president or designee of the institution. Further, it is not 
pittsible in a publication of this size to include all of the rules, 
policies and other information which pertain to the student, the 
institution, and The California State University. More current or 
complete information may be obtained fn>m the appropriate de- 
partment, school or administrative office. 

Nothing in this catalog shall be construed, operate as or have the 
effect of an abridgment or a limitation of any nghts, powers or 
privileges of the Bi*ard of Trustees of The California State Uni- 
versity, the chancellor of the California State University or the 
president of the campus. The Board of Trustees, the chancellor 
and the president are authorized by law to adopt, amend or repeal 
rules and policies which apply to students. This catalog does not 
constitute a contract or the terms and conditions of a contract 
between the student and the institution or The California State 
University. The relationship of the student to the institution is 
one governed by statute, rules and policy adopted by the Legisla- 
ture, the Board of Tnistees, the chancellor, the president and 
their duly authorized designees. 


Effective date: August 26, 1991 


California State 
University, Fullerton 



Accreditations and 
Associations 

Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology 
Accrediting Council on Education in Journalism and Mass 
Communications 

American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
American Chemical Society 
American Speech- Language- Hearing Association 
Commission on Teacher Credent ialing 
Computer Sciences Accreditation Commission 
National Association for Foreign Student Affairs 
National Association of Schixds of Art and Design 
National Association of Schixds of Dance 
National Association of Schools of Music 
National Association of Schools of Public Affairs and 
Administration 

National Association of Schools of Theatre 
National Athletic Trainers Association 
National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education 
National League for Nursing 

Southern California Consortium on International Studies 
Universities Field Staff International 
Western Association of Graduate Schools 
Western Ass<x:iation of Schtxds and Colleges 


1 





Nondiscrimination Policy 

Sex 

The California State University does not discriminate on the 
basis of sex in the educational programs or activities it conducts. 
Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, as amended, and 
the administrative regulations adopted thereunder prohibit dis- 
crimination on the basis of sex in education programs and activi- 
ties operated by California State University, Fullerton. Such 
programs and activities include admission of students and em- 
ployment. Inquiries concerning the application of Title IX to 
programs and activities of California State University, Fullerton 
may be referred to Rosamaria G6mez-Amaro, the campus officer 
assigned the administrative responsibility of reviewing such mat- 
ters or to the Regional Director of the Office of Civil Rights, 
Region 9, 221 Main Street, 10th Floor, San Francisco, CA 
94105. 

Handicap 

The California State University does not discriminate on the 
basis of handicap and is in compliance with Section 504 of the 
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations 
adopted thereunder. 

More specifically, The California State University does not dis- 
criminate in admission or access to, or treatment or employment 
in, its programs and activities. Rosamaria Gdmez-Amaro, Direc- 
tor of Affirmative Action, hits been designated incoordinate the 
efforts of California State University, Fullerton to comply with 
the act and its implementing regulations. Inquiries concerning 
compliance may be addressed to this person at California State 
University, Fullerton, Langsdorf Hall 101, Fullerton, CA 92654, 
(714) 775-3951. 

Race, Color or National Origin 

The California State University complies with the requirements 
of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and the regulations 
adopted thereunder. No person shall, on the grounds of race, 
color or national origin, be excluded from participation in, be 
denied the benefits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimina- 
tion under any program of The California State University’. 


This Catalog 

Within this catalog may be found general academic and adminis- 
trative information as well as specific descriptions of the depart- 
ments, their majors and the courses offered in each. The first 
major part contains orienting information such as the calendar, 
materials on the California State University, an overview of Cal 
State Fullerton and facts about student services and activities on 
the campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: ad- 
mission, registration, records and regulations; academic advise- 
ment; and university courses. The next sections describe the 
departments and the programs of study and courses they offer. 
The final part of the catalog contains a listing of the faculty and 
administration. An index may be found at the end to help the 
reader locate specific items. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the academic 
year it covers, changes in some programs and rules occur. The 
class schedule and subsequent errata sheets are the final authority 
in regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions of regula- 
tions. This publication may be bought for a small fee from the 
Titan Bwkstore. 


Credits 

The California State University, Fullerton, catalog is prepared by 
the Office of Academic, Graduate, and International Programs; 
Dennis F. Berg, Associate Vice President for Academic Programs; 
William W. Haddad, Assistant Vice President for Graduate and 
International Programs. 

Editor/Project Coordinator Gladys Fleckles 

Catalog Design Shushan Wilson 

Cover Photi>graph Patrick O’Donnell 

Additional photographs appear through the courtesy of Patrick 
O’Donnell, the Office of Public Affairs, the Fall 1990 Communi- 
cations 319 students, and select department faculty. 

Editorial Assistants Laela Handy 

Barbara Sweet 
Faye Workman 

Curriculum Editing School Deans 

Department Chairs 
Program Coordinators 

Typesetting Keyboard Network, Inc. 

Printing Sinclair Printing 

Los Angeles 


2 


President’s Message 

Welcome to California State University, Fullerton. The universi- 
ty is here to prepare students to meet the challenges of their 
future chosen careers. Our undergraduate and postbaccalaureate 
programs are designed to help students reach their optimum 
personal and professional development. We are a caring campus 
that provides an environment whereby our students have oppor- 
tunities for learning, growth, service to society, and involvement 
in the university community. Through our programs, students 
will learn to be concerned with the pursuit of excellence and the 
importance of quality of life issues. 

Cal State Fullerton has awarded more than 85,000 degrees since 
classes began in 1959, and we have played an integral role in the 
lives of students, almuni and the community at large. Our univer- 
sity provides the Orange County community, its surrounding 
regions, the state and the nation with the trained professionals in 
business, computer science, engineering, health, science and 
teaching, the arts and other service sectors with growing numbers 
of well-educated personnel. By providing access to professional 
careers for the broadest cross-section of Americans, including 
women and members of minority and immigrant groups, our 
university represents a pathway into the American mainstream 
for individuals and families who otherwise would not have the 
opportunity to make this step, thus helping to ensure the stability 
of our free economy and our democratic government. 

As Orange County has grown and matured, so has the university. 
Enrollment now stands at approximately 25,000 students, and 
the faculty is made up of 1,500 distinguished professionals, who 
are dedicated to excellence in teaching, scholarly and creative 
activity, and service to the university and the community. Our 
faculty members are actively involved in giving each student the 
finest academic experience possible. 

We are proud that in the university’s relatively short history our 
curriculum has grown to include 45 undergraduate majors and 41 
graduate degrees, plus a variety of credential and certificate 
programs. 


The university tradition extends from our quality academic offer- 
ings, our cultural diversity, our extensive outreach programs to 
the personal, first-hand interaction with professors whose diversi- 
ty and backgrounds provide unsurpassed enrichment for a total 
university education. Our students can participate in or be spec- 
tators of intellectual, cultural and athletics programs and events. 
By the time students graduate, they will have received one of the 
finest educations possible. They will be prepared for continued 
personal and professional development throughout their lives; 


they will be ambassadors of gtxxlwill for the university and our 
surrounding communities will benefit from their contributions to 
society. 

Cal State Fullerton is a stimulating and challenging place to be. 
As you become familiar and involved in the campus community, 
you will discover exciting opportunities to grow and contribute. I 
invite you to participate fully. 


a. 

Milton A. Gordon 
President 

California State University, Fullerton 





3 


Table of Contents 


President’s Message 3 

Academic Calendars 8 

The California State University 11 

California State University, Fullerton 15 

University Advisory Board 15 

Mission Viejo Campus 18 

Community Minority Affairs Advisory Council 19 

University Administration 20 

CSUF Alumni 24 

Community Support Croups 24 

ACADEMIC SERVICES 

Academic Affairs * . 28 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 28 

Academic Programs 29 

Academic Senate 29 

Admissions and Records 29 

Analytical Studies 30 

Computer Center 30 

Extended Education 30 

Graduate Studies 30 

Faculty Affairs and Records 30 

Faculty Research 30 

International Programs 31 

Television & Media Support Services 31 

Library 31 

Student Academic Affairs 33 

Academic Advisement Center 33 

Athletic Academic Services 33 

Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 34 

Educational Opportunity Program 34 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 34 

Mentor Program 35 

Student Academic Services 35 

Student Affirmative Action 35 

University Ourreach/Relations with Schools 35 

Campus Tours 36 

Writing Center 36 

Honors Programs 37 

Dean’s Honor List 37 

General Education Honors 37 


Honors at Entrance 37 

Honors at Graduation 38 

Honor Societies 38 

President’s Opportunity Scholars 38 

President’s Scholars Program 39 

Institutes and Centers 40 

California Desert Studies Consortium 40 

Center for Economic Education 40 

Center for Governmental Studies 40 

Center for International Business 41 

Environmental Institute 41 

Foreign Language Laboratory 41 

Humanities Institute 41 

Infant and Child Studies Center 41 

Institute of Geophysics 42 

Institute for Molecular Biology and Nutrition 42 

Laboratory of Phonetic Research 42 

Ruby Gerontology On ter 42 

Social Science Research Onter 42 

Southern California Ocean Studies Consortium 42 

Sport and Movement Institute 43 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 43 

STUDENT AFFAIRS 

Student Affairs 46 

Vice President for Student Affairs 46 

Academic Appeals 46 

Adult Reentry Onter 47 

Career Development Onter 47 

Financial Aid 48 

Disabled Student Services 48 

Health and Counseling Service 48 

Housing Services and Residential Life 49 

International Education and Exchange 49 

School Based Student Affairs 50 

Testing and Research 50 

Vtfomen s Onter 50 

Student Activities 51 

University’ Activities Onter 51 

Associated Students 53 

Child Care Onter 53 


4 


University Center 

Human Corps Community Service Program 
University Recreation Program 

Intercollegiate Athletics 

Conference Memberships 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Resources 

Anthropology Museum 

Art Gallery 

Dance Repertory Threatre 

Daily Titan 

Fullerton Arboretum 

Herbarium 

Oral History Program 

Reading Clinic 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

Theatre and Dance Department Productions 

Titan Shops 

Undergraduate Reading Lab 

University Channel 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

School Advisement Offices 

Academic Advisement Center 

Departmental Academic Advisement 

Preprofessional Programs 

Health Professions 

Answers to Your Questions 

ADMISSIONS 

Undergraduate Students 

Freshmen Requirements 

English Placement Test (EPT) 

Entry’ Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 

Residency Requirements 

Application Procedures 

Admission Requirements 

First-Time Freshman 

Undergraduate Transfer Students 

International Students 

Summer Session — 

Transfer Credits 


REGISTRATION 

Registration Information 88 

Schedule of Fees 90 

Financial Aid 95 

UNIVERSITY REGULATIONS 

Enrollment Regulations 101 

Grading Policies 102 

Administrative Grading Symbols 103 

Student Records 105 

Grade Changes 106 

Continuous Residency Regulations 108 

Stop-Out Policy 108 

Leave of Absence 109 

Withdrawal from the University 109 

Retention, Probation and Disqualification 109 

Student Conduct 109 

Student Rights Ill 

GRADUATE REGULATIONS 

Graduate Application Procedures 114 

Graduate Admissions 116 

Requirements for the Master’s Degree 117 

Graduate Enrollment Policies 120 

Graduate Academic Standards 123 

Theses and Projects 124 

Steps in the Master’s Degree 127 

ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 

Degree Programs 130 

Graduation Requirements for the 

Bachelor’s Degree 131 

General Education 134 

California Articulation Number (CAN) 135 

Teaching Credential Programs 145 

Extended Education 160 

International Programs 161 

Special Major Program 163 

Interdisciplinary Studies Program 163 

Course Numbering Code 164 

Cross-Disciplinary University Programs 166 

Library Courses 166 


53 

55 

55 

56 

56 

57 

58 

59 

59 

59 

59 

60 

60 

60 

60 

60 

61 

61 

61 

62 

62 

64 

65 

66 

66 

67 

68 

70 

70 

73 

73 

74 

76 

79 

79 

79 

81 

82 

83 


5 


CURRICULA 

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 169 

Art 171 

Music 184 

Theatre and Dance 198 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

AND ECONOMICS 211 

Accounting 214 

Business Administration Degrees 221 

Economics 229 

Finance 236 

International Business Program 240 

Management 243 

Management Information Systems 247 

Management Science 249 

Marketing 255 

SCHOOL OF COMMUNICATIONS 261 

Communications 263 

Speech Communication 271 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING AND 

COMPUTER SCIENCE 283 

Computer Science 286 

Engineering 293 

Civil Engineering 296 

Electrical Engineering 303 

Mechanical Engineering 310 

SCHOOL OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND 
COMMUNITY SERVICE 319 

Child Development 321 

Counseling 324 

Educational Administration 330 

Elementary and Bilingual Education 334 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation *44 

Human Services Program 355 

Military Science Program 359 

Nursing 361 

Reading 365 

Secondary Teacher Education 368 

Special Education 371 


SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND 

SOCIAL SCIENCES 377 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 379 

American Studies 383 

Anthropology 388 

Chicano Studies 395 

Criminal Justice 398 

English/Comparative Literature 401 

Environmental Studies 410 

Foreign Languages and Literature 412 

Geography 432 

Gerontology 438 

History 440 

Latin American Studies Program 448 

Liberal Studies Program 451 

Linguistics 453 

Pacific Rim Studies 458 

Philosophy 460 

Political Science 461 

Psychology 474 

Religious Studies 483 

Russian and East European Area 

Studies Program 489 

Social Sciences Program 491 

Sociology 493 

Women’s Studies 500 

SCHOOL OF NATURAL SCIENCE 

AND MATHEMATICS 505 

Biological Science 507 

Chemistry & Biochemistry 516 

Geological Sciences 525 

Mathematics 530 

Physics 538 

Science Education Program 542 

Special Programs 545 

Astronomy 545 

Earth Science f 545 

Geochemistry 545 

Marine Sciences 545 

Paramedical 546 

Meteorology 546 

Oceanography 546 

FACULTY’ AND ADMINISTRATION 549 

INDEX 599 


6 




1991 '92 Academic Calendar 

Please note: This academic calendar is not intended to he construed as an employee work calendar. 


SUMMER SESSION 1991 


June 3 

Monday Instruction begins; registration and 

classes. 

July 4, 

Thursday Independence Day — 

Campus closed. 

August 1, 

Thursday Initial peruxl for filing applications for 

admission to the spring semester 1992 
begins. 

August 23, 

Friday Instruction ends. 


FALL SEMESTER 1991 

August 26, 

Monday Academic year begins; advisement and 

orientation begins. 

September 2, 

Monday Labor Day — Campus closed. 

September 3, 

Tuesday Instruction begins. 

September 9, 

Monday Admission day — Campus open. 

September 9, 

Monday Rosh Hashanah — Campus open. 

September 18, 

Wednesday Yom Kippur — Campus open. 

October 14, 

Monday Columbus Day — Campus open. 

November 4, 

Monday Initial period for tiling applications for 

admission to the fall semester 1992 
begins. 

November 1 1 , 


Monday Veterans Day — Campus open. 

November 28-29, 

Thursday- Friday . Thanksgiving recess — Campus closed. 
December 13, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

December 16, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

IVcember 16-20, 


Monday-Fnday . . Semester examinations. 

December 23, 

Monday Winter recess begins. 

December 25-31 . . . Holiday break — Campus closed. 


1992 

January 1, 

Wednesday New Year’s Day — Campus closed. 

January 2, 

Thursday Winter recess ends. 

January 2 & 3, 

Thursday- 

Friday Semester ends; grade reports due. 


INTERSESSION - 1992 


January 6, 

Monday Intersession begins. 

January 20, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

Campus closed. 

January 31, 

Friday Intersession ends. 


SPRING SEMESTER 1992 


January 27, 

Monday Semester begins; advisement and 

orientation begins. 

February 3, 

Monday Instruction begins. 

February 12, 

Wednesday Lincoln's Birthday — Campus open. 

February 17, 

Monday Washington’s Birthday — 

Campus closed. 

April 13, 

Monday Spring recess begins. 

April 20, 

Monday Instruction resumes. 

May 22, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

May 25. 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

May 25, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

May 26-29, 


Tuesday-Friday . . . Semester examinations. 
May 30-31. 

Sarurday-Sunday Commencement exercises. 


June 1-4, 

Mondav- 

Thursday Evaluation days; grade reports due. 

June 4. 

Thursday Semester ends. 


8 


1992-93 Academic Calendar 


SUMMER SESSION 1992 


June 1, 

Monday Instruction begins; registration and 

classes. 

July 3, 

Friday Independence Day observed — Campus 

closed. 

August 3, 

Monday Initial period for filing applications for 

admission to the spring semester 1993 be- 
gins. 


August 21, 

Friday Instruction ends. 


FALL SEMESTER 1992 


August 24, 
Monday . . , 

August 31, 
Monday . . , 

September 7, 
Monday . . . 

September 9, 
Wednesday 

September 28, 
Monday . . , 

October 7, 
Wednesday 

October 12, 
Monday . . . 

November 2, 
Monday . . 


November 11, 
Wednesday 

November 26-27 
Thursday- Friday . 

December 11, 

Friday 

December 14, 
Monday 

December 14-18, 
Monday -Friday . . 

December 21, 
Monday 

December 25-31 ... 


Academic year begins; advisement and 
orientation begins. 

Instruction begins. 

Labor Day — Campus closed. 

Admission Day — Campus open. 

Rosh Hashanah — Campus open. 

Yom Kippur — Campus open. 

Columbus Day — Campus open. 

Initial period for filing applications for 
admission to the Fall Semester 1993 
begins. 

Veterans Day — Campus open. 

Thanksgiving recess — Campus closed. 

Last day of classes. 

Examination preparation day. 

Semester examinations. 

Winter recess begins. 

Holiday break — Campus closed. 


1993 

January 1, 

Friday New Year’s Day — Campus closed. 

January 4, 

Monday Winter recess ends. 

January 4, 

Monday Semester ends; grade reports due. 


INTERSESSION * 1993 


January 4, 

Monday Intersession begins. 

January 18, 

Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Day — 

Campus closed. 

January 29, 

Friday Intersession ends. 


SPRING SEMESTER 1993 


January 25, 

Monday Semester begins; advisement and 

orientation begins. 

February 1, 

Monday Instruction begins. 

February 12, 

Friday Lincoln's Birthday — Campus open. 

February 15, 

Monday Washington’s Birthday — 

Campus closed. 

April 5, 

Monday Spring recess begins. 

April 12, 

Monday Instruction resumes. 

May 21, 

Friday Last day of classes. 

May 24, 

Monday Examination preparation day. 

May 24*28, 


Monday-Fnday . . Semester examinations. 
May 29-30. 

Saturday-Sunday Commencement exercises. 


May 31, 

Monday Memorial Day — Campus closed. 

June 1-3 
Tuesday - 

Thursday Evaluation days; grade reports due. 

June 3, 

Thursday Semester ends. 


9 
































































































































The California State University 



The individual California Stare Colleges were brought together 
as a system by the Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960. In 
1972 the system became The California State University and 
Colleges and in 1982 the system became The California State 
University, loday, all 20 campuses have the title “university." 

The oldest campus — San Jose State University — was founded 
as a Normal School in 1857 and became the first institution of 
public higher education in California. The newest campus — 
California State University, San Marcos — began admitting stu- 
dents in Fall 1990. 

Responsibility for The California State University is vested in the 
Board of Trustees, whose members are appointed by the governor. 
The trustees appoint the chancellor, who is the chief executive 
officer of the system, and the presidents, who are the chief execu- 
tive officers on the respective campuses. 

The trustees, the chancellor and the presidents develop system- 
wide policy, with actual implementation at the campus level 
taking place through broadly based consultative procedures. The 
Academic Senate of The California State University, made up of 
elected representatives of the faculty from each campus, recom- 
mends academic policy to the Board of Trustees through the 
chancellor. 

Academic excellence has been achieved by The California State 
University through a distinguished faculty, whose primary re- 
sponsibility is superior teaching. While each campus in the sys- 
tem has its own unique geographic and curricular character, all 
campuses, as multipurpose institutions, offer undergraduate and 
graduate instruction for professional and occupational goals as 
well as broad liberal education. All of the campuses require for 
graduation a basic program of “General Education- Breadth Re- 
quirements" regardless of the type of bachelor’s degree or major 
field selected by the student. 

The California State University offers more than 1,500 bache- 
lor’s and master’s degree programs in some 200 subject areas. 
Many of these programs are offered so that students can complete 
all upper-division and graduate requirements by part-time late 
afternoon and evening study. In addition, a variety of teaching 
and schcxd service credential programs are available. A limited 
number of doctoral degrees are offered jointly with the University 
of California and with private institutions in California. 

System enrollments total over 360,000 students, who are taught 
by some 20,500 faculty. Last year the system awarded over 50 
percent of the bachelor’s degrees and 30 percent of the master’s 
degrees granted in California. More than 1.2 million persons 
have graduated from the 19 campuses since 1960. 


The CSU 1 1 


The California State University 


California State University, Bakersfield 
California State Polytechnic University. 

Pomona 

California State University, Northridge 
California State University, Los Angeles 
California State University. Dominguez Hills 
California State University, Long Beach 
Office of the Chancellor, Long Beach 
California State University, Fullerton 
California State University, San Bernardino 
California State University, San Marcos 
San Diego State University 


Humboldt State University 
California State University, Chico 
Sonoma State University 
California State University, Sacramento 
San Francisco State University 
California State University, Hayward 
San Jose State University 
California State University, Stanislaus 
California State University, Fresno 
California Polytechnic State University, 
San Luis Obispo 




12 The CSU 


Campuses of The California State University 


California State University, Sacramento 
6000 J Street 
Sacramento, CA 95819 
Dr. Donald R. Gerth, President 
(916) 278-6011 


California State University, Bakersfield 
9001 Stockdale Highway 
Bakersfield. CA 93311-1099 
Dr. Thomas A. Arciniega, President 
(805) 644-201 1 

California State University, Chico 
1st and Normal Streets 
Chico, CA 95929 
Dr. Robin S. Wilson, President 
(916) 898-6116 

California State University, Dominguet Hills 
1000 East Victoria Street 
Carson, CA 90747 
Dr. Robert C. Detweiler, President 
(213) 674-3300 

California State University, Fresno 
5241 North Maple Avenue 
Fresno, CA 93740 
Dr. Harold H. Haak, President 
(209) 278-4240 

California State University, Fullerton 
800 North State College Blvd. 

Fullerton, CA 92634-9480 
Dr. Milton A. Gordon, President 
(714) 773-2011 

California State University, Hayward 
Hayward, CA 94542 
Dr. Norma S. Rees, President 
(415) 881-3000 

Humboldt State University 
Areata, CA 95521 
Dr. Alistair W. McCrone, President 
(707) 826-3011 

California State University, Lung Beach 
1250 Bellflower Boulevard 
Long Beach, CA 90840 
Dr. Curtis L. McCray, President 
(213) 985-4111 

California State University, Los Angeles 
5151 State University Drive 
Los Angeles, CA 90032 
Dr. James M. Rosser, President 
(213) 343-3000 

California State University, Northndge 
18111 Nordhoff Street 
Northridgc, CA 91330 
Dr. James W. Cleary, President 
(818) 885-1200 

California State Polytechnic University, Rr rrruma 
3801 West Temple Avenue 
Pomona, CA 91768 
Dr. Hugh O. La Bounty, President 
(714) 869-7659 


California State College, San Bernardino 
5500 University Parkway 
San Bernardino, CA 92407 
Dr. Anthony H. Evans, President 
(714) 880-5000 

San Diego State University 
5300 Campanile Drive 
San Diego, CA 92182 
Dr. Thomas B. Day, President 
(619) 594-5000 

Imperial Valley Campus 
720 Heber Avenue 
Calexico, CA 92231 
(619) 357-3721 

San Francisco State University 
1600 Holloway Avenue 
San Francisco, CA 94132 
Dr. Robert A. Corrigan, President 
(415) 338-1111 

San Jose State University 
One Washington Square 
San Jose, CA 95192 
Dr. Gail Fullerton, President 
(408) 924-1000 

California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo 
San Luis Obispo, CA 93407 
D. Warren J. Baker, President 
(805) 756-1111 

California State University, San Marcos 
820 West Los Vallecitos Blvd. 

San Marcos, California 92069 
Dr. Bill W. Stacy, President 
(619) 471-4119 

Sonoma State University 
1801 East Cotati Avenue 
Rohnert Park, CA 94928 
Dr. David W. Benson, President 

(707) 664-2880 

California State University, Stanislaus 
801 West Monte Vista Avenue 
Turlock, CA 95380 
Dr. John W. Moore, President 
(209) 667-3122 


The CSU 13 


Trustees and Officers of The California State University 


Ex Officio Trustees 

The Honorable Pete Wilson 

Governor of California 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Leo T. McCarthy 
Lieutenant Governor of California 
State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Willie L. Brown, Jr. 

Speaker of the Assembly 

State Capitol, Sacramento, CA 95814 

The Honorable Bill Honig 
State Superintendent of 
Public Instruction 

721 Capitol Mall, Sacramento, CA 95814 

l)r. Ellis E. McCune 
Acting Chancellor of the 
California State University 
400 Golden Shore, 

Long Beach, CA 90802-4275 


Dr. Claudia H. Hampton (1994) 
Mr. Willie J. Stennis (1991) 

Mr. Roland E. Arnall (1991) 

Ms. Marian Bagdasarian (1996) 
Mrs. Marianthi Lansdale (1993) 
Mr. Dean S. Lesher (1993) 

Dr. John E. Kashiwabara (1994) 
Ms. Martha C. Falgatter (1995) 
Mr. William D. Campbell (1995) 
L>. Lyman H. Heine (1991) 

Mr. Ralph P IVsqueira (1996) 

Mr. Ted J. Saenger (1997) 

Mr. J. Gary Shansby (1992) 

Mr. Scott Vick (1991) 

Mr. Anthony M. Vitti (1997) 

Mrs. Gloria S. Horn (1992) 

Mr. James H. Gray (1998) 

Mr. Terrance W. Flannigan (1991) 
Mr. Jim Considine, Jr. (1992) 


Correspondence with Trustees should be sent: 

do Trustees Secretariat 

The California State University 

400 Golden Shore, Suite 322 

Long Beach, California 90802-4275 

Officers of the Trustees 

Governor Pete Wilson 
President 

Mr. William D. Campbell 
Chair 

Mr. J. Gary Shansby 
Vice Chair 

Acting Chancellor Ellis E. McCune 
Secretary-Treasurer 


Office of the Chancellor 

The California State University 
400 Golden Shore 
Long Beach, CA 90802-4275, 
(213) 590-5506 

Dr. Ellis E. McCune 
Acting Chancellor 

Dr. Herbert L. Carter 
Executive Vice Chancellor 

Dr. Lee R. Kerschner 
Vice Chancellor, 

Academic Affairs 

Mr. D. Dale Hanner 
Vice Chancellor, 

Business Affairs 

Dr. Caesar J. Naples 
Vice Chancellor, 

Faculty and Staff Relations 

Mr. Bruce M. Richardson 
Acting General Counsel 

Dr. John M. Smart 
Vice Chancellor, 

University Affairs 


Appointed Trustees 

Appointments are for a term of eight years, except for a student 
Trustee, alumni Trustee, and faculty Trustee whose terms are for 
two years. Terms expire in the year in parentheses. Names are 
listed in order of appointment to the Board. 


14 The CSU 


California State 
University, Fullerton 



Governance 

Governance on the campus at California State University, Ful- 
lerton is the responsibility of the president and his administrative 
staff. Working closely with the president are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, review, and/or recommend for 
approval, various university programs, policies, and procedures. 
Although the president is vested with the final authority for all 
university activities, maximum faculty and staff participation in 
campus decision-making and governance has become traditional. 
Students also are actively involved, with student representatives 
being included on almost all university, school, and departmental 
committees and policy-making Kxlies. 


Advisory Board 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board con- 
sists of community leaders interested in the development and 
welfare of the university. The hoard advises the president on a 
number of matters, particularly those affecting university and 
community relations. Members are appointed by the president 
for terms of four years. 


H. William Bridgford, Chair 

Chairman of the Board & CEO 

Bridgford Foods Corp Anaheim 

Dr. Arnold Miller, Vice Chan 

President, 

Technology Strategy Group Fullerton 

Evelyn E. Bauman Fullerton 

Robert F. Beaver Fullerton 

Don Karchcr 

President, 

Carl Karcher Enterprises, Inc Anaheim 

Frederick T. Mason 

Attorney at Law Santa Ana 

William J. McGarvey, Jr. 

Business Development Director, 

Pioneer Bank Fullerton 

John Rau 

President, David Industries Orange 

Ruth Schermitzler Brea 

Richard J. Stegemeier 

Chairman of the Board, President and 

Chief Executive Officer, Unocal Los Angeles 

Norman V. Wagner, III 

Consultant Orange 


CSUF 15 



Philosophy and Objectives 

Institutions of higher learning disseminate and advance knowl- 
edge. The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or 
promote the successful achievement of these objectives. There- 
fore, from its inception, Cal State Fullerton has consciously 
endeavored, through its educational program, to enhance the 
fullest possible development of those it serves. For both professors 
and students this entails a commitment to high standards of 
scholarship, to a comprehensive rather than a narrow approach 
in major areas of study, and to a concern with research and other 
creative activity. 

The mission of CSUF, as articulated and adopted in the "Mission 
and Goals" statement of the campus is as follows: 

• The University will develop and challenge students intel- 
lectually to help them understand their leadership role in a 
domocratic society and their responsibility to be informed 
citizens. In addition, the University will provide appropri- 
ate preparation for careers and professions. Strong under- 
graduate degree programs in the traditional liberal arts and 
sciences disciplines as well as pre-professional and profes- 
sional programs will be undergirded by a broadly based gen- 
eral education curriculum designed to educate every matric- 
ulated undergraduate student with regard to the history and 
diversity of human thought and culture. Postbaccalaureate 
work leading to degrees, credentials, licensures, and certifi- 
cates will provide students with the depth of advanced 
knowledge needed within major discipline areas and profes- 
sional fields. 

• As a principal component of the University’s mission, facul- 
ty emphasis must be on effective teaching sustained by on- 
going scholarly development, original basic or applied re- 
search, and other creative and professional activities. Thus, 
the University recognizes and nurtures the involvement of 
each CSUF teacher/scholar in the activities earned on 
within his/her disciplinary community. Furthermore, the 
University recognizes the importance of the collegial and 
cooperative intellectual atmosphere that exists on this cam- 
pus and will continue to foster this environment, thereby 
reinforcing individual effort directed toward excellent 
teaching and scholarly/creative endeavors. It also recog- 
nizes and supports the existence of diverse viewpoints in the 
University community and commits itself to defend the 
academic freedom of all faculty and students. 

• The University is committed to a variety of activities which 
enhance the learning environment and quality of life for 
students, faculty, staff, alumni, and the people of our re- 
gion. Thus, to further its missions, the University encom- 
passes the library, computer facilities, research institutes/ 
centers, the arts, athletics, recreation, and a variety of 
instructional, and student and alumni support programs. In 


addition, the University is committed to programs designed to 
enhance “town-gown" relationships and provide other public 
services. Above all, however, is the obligation to create an insti- 
tution which values morally and socially responsible actions and 
activities. The University is characterized by its dedication to the 
educational needs of a large and dynamic community, its bal- 
anced commitment to teaching and scholarly and creative activ- 
ity, its concern for wide access to higher education, and its strong 
tradition of collegial governance. In the preservation and en- 
hancement of these strengths lies the uniqueness of California 
State University, Fullerton. 

Academic Freedom and 
Responsibility 

The Academic Senate of California State University, Fullerton, 
endorses the 1987 Statement of Professional Ethics (University 
Policy Statement 230.000) and the 1940 Statement of Principles 
and Interpretive Comments of the American Association of Uni- 
versity Professors contained in the 1984 Edition of Policy Docu- 
ments and Reports. 


Retrospect and Prospect 

In 1957 Cal State Fullerton became the 12th State College in 
California to be authorized by the Legislature. The following year 
a site was designated in northeast Fullerton. It was purchased in 
1959, when Dr. William B. Langsdorf was appointed as founding 
president, the first staff was selected and plans for opening the 
new college were made. Orange County State College started 
classes tor 452 full- and/or part-time students in September, 
1959, using leased quarters for its administrative offices on the 
Fullerton Union High School campus and for its classrooms at 
Fullertons Sunny Hills High School. In the fall of 1960, the 
college opened classes on its own campus, where it occupied 12 
temporary buildings. The name changed to Orange State College 
in July, 1962, to California State College at Fullerton in July, 
1964, to California State College, Fullerton in July, 1968 and to 
California State University, Fullerton in June, 1972. The first 
permanent building, the six-story Letters and Science Building 
(now known as McCarthy Hall), was occupied in 1963. 

Txlay, there is much dramatic evidence of additional, rapid 
growth. Seventeen buildings or building clusters have been com- 
pleted, and enrollment has climbed to more than 25,000. Since 
1963 the curriculum has expanded to include lower division work 
and many graduate programs. 

The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 established the 
California State Colleges as a system under an independent 
Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the State Colleges, 


16 CSUF 


and related them to both the community colleges and the Uni- 
versity of California system. Cal State Fullerton was the first of 
the State Colleges to submit and secure approval for a Five-year 
master curricular plan and one of the first three to secure approval 
of a master building plan. It also was able to think in terms of its 
ultimate enrollment objectives from the beginning. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served as 
acting president for seven months, was appointed the second 
president of Cal State Fullerton. Dr. Miles D. McCarthy became 
acting president in January, 1981 , Dr. Jewel Plummer Cobb took 
office as the third president in October, 1981; and Dr. Milton A. 
Gordon was appointed the fourth president in August, 1990. 


Environment of the University 

Fullerton, a city of more than 1 10,000 inhabitants, is located in 
northern Orange County, about 30 miles southeast of central Los 
Angeles. It is part of a new Southern California population 
center and within easy freeway access of all the diverse natural 
and cultural attractions of this region. 

Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 48th in 
size of California's 58 counties, but it is the third largest county in 
population (2.3 million). Orange County has experienced during 
the last four decades almost unprecedented growth as communi- 
ties continue to occupy the diminishing expanses of open land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and new 
economic and life styles in Orange County. Underneath the soil, 
archaelogists and bulldozers uncover traces of the hunting and 
gathering Indian bands which flourished at least as early as 4,000 
yean ago in what w-as a benign and bountiful region. More visible 
traces remain of the Spanish and Mexican periods and cultures: 
Mission San Juan Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradi- 
tion in Orange County', and subsequent adobes from the great 
land grants and ranches that followed. Additionally, both cus- 
toms and many names persist from this period, and so does some 
ranching. The architectural and other evidences of the subse- 
quent pioneer period are still quite visible: farmsteads, old build- 
ings from the new towns that then were established in the late 
1800’s, mining operations, and traces of early resort and other 
types of promotional activities. For about 100 years, farming was 
the main economic activity with products such as grapes, wal- 
nuts, vegetables, and oranges, replacing the older wheat and 
cattle ranches. Today, agriculture still is very important. Orange 
County ranks high among California’s counties in mineral pro- 
duction w ith its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay mining 
and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in Orange 
County and the development of such attractions as Disneyland, 
Knott’s Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of 
the Masters, the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center and 


the Orange County Performing Arts Center continue to make 
tourism an increasingly important activity. So does the Mediter- 
ranean-type climate, with rainfall averaging 14 inches per year, 
and generally mild days (either freezing or 100- degree tempera- 
tures uncommon) with frequent morning fogs during the sum- 
mer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific Ocean can be 
reached by car in half an hour, and mountain and desert recrea- 
tion areas are as close as an hour’s drive from the campus. 


The Campus and Its Buildings 

Once part of a vast orange grove, Cal State Fullerton’s attractive- 
ly landscaped main campus now consists of 225 acres bounded on 
the south by Nutwixxl Avenue, on the west by State Oil lege 
Boulevard, on the north by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the 
east by the Orange Freeway. 

The portion of Orange County immediately surrounding the 
campus is predominantly suburban; ir includes housing tracts, 
apartment complexes, shopping centers, space-age industrial 
firms, and undeveloped hills and fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the immediate 
environment. The Southern California College of Optometry, 
with its four modernistic buildings, opened in the spring of 1973. 
It is just north of Cal State Fullerton. To Cal State’s immediate 
south is Pacific Christian College, a liberal arts school with a 
Bible emphasis, where students started classes in the fall of 1973. 
The Western State University College of Law, California’s largest 
law school, occupied its new campus to the immediate west of 
Cal State in January, 1975. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high density urban 
layout of buildings and facilities developed to serve a predomi- 
nantly commuting public. The university’s modern buildings 
were planned so that no student should need more than 10 
minutes to go from one class to another. The campus is surround- 
ed with landscaped parking facilities. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science Building, 
was occupied in 1963. This imposing structure, master planned 
to serve ultimately as a facility for undergraduate and graduate 
science instruction and research, has been used to house other 
programs until they could warrant new facilities of their own. 
This building is now called Miles D. McCarthy Hall. 

Since 1963, growth has been rapid. The Performing Arts Center 
was completed in 1964, the Physical Education Building in 1965, 
the Library Building in 1966, the Commons in 1967, the Human- 
ities-Social Sciences Building and Visual Arts Center in 1969, 
William B. Langsdorf Hall (Administration -Business Adminis- 
tration) and the Engineering Building in 1971, the Student 
Health Center in 1974, the Education-Classroom Building and 
University Center in 1976, an addition to the Visual Arts Center 


CSUF 17 


in 1979, the Jewel Plummer Cobb Residence Halls and the 
Charles L. and Rachael E. Ruby Gerontology Center in 1988, 
and the Fullerton Marriott and the Computer Science Building 
in 1989. The Ruby Gerontology Center was the first building on 
campus financed solely by contributed funds; the Fullerton Mar- 
riott, a full-service hotel, resulted from a joint venture involving 
the Marriott Corp., the university and the City of Fullerton. 

Under construction and due for completion in 1992 are an ex- 
pansion of the University Center; a sports complex featuring a 
multipurpose stadium, basehall pavilion, track and tennis courts; 
and a two-story laboratory annex to McCarthy Hall. 

In the northeast corner of the campus is the Fullerton Arbore- 
tum, which was dedicated in the fall of 1979 in a joint venture 
with the city of Fullerton. It includes a 1 5-acre contoured botani- 
cal garden, a three-acre organic garden and a two-acre experi- 
mental plot. The ecologically arranged flora depicts habitats from 
the desert to the tropics. The Fullerton Arboretum also includes 
Heritage House, a 19th-century restored dwelling. Heritage 
House serves as a cultural museum for North Orange County as 
well as an Arboretum office. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommodations that ap- 
proach the main entrance to the university’s modern campus also 
provide comparatively easy access to the great and diverse learn- 
ing resources available in Southern California: many other col- 
leges and universities; museums, libraries, art galleries; zoos; and 
the wide variety of economic, governmental, social, and cultural 
activities and experiments that may be found in this dynamic and 
complex region of California and the United States. 

Information concerning the instructional, laboratory and other 
physical plant facilities which relate to the academic program 
may be obtained from the Office of Facility Planning and 
Construction. 

CSUF Mission Viejo Campus 

The California State University, Fullerton-Mission Viejo Cam- 
pus is located on the lower campus of Saddleback College in 
Mission Viejo. As a satellite campus of Cal State Fullerton, it 
serves the higher education needs of southern Orange County. 
The Mission Viejo Campus offers coursework at both the upper- 
division (junior/senior) and postbaccalaureate levels. Lower-divi- 
sion (freshman/sophomore) coursework, including the lower-di- 
vision General Education requirements must be taken at either 
the main campus in Fullerton, or at a community college. 

Students who plan to attend the Mission Viejo Campus (MVC) 
must be admitted to California State University, Fullerton 
through the regular admissions process. Applications for admis- 
sion to the University are available at both the main campus and 
the Mission Viejo Campus. Registration for MVC classes takes 
place through the regular University processes and can be accom- 
plished at the MVC site. 


Information regarding the University or MVC is available to 
students and prospective students in the MVC administrative 
offices located in Building H. This facility also houses offices for 
the faculty, staff and the MVC director. 

Students enrolled at the Mission Viejo Campus receive all of the 
student services available at the main campus in Fullerton. MVC 
students are also eligible to use Saddleback Colleges Student 
Health Center, Library, and recreational facilities. The Assistant 
Dean for Student Affairs at MVC provides information on all 
student services and serves as ombudsman for all student con- 
cerns. 

The University Library at MVC offers access to all materials 
contained in the main library at Fullerton. Students can access 
periodical articles through means of an extensive system of CD- 
Rom computer work station. The MVC library also has a collec- 
tion of more than 400 periodicals on microfilm. Through Interli- 
brary Loan and other library services, students at MVC can 
access most academic libraries in the United States. 

Eighteen Epson Equity-One computers are available for student 
and class use. The MVC computer center is on-line with the 
mainframe located at the Fullerton Campus, so that students can 
access all University computer services from the satellite campus. 

For information, contact the CSUF-Mission Viejo Campus, 
28000 Marguerite Parkway, Mission Viejo, California 92692 or 
telephone (714) 582-4990. Office hours are 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 
p.m. Monday through Thursday, and 8:30 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. on 
Friday. 


Students of the University 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere of any 
campus comes from the nature and vitality of its students. Diver- 
sity, the synthesis of academic with work and family interests, 
strong achievement records, and relative maturity are some of the 
predominant characteristics of the student body at Cal State 
Fullerton. 

The university is primarily a commuter institution, with one on- 
campus residence facility which opened in the spring of 1988. 
Over 70 percent of the students work 20 or more hours per week, 
and yet 57 percent of all students take 12 or more hours of course 
work each semester. The majority of students live in Orange 
County. Of the fall 1990 new undergraduate students, 44 percent 
came from California high schools, 41 percent came from Cali- 
fornia community colleges, 8 percent from other Cal State cam- 
puses, 3 percent from other California colleges and universities, 
and 5 percent from other states or other countries. The fall 1990 
new graduate students came from other Cal State campuses (55 
percent), other California colleges and universities (22 percent), 
and other states or other countries (23 percent). 


18 CSUF 


The student body is 9 percent first-time freshmen, 20 percent 
other lower division, 54 percent upper division, and 17 percent 
graduate levels. Fifty-six percent of all students are women. The 
median age of all students is 23; undergraduates have a median 
age of 22, while graduate students have a median age of 30. Over 
40 percent of students take advantage of course offerings during 
the day and at night, in order to create a workable schedule for 
their multiple responsibilities. 

Many students already have clearly defined interests in a major 
field of study. Only 7 percent of all students have not yet declared 
a major, and are in the process of exploring different fields of 
knowledge. During 1989-90, 3,741 undergraduates received 
their baccalaureate degrees, and 629 graduates received their 
master’s degrees. 

The Faculty 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of higher learning 
is the quality and dedication of its individual faculty members to 
teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1989 there were 775 full-time faculty and adminis- 
trators and 722 part-time faculty members teaching on the cam- 
pus. Almost all the full-time faculty had some previous college or 
university teaching experience before coming to Fullerton. Fac- 
ulty members also have a wide variety of experiences and creative 
activities. Over 90 percent of the tenured and tenure track facul- 
ty have earned their doctoral degrees. 

Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of knowledge 
in an academic specialty, demonstrated skill and experience in 
teaching, and continuing interest in scholarly study and re- 
search. Retention and promotion criteria also include service to 
the university and community. 

Information concerning the faculty and other personnel may be 
obtained from the Office of Faculty Affairs and Records. 

Outstanding Professor Award 

Each year the University selects a faculty member to receive the 
CSUF Outstanding Professor Award. This individual becomes 
the campus nominee for the statewide Outstanding Professor 
Aw ard, an honor conferred annually on two system faculty by the 
by the Trustees of the California State University. 

Below are the names of all professors who have received the 
CSUF Outstanding Professor Aw-ard. Those with an asterisk were 
also honored with the statewide award. 


1963-64 Donald Stanley Tull 

Marketing 

1964-65 Miles Duffield McCarthy’ 

Biology 

1965-66 Giles Tyler Brown 

History 

1966-67 Gustave Bording Mathieu 

Foreign Languages & 


Literatures 

1967-68 Norman Tow-nsend-Zellner 

Economics 

1968-69 John Brown Mason 

Political Science 

1969-70 No award given 


1970-71 Loh Seng Tsai 

Psychology 


1971-72 Richard C. Gilbert 

Mathematics 

1972-73 Herbert C. Rutemiller 

Quantitative Methods 

1973-74 Fred M. Johnson 

Physics 

1974-75 Willis E. McNelly’ 

English 

1975-76 Donald E. Lagerherg 

Art 

1976-77 Sydney Klein 

Economics 

1977-78 Charles G. Bell 

Political Science 

1978-79 Bruce H. Weber 

Chemistry 

1979-80 Michael H. Horn 

Biology 

1980-81 Donald A. Sears 

Linguistics 

1981-82 Joyce E. Pickersgill 

Economics 

1982-83 Carl C. Wamser 

Chemistry 

1983-84 Corinne S. Wixxl 

Anthropology 

1984-85 Maria Linder 

Chemistry 

1985-86 Charles C. Lambert 

Zoology 

! 966 17 v limn M. Naftl 

Chemistry 

1987-88 Harris S. Shultz’ 

Mathematics 

1988-89 Warren A. Beck 

History 

1989-90 Roger Nanes 

Physics 


President’s Community Minority 
Affairs Advisory Council 

The President of California State University, Fullerton has estab- 
lished a Council to assist and advise the President on matters of 
importance in meeting the educational needs of the constituent 
minorities represented in the Community and on the Campus. 

The Council is comprised of representatives selected from the 
distinguished leadership of the Community who are from various 
ethnic groups, public schixils, businesses, churches, local civic 
organizations, student organizations, parent groups, and Campus 


groups. 

Jo Caines, Chair 

Director of Community Relations, 

KOCE-TV Huntington Beach 

John Hobgtxxl, Vice Chair 

Communications Consultant Laguna Beach 

Tsu-Tsair O. Chi 

Laboratory Director, Omicron Inc Anaheim 

Tina Fernandez 

Specialist, Orange County Human 

Relations Commission Santa Ana 

Frank Dominguez 

Director, United Way Hispanic 

Development Council Garden Grove 

Harvey Hoyo 

Principal, Faye Ross Junior High School Artesia 

Tom Miller 

Counselor, John Glenn High Schtxd Norwalk 

Albert Perales 

Counselor, Kraemer Junior High School Placentia 

Chieu Minh Pham 

Educator and Computer Specialist Orange 

George Williams 


Director, Orange County Urban League .... Garden Grove 


CSUF 19 


University Administration 


President 

Staff Assistant 

Executive Assistant 

Director of Affirmative Action 

Administrative Assistant 

Director of Athletics 

Associate Director for Internal Affairs 

Associate Director for Business Affairs 

’ Associate Athletic Director for Marketing and Development and Director, Titan 

Director of Operations 

Assistant Athletic Director for Media Relations 

Director of Budget Planning and Administration 

Assistant Director 

Administrative Assistant 

Budget Analyst 

Budget Analyst 

Systems Analyst 

Payroll Supervisor 

Vice President for Academic Affairs 

Associate Vice President, Academic Affairs 

Staff Assistant 

Coordinator, Faculty Affairs and Records 

Associate Vice President, Academic Programs 

Assistant Vice President/Graduate and International Programs 

Director of Graduate Studies 

Coordinator, Undergraduate Studies 

Coordinator, Health Professions 

Athletic Academic Coordinator 

Prelaw Adviser 

Coordinator, Special Projects 

Associate Vice President, Research and External Programs 

Director of Extension Administration . . 

Director of Extended Education Program Services 

Director of Certificate Programs 

Director of Program Management 

Director of Corporate and Public Education 

Director of Seminars and Teleconferencing 

Associate Vice President, Information and Telecommunication Services 

Director, Administrative Computing 

Director, Telecommunications 

Instructional Services Manager . 

Operations Manager 

University Librarian 

Associate University Librarian ! 

Collection Development Officer 

Chair, Public Services 

Chair, Technical Services . . . 

Director of Admissions and Records 

Assistant to the Director of Admissions and Records 

Admissions Officer 

University Articulation Officer 

Registrar 

Assistant Registrar 

Director of Analytical Studies 

Associate Director of Analytical Studies 


Milton A. Gordon 

Norma Morris 

Vacant 

Rosamaria Gomez-Amaro 

F. Caroline Cosgrove 

Vacant 

Leanne Grotke 

Steve DiTolla 

Athletic Foundation .... Walt Bowman 

Mary Ann Tropodi 

Mel Franks 

Sherri Newcomb-Hill 

E. Sue Boeltl 

Ruby Hamilton 

Linda Erickson 

Michele L. Janiel 

Keiko Takahashi 

Vacant 

Jack W. Coleman 

John W. Bedell (Acting) 

Marlys K. Rietman 

Mary Watkins 

Dennis F. Berg 

William W. Haddad 

Gladys Fleckles 

Robert Belloli 

Albert Flores 

Alison Cone 

Harvey Grody 

Laela E. Handy 

Ruth Truman (Acting) 

James T. Mavity 

Vacant 

Shelley Bartenstein 

Judy Strong 

Tom O’Neill 

Le Esta Bentley 

Gene H. Dippel 

Bobbe Weber 

Dick Bendar 

Michelle Perlman 

Charles Sowers 

Richard C. Pollard 

Patricia L. Bril (Acting) 

Patricia L. Bril 

Douglas Highsmith 

Janice ZIendich 

James C. Blackburn 

Francis M. Casey 

Nancy Dority 

William Gowler 

Carole Jones 

Lynnette Housty 

Dolores Hope Viira 

Robert Fecarotta 


20 CSUF 


Director, Faculty Research and Development 

Coordinator, Contracts and Grants 

Director, Center for Internships and Cooperative Education 

Director, Mission Viejo Campus . 

Radiation Safety Officer 

Director, Student Academic Services and 

University Outreach 

Associate Director, Student Academic Services and 

University Outreach 

Coordinator, Student Academic Services 

Coordinator, Learning Assistance Resource Center 

Coordinator, University Outreach Services and Relations with Schools and Colleges 

Director of Television and Media Support Center 

Media Consultant 

Distribution and Maintenance Supervisor 

Vice President for Administration 

Insurance & Facility Use Officer 

Associate Vice President, Facility Planning & Construction 

Facility Planner 

Director, Design £k Construction Services 

Construction Administration . 

Controller 

Internal Financial Analyst/Auditor 

Assistant Controller 

Accounts Payable Supervisor ! . . . . 

General Accounting Supervisor 

Cashiering Supervisor 

Manager, Student Aid Accounting 

Supervisor, Student Aid Accounting Receivables 

Supervisor, Student Aid Loan Collection 

Purchasing & Support Services Officer 

Manager, Logistical Services 

Supervisor, Campus and U.S. Mail Services 

Director, Personnel Services &. Staff Employee Relations 

Associate Director 

Classification 

Employee Benefits/Workers’ Compensation 

Employee Relations, Grievances, Discipline, 

Performance Appraisals 

Recruitment 

Training and Development, Temporary Help 

Director, Physical Plant 

Associate Director, Plant Operations & Engineering 

Assistant Director, Operations 

Manager, Administrative Services 

Director, Public Safety 

Assistant Director 

Environmental Health & Safety Officer 

Manager, Transportation/Parking/Visitor Information 

Executive Director, Foundation 

Director, Finance and Administration 

Director, Grants and Contracts 

Director, Commercial Operations 

(Titan Bookstore and Titan Shops) 

Assistant Director, Book Division 

Assistant Director, Merchandise Division 

Assistant Director, Business Services 


Stuart A. Ross 

Elizabeth Gewin 

Carolyn Kubiak 

George Giacumakis 

John Elliott 

Silas M. Abrego 

Jeremiah W. Mix>re 

Stephanie Ortiz 

Ina Katz 

Carmela Harvey 

Ernest B. Gourdine 

William Shultz 

; . Michael Dufour 

Sal D. Rinella 

Martin E. Carbone 

Jay W. Bond 

Robin I. Moore 

Glenn M. Lemon 

Richard A. Baker 

Resty P Prospero 

Vacant 

Charles R. Umlauf 

Sandra L. Bracken 

Lydia L. Rodriguez 

Leslie A. Reed 

Carlos Navarrete 

Kathie Ip 

Roberta J. Wallstrom 

LeRoy Page 

Holly M. Hall 

Edward A. Flynn 

David J. Losco 

Emily E. Gilbert 

Anne M. Megli 

Donna B. Burg/Marilyn O. White 

Dorothy A. Edwards 

Vacant 

Judy A. Presch 

Charles D. Stevens 

Vacant 

Gene W. Rawlins 

Willem H. van der Pol 

Daniel A. Byrnes 

William E. Huffman 

Thomas J. Whitfield 

Roger B. Kays 

William E. Dickerson 

Sherry D.Jarrett (Acting) 

Shou-Yinn (Pearl) Cheng 

James F. Sando 

Hani F. Sayegh 

Joyce A. Phillips 

Jean M. Tebbe 


CSUF 21 


Assistant Director, Food & Vending Services 

Director, Dining Services 

(Campus FcxxJ Services) 

Vice President for Student Affairs 

Associate Vice President for Student Affairs 

Assistant Vice President for Student Affairs 

Administrator for Associated Students 

Coordinator, Academic Appeals 

Director, Career Development Center 

Director, Financial Aid 

Director, Disabled Student Services 

Director, Housing and Residence Life 

Director, International Education and Exchange 

Director, Student Health and Counseling Service 

Director, Testing and Research 

Director, University Activities Center 

Director, Women’s Center 

Director of Alumni Affairs 

Director of Annual Fund 

Director of Corporate and Foundation Relations 

Director of Public Affairs 

Director of Public Information 

Executive Director of Titan Athletic Foundation 

Schools, Divisions and Departments 

School of the Arts 

Dean 

Associate Dean 

Art Department 

Music Department 

Theatre Department 

School of Business Administration and Economics 

Dean 

Associate Dean 

Associate Dean 

Associate Dean 

Accounting Department 

Economics Department 

Finance Department 

Management Department 

Management Science Department 

Marketing Department 

School of Communications 

Dean - 

Associate Dean 

Communications Department 

Speech Communication Department 

School of Engineering and Computer Science 

Dean 

Associate Dean for Academic Affairs 

Associate Dean tor Administration 

Civil Engineering Department 

Computer Science Department 

Electrical Engineering Department 

Mechanical Engineering Department 


Warren L. Corse 

Anthony M. Lynch (Acting) 

Robbie L. Nayman 

Charles W. Buck 

Vacant 

William G. Pollock 

Ralph Bigelow 

Roberta F. Browning 

James T. Shafer 

Paul K. Miller 

Darlene Stevenson 

Robert Ericksen 

Charles B. Darke 

John Gillis 

Loydene Pritchard 

Barbara McDowell 

Sue Lasswell 

. . . Susan B. Smith (Acting) 

Leo H. Cullum 

Jerry J. Keating 

Judy M. Mandel 

Walter F. Bowman 


Jerry Samuelson 

Frank E. Cummings, 111 

Alvin Ching 

Benton Minor 

. . Joseph A. Arnold, Jr 


Ephraim P Smith 

. . Dorothy Heide (Acting) 

Vacant 

Keith Lant: 

Ephraim R Smith (Acting) 

Anil Puri 

John Emery 

Thomas Maher 

Zvi Drezner 

Irene Lange 


David B. Sachsman 

Robert Emry 

Terry Hynes 

. Joyce M. Flocken 


Andy R. Bazar 

James R. Rina (Acting) 

Vacant 

. . . Dindial Ramsamtx>j 

Charles Mosmann 

Young Kwon 

Jesa Kreiner 


22 CSUF 


School of Human Development and Community Service 

Dean ; 

Associate Dean 

Counseling Department 

Educational Administration Department 

Elementary and Bilingual Education Department 

Health, Physical Education and Recreation Department 

Nursing Department 

Reading Department 

Secondary Education Department 

Special Education Department 

Child Development Department 

Human Services Program 

Military Science Program 

University Recreation Program 

School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Dean 

Associate Dean * 

Administrative Assistant 

Afro-Ethnic Studies Department 

American Studies Department 

Anthropology Department 

Chicano Studies [department . . . ‘ 

Criminal Justice Department 

English and Comparative Literature Department 

Foreign Languages and Literatures Department 

Geography Department 

History Department 

Linguistics Department 

Philosophy Department 

Political Science Department 

Psychology Department 

Religious Studies Department 

Sociology Department 

Environmental Studies Program 

Gerontology Program 

Latin American Studies Program 

Liberal Studies Program 

Russian and East European Area Studies Program 

M.A. in Social Sciences Program 

Omen’s Studies Program 

School of Natural Science and Mathematics 

Dean 

Associate Dean, Academic Affairs 

Associate Dean, Administrative Affairs 

Biological Science Department 

Chemistry and Biochemistry Department 

Geological Sciences Department 

Mathematics Department 

Physics Department 

Science Education Program 


Mary Kay Tetreault 

Michael Parker 

James R. Bitter 

Walter Beckman 

Carol Barnes 

Anne Marie Bird 

Julia B. George 

Ashley Bishop 

Paul Kane 

Leo Schmidt 

Judith Ramirez 

Gerald Corey, Coordinator 

Captain John Sarnecky, Coordinator 
Ronald G. Andris, Director 


Don A. Schweitzer 

Chris Cozby 

Elaine Hutchison 

Emory Tolbert 

Wayne Hobson 

Jacob Pandian 

Isaac Cardenas 

James Farris 

Joseph Sawicki 

Eva Van Ginneken 

Robert Young 

James F. Woodward 

Thomas P Klammer 

Merrill Ring 

Sandra Sutphen 

Richard McFarland 

Benjamin Hubbard 

Ron Hughes 

. . Stewart Long, Coordinator 
Rosalie Gilford, Coordinator 
. . Bruce Wright, Coordinator 
Ronald Clapper, Coordinator 
Robert Feldman, Coordinator 
. . . Ron Riggio, Coordinator 
. . . Diane Ross, Coordinator 


Kolf O. Jayaweera 

Margaret Woyski 

Marvin Rosenberg 

C. Eugene Jones 

Glenn Nagel 

Gerald Brem (acting) 

James O. Friel 

Mark Shapiro 

Eric Streitberger, Coordinator 


csuf 23 


California State University, 
Fullerton Foundation 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation wasestab- 
lished and incorporated as a not-for-profit corporation in October 
1959. The Foundation is an auxiliary organization of the univer- 
sity established to provide essential student, faculty and staff 
services which cannot be provided from state appropriations. It 
also supplements the program and activities of the university in 
appropriate ways by assisting the university in fulfilling its pur- 
poses and in serving the people of the State of California — 
especially those in the immediate Fullerton area. 

Some of the activities in which the Foundation assists the univer- 
sity are developing and administering research and educational 
grants and contracts; conducting bcx>kstore, food service and 
vending operations on campus; accumulating and managing en- 
dowment and student scholarship funds; and administering var- 
ious educationally related functions and special pri>grams such as 
the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 

The Foundation’s overall policies are administered by a Board of 
Directors composed of members of the university faculty, admin- 
istration and students as well as prominent community leaders. 


Board of Directors 

David L. Palmer, Chair# 

Sal D. Rinella, Vice Chair* 

Gary R. Del Fium, Secretary# 

Sherry D. Janrett, Treasurer* (ex officio) 

William M. Dickerson, Executive Director’ (ex officio) 
Joe Ahnt 
Elisha Backt 
Ted Bremner# 

Bert Buzan ' * 

Clare Carlson* 

Edward Carpenter# 

Robert Clark. Jr# 

Jack W. Coleman * 

Barbara Finlayson Pitts** 

Tim Garcia t 
Milton A. Gordon* 

Kolf Jayaweera* 

Stewart Long” 

Robbie L. Nayman* 

Robert Ostengaard# 

Walter J. Pray# 

James P Stickels* ’ 


'Administrator "Faculty tSfudent #Commumtv Mcmher 


Administrative Officers 

William M. Dickerson, Executive Director 
Sherry D. Jarrett, Acting Director of Finance and 
Administration 

James F. Sando, Director of Commercial Operations 


CSUF Alumni 

Five students were first to graduate from Cal State Fullerton, 
becoming the Class of 1960. Since then, over 75,000 graduates 
have passed through the university. 

CSUF alumni have a vested interest in their university. They 
have been part of irs past, belong to its present and are working 
for its future. Representing those alumni is the CSUF Alumni 
Association, which consists of the board of directors (governing 
body), school councils and chartered departmental, special inter- 
est and regional chapters. 

Inaugurated in November, 1983, the organization serves to ad- 
vance the university’s interests through alumni talents, services, 
energies and financial assistance to nurture and enhance the 
academic setting in such a way that students will benefit directly. 
The group promotes alumni involvement on campus and honors 
outstanding student, faculty, staff, community and alumni 
achievement. 

Membership privileges are extended to CSUF graduates who 
earned a bachelor's or master’s degree, as well as those who have 
earned a credential or certificate from the university. Members 
enjoy tangible benefits such as the quarterly publication (Titan 
News), library privileges, career services, travel programs, insur- 
ance and financial services, various events and discounts. 


Community Support Groups 

California State University, Fullerton has established close rela- 
tionships with the community which has resulted in community 
support groups that are involved in the life of the university' and 
support the university in ways that are unique to the particular 
organization. Each group determines membership criteria and 
annual membership fees and assists in developing goals that w ill 
advance the quality of student, faculty and educational environ- 
ment of the university. Further information about community 
support groups may be obtained from the Office of University 
Relations and Development located in Langsdorf Hall 805 at 
(714) 773-2108. 


24 csuf 


Art Alliance 

The Art Alliance provides support programs for the Art Depart- 
ment and Gallery through scholarships for art students, endow- 
ment funds, financial support for Main Art Gallery exhibitions 
and catalogs, and the administration of a docent program which 
provides tours for special groups and high school students. 

Continuing Learning Experience 

Continuing Learning Experience is an organization of retired and 
semi -retired men and women who wish to pursue continuous 
learning in an educational environment. CLE’s programs are 
designed to serve special interest groups and/or respond to special 
academic needs in the community. Members of CLE were active 
in raising funds for the Ruby Gerontology Center on campus. 

Executive Forum 

The membership of the Executive Forum is composed of chief 
executive officers and senior executives in California, who advise 
and assist the university president on matters relating to improv- 
ing education and research at Cal State Fullerton. Its members 
recommend measures and actions to stimulate and promote bet- 
ter relationships with the business community, as well as improve 
California’s quality of life. 

Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum 

Besides contributing annually to the Fullerton Arboretum oper- 
ating budget, the Friends augments and assists the arboretum 
program through a wide variety of volunteer functions. The pur- 
pose of the arboretum is threefold: to create a quiet, esthetic 
retreat in the midst of a rapidly growing urban area; to provide the 
university and surrounding communities with a resource for envi- 
ronmental and historical education; and to encourage research 
and experimentation in horticulture, plant ecology, and the con- 
servation of natural resources. 

Music Associates 

The Music Associates of California State University, Fullerton is a 
volunteer organization which provides support to the Department 
of Music in its goals for excellence. Annual contributions to a music 
scholarship fund for entering music majors, sponsorship of an annu- 
al Performance Award Contest, and the purchase of special equip- 
ment and instruments which enhances the music programs are 
among the objectives of this group. Fund raising activities include 
an annual Spring Luncheon held in the Mamott Hotel, a member- 
ship drive, and the co-sponsorship of a “Candlelight Carol Dinner* 
which features the University Singers. 


Parents’ Association 

The Parents’ Association is designed to respond to the needs and 
interests of the parents of California State University, Fullerton 
students. The organization sponsors a broad spectrum of activi- 
ties and educational programs as well as contributing financially 
to unmet university needs. 

Patrons of the Library 

The Patrons of the Library is an organization of community 
leaders, concerned citizens, former students, faculty and staff 
who generate financial support to sustain the margin of excel- 
lence of the university Library. It is a group that is unique among 
the 20 campuses of The California State University in the quality 
of its support of library holdings and facilities. 

Patrons of the Museum of Anthropology 

The Patrons of the Museum of Anthropology support the An- 
thropology Museum and its exhibits. Its members attend exhibit 
previews and receptions, as well as special addresses by guest 
lecturers. Tours and field trips also are available. 

President’s Associates 

The President’s Associates is an organization of dedicated com- 
munity leaders committed to the support of quality higher educa- 
tion. Membership contributions enable the university to initiate 
and sustain quality cultural and educational programs, including 
the Presidents’ Scholars and Presidents’ Opportunity Scholars 
scholarship and special recognition awards of faculty and 
students. 

Reading Educators’ Guild 

The Reading Educators’ Guild is composed of those who have 
graduated from California State University, Fullerton with a 
Master of Science in Education, Reading. The Guild has a close 
working relationship with the Department of Reading, and pro- 
motes research dealing with all aspects of reading. 

Titan Athletic Foundation 

The Titan Athletic Foundation is a nonprofit organization that 
exists solely to aid the athletic program at California State Uni- 
versity, Fullerton. The foundation is composed of individuals 
who have a genuine interest in athletics, the university, and the 
community and support athletics by providing funds for scholar- 
ships that ensure an effective recruiting program. 


CSUF 25 








(/ » gniim-Jf • niun m !> 
























f 



Academic Affairs 


California State University, Fullerton provides a diversity of edu- 
cational opportunities to satisfy the broad range of backgrounds 
and interests of its students and to meet the continually changing 
and ever growing demands of not only our local community and 
the state, but to accommodate the increasingly significant na- 
tional and global expectations as well. The academic programs 
available include 45 bachelor’s degrees, 41 master's degrees, 45 
minors, 3 resident certificates and 14 teaching credential pro- 
grams. Over 3,660 courses have been developed to provide learn- 
ing from introductory to highly specialized, in-depth and ad- 
vanced work in a wide variety and growing number of fields of 
study. 

The mission of the University is to provide excellent educational 
opportunities to its students to enable them to develop intellectu- 
ally, personally and professionally. To this end, the University is 
committed to attracting and retaining a diverse student body and 
faculty for all of its programs. Fundamental to these endeavors are 
excellence in instruction, actively involved faculty, and adequate 
support for the instructional mission. 

Academic excellence is provided in the various specializations 
offered by the University by encouraging departments and profes- 
sional schcxds to develop programs for their majors through a 
formal process that ensures careful and thoughtful review by 
various levels of the University. The General Education Program 
is designed to assure that graduates have made significant progress 
toward being a well-educated person by integrating into the ma- 
jor programs a relative balance in strength of required courses in 
the physical sciences, the social sciences, the humanities and the 
fine arts. These courses are planned to complement those offered 
through the major programs and electives. Articulation agree- 
ments with the local community colleges clarify the courses that 
will be accepted for credit in both general education and major 
programs. 

Vice President for 
Academic Affairs 

McCarthy Hall 133 
(714) 773-2614 

The Vice President for Academic Affairs is responsible for the 
leadership and coordination of all campus academic matters. The 
Vice President is the chief academic officer for the campus and is 
directly involved in the areas of curriculum development, faculty 
personnel pnxresses and budget and resource allocation as they 
pertain to instruction and academic support. 



28 Academic Affairs 


The academic vice president works closely with the President, 
the academic associate vice presidents, deans, and pri>gram direc- 
tors regarding all instructional^ related planning and operational 
matters. Related responsibilities include: (1) oversee the devel- 
opment and review of curriculum and educational and profes- 
sional policy; (2) instructional resource administration relating 
to staffing, operating expenses and equipment; (3) assuring that 
all faculty and academic staff personnel actions reinforce and 
complement the qualitative objectives of the university while 
meeting its strong commitment to the principles and spirit of 
affirmative action; (4) administration of academic support ser- 
vices such as the library, admissions and records, extended educa- 
tion, computer center, and student EOP and affirmative action 
pn>grams. As chief academic officer, the Vice President reviews 
department and faculty Personnel Committee recommendations, 
in order to make final recommendations to the President on all 
faculty and tenure considerations as well as other academic per- 
sonnel actions as required by university policy. 

Information concerning the academic programs of Cal State Ful- 
lerton may be obtained from the Office of the Vice President for 
Academic Affairs. This information may include: 

1 . The current degree pn>grams and other educational and train- 
ing programs; 

2. The instructional, laboratory, and other physical plant facili- 
ties which relate to the academic program; 

3. The faculty and other instructional personnel; 

4. Data regarding student retention at Cal State Fullerton and, if 
available, the number and percentage of students completing 
the program in which the student is enrolled or has expressed 
interest; and 

5. The names of associations, agencies or governmental bodies 
which accredit, approve, or license the institution and its 
programs, and the procedures under which any current or 
prospective student may obtain or review upon request a copy 
of the documents describing the institution’s accreditation, 
approval or licensing. 

Academic, Graduate and 
International Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-3602 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Programs 
coordinates the development of educational programs; provides 
an all-university perspective on educational activities at the cam- 
pus, and stimulates academic innovations. 

The Associate Vice President, Academic Programs, and the As- 
sistant Vice President, Graduate and International Programs, are 
responsible for administering university policies and regulations 
dealing with undergraduate and graduate curricula; fostering and 


administering institutional exchange programs with foreign uni- 
versities; preparing and publishing the university catalog; and 
serving as liaison to the Western Association of Schools and 
Colleges (WASC) and other accrediting agencies. 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Programs 
provides leadership for the Curriculum Committee, General 
Education Committee, Graduate Education Committee, Inter- 
national Education Committee and other groups and individuals 
concerned with changing and improving the educational pro- 
grams of this institution. Responsibilities relating to the Chan- 
cellor’s Office include regular review and updating of the Aca- 
demic Master Plan; coordination of program performance review; 
and staff reports for the Chancellor’s Office relating to academic 
planning. 

Academic Senate 

McCarthy Hall 143 
(714) 773-3683 

The Academic Senate develops, formulates and reviews educa- 
tional and professional policy which becomes university policy if 
approved by the President. Among other things, educational and 
professional policy includes: curricula; academic standards; crite- 
ria and standards for the selection, retention, and promotion of 
faculty members; academic and administrative policies concern- 
ing students; and allocation of resources. There are 14 standing 
committees of the Senate and three general committees of the 
faculty. The Senate consists of 45 members and includes two 
student representatives. 

The 15 standing committees of the Academic Senate are: Aca- 
demic Standards Committee, Budget Advisory Committee, 
Computing Affairs Committee, Curriculum Committee, Elec- 
tions Committee, Extended Education Committee, Faculty Af- 
fairs Committee, Faculty l>evelopment and Educational Innova- 
tion Committee, General Education Committee, Graduate Edu- 
cation Committee, International Education Committee, Library 
Committee, Long Range Planning and Priorities Committee, 
Research Committee, and Student Academic Life Committee. 

The Senate typically meets every other Thursday in Library 1 1 7 
at 1 1:00 a.m. 

Admissions and Records 

Langsdorf Hall Lobby 
(714) 773-2300 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for the 
administration of the admission, registration, records, and ser- 
vices to undergraduate and graduate students in the regular ses- 
sions of California State University, Fullerton. These programs 
and services provide preadmission guidance to prospective stu- 
dents and current information about the university’s curricula 
and requirements to school and college counselors; admit and 
readmit students within enrollment categories and priorities; 


Academic Affairs 29 


evaluate the applicability of undergraduate transfer credit toward 
all'University requirements of the curriculum; provide liaison in 
the identification and resolution of articulation problems of 
transfer students; register student programs of study, including 
enrollment into classes; maintain academic records; administer 
academic probation and disqualification policies; provide enroll' 
ment certifications on student request, including transcripts of 
academic records, to the Veterans Administration and for other 
purposes; certify the completion of degree and credential require- 
ments; receive petitions for exceptions to academic regulations; 
and provide information about these programs and services. 

Analytical Studies 

McCarthy Hall 1 36 
(714) 773-2121 

The Office of Analytical Studies is responsible for the organiza- 
tion, analysis, and presentation of the information and data 
essential for the support of campus policy formulation, resource 
allocation, and short- and long-range planning. The office par- 
ticipates in the development and enhancement of institutional 
information data base systems, and conducts descriptive and ana- 
lytic research on campus trends, program and policy effective- 
ness, and a variety of institutional characteristics, as required by 
the President and the Vice President for Academic Affairs. 

Among the institutional data with which the Office of Analytical 
Studies is concerned are student and faculty demography, student 
progress, enrollment, curriculum and scheduling, space and fa- 
cilities utilization, testing, workload, regional demography, affir- 
mative action, budget and program performance review. 

The Office of Analytical Studies produces and publishes regular 
campus reports such as the Statistical Handbook, as well as rel- 
evant reports required by the Chancellor’s Office and other agen- 
cies. 

Computer Center 

McCarthy Hall 38 
(714) 773-3921 

The Computer Center is located in the basement of McCarthy 
Hall. The campus has two separate mainframe computers: a DEC 
VAX 8550 for instructional purposes and an IBM 3090- 150E for 
all on-line administrative data processing for the University. Also 
available for instructional support are two AT&T 3B2 UNIX 
machines and one IBM 9370. Instructional users have access to 
such software applications as SPSS-X, SAS, SPICE. BMD, 
STRUDL, and a variety of other discipline-specific programming 
tools. 

Students have access to these central computing resources from 
over 1000 micro-computers and terminals connected to the cam- 
pus data communications network. Open-access satellite labs are 
located in each building, allowing students convenient comput- 
er-related services. Computer workshops are conducted to train 
and assist students in the proper use of computing equipment. 


Extended Education 

Building T-14 
(714) 773-2611 

The Office of Extended Education is responsible for all university 
program and course offerings not supported by state appropri- 
ations. These include summer and intersession, extension 
courses, adjunct enrollment, travel study programs, contract 
courses, certificate programs and teleconference programming. 
In contrast to state-supported programs which require matricula- 
tion and a degree objective, most Extended Education programs 
allow any adult and selected high school students to participate. 
The primary objective of Extended Education is to augment the 
regular university offerings and to provide further educational 
opportunities for all who wish to gain new knowledge and skills or 
to enhance those already acquired. Courses are taught by regular 
university faculty, visiting faculty and practicing professionals. 
All are specialists in their fields. Additional information con- 
cerning the Extended Education programs may be found in the 
Academic Programs section of this catalog. 

Graduate Studies 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-2618 

The staff of the Office of Graduate Studies assists students in 
answering questions about admission, academic policies and pro- 
cedures, graduate programs, financial assistance, student ser- 
vices, and other matters of concern to applicants or graduate 
students. The office is also responsible for performing an evalua- 
tion of student programs at classification and completion of re- 
quirements for authorizing award of degree. 

The Assistant Vice President for Graduate and International 
Programs is the appropriate university authority for coordinating 
and administering all matters related to graduate degree curricu- 
la. This position is guided by the policy recommendations of the 
Graduate Education Committee. 

Faculty Affairs and Records 

McCarthy Hall 142 
(714) 773-2125 

The Office of Faculty Affairs and Records is the off icial repository 
for documents and correspondence concerning full-time teach- 
ing and administrative faculty. It has responsibility for retaining 
documentation pertaining to employment, reappointment, ten- 
ure, promotion, leaves of absence, grievances, disciplinary ac- 
tions and separations. 

Faculty Research 

McCarthy Hall 1 1 2 
(714) 773-2106 

The Office of Faculty Research and Development provides assis- 
tance to faculty and staff in their efforts to obtain funding for 
research and other creative activities. The office offers pre-pro- 


30 Academic Affairs 


posal consultation, information about funding opportunities and 
assistance with budgets, technical design, typing and editing of 
proposals. It also publicizes and administers intramural research 
grants. A small library is maintained in McCarthy Hall 1 12 to aid 
faculty in identifying grant resources, federal/private announce- 
ments and agency/foundation grant profiles. 

International Programs 

McCarthy Hall 129 
(714) 773-2618 

The Office of Academic, Graduate and International Programs 
serves as the focus for all aspects of the University’s commitment 
to academic internationalization. It is responsible for overseeing 
and directing the internationalization of the curriculum. It also 
initiates and administers contacts with sister institutions 
throughout the world in order to foster the exchange of faculty 
and students. 

For more information on specific opportunities to study abroad, 
either through the CSU system-wide International Program or 
direct links that CSU Fullerton has with foreign institutions, see 
the section of this catalog titled “International Programs" on 
page 161. 

Television &. Media Support 
Services 

Library 80 
(714) 773-2621 

The Television and Media Support Center, located on the Lower 
Level of the Library building, includes audiovisual equipment 
and media distribution, materials design and production and 
instructional television services. 

Audiovisual services for the faculty include the use of audiovisual 
equipment and materials. Conventional classroom AV equipment 
— motion picture, slide, opaque, and overhead transparency 
projectors, audio and video tape recorders, and phonographs — 
are provided. Special purpose equipment and accessories are 
available. 

Design and production services for faculty include assistance in 
selecting appropriate media for specific course objectives, and the 
production of media not otherwise obtainable. Graphics of all 
sorts rendered as overhead transparencies, easel or wall posters, 
or camera ready copy are available. Photographic slides and 
prints are provided. Audiotapes are produced, edited, and dupli- 
cated, on reel or cassette, for classroom use. Modules incorporat- 
ing several media (e.g. sound/slide) will be designed and pack- 
aged in consultation with requesting faculty. 

Personnel of the Center consult with faculty in the analysis of 
media needs and advise in the procurement or production of 
materials appropriate for instructional goals and objectives. 


Television services include the production of instmctional and 
informational modules for closed circuit distribution on campus 
or presentation within the classroom or distribution by means of 
CATV Videotaping can take place in studio facilities, in the 
classroom, or at appropriate locations on or off the campus. 
Courses are delivered by means of cable television and microwave 
transmission to high schools and other remote sites by means of 
the Titan Interactive Network (TIN). The Television and Media 
Support Center, in cooperation with Extended Education, re- 
ceives satellite-delivered teleconferences for the campuses and 
members of TIN. 

Television and Media Support Center staff operate the system 
which provides university access programming to the CATV 
companies in Fullerton, Placentia, Anaheim, and Villa Park. 
While the CSUF Communications Department and the Theatre 
Department contribute to the cable schedule, instmctional pro- 
gramming and operations management are provided by the Tele- 
vision and Media Support Center. 

Interactive Televised Instruction is the latest addition to the 
Center’s responsibilities. ITI employs a television broadcast tech- 
nology known as Instructional Television Fixed Service. An asso- 
ciated audio teleconferencing system permits interaction by stu- 
dents at remote viewing locations with faculty in studio on 
campus. 

The University Library 

Library 229 
(714) 773-2714 

Chief among the learning resources on the campus is the Univer- 
sity Library. The six-story building located in the center of the 
campus houses a collection of over 700,000 hooks and bound 
periodicals, as well as one and half million other items: govern- 
ment documents (federal, state, local, and international); maps; 
microforms; and non-print materials such as kits, videotapes, 
phonorecords, compact discs, audio tapes, and film strips. Btx)ks 
and other materials are selected through the joint efforts of in- 
structional and library faculty to support the undergraduate and 
graduate programs of the University. In addition to these general 
collections, special and supplemental collections designed to 
support both the curriculum and instructionally-related research 
have been developed. 

The student identification card issued by the University serves as 
a library card for checking out books and other materials. Cards 
must be validated each semester at the library circulation center. 
The loss or theft of the student ID, as well as any change of 
address, should be immediately reported at the library circulation 
counter; early reporting of a lost ID will reduce the risk of misuse 
of the card. Library users are responsible for the return of all 
materials charged out on their ID cards. Since all library materi- 
als are subject to recall after two weeks, they should be returned 
to the University Library if there is need to be absent from 
campus for more than this length of time. 


Academic Affairs 3 1 


Primary access to the University Library's holdings is provided by 
the electronic Online Public Access Catalog (OPAC). The 
OPAC provides access to books, government documents and 
other materials through author, title, subject and other indexes. 
The OPAC also provides a listing of materials required or recom- 
mended for course-related reading and available for limited loan 
periods through the Reserve Book Room. General information, 
such as the hours the Library is open, is also available on this file. 
One can search the OPAC not only on terminals in the Library 
building, but also through dial-up access from remote locations 
on and off campus. 

Subject access to periodicals and similar types of literature is 
provided through printed indexes and abstracts, and through 
electronic CD-ROM databases housed in the Reference Section. 
Access to remote databases is provided through the Computer- 
ized Information Retrieval Service (CIRS), a fee-based service 
offered by the Reference Section. 

As part of the curriculum, the University Library offers courses in 
bibliographic research, including Library 200 (Elements of Bib- 
liographic Investigation). Tours and lectures for individual classes 
are given at the request of the faculty. In addition to formal 
instruction in bibliographic research, general and subject- 
specialized reference and research services are provided by the 
library faculty. 


For the convenience of users photocopiers and microform reader- 
printers are available in locations throughout the University Li- 
brary. These are operable with coins or electronically encoded 
copycards that may be purchased in the Library’s lobby. Other 
specialized facilities include music listening rooms, videotape 
viewing equipment, group study rooms, and a microform reading 
area. 

In addition to the many resources available on campus, mutual 
use agreements make accessible to students and faculty the library 
collections of the nineteen other libraries in the California State 
University system, the closest University of California campuses 
(Irvine and Riverside), and neighboring institutions such as Ful- 
lerton College. Intralibrary services provide easy access to library 
resourc es both at and from the Mission Viejo Campus. Interli- 
brary borrowing arrangements with major university and research 
libraries throughout the country further expand the resources 
available to the CSUF community. 

More detailed information about the University Library and its 
services is available at the Reference Desk located on the first 
floor. 


3 2 Academic Affairs 


Student Academic Affairs 

Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 
(714) 773*3606 

The Academic Advisement Center provides information and 
guidance in the choice of an undergraduate major, a school of 
interest, or selection of elective and general education courses. It 
is the administrative center for undergraduate students who have 
not declared a major or school of interest. Refer to the Academic 
Advisement section for additional information. 

Student Academic Services and 
University Outreach 

Library (lower level) 18 
(714) 773*2484 

The primary responsibility of Student Academic Services and 
University Outreach is the recruitment and retention of students 
at California State University, Fullerton. Inherent to this mis- 
sion is the strict attention that must be given to increasing the 
number and graduation rates of underrepresented students. 
Moreover, the unit is assigned much of the responsibility for 
coordinating institutional efforts in providing educational oppor- 
tunity for all students. 

The Student Academic Services and University Outreach Office 
develops and coordinates a comprehensive program of outreach 
services and activities which assist to make the university more 
visible, attractive, and accessible to all potential students. A 
number of programs have been consolidated under this office. 
These are described on the following pages. 

Athletic Academic Services 

Physical Education 1 30B 
(714) 773*3057 

As an integral part of the CSUF student advising system, the 
Athletic Academic Giordinator’s office provides advisement for 
student-athletes; provides referrals to campus academic support 
units, and conducts programs which are designed to assist stu- 
dent-athletes in meeting their academic goals. 




Student Academic Affairs 33 


Center for Internships and 
Cooperative Education 

Langsdorf Hall 210 
(714) 773-2171 

The Center for Internships/Cooperative Education was estab- 
lished to offer students the opportunity to formally integrate 
academic training with practical work experience prior to gradua- 
tion. The Internship/Co-op Program offers students an opportu- 
nity to expand their knowledge and skills in a “real work" situa- 
tion which better prepares them to select a career and successfully 
enter the job market. Through academic study and practical 
experience, students can enhance their academic knowledge, 
personal development, and professional preparation. Other valu- 
able benefits of an internship are to: 

1. gain work experience; 

2. network and develop industry contacts; 

3. earn academic credit; 

4. solidify academic and career goals; 

5. earn money while learning; 

6. explore various career options within a major. 

The program involves the cooperative efforts of both faculty and 
employers in the creation of opportunities for students that fulfill 
academic and professional needs. Each internship/co-op is super- 
vised and monitored by the employer, while faculty coordinators 
provide guidance to students to insure the academic integrity of 
the work experience. 

There are two internship/co-op program options: parallel and 
alternate. Students can work part-time while attending regular 
classes or full-time for a semester and can continue classes the 
following semester. Mast assignments are salaried positions and 
consequently assist the student to finance their educational ex- 
penses. 

CSUF currently has 39 academic programs that offer internships/ 
co-op in fields from the arts to the sciences. To participate in the 
internship/co-op program a student must: 

1. he at least in the junior year of study; 

2. be in good academic standing; 

3. receive approval from a faculty coordinator; 

4. enroll in the departmental internship/co-op course. 

The internship/co-op must be consistent with the goals of the 
students academic discipline. In mi>st departments up to six units 
of internship/co-op credit may be earned. With faculty coordina- 
tor approval, students may also be able to receive credit if cur- 
rently employed in a job relating to their academic major. Stu- 
dents should not wait until their final semester to participate.' 

For further information, contact the Center for Intemships/Co- 
operative Education. The Center is open 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. . 
Monday through Friday. 


Educational Opportunity Program 

Library (lower level) 20 
(714) 773-2784 

The Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) is primarily a 
“Special Admissions” program available to legal residents of the 
state of California. EOP is designed to provide information re- 
garding admission, financial assistance, and supportive services 
to prospective undergraduate students who have potential to 
perform satisfactorily at the university level, but who might be 
prevented from doing so because of economic, educational and 
environmental disadvantages. 


EOP gives each of the students individual attention. It uses 
knowledge of the students’ distinctive patterns of social behavior, 
learning styles, motivations, and aspirations to assist them in 
realizing their full potentials. 


Advisement Services 

The EOP advisement component, (See Student Academic Ser- 
vices), is one key to the effectiveness of the EOP Peer mentors, 
working under the direction of professional staff, serve as impor- 
tant liaisons between each EOP student and the university as a 
whole. Assistance and guidance are provided to help the student 
resolve academic, social, financial and personal problems. The 
EOP component of the Academic Services Center also serves as a 
referral point to direct students to the appropriate support ser- 
vices, e.g. Financial Aid, Learning Assistance Resource Center, 
and Health Center. 


Learning Assistance Resource 
Center (LARC) 

Library (lower level) 38 
(714) 773-348 8 

The Learning Assistance Resource Center (LARC), located on 
the lower level of the Library, offers a wide range of services for 
students who want to improve their academic skills. LARC ser- 
vices include: 


1 . Strategies for Learning classes to help students learn more and 
earn higher grades. Strategies classes emphasize use of appro- 
priate study skills in general education courses (e.g. history, 
political science, biological science and chemistry). 


2. Test preparation classes to help students prepare for the Entry 
Level Mathematics Examination, the California Basic Educa- 
tional Skills Test and the Graduate Record Exam. 


34 Student Academic Affairs 


3. The Computer Assured Instructum Lab to help students prepare 
for the ELM. GRE, and CBEST. In addition, there are self- 
help programs in mathematics, English grammar, and reading 
that students can use independently to learn new skills or to 
review old skills. Materials are also available to help students 
learn about other subjects such as political science, biology, 
history, and chemistry. 


4. W/rkshops to help students improve their test-taking skills, 
reduce test-taking anxiety, and deal with stress related to test- 
taking. 


Mentor Program 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773*3709 

The Mentor Program seeks to improve the interaction of individ- 
ual students with university personnel by matching a student 
with a faculty or staff member in a mentoring relationship. Men- 
tors provide encouragement to the students with whom they 
work in the following ways: (1) serving as role models, (2) help- 
ing to build self-esteem, (3) supporting the student’s educational 
and career goals, (4) providing general counsel and advice, and 
(5) providing feedback on the students progress. 


Student Academic Services 

Humanities 113 
(714) 773*228 8 

An important component of the Educational Equity Programs 
(Student Affirmative Action and the Educational Opportunity 
Program) is Student Academic Services. These support services 
are designed to facilitate student adjustment, academic achieve- 
ment and persistence at CSUF. Through individual advisement, 
counseling, workshops, and social activities, students are encour- 
aged toward their educational goals. The center also provides 
referrals to other appropriate services and is an important liaison 
between each individual student and various university offices. 


Student Affirmative Action 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773*2086 

Student Affirmative Action (SAA) is part of The California 
State University’s systemwide Student Affirmative Action plan 
which was mandated by the California Legislature in 1984 under 
Assembly Concurrent Resolution No. 151. The intent of this 
resolution was to address the underrepresentation of ethnic mi- 
norities, women and economically disadvantaged students en- 
rolled in California postsecondary institutions. 


At Fullerton, the SAA program focuses on students from under- 
represented groups who are academically qualified to meet the 
system’s regular admission requirements. The program’s major 
activities fall into two components: outreach and educational 
enhancement. 

Outreach Services 

Outreach services and activities to increase the enrollment of 
regularly admissible students from underrepresented groups to 
Cal State Fullerton is one of the responsibilities of SAA. 

High School and community college students seeking admission 
to the university are provided information on Fullerton admis- 
sions’ procedures, academic programs and student support ser- 
vices. Students are also provided individual advisement and assis- 
tance with application processes and information on financial aid 
and scholarships. Parents of prospective students are also invited 
to participate in outreach activities including a parent support 
group and information workshops to familiarize them with var- 
ious segments of the university and promote their involvement in 
the college experience of their offspring. 

The Intermediate Outreach Program works with ethnic minority 
students from local junior high schools in preparing them to 
enroll successfully and excel academically in college. 

Educational Enhancement 

Recognizing that students are more likely to succeed in an envi- 
ronment where they are treated with sensitivity and understand- 
ing, the SAA educational enhancement component works with 
faculty, staff and administrators to create a sensitive and support- 
ive environment for minority and underrepresented students. 

University Outreach/Relations 
with Schools 

Library (lower level) 22 
(714) 773*2086 

The University Outreach Service Office develops and coordi- 
nates a comprehensive program of outreach services and activi- 
ties to make the university more visible, attractive and accessible 
to all potential students. An overall goal of the office is to in- 
crease the enrollment of students at Cal State Fullerton with a 
special emphasis on students from underrepresented ethnic mi- 
nority groups. 

To accomplish this goal, outreach staff make presentations to 
high school and community college students, parents and coun- 
selors regarding Fullerton admissions procedures (including ad- 
mission to the Educational Opportunity Program (EOP) and 
Student Affirmative Action (SAA), academic programs and stu- 
dent support services). Students are also provided individual 
advisement and assistance with application processes and finan- 
cial aid procedures. 


Student Academic Affairs 35 


Special activities including campus tours, admissions workshops 
for parents and conferences for high school and community col- 
lege counselors are also sponsored by the office. 

In keeping with the university’s commitment to increase the 
representation of ethnic minority and underrepresented students 
at Fullerton, special efforts are made to incorporate the unique 
needs of these students in the development and implementation 
of all outreach efforts. 

Campus Tours 

Library (lower level) 4 A 
(714) 773-2360 

To schedule a campus tour you may call from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. t 
Monday through Friday. 

Tour hours are Monday through Thursday at 10 a.m. and again at 
2 p.m., and Friday at 10 a.m. 

A one day advance reservation is requested for individual campus 
tours. Group tours should he requested at least 30 days in 
advance. Tours are not available on holidays, weekends or 
evenings. 

Each individual tour lasts about an hour and covers all aspects of 
student life. Group tours are also about an hour long, but can 
include an orientation session to cover Admissions, EOR Finan- 
cial Aid, and student activities if given a two-week advance 
notice. 


Writing Center 

Humanities 528 
(714) 773-3650 

The Writing Center provides tutorial assistance primarily for 
students who are enrolled in English Department writing classes. 
However, tutors will also assist students who need help in writing 
papers for other university classes. Tutors offer individualized 
instruction, helping students write the kind of clear, concise 
prose necessary for acaemic and professional writing. While they 
will not proofread or edit papers, tutors do offer constructive 
suggestions designed to help the student master the techniques of 
proofreading and editing. The goal is to increase the students 
competence, not to improve any given paper. 

Tutors are also trained to help non-native speakers of English 
improve not only their writing but their speaking skills, and 
students may make appointments for conversation. If a student 
needs intensive work on grammar, one-to-one tutoring in this 
skill is available and can be supplemented with study materials 
and computer programs. Additionally, the Center has sample 
topics for the EWP which students may write on and then receive 
tutorial feedback prior to the exam. 


36 Student Academic Affairs 


Honors Programs 

Dean’s Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each 
semester of a list of undergraduate students whose grade-point 
averages for the previous term are 3.5 or better tor 12 units of 
graded course work. Students are notified in writing when they 
have earned this distinction. 

General Education Honors 

The General Education Honors Program offers students many of 
the educational benefits of a small college in the midst of the rich 
resources of a large university. The program’s small class sizes 
provide challenging learning experiences, individualized atten- 
tion from professors, and closer interaction with other students. 

The program also gives students the opportunity to earn recogni- 
tion for distinguished academic performance in general educa- 
tion courses. Students who successfully complete the require- 
ments for honors in general education will have a notation placed 
on their transcripts. 

In order to graduate with honors in general education, a student 
must: be accepted into the General Education Honors Program; 
complete 30 units of general education honors courses; maintain 
a grade-point average of 3.25 in all general education honors 
classes; complete the university’s general education require- 
ments. 

For additional information, please refer to the General Education 
section of this catalog. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and transfer 
students who have demonstrated outstanding achievement in 
past academic work. For first-time freshmen with no previous 
college units earned, a grade point average of 3.5 on a four-point 
scale must be earned in the course work considered for admission 
to the university. Students who have completed fewer than 56 
transferable semester units of credit must meet the grade-point 
average criteria for first-time freshmen and must also have earned 
a 3.5 grade-point average on all transferable college work at- 
tempted. Students who have completed 56 or more transferable 
semester units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3. 5 is earned 
in all transferable college work completed. 


Honors Program 37 


Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation for baccalaureate recipients are based on 
overall performance and have been defined by the Academic 
Senate in three classifications: 

With honors gpa. 3. 50-3. 74 

With high honors gpa. 3.75-3.89 

With highest honors gp.a. 3.90-4.00 

Honor Societies 

Chapters of eleven honor societies have been chartered at Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton to recognize students who dem- 
onstrate superior scholarship and leadership in specific academic 
fields. 

Alpha Kappa Delta — Promotes and recognizes high scholastic 
achievement among junior, seniors and graduate students in soci- 
ology. 

Betti Alpha Psi — Encourages and gives recognition to scholastic 
and professional excellence in the field of accounting. 

Beta (jumtna Sigma — Encourages and rewards scholarship and 
accomplishment among students of business and administration. 

Eta Kappa Nu — Recognizes students in electrical engineering 
distinguished by scholarship, activities, leadership, and exempla- 
ry character, and helps these students progress by association 
with alumni. 

K off pa Tau Alpha — Serves as a vehicle of recognition for ous- 
tanding students in the field of mass communication. 

Lambda Alpha Zeta — Encourages and stimulates superior 
scholarship and professionalism among students in anthropology. 

Mu Phi Epsilmi — Promotes high standards in education and 
performance in the professional world of music. 

Omicrcm Delta Epsilon — Recognizes high scholastic achieve- 
ment in economics. 

Phi Alpha Theta — Serves as a vehicle of recognition for out- 
standing students in the field of history. 

Psi Chi — Advances and maintains scholarship in the science of 
psychology. 

Tau Beta Chi — Promotes and encourages scholastic excellence 
among top junior and senior engineering students. 

The following four societies also recognize specialized groups of 
people, but are not limited to a specific academic field: 


Qolden Key National Honor Society — Promotes and recognizes 
scholastic excellence and service among juniors and seniors at 
CSUF. 

Phi Beta Delta — Honors international students, faculty who 
have studied or done research abroad, and American students 
who have studied abroad. 

Phi Delta Qamma — Promotes the highest professional ideals 
among women in graduate school. 

Phi Kappa Phi — Provides an honor society dedicated to the 
unity and democracy of education and open to honor students 
from all departments of American university and colleges. 

President’s Opportunity Scholars 
Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the President’s 
Opportunity Scholars Program as a means of recognizing the 
academic and extracurricular excellence of a select group of stu- 
dents. Its special focus is outstanding students from the current 
year of high school graduates who are also members of minority 
groups which are underrepresented in higher education — pri- 
marily black and Hispanic students. Scholars receive $1,000 per 
year for four years while maintaining eligibility in the program. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Have a grade-point average of at least 3.2 in all academic 
subjects for the 10th, Uth and first half of the 12th 
grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 900 or high- 
er, or an American College Test composite score of 22 or 
higher. 

• Graduate from high school in the class year preceding the 
fall semester for which applying. 

• Document significant contributions to school and com- 
munity activities during the high school years. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before applying 
for a President’s Opportunity Scholars award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Opportunity Scholars ap- 
plication form and arrange for the Secondary’ School Re- 
port and Descnption and Evaluation of Student forms to 
be submitted by the high school principal or a counselor 
and by a faculty member. 


38 Honors Program 


President’s Scholars Program 

California State University, Fullerton established the President’s 
Scholars Program as a means of recognizing the academic and 
extracurricular excellence of a select group of students. Funded 
by the President’s Associates, the program began in 1979 with 
the first 10 President’s Scholars. Each year 10 additional Presi- 
dent’s Scholars are selected with the potential eligibility of all 
chosen individuals extending for a total of four years. President’s 
Scholars receive $ 1 ,000 a year. 

To be eligible for consideration, an applicant must: 

• Be a legal resident of California. 

• Present a grade-point average of at least 3.75 in all aca- 
demic subjects for the 10th, 1 1 th and first half of the 1 2th 
grades. 

• Earn a Scholastic Aptitude Test total score of 1150 or 
higher, or an American College Test composite score of 28 
or higher. 


• Graduate from high school. 

• Verify outstanding individual achievement. 

• Document significant contributions to school and community 
activities during the high school years. 

• File for admission to Cal State Fullerton before applying for a 
President’s Scholars award. 

• Submit a completed President’s Scholars application form and 
arrange for the Secondary School Report and Description and 
Evaluation of Student forms to be submitted by the high school 
principal or a counselor and by a faculty member. 

Application forms for both Scholars Programs are available by 
telephoning (714) 773-2010 or by writing the President’s Schol- 
ars Screening Committee, President’s Scholars Program, Library 
20, California State University, Fullerton, CA 92634. 


Honors Program 39 



Institutes and Centers 


California Desert Studies 
Consortium 

Faculty Terrace 303 
(714) 773-2428 

The California Desert Studies Consortium consists of seven Cali- 
fornia State University campuses including Dominguez Hills, 
Fullerton, Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge, Pomona, and 
San Bernardino. The primary objectives of this consortium arc to 
promote and provide physical and academic support for under- 
graduate educational programs in a variety of disciplines and to 
better understand and manage the physical and biological aspects 
of desert environments. The CSU Desert Studies Center pro- 
vides living accommodations, laboratory space, classrooms, and 
library facilities for over 100 undergraduates at Soda Springs in 
the Mojave Desert, a location central to all high desert study 
areas. 

Center for Economic Education 

Langsdorf Hall 530 
(714) 773-2248 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers 
at colleges and universities in the United States working with the 
Joint Council on Economics Education at the national level and 
the California Council on Economic Education to expand eco- 
nomic understanding. Center pn>grams include services to 
schools and colleges, individual educators, and the community; 
research and professional training; and operation of an economic 
education information center. The center is located in the 
School of Business Administration and Economic** 

Center for Governmental Studies 

Education Classroom 424 
(714) 773-3521 

The Center for Governmental Studies supports research, train- 
ing and publication which assist governmental, professional and 
civic groups. It is housed in the Political Science Department and 
draws upon departmental, community and alumni expertise. The 
Institute publishes monographs and books, sponsors training pro- 
grams, and supports theoretical and applied research which are of 
interest to public policy makers. Institute funds also assist in 
supporting the teaching mission of the department. 




40 Institutes and Centers 



Center for International Business 

Langsdorf Hall 626 
(714) 773-2223 

The need for an international dimension to business education is 
underscored by the importance of international business oper- 
ations to domestic firms and the development of multinational 
firms and agencies. Equally important is a growing awareness of 
the diversity among the world’s cultures and economies, and an 
understanding of an unavoidable interdependence between na- 
tions. The International Business Center has undertaken to meet 
these challenges in the international area by developing interna- 
tional business programs with the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics. 

Environmental Institute 

McCarthy Hall 103 
(714) 773-2594 

The Environmental Institute promotes interdisciplinary re- 
search, education and srudy, and dissemination of information 
concerning the environment. Particular emphasis is placed on 
the examination of environmental problems for the purpose of 
providing information and analyses concerning policy alterna- 
tives. The institute seeks funding to support research, sponsor 
conferences and seminars and prepare environmental studies and 
reports of interest to the academic, governmental, and general 
communities. Whenever possible, the institute’s activities are 
structured to allow the participation of graduate and undergrad- 
uate students. 

Foreign Language Laboratory 

Humanities 325 
(714) 773-2153 

Instructional technology in the Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages changed dramatically in 1987 when an antiquated reel-to- 
reel audio lab was replaced by a state-of-the-art 36-station Tand- 
berg IS- 10 audio tape lab. Attached to the audio tape facility 
there is a new 12-station laboratory for computer- assisted lan- 
guage learning. Here, students in selected classes use computer 
programs to learn grammar, idioms, and vocabulary as well as to 
write compositions in foreign languages. Additional hardware 
includes a powerful Xerox 6085 computer and laser printer capa- 
ble of displaying and printing not only the Roman alphabets but 
also Russian, Chinese and Japanese. 

Foreign Language broadcasts provide students with authentic and 
interesting supplements to classroom instruction. To facilitate 
such programming, the laboratory has special video units that 
accommodate recordings made in foreign countries. Interactive 
videodiscs, the latest in a series of technological enhancements 
to the study of foreign languages, are also available for classroom 
and individual use. 


Humanities Institute 

Humanities 810L 

(714) 773-2482/3474 

The California State University, Fullerton Humanities Institute 
promotes scholarship and study in the humanities disciplines and 
encourages investigation of pedagogical advances in the human- 
ities. The institute is engaged in an on-going series of projects 
designed to create instructional materials and programming to 
enhance humanities instruction at all levels of the educational 
system within the region served by California State University, 
Fullerton. 

Institute activities are planned and coordinated by an interseg- 
mental advisory board comprised of representatives of both pub- 
lic and private educational institutions at the K-12, community 
college and university level. The Institute has just published an 
annotated resource guide for teachers of the humanities in Or- 
ange County which includes information on a broad variety of 
humanities resources such as art museums, colleges and universi- 
ties, consulates, historic sites, historical and cultural organiza- 
tions, libraries, museums, and performing arts centers. Also in- 
cluded is a select annotated bibliography of other resource publi- 
cations. 

A second project was undertaken in response to a request from 
the California State Department of Education and is sponsored 
by the California Humanities Project. It is an institute for social 
science teachers at the 6th and 7th grade level, and is designed to 
provide them with background information on the new state 
framework for history and social science teachers in the elemen- 
tary school. Within that general context, the institute will focus 
on materials aimed at enhancing the teachers’ implementation of 
the Middle East segment of the framework, specifically in the 
areas of art history, religion, history, and geography. 

Infant and Child Study Center 

Humanities 519 
(714) 773-2147 

The Infant and Child Study Center in the Department of Psy- 
chology supports the research and instructional activities of fac- 
ulty and students in developmental psychology. Unique opportu- 
nities are provided to students in both research training and 
applied developmental psychology. Programmatic research con- 
ducted at the center includes: ( 1 ) longitudinal assessment of the 
relationships between home environment, mental development 
and school readiness; (2) experimental analysis of perceptual and 
cognitive abilities; (3) life-span changes in memory and informa- 
tion processing; (4) learning disabilities in children and adults; 
(5) memory strategy instruction across the life-span; (6) develop- 
ment of cerebral hemisphere specialization; and (7) parent-child 
computer learning activities. 


Institutes and Centers 41 


Institute of Geophysics 

McCarthy Hall 263 
(714) 773*3882 

The Institute of Geophysics is an interdisciplinary organization 
currently comprised of faculty members from the Departments of 
Geological Sciences and Physics. It was established to foster the 
communication of ideas and information; encourage interdisci- 
plinary research; and improve instruction in geophysics. Mem- 
bership is open to all faculty members who are interested in 
aspects of geophysics. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 
and Nutrition 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773*3614 

The Institute for Molecular Biology and Nutrition is an interdis- 
ciplinary organization comprised of faculty members from the 
Departments of Biological Science, and Chemistry and Bio- 
chemistry. The mission of the Institute is the exploration of ideas 
and problems concerning cell and molecular life science with 
special emphasis on understanding the biochemical basts of nutri- 
tion by: (1) fostering communication of scientific ideas to its 
membership, affiliated departments, the University, and to the 
community at large; (2) promoting active research on cellular 
and molecular problems; (3) encouraging student research in 
affiliation with members of the Institute; (4) development of 
courses related to the Institute's mission which benefit from the 
unique interdisciplinary approach; and (5) establishment of the 
Biotechnology Minor. 

The Institute sponsors a scries of special seminars and symposia 
featuring distinguished scientists of national and international 
renown. 

Laboratory of Phonetic Research 

Education Classroom 630D 
(714) 773*2526 
(714) 773*2441 

The Laboratory of Phonetic Research is a research and training 
facility in the Department of Linguistics. It is equipped with 
electromechanical facilities for the study of human speech, re- 
cording equipment, and an extensive collection of tape record- 
ings of lesser known languages and dialects. Its objectives are 
twofold: 

Instructum. To provide beginning students with teaching, 
training and experience in phonological analysis. 

Research. To provide advanced students and faculty with facili- 
ties for research in phonetics and phonology. 


The Laboratory’ also serves as the editorial home of the California 
Ijnguistic Newsletter. 

Ruby Gerontology Center 

Ruby Gerontology Center 8 
(714)449*7007 

The Charles L. and Rachael E. Ruby Gerontology Center serves 
as a forum for intellectual activity and creative scholarship in the 
area of gerontology. The Center houses the activities of the 
Continuing Learning Experience, the Gerontology Research In- 
stitute, and is a resource center on aging for the Orange County 
region. The Center s goals include: promoting educational pro- 
grams concerning adult development and aging, developing pro- 
ductive intergenerational activities in education and research, 
fostering cross-disciplinary research on topics related to aging and 
later life, providing opportunities for lifelong learning, and ex- 
panding opportunities for professional growth and development 
for those interested in gerontology. 

Social Science Research Center 

Humanities 512 
(714) 773*2202 

The Social Science Research Center supports the instructional 
activities and research of the faculty and students in the School of 
Humanities and Social Sciences. The SSRC has three broad 
mission areas: (1) Instructional Support, (2) Research Support, 
and (3) Community Service. The facility provides instructional 
support through courses and workshops offered in the Microcom- 
puter Teaching Laboratory. Students and faculty have access to 
computer workstations in an open computer laboratory during 
normal university hours and on weekends. Research activities of 
the faculty and students are supported through consultation with 
the professional and graduate assistant staff of the SSRC. The 
SSRC provides community’ service to agencies and organizations 
within Orange County in the areas of survey research, program 
evaluation and statistical analysis. The community service ac- 
tivities also provide instructional and research opportunities for 
the faculty’ and students. 

Southern California Ocean 
Studies Institute 

McCarthy Hall 282 
(714) 773-3614 

The Southern California Ocean Studies Institute, which consists 
of six State University campuses (Dominguez Hills, Fullerton, 
Long Beach, Los Angeles, Northridge. Pomona), participates in 
training managers and scientists and in educating the general 
public by coordinating and facilitating marine educational and 
research activities. It provides facilities for introducing students 
to the marine environment or for intensive participation by stu- 
dents pursuing professional programs. The major facility is the R. 
V. Yellowfin (85-foot vessel) which is used by classes and research 


42 Institutes and Centers 


programs in biology, geology and ocean engineering. In addition 
the Institute serves as an educational and research liaison be- 
tween regions, states and nations. 

Sport and Movement Institute 

Physical Education 134 
(714) 773-3316 

The purpose of the Sport and Movement Institute is to promote 
an atmosphere congenial to research, creative activity, and ser- 
vices concerned with human movement and its related phenom- 
ena. Specifically, the organization endeavors to: (1) provide ser- 
vices of evaluation, consultation and advisement; (2) foster and 
encourage the generation and communication of ideas and infor- 
mation; (3) interpret and facilitate the practical application of 
research findings; ( 4 ) provide opportunities for individuals and 
community groups to participate in activities of the Institute such 
as clinics, workshops, seminars, etc.; (5) promote and support 
research and other scholarly activities on the part of the member- 
ship. 


Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

McCarthy Hail 207H 
(714) 649-2760 
(714) 773-3451 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California 
State University, Fullerton Foundation agency. Located in Mo- 
djeska Canyon in the Santa Ana Mountains, the sanctuary pro- 
vides for a program of continuing educational service to the 
community; a research center for biological field studies; a facility 
for teacher education in nature interpretation and conservation 
education; and a center for training students planning to enter 
into the public service field of nature interpretation. 


Institutes and Centers 43 















































?. ij r.»- . jvot/i bns Ptoq8 

aojtM&ubl U&Uvd*! 
l . T (M ) 

Tt^’.fcuro i wieuisv » i ■, civ 






'J I » 



Student Affairs 


ClassnxMn activity is devoted to the academic development of 
the learner. Student Affairs offers programs which support the 
academic program and simultaneously provide students with ser- 
vices and opportunities for personal growth. Some Student Af- 
fairs programs such as housing and financial aid emphasize their 
service and educationally supportive roles; others, like counsel- 
ing, accentuate their developmental aspects. The opportunities 
offered by the university’s Student Affairs program vary from the 
traditional social activities to lectures and concerts funded 
through the Associated Students. Developmental activities in- 
clude the exploration of personal and vocational life styles and 
leadership and training. 

Student Affairs arc comprised of Academic Appeals, the Adult 
Reentry (Center, the Career Development Center, Disabled Stu- 
dent Services, Financial Aid, Health and Counseling Service, 
Housing Services and Residence Life, International Education 
and Exchange, lesting and Research, University Activities Cen- 
ter, University Center (Student Union), and Women's Center. 

Vice President for 
Student Affairs 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773*3221 

The vice president’s office axmJinatcs and supervises all student 
affairs services and programs. The vice president is responsible for 
the quality of student life on the campus and works with faculty, 
administration and students to improve the campus environ- 
ment. This office is also charged with administering the universi- 
ty s academic appeals pnKcdure and the student disciplinary 
codes. 

Academic Appeals 

Langsdorf Hall 810 
(714) 773-3836 

Students who have grade disputes are encouraged to make every 
effort to resolve the issue informally by meeting with the instruc- 
tor, department chair, and dean of the school. Students who feel 
they have been unsuccessful at resolving the issue informally, 
should contact the coordinator of academic appeals, who will 
work to resolve the dispute informally and provide information 
and clarification about university policies. Students are encour- 
aged to contact the coordinator if they haw questions about the 
academic appeals process. 



46 Student Affairs 


Adult Reentry Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3889 

The Adult Reentry Center (ARC) serves adults who, after a 
break in their education, are considering beginning or continu- 
ing their college education. The center provides support and 
guidance for currently enrolled reentry students and others whose 
needs differ from those of the traditional university student. 


ARC offers a variety of programs which include support counsel- 
ing, workshops, support groups and referrals to start and faculty. 
The center’s counselors and programs can help students and 
prospective students to clarify their goals and determine if a 
university education is the appropriate method for attaining 
those goals. The center also provides information and assistance 
with university application and registration procedures as well as 
personal, academic and career counseling. Special programs, 
groups, workshops, films and discussions which focus on the 
special needs of reentry students are presented each semester. 
Evening hours are always available. 


Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall 208 
(714) 773-3121 

The Career Development Center provides career counseling, 
personal counseling and employment services. It is structured to 
meet the wide range of students’ career needs and to help explore, 
develop and realize career plans. The center has designed many 
programs and services tailored to fit career exploration, planning 
and employment needs. 


The center can help with career planning and research or provide 
job search skills and employment opportunities. Because the 
career planning process involves many variables, the CDC draws 
upon both on- and off-campus resources. Counselors work closely 
with employers and serve on task forces with faculty to develop 
career programs relevant to educational experiences. Whether a 
student is just beginning career research or is ready to look for a 
job, the CDC has counselors and programs that will help define 
and achieve career goals. 


Counseling 

CDC professionals can help to identify interests, skills and values 
and their relationship to career opportunities through counseling 
and vocational testing. In addition to career issues, CDC coun- 
selors are trained in personal counseling. An individual, confi- 
dential appointment can help clarify concerns and develop a plan 
of action. 


Seminars and Workshops 

Group sessions examine topics such as career planning, resume 
writing, job search techniques, interview skills and other career 
related subjects throughout the semester. Many of these seminars 
are designed for specific academic areas. In addition, workshops 
in personal development and life skills are offered in the center. 
See the CDC Calendar published every semester for current 
information. 

Career Resource Library 

The center has an extensive collection of company, career 
search, occupational and labor market information to help with 
career research. The library includes books, pamphlets, bro- 
chures, as well as audio and video tapes. 

Part-Time Employment 

The center has listings of part-time, summer and temporary em- 
ployment which are received each day from local employers. 

Career Employment 

Employment listings and recorded job information are available 
to students and graduates seeking full-time career opportunities. 
The jobs are found in government agencies, business, industry, 
manufacturing and service industries. 

On Campus Recruitment 

Several hundred employers send recruiters to the CDC each fall 
and spring to recruit graduating seniors, graduate students and 
alumni. 

Educational Placement 

The center provides complete services for candidates seeking 
employment in educational institutions including: placement 
counseling, placement file service, position listings and a pub- 
lished bulletin of administrative openings. 

Minority Services 

The CDC is aware of the career needs of minority students; 
counselors work closely with employers, clubs and professional 
organizations to provide services and opportunities that will help 
meet these needs. 

S1GI PLUS™ 

SIGl PLUS™ (pronounced “Siggy") is a computer-based System of 
Interactive Guidance and Information that will help make career 
decisions. The program will help examine values, explore career 
options and master decision -making strategies. 

Career Class 

Career Exploration and Life Planning (Counseling 252) is a three 
unit course designed t b facilitate career and educational decision 
making. Specific objectives of the class include increasing aware- 


Student Affairs 47 


ness of self, the world of work, relationships between college 
majors and occupations, and job search skills. See the current 
Class Schedule for further information. 

Alumni Career Bank 

The Alumni Career Bank is composed of several hundred CSUF 
alumni who have volunteered to share their work experiences 
with students. Over 100 career areas and nearly every major and 
program are represented in the hank. 

Walk-In Counselor 

Throughout the day a CDC counselor is available to help define 
career needs and suggest appropriate CDC services. This is de- 
signed to answer short questions and provide information. 

The services of the Career Development Center are available 
without cost to currently enrolled students. Services are also 
available to alumni without charge for six months following 
graduation. After that period, alumni will be charged a nominal 
fee for services. 

The university will furnish, upon request, information concern- 
ing the subsequent employment of graduates from programs or 
courses of study which have the purpose of preparing students for 
a particular career field. This information includes data concern- 
ing average starting salary and the percentage of previously en- 
rolled students who obtained employment. The information pro- 
vided may include data collected from either graduates of the 
campus or graduates of all campuses in The California State 
University system. Copies of the published information are avail- 
able in the center. 

Financial Aid 

McCarthy Hall 63 
(714) 773-3125 

The Financial Aid Office is committed to providing eligible stu- 
dents with the necessary financial aid resources to ensure their 
academic success. The office provides financial assistance to ap- 
proximately 6,300 students annually and administers over $17 
million each year through the following student financial assis- 
tance programs: 

Supplemental Loans for Students (SLS) 

Parent Loan (PLUS) Program 
Perkins Loan (formerly NDSL) 

Stafford Loan (formerly GSL) 

Pell Grant 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant 
Bureau of Indian Affairs Grant 
State University Grant Program 
Educational Opportunity Program Grant 
College Work Study Program 


Cal Grant A (State Scholarship) 

Cal Grant B (College Opportunity Grant) 

Graduate Fellowship 
Private Scholarship 
Emergency Loan Fund 

For further information concerning financial aid programs avail- 
able at the university see the Registration Procedures section of 
this catalog or call the Financial Aid Office. 

Disabled Student Services 

Library 1 1 3 
(714) 773-31 17 

Disabled Student Services provides assistance and offers special 
services to all disabled students. The purpose of this program is to 
make all of the university’s educational, cultural, social and phys- 
ical facilities and programs available to students with orthopedic, 
perceptual and/or learning disabilities. The program serves as a 
centralized source of information and provides students with in- 
dividual attention. The professional and support staff are exper- 
ienced with the particular needs of persons with disabilities. 

The program works in close cooperation with other university 
departments in order to provide a full range of services. These 
services include classroom support services (readers, notetakers, 
tutors, interpreters for the deaf/hearing impaired, alternative 
testing) counseling, handicapped parking, application assistance 
and priority registration, academic advisement, career counsel- 
ing and job-placement, housing and transportation, health ser- 
vices for acute illness and advocacy. 

The program coordinates and provides diagnostic assessment, 
counseling, advisement, advocacy and supportive services for 
students with learning disabilities. 

The program needs and encourages involvement and input from 
the students it serves in order to maintain a responsive and 
quality program. 

Information regarding special facilities and services available to 
disabled students may be obtained from the Office of Disabled 
Student Services. 

Health and Counseling Service 

Student Health Center 
(714) 773-2800 

The Student Health and Counseling Service is equipped to care 
for a wide range of episodic outpatient medical problems. 

The Health and Counseling Service is staffed by physicians, 
nurse practitioners, registered nurses, laboratory and radiology’ 
technologists, a pharmacist, and a physical therapist. Most of the 
providers are primary care clinicians. The staff also includes 
specialists in the following fields: gynecology, orthopedics, der- 


48 Student Affairs 


matology, allergology, podiatry, health education, reproductive 
health, and nutrition counseling. Students who encounter emo- 
tional or personal problems may come to the Counseling and 
Psychological Services Department: Professional psychological 
counselors and a psychiatrist are available when needed. 

All medical records are confidential ; no information will be released 
without the patient’s written permission, except in the rare case 
of a court subpoena. 

The cost of care provided by the Health and Counseling Service, 
except for a few specific fees, has been paid through student fees 
and by the State of California. Every registered student is eligible 
for care. The Student Health and Counseling Service cannot, 
however, meet all medical needs. Students are urged to obtain 
health insurance, if they do not already have adequate private 
insurance. A policy is offered on campus through the Associated 
Students, Inc. 

Housing Services and 
Residence Life 

Cypress House 101 
(714) 773*2168 

The University welcomed its first residence students in spring, 
1988. Up to 396 students are accommodated in 66 Residence 
Hall suites. Each 3 bedroom, 2 bath suite accommodates 6 resi- 
dents, is air-conditioned, carpeted and fully furnished. This is the 
first phase of a two-phase construction program that will eventu- 
ally house up to 800 students on campus. 

The housing complex offers a study lounge, computer and typing 
rooms, a weight room, a multi-purpose room and coin-operated 
washers and dryers. Barbecue grills, a picnic area, a basketball 
court, a sand volleyball court, video game machines, billiards, 
ping pong, a large screen television set and VCR are also avail- 
able for residents. 

The Housing and Residence Life Office also assists students in 
their search for off-campus housing. The office provides updated 
listings of local apartment complexes. Bulletin boards are avail- 
able for posting cards by students seeking roommates or accom- 
modations. Other listings highlight rooms for rent in private 
homes and rooms in exchange for work. Additional information 
is available on model rental agreements and on referrals for com- 
munity housing agencies handling landlord/tenant law. 

Residence hall space is available for summer session students and 
for educationally related groups sponsoring workshops and pro- 
grams on campus. 

Contact the campus Housing and Residence Life Office for fur- 
ther information. 


International Education and 
Exchange 

McCarthy Hall 79 
(714) 773-2787 

California State University, Fullerton is a community of people 
from many nations and cultures. The Office of International 
Education and Exchange is dedicated to promoting the exchange 
of knowledge and experience within the multicultural campus 
community and with the world at large. The office provides 
information and assistance for all international students attend- 
ing CSUF and for U.S. students planning to study abroad. 

International Students 

Over 1000 students from nearly 70 countries study at CSUF as 
international students, and the staff of the Office of International 
Education and Exchange endeavors to provide them with a home 
away from home. The office provides visa eligibility documents, 
pre-arrival information, and orientation to newly admitted stu- 
dents. The door is always open for students to meet with an 
adviser to discuss academic concerns, cultural adjustment, immi- 
gration matters or just to chat. 

Campus activities such as international dinners and discussions 
occur throughout the year. The office coordinates programs in 
the community, such as the Fullerton International Friendship 
Council. 

Study, Work and Travel Abroad 

A year or semester overseas can provide an invaluable educational 
experience. Cultural awareness, language skills and an in-depth 
knowledge of one’s field from an international perspective are but 
a few of the many benefits of studying abroad. A well planned 
program offers career advantages with the increasingly multina- 
tional and multicultural organizations and communities of south- 
ern California. 

The California State University International Programs is an 
academic year program with 25 centers in 15 countries. Interna- 
tional Programs participants remain enrolled at CSUF, earn resi- 
dential credit, and pay only home campus fees. All personal 
expenses are the student’s responsibility. 

CSUF has established campus-based direct exchange programs 
with universities in the Soviet Union, China, France, Japan and 
Mexico. Application and admission requirements vary somewhat 
by country. No overseas tuition is charged; students pay regular 
CSUF campus fees, plus international transportation, living, and 
related expenses. Semester programs are available. Detailed in- 
formation may be found in the “International Programs” section 
of this catalog. 

Information on the International Programs as well as a general 
library on study, work, and travel abroad are available in the 
International Education Office. 


Student Affairs 49 


Intercultural Development Center 

The Intercultural Development Center, located in the Library, 
Rixjm 4-B, offers educational support programs and services for 
foreign-born students, particularly recent immigrants and refu- 
gees. Students will he offered programs such as employment skills 
workshops, peer support groups, traditional cultural celebrations, 
and English Writing Proficiency Exam preparation sessions. 

The Intercultural Development Center builds cross-cultural 
awareness in the campus community by serving as a resource 
center with published materials and presentations on diverse 
cultures. The Center is well-equipped to assist Vietnamese stu- 
dents with academic and personal problems. 

School Based Student Affairs 

The assistant deans work in collaboration with the Vice President 
for Student Affairs and the deans in each school and the director 
of the Mission Viejo Campus, to deliver services which support 
student progress toward degree and professional objectives. In 
addition, the assistant deans design and coordinate programs 
with faculty, students and administration which enrich the aca- 
demic environment and enhance student development within 
the schixds. 

Responsibilities of the assistant deans may include counseling 
students with personal and academic questions, axmiinating ori- 
entation and retention programs, advising student groups, ad- 
ministering scholarship programs, and developing alumni and 
community support for the school. 

Testing and Research 

Langsdorf Hall 206 
(714) 773-3838 

The Testing Center provides a variety of testing and research 
services to the university. 

The center supports the counseling services available through 
the Career Development Center and the Student Health and 
Counseling Service by administering a variety of psychological 
tests designed to help students gain a better understanding of 
themselves and of their goals and interests. These tests are ad- 
ministered on an individual basis in response to counselor refer- 
rals. 

The center conducts ongoing research and evaluation of universi- 
ty testing programs and consults with members of the university 
community regarding the design and conduct of testing-related 
studies and survey research. The center also designs and conducts 
surveys of student needs, attitudes, and other characteristics. 


National group testing programs related to undergraduate and 
graduate school admissions and teacher certification are also co- 
ordinated by the center. Information on the following tests is 
available in the center: 

American College Test (ACT) 

Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) 

Graduate Record Examination (GRE) 

Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) 

Law School Admission Test (LSAT) 

Medical College Admission Test (MCAT) 

National Teacher Examination (NTE) 

California Basic Educational Skills Test (CBEST) 

Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) 

The center also administers other group tests related to CSUF 
degree requirements. Information on these tests is available in 
the center: 

English Placement Test (EPT) 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) 

English Equivalency Examination (EEE) 

Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Accounting Qualifying Exam (AQE) 

Mathematics Qualifying Examination (MQE) 

Women’s Center 

McCarthy Hall 33 
(714) 773-3928 

The Women’s Center’s primary focus is to foster a greater aware- 
ness of women’s issues. Its goal is to promote gender equity 
through improved communication between women and men. It 
is open to all interested students. The center’s hours are from 8 
a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday. Evening appointments 
are always available. 

The Women’s Center is a place for all students — women and men 
— a place to get help with any problem you may have — a place 
to study, relax and make new friends. In short, an excellent 
center for students to receive support, information and resources 
to help them explore the many options available to them. 

Programs and services include individual counseling, speakers, 
films, skill-building workshops, developmental groups, resource 
information and referrals. 

The Women’s Center is closely involved with the minor in Wom- 
en’s Studies. The center houses a Women’s Studies Library of over 
800 books and files with excellent research materials. A listing of 
film and tape titles round out the collection. The center also 
gathers and maintains information on local women’s events, 
news and networks. 


50 Student Affairs 


Student Activities 

The division of Student Affairs provides students with opportune 
ties to teach and to learn and are not limited to the classroom at 
California State University, Fullerton. Students taking full ad' 
vantage of the many educational opportunities at the university 
find themselves attending lectures, concerts and seminars offered 
as part of a well-developed co-curriculum on campus. Students 
not only attend events, but they participate in the planning and 
implementation of a full slate of activities held throughout the 
year. Through their participation, students experiment with new 
interests and broaden their experience with existing interests. 
Many clubs and organizations exist in the academic disciplines 
which encourage close contact between students and faculty. 

University Activities Center 

University Center 2-43 
(714) 773-3211 

From New Student Orientation through commencement the 
University Activities serves as a resource for students seeking to 
develop their management, leadership and organizational skills. 
New Student Orientation is coordinated by the center and held 
each semester during the week prior to the beginning of classes. 
Since orientation is staffed by students, this program is an excel- 
lent way for new students to take advantage of training resources 
and become involved with the university. 

Opportunities for involvement in the center’s programs are open 
to all students according to their interests, abilities and time. 
Staff members at the Activities Center advise many student 
organizations and are available as resources in the formation of 
new groups and strengthening existing groups. Workshops on 
team building, organizational behavior, leadership styles, group 
dynamics and event programming are available by contacting the 
office. 

Leadership Opportunities 

Workshops and training programs are available to teach and 
encourage students who may want to learn or refine leadership 
skills. Practical application of these skills is available through the 
approximately 200 campus clubs and organizations. Academic 
and professional organizations are either closely affiliated with 
academic areas at Cal State Fullerton or have national profes- 
sional recognition. These groups offer students a chance to iden- 
tify with faculty and community members who have similar ca- 
reer interests. 

Councils and task forces are formed by representatives of other 
officially recognized organizations. These groups often have a 
specific purpose or are formed to solve a particular problem. 



Student Activities 51 


Cultural organizations seek to present ethnic, minority and cul- 
tural programs for the Cal State Fullerton campus. Many oppor- 
tunities are created for the development of leadership and pro- 
gramming skills in this area because of the diversity of the cul- 
tures represented on campus. 

Greek letter fraternities and sororities with national affiliation 
also exist at Cal Stare Fullerton. With a choice from thirteen 
fraternities and eight sororities, Cal State Fullerton students can 
usually find a group with which they want to affiliate. Rush 
information is available at the University Activities Center. 

Many religious organizations have been formed at Cal State Ful- 
lerton with representation from a wide variety of religious persua- 
sions. Groups which are predominantly political in nature and 
those whose goal is service to others also enjoy student support. 

Club sports, recreation and leisure groups in a variety of recrea- 
tional programs are very active on campus. Some are competitive 
as teams and others offer students a chance to develop individual 
skills which can he used as lifetime leisure activities. 

AS Productions 

University Center M-17 

( 714 ) 773-3501 

Entertainment possibilities are endless with Associated Students 
Productions at CSUF. ASP consists of six committees composed 
of student volunteers whose common interest is to keep the 
campus alive with quality entertainment and educational presen- 
tations. 

Any student can apply to he a program director or assistant 
director. Candidates for these posts are appointed by the AS1 
president and are approved by the board of directors. Their re- 
sponsibilities include planning and implementing programs, 
managing budgets, and training committee members. 

Committee members are student volunteers who attend regular 
meetings, help in program selection and work at the actual 
events. Joining a committee is a great way to have fun while 
learning leadership, communication and organization skills, as 
well as making a lot of new friends. 

Students can join an AS Productions committee anytime during 
the year by contacting the ASP office. 

AS Productions coordinates the film series, lecture series and 
concert series committees. The film series presents a variety of 
contemporary, classic and foreign movies to students at a cost 
lower than that charged by most commercial theaters. The 
speaker series provides the campus with prominent speakers who 
create a forum for issues and topics that are of importance to the 
campus and to the community. Noontime and major concerts 
provide a showcase of original music ranging from classical to 
rock. Major concerts are usually held indoors while all noontime 
concerts are performed at the Becker Amphitheatre. 


Pub entertainment features bands from local nightclubs in the 
afternoon as well as evening concerts in the University Center 
Pub. 

Special Events offers unique and memorable events such as fairs, 
theatre groups and other special entertainment. 

Camp Titan 

Camp Titan is a service opportunity for students who enjoy the 
special feeling that comes from sharing their time with children. 

CSUF students devote one week of their time each June to be 
friends and counselors to over 120 children attending Camp 
Titan, which is accredited by the American Camp Association. 

The children range in age from 5 to 1 3 years and are selected on a 
referral basis from community service agencies. Because all of the 
children are underprivileged, they attend camp at no cost to their 
families. 

Students enjoy a special time of helping these children develop 
positive attitudes about themselves. The week is as much fun for 
the counselors as it is for the children. 

Students who are interested in a week of hiking, crafts, sitting 
around a campfire, swimming and spending time with children, 
can obtain further information about Camp Titan from the Uni- 
versity Activities Center. 

Departmental Association Council 

The Departmental Association Council (DAC) is the organiza- 
tion formed by the Associated Students to represent the academ- 
ic associations at CSUF. DAC is composed of student delegates 
who represent all of the academic student organizations w'ithin 
each department. By being a member of his or her own depart- 
mental student organization the student is a part of the DAC. 

The DAC provides funding for programs originated by member 
organizations. Student departmental organizations can use DAC 
funds to provide speakers, films and presentations that enhance 
the classroom experience. 

Individual students can receive funds for use in conducting re- 
search. All CSUF students are eligible to apply for such funds. 

The DAC provides a forum for discussion of student ideas and 
concerns. All students are welcome to attend council meetings. 

For more information on how to get involved in the DAC, 
contact the University Activities Center. 

Multicultural Council 

The Multicultural Council is composed of the student cultural 
clubs and organizations at CSUF. It provides funds to student 
groups that represent ethnic programs and for educational pro- 
grams that have cultural bases. For more information about the 
Multicultural Council contact the University Activities Center. 


52 Student Activities 


Associated Students 

University Center 2*7 
(714) 773*3295 

The Associated Students, Inc. is a campus involvement connec- 
tion at California State University, Fullerton. ASI offers a variety 
of learning experiences through its government, programs and 
services. Many campus special events are the product of student 
efforts to bring students new educational opportunities, to teach 
them about the campus, and to provide them a friendly, social 
atmosphere at CSUF. 

ASI is a non-profit corporation supported by the activity fee 
students pay through registration each semester. By paying this 
fee, students are automatically a member of the Associated Stu- 
dents, Inc. The purpose of the corporation is to provide academic 
and co-curricular programs and services for students. When stu- 
dents are involved in ASI they are a part of an energetic, produc- 
tive group, learning valuable organization and communication 
skills that can augment their personal and professional growth. 

ASI Government 

The ASI government controls the actions of the corporation; it is 
a powerful, active organization that has use for students’ talents 
and skills. To apply for a position or find out more about student 
government, visit the ASI government office in the University 
Center. 

ASI President and Vice President 

The ASI president and vice president are chosen through student 
elections each spring and manage the corporation and its employ- 
ees and volunteers. These officers represent students’ needs and 
interests to CSUF’s faculty and administration and to the sur- 
rounding community. They also participate in several commit- 
tees. Along with the executive staff, the president and vice 
president submit recommendations to the ASI Board of Directors 
on the corporation’s annual budget of more than $4. 1 million. 

ASI Executive Staff 

The executive staff works with the president and vice president to 
direct the programs and operation of the corporation. All execu- 
tive staff members are appointed by the ASI president. Students 
may apply for these positions in the ASI government office. 

The ASI vice president for finance coordinates the budget pro- 
cess. The vice president for administration recruits students for 
presidential appointments and implements special projects. The 
director of legislative affairs is the CSUF representative to the 
California State Student Association. This statewide organiza- 
tion influences decisions about education, fee schedules and re- 
lated topics. The public relations director is responsible for mar- 
keting the corporation and communicating with the campus 
community. Student volunteers are assigned specific duties ac- 
cording to the needs of the corporation. 


ASI Board of Directors 

The ASI Board of Directors is composed of three directors from 
each school who are elected to serve one-year terms. The ASI 
president, vice president, vice president for finance and adminis- 
trator, one faculty council representative and one appointee of 
the university president also sit on the board. Directors also sit on 
various board subcommittees and other university committees. 

These directors represent the student body and work with the 
executive staff to implement programs that fulfill students’ aca- 
demic and co-curricular needs. They deal with issues regarding 
the business and affairs of the corporation, including approving 
budgets and appointments, authorizing business contracts, and 
issuing policy statements for administrative purposes. 

The weekly meetings of the ASI board are held in the Legislative 
Chambers in the University Center. All students are welcome to 
attend. Board seats are open to all students. Election applications 
are available at the midpoint of each semester in the ASI govern- 
ment office in University Center. 

ASI Judicial Commission 

The ASI judicial commission decides cases for the Associated 
Students, Inc. The five justices, who serve staggered two-year 
terms, make decisions according to the ASI bylaws. Any student 
can bring a case to the ASI judicial commission. 

Child Care Center 

Buildings 200 and 400 
(714) 773-2961 

The Child Care Center is sponsored and funded by Associated 
Students, Inc. For a nominal fee, children aged 3 months 
through 5 years whose parents are CSUF students, staff or faculty 
can benefit from the services of the center. Trained preschool 
teachers offer a comprehensive curriculum which covers learning 
skills in several areas of education. 

Legal Information and Referral 
(714) 870-5757 

The Associated Students contracts with the College Legal Clin- 
ic, a Fullerton -based corporation, to provide information on legal 
procedures and initial consultation on all types of legal matters. If 
desired, students are referred to Orange County attorneys for 
reduced fee services. A 24-hour hot line is maintained by the 
College Legal Clinic. 

University Center 

The University Center is located on the northwest corner of 
campus and provides areas for recreation, relaxation and study. 
Each semester a portion of student fees helps support the services 
available there. 


Student Activities 53 


Expansion will increase the existing facility by almost two-thirds 
and will provide additional dining, recreation and programming 
areas. A club and organizational wing will also be included. The 
estimated cost of this student-funded project will be approxi- 
mately $10,000,000 and will be completed in the spring of 1992. 

University Center Governing Board 

The University Center Governing Board establishes operating 
policies for the University Center. Board members include stu- 
dents, faculty, an alumni representative, administrative represen- 
tatives and an appointee of the university president. Additional- 
ly, the board also evaluates the programs and services of the 
University Center as well as space allocation and budgetary 
matters. 

Board members are involved in several committees. Among them 
are the Food Services Committee, Policy Committee, Interior 
Design Committee and the Future Directions Committee. Any 
student may apply for a board position. 

Main Information Desk 

The main information counter of the University Center has the 
answer to most questions. It’s the place to purchase OCTD bus 
passes and ticket books; tickets for some campus events; receive 
vending machine refunds; retrieve lost belongings from “lost and 
found”; and obtain general campus information. In addition, 
student clubs or organizations can place announcements of com- 
ing events on the building’s three video screens by filling out the 
appropriate request form. The nearby rideshare board contains 
the names and phone numbers of people seeking carpool com- 
panions for long-distance trips. 

The reservation office located behind the information desk pro- 
vides meeting/event facilities and related services in the UC for 
student groups, faculty/staff groups, and for the surrounding com- 
munity. While specific room rental rates vary, some facilities are 
frequently available at no charge to CSUF chartered student 
organizations. 

Amphitheatre 

The Becker Amphitheatre was built by the Associated Students, 
Inc. in conjunction with the University Center. The amphith- 
eatre, located at the south end of the University Center, is used 
for noontime concerts, theatre productions and other live enter- 
tainment. 

Center Gallery 

The Center Gallery offers displays of student, graduate and facul- 
ty artwork. Exhibits usually feature the work of a single artist and 
are shown for three weeks. All exhibits are chosen by a student 
art gallery coordinator. 


Graphic Services and Photo Lab 

University Center Graphic Services develops quality flyers, bro- 
chures, logos, letterheads and posters. Services include illustra- 
tion, layout design, paste up, and desk top publishing. This area 
also offers a complete black and white photo lab. All services are 
provided at very reasonable prices. 

Music Listening Room 

The Music Listening Room has a living room atmosphere, with 
soft chairs, bean bag chairs, bright lights for reading, and a 
counter full of magazines. The Music Listening Room has a wide 
selection of the latest releases of rock, jazz, classical and country- 
western music. There also are headsets to listen to one of the 
many albums that are on cassette tapes. 

Pub, Snack Bar, Garden Cafe 

The Pub’s congenial atmosphere offers a place to relax selling soft 
drinks, beer and wine, sandwiches, pizza, baked potatoes and 
other foods. Major sporting events are shown on the Pub’s big- 
screen television, and music is played continuously. The Pub is 
located on the University Center’s lower level. 

The Snack Bar is located on the main level of the University 
Center and specializes in a variety of fast foods. 

The Garden Cafe is located on the lower plaza of the University 
Center and offers a unique cafe menu in a pleasant outdoor 
garden setting. 

Student Typing and Word Processing Center 

Aside from the study lounges, this is one of the most popular 
services offered by the University Center. Here, students can rent 
typewriters and personal computers to give their assignments that 
professional look. 

UC Programming 

UC Programming is a committee of the University Center Board, 
the governing body of the University Center. The committee’s 
purpose is to develop and present social, cultural and educational 
programs of interest to the University community. 

UC Recreation Area 

It’s mostly fun n’ games on the lower level of the UC. The 
recreation area offers a place for diversions that include a lounge 
with a large screen television, a billiard room, table tennis, video 
and pinball games, a counter for renting lockers, small table 
games and the Titan Bowl. The CSUF community is invited to 
participate in the various bowling leagues and tournaments spon- 
sored each semester. 


54 Student Activities 


UC Theatre 

The University Center Theatre is available to clubs and organiza- 
tions for meetings, conference lectures and other presentations. 
It can be reserved through the reservation office at the informa- 
tion counter. 

Human Corps Community Service 
Program 

Historically, the mission of American colleges and universities 
has included a strong commitment to community service. Cali- 
fornia State University, Fullerton, as a publicly-supported uni- 
versity, places a high priority on service to the community. A 
primary goal of the total educational process is to prepare stu- 
dents for responsible citizenship. The University has encouraged, 
since its founding, an ethic of community involvement and par- 
ticipation on the part of its faculty, staff, and student body. 
Student clubs and organizations have carried out many social 
service projects, faculty have contributed their expertise to the 
solution of various civic problems, and individual students, staff, 
and faculty have all volunteered their time, effort, and abilities to 
fraternal, civic, and religious organizations and activities. 

Therefore, the university welcomes the establishment of the Hu- 
man Corps and the focus it places on service to the community. 
Under the Human Corps legislation, all students in publicly 
supported colleges and universities in California are strongly en- 
couraged to provide an average of 30 hours of community service 
activity each year. Community service includes, but is not limit- 
ed to: tutoring, literacy training, neighborhood improvement, 
job training, youth work, health-support services, mental health 
care, and assistance to the elderly, disabled, disadvantaged, and 
homeless. To support students in achieving this goal, Cal State 
Fullerton: 

1 . established a volunteer bureau and other systems of referral 

2. provides support to student organizations seeking service pro- 
jects, and 

3. rewards and recognizes service contributions by individual 
students and student organizations. 

Academic credit for certain class-related service activities is al- 
ready provided in some cases and departments are encouraged to 
expand such opportunities where academically appropriate. Pay 
may also be accepted for certain service activities, such as paid 
internships or stipends and work-study employment. 

Further information can be obtained from the University Activi- 
ties Center, Room 2-43, University Center. 


University Recreation Program 

Believing that recreation and leisure pursuits are an integral part 
of one’s total educational experience and achievement, the Of- 
fice of University Recreation strives to provide all students an 
opportunity to use their leisure time wisely in order to attain the 
highest degree of physical reward and mental relaxation. 

The benefits of the recreation program are numerous, and it has 
been proven time and again, that those who maintain good 
health and physical fitness, perform better in all aspects of life. 
These programs are free to all students. 

Informal Leisure Recreation 

An intensive program of unstructured recreational activities are 
available to all CSUF students. By presenting a validated, photo 
ID card, students can participate in the supervised use of numer- 
ous facilities including the racquetball and tennis courts, swim- 
ming complex, gymnasium and weightroom. These facilities are 
open seven days a week. 

Intramural Sports 

The Intramural Sports Program is a student funded recreational 
based program of competitive leagues and tournaments. The 
program is accessible to all CSUF students, faculty and staff. 
Students have an active participative voice in all operations of 
the program through student assistants as well as the Intramural 
Representatives who sit on the Intramural Sports Council. Ac- 
tivities such as flag football, ultimate frisbee, bowling, ping pong, 
basketball, softball and volleyball are scheduled at various times 
and days to accommodate individual schedules. 

Sports Club 

The Sports Club program at California State Fullerton is de- 
signed for individuals and organizations with similar athletic and/ 
or recreational interests who wish to compete against other teams 
outside the University. They meet on a regular basis to teach and 
develop skill, and to promote the sport or activity. While com- 
peting in leagues and tournaments with other colleges, universi- 
ties, and local clubs they are representatives of California State 
University, Fullerton. All competitions are on a non-varsity 
(Non-NCAA) level. Typical clubs include rugby, archery, cy- 
cling, bowling, skiing and badminton. 

Student Family Memberships 

Current CSUF students who are married may purchase a recrea- 
tion membership for their spouse and children (21 years and 
younger, living at home). Unmarried students living at home 
may purchase a recreation membership for their parents and 
siblings (21 years and younger, living at home). 


Student Activities 55 


Intercollegiate Athletics 


Physical Education 1 58 

( 714 ) 773-2677 

Director of Athletics: Vacant 
Associate Directors: Steve Dilolla, Leanne Grotke, 
Walt Bowman 

Academic Coordinator: Alison Cone 
Tickets/ Event Manager: Mary Ann Tripodi 
Sports Information Director: Mel Franks 

Coaches 

Baseball 
Augie Garrido 

Basketball 

John Sneed (Men) 

Maryalyce Jeremiah (Women) 

Cross Country/Track (M enJWomen) 

John Elders 

Fencing (hien/Wumen) 

Heizaburo Okawa 

Football 
Gene Murphy 

Gymnastics 
Dick Wolfe (Men) 

Lynn Rogers (Women) 

Soccer 

A1 Mistri 

Softball 
Judi Garman 



Tennis (Women) 

Bill Reynolds 

Volleyball 
Jim Huffman 

Wres tling 
Dan Lewis 

Conference Memberships 

National Collegiate Athletic Association 
(NCAA) Division I 
Big West Conference 


56 Intercollegiate Athletics 


The rise of academic prestige at California State University, 
Fullerton has grown alongside the development^ one of the 
nation’s premier athletics departments. The intercollegiate ath- 
letics department provides student-athletes the opportunity to 
compete against the country’s finest competition as well as pro- 
viding a top-notch education. In an effort to ensure academic 
development, the university provides counseling systems de- 
signed specifically for student-athletes. Those services include 
academic advisement, guidance counseling and daily study halls. 

CSUF has also made a commitment to provide facilities that 
enable fans and athletes alike to enjoy first-rate competition. The 
long-awaited Sports Complex will give Fullerton fans a much- 
needed home football and soccer stadium. The complex will 
provide a 10,000-seat stadium plus upgraded baseball facilities 
that will seat over 2,000. Already completed are two lit softball 
diamonds and a lighted soccer field that enable fans to enjoy the 
university’s many night events. Titan Gymnasium already enjoys 
tremendous popularity among the local community with over 
4,000 fans attending home basketball (men and women’s), gym- 
nastics (men and women’s) and women’s volleyball events. An 
outdoor swimming complex, racquetball courts, weighttraining 
facilities, a high-level gymnastics practice facility plus facilities 
for wrestling and fencing make the Fullerton athletic complex a 
step above. 

Men’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Baseball 

Few NCAA Division I baseball programs have enjoyed the de- 
gree of success that the Titans have had over the past decade and 
a half. During that time, the Titans won 13 conference cham- 
pionships, six regional championships and two national cham- 
pionships. Major League stars Tim Wallach (Montreal Expos), 
Jeff Robinson (New York Yankees) and Mike Harkey (Chicago 
Cubs) have developed at Fullerton. Year in and year out the 
Titans compete against the nation’s finest programs and always 
come out winners. 

Basketball 

The development of Fullerton basketball has been one of college 
sports’ finest Cinderella stories. Always in contention for the Big 
West Championship, the program has produced half a dozen 
professional prospects and made a pair of N ITappearances. 1984 
Olympic Team point guard Leon Wood is one of many fine ath- 
letes who has helped develop the Titans into a team that will 
continue to grow. The university’s commitment to basketball 
ensures that success in the years to come. 

Cross Country 

Men’s cross country is making positive strides. The program com- 
petes in the very competitive Big West Conference which is 
perennially in the spotlight for national attention. The campus 


and outlying community offer a beautiful setting which enable 
the sport to set new standards among local and national universi- 
ties. 

Football 

The most visible program in an athletics department is football 
and the growth the Titans displayed on the gridiron during the 
1980s was an inspiring example to all Fullerton teams. A strug- 
gling Division 1-A program became respectable with back-to- 
back conference championships in 1983 and 1984 and now Ful- 
lerton is raising its sights by scheduling such opponents as LSU, 
Florida and West Virginia. The arrival of the on-campus stadium 
is the final link to a consistently competitive major college 
program. 

Soccer 

Soccer is another of Fullerton’s many sports where strong coach- 
ing has turned the program into a West Coast power. A1 Mistri 
developed one of Southern California’s finest soccer programs at 
Damien High School in Claremont before taking over at Fuller- 
ton. Through hard work and support from a summer soccer camp, 
Coach Mistri has turned Titan soccer into one of the NCAA’s 
most competitive squads. Fullerton shared the conference cham- 
pionship in 1986 and, with the help of the new stadium, expects 
to challenge for the crown every season. 

Fencing 

One of the West Coast’s few Division I fencing programs gives 
prospective athletes a chance to train in a traditional, unique 
sport. The team has enjoyed a great deal of success over the past 
few years competing against local universities in sabre, foil and 
epee. 

Gymnastics 

Fullerton gymnastics have always been one of the NCAA’s great 
success stories. Head Coach Dick Wolfe has won three NCAA 
championships and countless conference titles in making the 
Titan team one of the nation’s premier units. Numerous All- 
Americans have competed under Coach Wolfe including Nissen 
Award candidate Ron Howard. Innovative gymnastics have al- 
ways been the course of the program as several internationally 
recognized tricks were devised under Coach Wolfe including the 
now famous Thomas Flair performed by U.S. Olympian Kurt 
Thomas. 

Track 

Reinstated for the 1989 season, a spring track program provides a 
complement to the fall cross country schedule and should attract 
greater numbers of athletes. A new running track is part of the 
Sports Complex project and will certainly accelerate the growth 
of the program that was one of the mainstays of Fullerton’s athlet- 
ics department in the early 1970s. 


Intercollegiate Athletics 57 


Wrestling 

Another sport that few West Coast schools support is prospering 
in Orange County as CSUF proves that hard work and strong 
coaching can bring success. Prospective athletes will find an 
atmosphere that is unparalleled among California universities. 
Top-notch competition and an All-American environment are 
two reasons why Fullerton wrestling is so successful. The Titans 
compete in the rugged Pac-10 conference. 

Women’s Intercollegiate Athletics 

Basketball 

The rise in popularity of women’s basketball has its foundations 
tied to the success of Fullerton women’s basketball teams. Under 
former Coach Billie Moore, the Titans won one of the very first 
national championships given out in the sport and recent teams 
have continued to be competitive on a regional basis. Two of 
women’s basketball’s greatest names have risen from Fullerton 
including 1976 Olympian Nancy Dunkle and All-American 
Robin Holmes. 

Fencing 

One of the West Coast’s few Division I fencing programs gives 
prospective athletes a chance to train in a traditional, unique 
sport. The team has enjoyed a great deal of success over the past 
few years competing against local universities in sabre, foil and 
epee. 

Gymnastics 

The consistent efforts of Lynn Rogers’ women’s gymnastics squad 
have made them a top-five national power for 1 1 of the past 1 5 
years. No other school in the nation has produced more All- 
Americans or finished in the top three for more years than the 
Titans. Potential scholar-athletes receive an opportunity to com- 
pete and win year round. 

Softball 

The sport of softball continues to set new standards of excellence 
on the local and national level. Always a contender for the 
NCAA title, the Titans captured their first championship in 


1986. Coach Judi Garman’s teaching has brought the university 
countless All-Americans including former Broderick Award win- 
ners Kathy Va^Wyk, Susan Lefebvre and Connie Clark. A newly 
finished on-campus facility now enables an even greater audience 
to enjoy one of the nation’s most successful teams face off against 
other national powers. The Titans compete in the Big West with 
such national powers as Fresno State, UOP and Long Beach. 

Cross Country 

The re-birth of a spring track schedule has been a boon to cross 
country as athletes in the distance races can now train on a 
competitive level year-round. An outstanding setting plus the 
addition of some outstanding athletes make success a very strong 
likelihood in the years to come. 

Tennis 

One of the university’s many programs on the rise, Fullerton can 
take advantage of the beautiful climate of Orange County to 
attract the nation’s top athletes to Fullerton. The redevelopment 
of the tennis facilities in the future make Titan tennis a program 
that is bound to remain competitive in the Big West. 

Track 

Fullerton made its strongest showing in more than a decade in the 
1988 conference championship meet and optimism abounds that 
the Titans will become a competitive force in the Big West 
Conference. A new running facility and the advancements made 
in distance running by the cross country team combined with the 
climate in southern California should ensure Fullerton of a solid 
track program. 

Volleyball 

Despite playing in collegiate volleyball’s most competitive con- 
ference, Titan volleyball has proven to be a program on the rise. 
The obvious attraction of playing against NCAA Championship 
contenders in the nation’s strongest conference in the Big West 
have positioned Titan volleyball as a program on the rise. The 
acquisition of future athletes, plus the development of budding 
stars will create an environment that will be hard to beat in the 
upcoming years. 


58 Intercollegiate Athletics 


Resources 

Anthropology Museum 

The Museum of Anthropology is an educational and research 
resource for the University and the community. It houses, spon- 
sors, and conducts a variety of activities as part of the CSUF 
Anthropology program. Exhibits of the Museum of Anthropolo- 
gy have included artifacts from California, the Middle East, Me- 
soamerica, the Southwest and Oceania. The well-equipped ar- 
chaeology laboratory, faunal collection and research library pro- 
vide facilities for research. Internships and classes in museum 
techniques are offered for students interested in museology. The 
museum publishes a series of Occasional Papers, administers an 
annual scholarship for archaeology students, houses the business 
office of the Society for California Archaeology, conducts studies 
on cultural resource management and is the clearing house for 
Orange County archaeology. The extensive collections are curat- 
ed by a certified museologist. 

Art Gallery 

Since 1963 the Art Gallery at California State University, Fuller- 
ton has brought to the campus carefully developed art exhibitions 
that instruct, inspire and challenge the student to the visual arts. 
Exhibitions of national interest and of museum caliber are pre- 
sented to the entire student body, faculty and to the community. 
These act not only as an educational tool but also create interac- 
tion between various departmental disciplines and between the 
campus and the community. In 1970 the Art Gallery was housed 
in its current permanent location within the Visual Arts Center. 
In the following years, the gallery has earned national visibility 
for its program in Museum Studies and Exhibition Design in 
which museum preprofessionals may obtain both conceptual and 
practical experience. 

Dance Repertory Theatre 

The Dance Repertory Theatre was formed in 1981 as a culminat- 
ing experience for selected students graduating from the Depart- 
ment of Theatre and Dance. It offers recent graduating students 
in dance an opportunity to perform with a professionally oriented 
company, preparing them for their careers in dance. Dance Rep- 
ertory Theatre also permits the university’s distinguished dance 
faculty to continue their professional commitment through pub- 
lic performance. Dance Repertory Theatre members are carefully 
chosen, based upon their training in ballet and modern dance, to 
tour a repertory of established and original choreography. The 
company has toured extensively in southern California, the mid- 
west and Europe. 



Resources 59 


Daily Titan 

Cal State Fullerton’s Daily Titan is one of the largest college 
newspapers in California. In recent years, it has become one of 
the most critically successful, as well. 

The Titan earned first place among all college dailies in the state 
in 1987 and 1988 competitions sponsored by the California In- 
tercollegiate Press Association. In 1990, the TITAN won CIPA’s 
on-the-spot competition for the fourth consecutive year. 

The Titan is published every Tuesday through Friday throughout 
the academic year. It is produced, written and edited entirely by 
Cal State Fullerton students. All its photographic content is the 
work of CSUF students. 

The Daily Titan has a daily readership of more than 19,000. It is 
distributed at more than 40 locations on campus, as well as in 
newsracks near the University. 

Work on the Daily Titan provides intensive experience in news- 
writing, copy editing, page layout and the myriad other functions 
necessary to produce a modern daily newspaper. 

Fullerton Arboretum 

The Fullerton Arboretum is a 26-acre botanical garden — a 
living museum of plants — located at the northeast comer of the 
campus. It contains local historical artifacts in the Heritage 
House museum and horticultural collections that attract visitors 
from the University and the surrounding communities. The Ar- 
boretum is an island of serenity in an increasingly urban/metropo- 
litan environment. 

The Arboretum offers countless opportunities to study local his- 
tory and culture. Heritage House is the restored residence and 
medical office of Dr. George C. Clark, an Orange County pio- 
neer physician. The Clark home was built in 1894 and exempli- 
fies the Eastlake Victorian style of architecture. The house is 
listed in the National Register of Historic Places and the Inven- 
tory of California Historic Sites. It is also an Orange County 
Historic Site. It is open to the public on Sundays from 2 to 4 
p.m., at which time trained docents discuss the period furnish- 
ings and memorabilia. Several student projects and studies have 
used this facility. 

The Arboretum grounds contain a recirculating waterfall, pond and 
stream system that is a focal point for migratory waterfowl and 
human visitors. Many plants are grown in groups according to their 
moisture requirements. Others form special collections such as co- 
nifers, palms and rare fruits. Special plant displays assist visitors in 
their selection of plant materials tor urban landscaping. 


The CSUF Associated Students (AS) helped to initiate the Fuller- 
ton Arboretum by contributing $10,000 in 1971. Since then, the 
AS have contributed support monies each year to hire students to 
help in the maintenance and operation of the Arboretum. 

The Friends of the Fullerton Arboretum, the community support 
group, also supplies operating monies, manages the gift and gar- 
den shop, propagates plants for plant sales and provides countless 
hours of volunteer effort in behalf of the Arboretum. 


The Fullerton Arboretum is open 8 a.m. to 4:45 p.m. , seven days 
a week. The Arboretum is closed on Christmas, Thanksgiving 
and New Year’s Day. 


Herbarium 

The Faye A. MacFadden Herbarium is named after Faye A. 
MacFadden, who sold her extensive collection of plants to the 
university just prior to her death in 1964. The collection now 
includes over 25,000 vascular plants, about 12,000 bryophytes 
and nearly 800 lichen specimens. The plants are used as a re- 
search and teaching tool. 


Oral History Program 

The Oral History Program offers students a source of informa- 
tion, courses and work experience. The program has conducted 
over 2,000 interviews on the history of Orange County, the 
western United States, and other areas of historical study. Either 
transcriptions or tapes are available for any student to use as they 
would use any library materials, at the Oral History Archive. 

Most of these interviews were done by students in the several 
classes offered at the Oral History Program. The program also 
maintains a student staff through internships, work study or 
grant-supported positions. These staff receive experience in 
word-processing, editing, book production and organizational 
administration. They are credited with authorship or assistance 
on publications, and several alumni of the program now hold 
important professional positions. 


Reading Clinic 

Education Classroom 24 
(714) 7730356 

The Reading Clinic serves three major purposes. First, it provides 
a controlled, supervised setting for the training of reading spe- 
cialists and classroom teachers who wish to improve their skills in 
working with learning disabled and reading disabled students. 


60 Resources 


Secondly, the clinic serves as a community service providing very 
low cost, high quality instruction in reading that is not available 
elsewhere in Orange County. The clinic works closely with the 
Southern California College of Optometry in order to provide 
broader services. 

The third purpose of the clinic is to provide parent education to 
community members whose children have reading disabilities. 
The clinic provides parent inservice sessions, a hot line for phone 
information, and a monthly newsletter of information, tips and 
examples of student work. The clinic is proud of its 20-year 
service to the university and community. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic (SHC) is an integral part of the 
curricular programs of the university leading to a B. A. and M. A. 
Degree in Communicative Disorders. Since 1961 the Depart- 
ment of Speech Communication has provided speech, language 
and hearing services to the community in conjunction with its 
training program for professional speech pathologists. The gradu- 
ate program in Communicative Disorders holds the distinction of 
being one of only two academic programs in California to main- 
tain continuous accreditation by the Educational Standards 
Board of the American Speech-Language- Hearing Association 
since September 1969. 

The clinic is composed of a Speech Pathology Unit, an Audi- 
ology Unit and a Communicative Disorders Research Laboratory 
with special emphasis given to voice disorders. The clinic offers 
the services of a resident professional Speech Pathologist who 
holds the Certificate of Clinical Competence (CCC-SP), faculty 
supervisors who are clinically certified and, in addition, hold 
doctoral degrees in the field, and student clinicians who have met 
strictly prescribed standards for admission to clinical practicum. 
Referrals to the clinic come from a variety of sources including: 
physicians, teachers, rehabilitative centers, private speech pa- 
thologists and audiologists, and self-referrals. Services available 
at the clinic include: diagnostic evaluations, therapeutic inter- 
vention, audiometric testing, rehabilitative audiology including 
hearing aid evaluations, screening tests for students seeking state 
credentials, and family counseling relative to problems associated 
with communicative disorders. 

Theatre and Dance Department 
Productions 

CSUF students receive reduced ticket rates to all Theatre and 
Dance Department productions. Each year, six plays and two 
dance concerts are produced on main stage along with theatre for 
young audiences, touring plays, master’s thesis productions, play- 
wright workshops and original one-acts. CSUF plays have been 
selected eight times during the last ten years to be produced at the 


American College Theatre Festivals, selected out of over 50 
production entries. In 1983, its production of The Bulldog and the 
Bear was selected from over 500 production entries to be pro- 
duced at the National American College Theatre Festival at the 
John F. Kennedy Center in Washington, D.C. 

Titan Shops 

Titan Shops is a subsidiary of the California State University, 
Fullerton Foundation and is the organization that is responsible 
for the administration of the Titan Bookstore, Dining Services 
and Vending Services for the university. Titan Shops policy is set 
by the CSUF Foundation Board of Directors. Titan Shops 
is administered by the Foundation’s Director of Commercial 
Operations. 

Titan Shops Bookstore 

The Titan Shops Bookstore is located on the ground floor of the 
Commons Building directly east of the University Center and 
west of the Library. Its primary function is to service the textbook 
and school supply requirements of the students of the university. 
In addition to these items, however, the Titan Shops carries an 
extensive stock of office supplies, greeting cards and clothing 
items, a trade book department which encompasses 1 5,000 refer- 
ence and general interest books, a photocopy center and a gift 
department with an ever changing selection of items. Finally, the 
Titan Shops is engaged in the sale and repair of personal comput- 
ers at significant price reductions to encourage the use of comput- 
ers and development of computer literacy at the university. 

Titan Shops is managed by the California State University Fuller- 
ton Foundation. 

Dining & Vending Services 

Primary Food Service facilities on the campus are on the second 
floor of the Commons (the Tastery), on the University Center 
ground floor (the UC Food Court), and at the southeast corner of 
the campus, the campus Carl’s Jr. In addition to these primary 
facilities, there is a Pub serving food, beer and wine on the 
basement level of the University Center. Catering for the univer- 
sity is the responsibility of Dining Services. 

Over 75 food and beverage vending machines are located at 
several areas on the campus to service the needs of the university. 
Product selection and prices are monitored by the University 
Food Service Committee. In addition, the vending program in- 
cludes payphones across the campus and laundry machines in the 
residence halls. 

Dining and Vending services are managed by the California State 
University Fullerton Foundation. 


Resources 61 


Undergraduate Reading Lab 

Education Classroom 249 and 18 

The Undergraduate Reading Lab/Professional Library is an esse n- 
tial element in the Reading Program for both graduate and under- 
graduate students. It serves as a resource for materials and equip- 
ment by which undergraduate students can improve their reading 
skills and complete additional class assignments. The lab also 
functions as a liaison between faculty and students, as a diagnos- 
tic lab for required or additional assessment of student skills, and 
as a professional resource for graduate students and faculty. 


The lab has also offered services to special students from the 
Handicapped Center, Women’s Center and the Counseling Cen- 
ter. In addition, the development of a professional library and the 


recent donation of material from the Reading Educators Guild 
aids graduate students in their research and course work. Finally, 
a goal of this lab is to develop a base of software materials for both 
classroom and individual student use. 


University Channel 

As part of two local cable television agreements covering the 
cities of Fullerton, Placentia and Anaheim, the university pro- 
vides programming for dedicated channels on those systems. In 
January 1981, regular production of programs about Cal State 
Fullerton and Orange County in general was begun. Students in 
senior level communications and theatre courses participate in a 
variety of programming efforts for the university cable channel. 


62 Resources 


r 



Academic Advisement 


Academic Advisement Policy 

The CSUF Academic Policy (UPS 300.002) states that: 

— the responsibility for ensuring the availability of academ- 
ic advisement rests with each school dean; 

— every student should declare a major or school of interest 
as soon as possible after admission to the university; and 

— all students shall confer with an academic adviser on a 
regular basis. 

Choosing General Education 
Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university requires 
its graduates to have sampled a variety of disciplines as part of 
their general education. The broad categories of general educa- 
tion courses are presented in the catalog section on “Graduation 
Requirements for the Bachelor s Degree." 

All students are strongly encouraged to consult with faculty’ 
members or the Academic Advisement Center about choice of 
general education and elective courses. 

Advisement in the Major 

Students who have declared a major should consult their depart- 
mental adviser on a regular basis for academic advice. 

Advisement for Students Who 
Have Not Selected a Major 

Students who have not declared a major should consult one of 
the schixd advisement offices listed below or the Academic Ad- 
visement Center to discuss their academic goals. 



School Advisement Offices 

Students who have declared a school of interest or who w ish to 
explore the majors offered by a specific school should contact the 
appropriate school advisement office: 

School of the Arts Office of the Dean 

Visual Arts 199 
(714) 773-3256 

School of Business Business Advising Center 

Administration Langsdorf Hall 700 

and Economics (714) 773-2211 


64 Academic Advisement 


School of Communications 


Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Education Classroom 46 
(714) 773-3355 


School of Engineering 
and Computer Science 


School of Human 
Development And 
Community Service 


School of Humanities and 
Social Sciences 


School of Natural 

Science and Mathematics 


Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Engineering 100-D 
(714) 773-3362 

Office of the 
Associate Dean 
Education Classroom 325 
(714) 773-3311 


Office of Student 
Academic Affairs 
McCarthy Hall 103 
(714) 773-2024 


Office of 
Academic Affairs 
McCarthy Hall 166 
(714) 773-2638 


Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities 112 
(714) 773*3606 

The Academic Advisement Center provides guidance in the 
selection of elective and general education courses. It is the 
administrative center for undeclared undergraduate majors. All 
problems encountered by the undeclared major, which normally 
require the assistance of a department chair, are handled by the 
director of the Academic Advisement Center. 


No appointment is necessary to engage the assistance of an advis- 
er about various aspects of academic life at the university. For 
more specific information about the office, the student should 
consult the class schedule. 


Undeclared Majors 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their primary 
educational or vocational goals may enroll as undeclared majors. 
However, they should select the school which most closely re- 
flects their general interests and consult that School’s advisement 
office for academic assistance. During their freshman and sopho- 
more years, such students should explore their interests and po- 
tential by enrolling in a set of courses recommended by the 
School adviser. 


Choosing an Undergraduate Major 

Every student should choose a major by the beginning of the 
junior year so that he or she may complete major requirements in 
an orderly way. Most major requirements allow students the free- 
dom to take a number of courses in fields other than in the major. 

To help students, the University has available a number of useful 
resources: the academic information sessions conducted in May 
and November; summary sheets on majors available from depart- 
ment offices or the Academic Advisement Center; a variety of 
counseling and testing services provided by the Career Develop- 
ment Center; and brochures and manuals from school and de- 
partment offices describing their programs of study and later work 
opportunities. There are student organizations with disciplinary 
and professional interests and a Career Development Center 
which has information on vocations and work opportunities to 
help in the selection of a major. 

The task of selecting a major (and often a minor or other comple- 
mentary specialization) becomes one of crystallizing ideas on the 
basis of experiences in specific courses, discussions with other 
students, faculty, the staff of the Academic Advisement Center, 
etc. The option to take a limited number of courses on a Cre- 
dit/No Credit basis often will help students explore new interests. 

Students must plan freshman or sophomore programs which will 
permit them to enter or take advanced courses in fields they may 
want to pursue. They should be sure to begin or complete require- 
ments such as mathematics, chemistry or a foreign language early 
in their academic careers. Students anticipating graduate or pro- 
fessional study should exercise special care in planning under- 
graduate programs and seek faculty counseling in the field of 
interest. Advance examination of the possibilities of graduate or 
professional study will be helpful to students who have clear 
educational and vocational objectives. 

Those whose goals and objectives have not yet crystallized will 
have opportunities to take courses in various fields and make up 
their minds during their lower division work. They should, how- 
ever, take full advantage of the opportunities that exist on and 
outside the campus to learn more about available fields of study 
and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they should study all 
the requirements which are specified in this catalog under their 
chosen degree program. They should make a tentative semester 
by semester plan for completing the requirements including pre- 
requisites and discuss this plan with an adviser in the major. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related courses in 
other fields and supporting courses in basic skills may also be 
required. These should be included in the tentative semester by 
semester plan. 


Academic Advisement 65 


Some departments require placement tests prior to admission to 
classes. The times and places for such tests are given in the class 
schedule. Students should purchase a copy of the class schedule 
at the Titan Bookstore when registration for classes begins. 

Change of Major, Degree or 
Credential Objective 

To change a major, degree, or credential objective, obtain the 
required form in the Office of Admissions and Records or the 
Academic Advisement Center and take it to the appropriate 
office(s) for signature(s). Such a change is not official until the 
form has been signed and filed in the Registrar’s Office. 

Departmental Academic 
Advisement 

Each department follows the advisement system which it finds 
the most appropriate for its majors. 

It is the responsibility of the student to obtain the assistance of a 
faculty adviser. 

The adviser is a resource person who can provide information and 
suggestions and who can assist the student to find the most 
desirable ways to meet the requirements for graduation and for 
the major or credential. The final choice of courses and the 
responsibility for the program lies with the student. Undergrad- 
uate students who have not yet decided upon a major (undeclared 
majors) or who are not seeking a degree will be advised in the 
Academic Advisement Center. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice if 
students provide lists of courses they have taken and their own 
copies of transcripts from colleges previously attended (if students 
are new to Cal State Fullerton). 

Undergraduate advisement coordinators are appointed by each 
department (for the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics see below) in order to facilitate communication between 
students and faculty. They coordinate advisement in each depart- 
ment and act as resource persons for the students and the faculty 
of the department in all matters of advisement. 

The School of Business Administration and Economics provides 
advisement in the advisement center of the school. 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their fields 
of specialization, except in education where all will have a profes- 
sional adviser from the School of Human Development and 
Community Service. Those students seeking a credential for 
teaching in secondary schools will be assigned both a professional 
and a major adviser. 


Preprofessional Programs 

The academic programs of the university provide appropriate 
preparation for graduate work in a variety of fields. Students who 
have made tentative decisions about institutions at which they 
may wish to pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of 
those graduate schools as they plan their undergraduate pro- 
grams. Students planning to undertake graduate work should 
supplement their undergraduate programs by anticipating re- 
quirements at major graduate schools. 

The university offers a number of professional programs through 
the master’s degree. These include programs in the fine arts, 
business administration, communications, education, engineer- 
ing, health education and physical education and recreation, 
public administration, and speech pathology-audiology. Students 
interested in preparing for professional careers in these areas, 
either here or at other educational institutions, are encouraged to 
seek assistance and guidance from CSUF faculty members in 
these fields. 

Prelegal Preparation 

It is recommended that prospective law students prepare them- 
selves in such fields as English, American history, economics, 
political science (particularly the history and development of 
English and American political institutions) and such undergrad- 
uate courses as judicial process, administrative law, constitutional 
law and international law, philosophy (particularly ethics and 
logic), business administration, anthropology, psychology and 
sociology. 

A distribution of course sequences among the social sciences, the 
natural sciences and the humanities is desirable. Students with 
interest in becoming lawyers should contact the Prelaw Society. 
Some faculty members in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics and Departments of American Studies, History 
and Political Science, also can provide advice and assistance. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested in pursuing careers in counsel- 
ing, social work, the teaching of religion, and the ministry and 
associated fields should take some courses in religion, psychology, 
anthropology, sociology, philosophy, education, communica- 
tions, history, English, speech communication and a foreign lan- 
guage. Students desiring assistance and counseling regarding ad- 
vanced work in religious studies or professional careers in the 
ministry or rabbinate may seek help from the faculty in the 
Department of Religious Studies. 

Social Welfare 

Students who plan to seek employment in social work or social 
welfare should prepare themselves in the fields of human services, 
psychology (particularly child and adolescent psychology), soci- 
ology, anthropology, political science, economics and research 
methods in social science. 


66 Academic Advisement 


Students who intend to enter a professional school following 
undergraduate training should learn about the specific prerequi- 
sites for admission to the graduate school of their choice. Ordi- 
narily a major in one of the social sciences, and some additional 
work in at least several other social sciences, are recommended. 
Students with interests in pursuing careers in the fields of social 
welfare should contact the Department of Sociology or the Hu- 
man Services Program for advice and assistance. 

Health Professions 

Langsdorf Hall 203 
(714) 773-3980 

All health professions programs are seeking the best qualified 
applicants with a good command of communication skills, rigor- 
ous basic science preparation and as broad a general education 
base as possible. 

The Health Professions Committee assists students to prepare the 
best academic programs consistent with their former educational 
experience, interests and professional objectives. The Commit- 
tee continues to be concerned about the under-representation of 
minority students entering the health care professions. Thus, 
minority students are actively recruited and every effort is made 
to assist them in achieving their goals. 


Student Responsibility 

All new students, both first-time freshmen and transfer students, 
interested in preparing to enter one of the following health pro- 
fessions, or related health professions, should register with the 
secretary of the committee, in the Health Professions Office. 
These health professions are medicine, osteopathic medicine, 
podiatric medicine, veterinary medicine, chiropractic, clinical 
pharmacy, clinical pharmacology, dentistry, optometry. 

The related health professions include anatomist, dental hygien- 
ist, histologist, medical technologist, nutritionist, occupational 
therapist, orthotist-prosthetist, pharmacologist, physical thera- 
pist, pharmacist, physiologist, public health. 

Health Professions Committee 

The committee assists the student to (a) gain some preceptorship 
experience with a practicing professional in the area appropriate 
to the field of interest; (b) select a list of professional schools to 
which there is a likelihood of admission; (c) prepare professional 
school applications; (d) prepare for an admissions interview. 

Students who receive a favorable Health Professions Committee 
review of their academic records and personal qualifications, 
including commitment and motivation, have a committee letter 
prepared for them in support of their application. 


Academic Advisement 67 


Answers To Your Questions 


TOPIC 

WHERE TO GO 

LOCATION 

TELEPHONE 

Academic Appeals 

Academic Appeals Office 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3221 

Add or Drop a Class 

See Class Schedule 


773-2300 

Address Change 

Admissions &. Records Counter 

Landgsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Admissions/Applications 

Admissions &. Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Advisement: 

Undeclared Major 

Academic Advisement Center 

Humanities- 1 12 

773-3606 

Declared Majors 

Athletics Tickets/Passport 

Major Department 

Athletic Ticket Office 

Physical Education- 122 

773-2783 

Child Care 

Child Care Center 

Temporary-200 

773-2961 

Counseling: 

Personal 

Counseling Service-Health Center 

Health Center 

773-2800 

Vocational 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3121 

Degree Application/Diploma Orders 

Graduation Unit 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10B 

773-2300 

Degree Evaluation, Undergraduate 

Graduation Unit 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10B 

773-2300 

Disabled Student Services 

Office of Disabled Student Services 

Library- 1 13 

773-3117 

Disqualification/Reinstatement 

Admissions Counselor 

Langsdorf Hall- 107 

773-2370 

Emergency Messages 

Vice President for Student Services 

Langsdorf Hall-810 

773-3221 

Employment: 

Business, Industry, 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3063 

Government 

Educational 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-2457 

Minority Relations 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall-208 

773-3063 

Student (Part-Time) 

Career Development Center 

Langsdorf Hall- 208 

773-3063 

Staff 

Personnel Services 

Temporary- 14 

773-2425 

Enrollment Verification: 

Duplicate I.D. Card or Fee Receipt 

Cashier 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Letter Request 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Extension Class Information 

Extended Education Office 

Temporary- 14 

773-2611 

Evaluations/General Education 

Evaluations Unit 

Langsdorf Hall- 1 1 OB 

773-2300 

Financial Aid 

Financial Aid Office 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

Foreign Student: 

Advisement 

Permits to Register 

Major Department 

International Education Office 

McCarthy Hall-79 

773-2787 

Graduate Studies 

Graduate Studies Office 

McCarthy Hall- 129 

773-2618 

Graduation Requirements (undergraduate) 

Graduation Unit 

Langsdorf Hall- 1 1 OB 

773-2300 

Health Insurance 

University Center 

U.C. Lobby 

773-2468 

Housing and Transportation 

Housing Office 

Cypress- 101 

773-2168 

Internships and Cooperative Ed. 

Internship Office 

Langsdorf Hall-210 

773-2171 

Library Information 

Library Building 

Library Lobby 

773-2724 

Mentor Program 

Engineering Building 

Engineering- 100 

773-3709 

Name Change 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Organizations & Clubs 

University Activities Center 

U.C 2-43 

773-3211 

Outreach Services 

University Center 

University Outreach Office 

Library-22 

773-2086 

Parking: 

Fees 

Cashier 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Information 

Department of Public Safety 

Temporary- 1200 

773-2515 

Handicapped 

Disabled Student Services 

Library- 1 13 

773-3117 

Readmission 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Records (Student) 

Records Office 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Registration Fees 

Cashier 

Langsdorf Hall- 108 

773-3918 

Residency 

Evaluations Unit 

Langsdorf Hall- 105 

773-2300 

Scholarships 

Financial Aid Office 

McCarthy Hall-63 

773-3125 

Student Academic Services 

Student Academic Services Office 

Humanities- 1 13 

773-2288 

(EOP/S A A/Retention) 

Summer Sessions, Information 

Extended Education Office 

Temporary- 14 

773-2611 

Test Information 

Testing Center 

Langsdorf Hall-206 

773-3838 

Transcripts 

Admissions & Records Counter 

Langsdorf Hall-Lobby 

773-2300 

Tutoring 

Learning Assistance Resource Center 

Library-38 

773-3488 

Veterans Certification 

Veterans Affairs Office 

Langsdorf Hall-1 10A 

773-2300 

Women’s Center 

Women’s Center 

McCarthy Hall-33 

773-3928 


68 Academic Advisement 



Undergraduate Students 


Freshmen Requirements 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time freshman if 
you 

1. are a high school graduate, 

2. have a qualifiable eligibility index (see Eligibility Index Table 
next page) and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better the courses in the 
comprehensive pattern of college preparatory subject require- 
ments: 

English: 4 years 

Mathematics, 3 years: algebra, geometry, and intermediate 
algebra 

U.S. Hisuny or U.S. history and government: 1 year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chemistry, physics, or 
other acceptable laboratory science 

Foreign Language: 2 years in the same language (may be waived 
for applicants who demonstrate competence in a language 
other than English equivalent to or higher than expected of 
students who complete two years of foreign language study) 

Visual arul Performing Arts, 1 year: art, dance, drama/theater, 
or music 

Electives, 3 years: selected from English, advanced mathemat- 
ics, social science, history, laboratory science, foreign lan- 
guage, visual and performing arts, and agriculture 



Eligibility Index 

The eligibility index is the combination of your high school grade 
point average and your test score on either the American College 
Test (ACT) or the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). For this 
purpose we compute your grade point average on your final three 
years of high school studies, excluding physical education and 
military science, and use bonus points for certain honors courses, 
(see “High School Honors Courses” in this section of the cata- 
log. ) CSUF may offer you early, provisional admission based on 
your work completed through the junior year of high school and 
planned for your senior year. 


70 Admissions 


Eligibility Index Table for California High School Graduates or Residents of California 



A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 


A.C.T. 

S.A.T. 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

G.P.A. 

Score 

Score 

3.00 and above 













qualifies with any score 

2.79 

14 

570 

2.58 

18 

740 

2.37 

22 

910 

2.16 

27 

1080 

2.99 

10 

410 

2.78 

14 

580 

2.57 

18 

750 

2.36 

23 

920 

2.15 

27 

1080 

2.98 

10 

420 

2.77 

14 

590 

2.56 

19 

760 

2.35 

23 

920 

2.14 

27 


2.97 

10 

430 

2.76 

15 

600 

2.55 

19 

760 

2.34 

23 

930 

2.13 

27 

1100 

2.96 

11 

440 

2.75 

15 

600 

2.54 

19 

770 

2.33 

23 

940 

2.12 

27 

1110 

2.95 

11 

440 

2.74 

15 

610 

2.53 

19 

780 

2.32 

23 

950 

2.11 

28 

1120 

2.94 

11 

450 

2.73 

15 

620 

2.52 

19 

790 

2.31 

24 

960 

2.10 

28 

1120 

2.93 

11 

460 

2.72 

15 

630 

2.51 

20 

800 

2.30 

24 

960 

2.09 

28 

1130 

2.92 

11 

470 

2.71 

16 

640 

2.50 

20 

800 

2.29 

24 

970 

2.08 

28 

1140 

2.91 

12 

480 

2.70 

16 

640 

2.49 

20 

810 

2.28 

24 

980 

2.07 

28 

1150 

2.90 

12 

480 

2.69 

16 

650 

2.48 

20 

820 

2.27 

24 

990 

2.06 

29 

1160 

2.89 

12 

490 

2.68 

16 

660 

2.47 

20 

830 

2.26 

25 

1000 

2.05 

29 

1160 

2.88 

12 

500 

2.67 

16 

670 

2.46 

21 

840 

2.25 

25 

1000 

2.04 

29 

1170 

2.87 

12 

510 

2.66 

17 

680 

2.45 

21 

840 

2.24 

25 

1010 

2.03 

29 

1180 

2.86 

13 

520 

2.65 

17 

680 

2.44 

21 

850 

2.23 

25 

1020 

2.02 

29 

1190 

2.85 

13 

520 

2.64 

17 

690 

2.43 

21 

860 

2.22 

25 

1030 

2.01 

30 

1200 

2.84 

13 

530 

2.63 

17 

700 

2.42 

21 

870 

2.21 

26 

1040 

2.00 

30 

1200 

2.83 

13 

540 

2.62 

17 

710 

2.41 

21 

880 

2.20 

26 

1040 




2.82 

13 

550 

2.61 

18 

720 

2.40 

22 

880 

2.19 

26 

1050 

Below Z.UU does not 

2.81 

14 

560 

2.60 

18 

720 

2.39 

22 

890 

2.18 

26 

1060 

qualify for regular 

2.80 

14 

560 

2.59 

18 

730 

2.38 

22 

900 

2.17 

26 

1070 


admission 



You can calculate the index by multiplying your grade point 
average by 800 and adding your total score on the SAT. Or, if you 
took the ACT, multiply your grade point average by 200 and add 
ten times the composite score from the ACT. If you are a Califor- 
nia high school graduate (or a legal resident of California for 
tuition purposes), you need a minimum index of 2800 using the 
SATor 694 using the ACT; the table on the next page shows the 
combinations of test scores and averages required. 

If you neither graduated from a California high school nor are a 
legal resident of California for tuition purposes, you need a mini- 
mum index of 3402 (SAT) or 842 (ACT). 

Applicants with grade-point averages above 3.00 (3.60 for non- 
residents) are exempt from the test requirement. However, stu- 
dents are urged to take the SAT or ACT since campuses use test 
results for advisement and placement purposes. 

Eligibility Index A Iternative — As an alternative to calculating 
an eligibility index, California residents (or graduates of Cali- 
fornia high schools) may use the table on the next page to 
determine their eligibility. 

You will qualify for regular admission to programs not impacted 
(See “Impacted Programs" in the Application Procedure section 
of this catalog) when the university verifies that you have a 
qualifiable eligibility index and that you will have completed the 
comprehensive pattern of college preparatory subjects. You may 
still qualify for regular admission on condition , if you are otherwise 
eligible but are missing a limited number of the required subjects 
(see “phase-in” section). Please consult a counselor if you have 
any questions. 


“Conditional admission” is an alternative means to establish eli- 
gibility for admission. Applicants otherwise eligible for regular 
admission, but missing a limited number of the preparatory sub- 
jects, will be regularly admitted on condition that they make up 
the missing subjects early in their baccalaureate studies. Students 
will not be denied admission during the phase-in period simply 
because they lack a limited part of the required pattern. 

The phase-in schedule is: 

Fall 1991 — Summer 1992: at least 13 of the required 15 units, 
including at least 3 of the units required in English and 2 of the 
units required in mathematics. 

Fall 1992 and later: full implementation of the 15-unit require- 
ment expected. 

Transfer Requirements 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student if you have a 
grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better in all transferable units 
attempted, are in good standing at the last college or university 
attended, and meet the following standard: 

(a) were eligible as a freshman, or 

(b) were eligible as a freshman except for the college preparato- 
ry subjects and have completed appropriate college courses 
in the missing subjects, or 

(c) have completed at least 56 transferable semester (84 quar- 
ter) units and have completed appropriate college courses 
to make up any missing subjects in college preparatory 
courses. (Nonresidents must have a 2.4 grade point average 
or better. ) 


Admissions 71 


High School Honors Courses 

Grades in up to eight semester courses, taken in the last two years 
of high school, that are designated honors in approved subjects 
receive additional points in grade point average calculations. 
Each unit of A in approved courses will receive a total of 5 points; 
B, 4 points; C, 3 points; D 1 point; and none for F grades. 

International Baccalaureate Program 

California State University, Fullerton recognizes the high scho- 
lastic quality of the International Baccalaureate Diploma Pro- 
gram. High school graduates who have participated in the pro- 
gram are encouraged to apply for admission, and those who have 
received the International Baccalaureate Diploma will he given 
special consideration for admission. Advanced placement and/or 
university credit for International Baccalaureate subject exami- 
nations may be awarded at the discretion of individual depart- 
ments. 

For example for a grade of 4 or better, the Departments of Foreign 
Language and Mathematics award credit in the following man- 
ner: 

Foreign Languages. Subject to a successful oral interview with two 
CSUF instructors of the target languages, and upon their recom- 
mendation: 

Higher Level Language B: 

— Waiver of appropriate lower division requirements 

— 3 to 12 units of upper division language credit 

Subsidiary Level Language B: 

— waiver of appropriate lower division requirements 

— 0 to 6 upper division language credit (if 0 upper division is 
awarded, a minimum of 6 units of 200 level credit is 
recommended. ) 

Mathematics 

Higher level 

— two semesters of Calculus (Math 150A and Math 150B) 
Subsidiary level 

— one semester of Calculus Math 150A or equivalent 

Health Screening 

All new and readmitted students born after January 1, 1957, will 
be notified of the requirement to present proof of measles and 
mbella immunizations. This is not an admissions requirement, 
but shall be required of students by the beginning of their second 
term of enrollment in CSU. Proof of measles and rubella immu- 
nizations shall also be required for certain groups of enrolled 
students who have increased exposure to these diseases. 


Measles and Rubella Immunizations 

The campus shall notify certain students born after January 1, 
1957, of the CSU requirement to present proof of measles and 
rubella immunizations by the beginning of the next term of 
enrollment. At the beginning of the next term of enrollment, 
those so notified who have not presented acceptable proof of the 
immunizations shall be notified further of the need to comply 
before receiving registration materials to enroll for the succeed- 
ing term. 

Persons subject to these health screening provisions include: 

New students enrolling fall 1986 and later; 

Readmitted students reenrolling fall 1986 and later; 

Students who reside in campus residence halls; 

Students who obtained their primary and secondary school- 
ing outside the United States; 

Students enrolled in dietetics, medical technology, nursing, 
physical therapy, and any practicum, student teaching, or 
field work involving preschool-age children, school-age 
children, or taking place in a hospital or health care setting. 
(Campuses may modify the list of types of study in this 
reference as appropriate to their curricula. ) 

The Student Health Center shall provide immunizations without 
cost to those students unable to obtain acceptable proof of 
immunizations. 

Test Scores 

Freshman and transfer applicants who have fewer than 56 semes- 
ter or 84 quarter units of transferable college work must submit 
scores, unless exempt, from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test of 
the College Board (SAT) or the American College Test Program 
(ACT). You may obtain registration forms and the dates for 
either test from school or college counselors or from a campus 
Testing Office or may write to: 

The College Board (SAT) American College Testing Program (ACT) 
Registration Unit, Box 592 Registration Unit, PO. Box 168 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 

TOEFL Requirement 

All undergraduate applicants regardless of citizenship whose na- 
tive language or whose language of instruction or study is other 
than English are required to present scores for the Test of English 
as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). The TOEFL results submitted 
must not have been earned more than two years prior to the 
desired enrollment date. A minimum score of 500 on the Test of 
English as a Foreign Language is required. Individual campuses 
may require a higher score. 


72 Admissions 


Placement Test Requirements 

English Placement Test (EPT) 

The English Placement Test (EPT) is required of all entering 
California State University undergraduate students who are not 
otherwise exempt. Exemptions are granted only for those stu- 
dents who present proof of having met one of the following 
criteria: 

• a score of 2 5 or above on the ACTE ( Enhanced ) Engl ish Test . 

• a score of 3, 4 or 5 on either the Language and Composition or 
the Composition and Literature examination of the College 
Board Advanced Placement Program 

• a satisfactory score on the CSU English Equivalency Exami- 
nation 

• a score of 470 or above on the Verbal section of the College 
Board Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT- Verbal) 

• a score of 25 or above on the ACT English Usage Test 

• a score of 600 or above on the College Board Achievement 
Test in English Composition with essay 

• completion of an acceptable college course in English compo- 
sition of four quarter or three semester units with a grade of C 
or better 

The EPT is offered only to admitted students and has no effect on 
admission decisions. Effective with the 1986/87 academic year, 
all nonexempt students subject to the 1985/87 or subsequent 
catalogs, including those enrolling with 56 or more transferable 
semester units, are required to take the EPT. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) has established 
the following policy regarding compliance with this regulation: 

Effective fall 1986, all new and continuing undergraduate stu- 
dents who have not taken the EPT and who are not otherwise 
exempt must take the test prior to the beginning of their next 
semester of enrollment at CSUF. Students who fail to comply 
with this policy shall be placed on administrative academic pro- 
bation in their next semester of enrollment at Fullerton. Stu- 
dents on probation for this reason who do not take the EPT prior 
to the beginning of their third semester of enrollment at CSUF 
will be administratively disqualified from enrolling until they 
take the EPT. 

Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) Test 

The Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) test is required of all Cali- 
fornia State University undergraduate students who were admit- 
ted for fall 1983 or after under the 1983/84 or later campus 
catalog and who are not otherwise exempt. Exemptions are 
granted only for those students who present proof of having met 
one of the following criteria: 


• a score of 3 or above on the College Board Advanced Place- 
ment Mathematics examination (AB or BC) 

• a score of 530 or above on the Mathematics section of the 
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT-Math) 

• a score of 23 or above on the ACT Mathematics Test 

• a score of 520 or above on the College Board Math Achieve- 
ment Test, Level 1 

• a score of 540 or above on the College Board Math Achieve- 
ment Test, Level 2 

• completion of a college course that satisfies the General Edu- 
cation-Breadth Requirement in Quantitative Reasoning, pro- 
vided it is above the level of intermediate algebra with a grade 
of C or better. 

The ELM test is offered only to admitted students and has no 
effect on admission decisions, but it must be taken and passed 
before the student can enroll in any course that satisfies the 
Mathematical Concepts and Quantitative Reasoning portion of 
the General Education- Breadth requirements. 

California State University, Fullerton (CSUF) established the 
following policy regarding compliance with this regulation: 

Requirement To Take The ELM Test: 

Effective fall 1986, all new and continuing undergraduate stu- 
dents who have not taken the ELM test and who are not other- 
wise exempt must take the test prior to the beginning of their 
next semester of enrollment at CSUF. Students who fail to com- 
ply shall be placed on administrative academic probation in their 
next semester of enrollment at Fullerton. Students on probation 
for this reason who do not take the test prior to the beginning of 
the third semester of enrollment at CSUF will be administrative- 
ly disqualified from enrolling until such time as they take the 
ELM test. 

Students Who Have Taken Rut Not Passed The ELM 
Test: 

Students who have taken but failed to pass the ELM test must 
participate in a program designed to assist them in learning the 
skills needed to pass the test (such as the Intensive Learning 
Experience). The program may be one offered at CSUF or an 
appropriate program on another campus. For continuing stu- 
dents, participation must begin in the fall 1986 semester. Effec- 
tive fall 1986, new and returning students must participate in an 
approved program in their first semester of enrollment after the 
receipt of the test results. Learning Assistance Resource Center is 
responsible for monitoring compliance with this provision and 
for certifying the appropriateness of the course in which the 
student wishes to participate. 

Participation in a program to prepare for the ELM test must be 
continued until the test is passed. At least one attempt to pass the 
test must be made each semester. Students who fail to comply 


Admissions 7 3 


with this requirement shall be placed on administrative academic 
probation. Students on probation for this reason must pass the 
ELM test before the beginning of the next semester or they will 
be administratively disqualified from enrolling until they obtain a 
passing score. 

ELM And Credit Unit Limitations: 

Students not otherwise exempt and who have not passed the 
ELM test will be placed on administrative academic probation 
the first semester after they complete 61 or more semester units of 
credit. Such students must pass the ELM test before the begin- 
ning of the next semester or they will be administratively dis- 
qualified. 

Residency Requirements 

The campus admissions office determines the residence status of 
all new and returning students for nonresident tuition purposes. 
Responses to the Application for Admission and, if necessary, 
other evidence furnished by the student are used in making this 
determination. A student who fails to submit adequate informa- 
tion to establish a right to classification as a California resident 
will be classified as a nonresident. 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency determi- 
nation for nonresident tuition purposes is not a complete discus- 
sion of the law, but a summary of the principal rules and their 
exceptions. The law governing residence determination for tu- 
ition purposes by The California State University is found in 
Education Code Sections 68000-68090, 68121, 68123, 68124, 
89705-89707. 5, and 90408 and in Title 5 of the California Code of 
Regulations, Sections 41900-41912. A copy of the statutes and 
regulations is available for inspection in the campus admissions 
office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who is physically 
present in the state and who, at the same time, intends to make 
California his or her permanent home. Steps must be taken at 
least one year prior to the residence determination date to show 
an intent to make California the permanent home with concur- 
rent relinquishment of the prior legal residence. The steps neces- 
sary to show California residency intent will vary from case to 
case. Included among the steps may be registering to vote and 
voting in elections in California; filing resident California state 
income tax forms on total income; ownership of residential prop- 
erty or continuous occupancy or renting of an apartment on a 
lease basis where one’s permanent belongings are kept; maintain- 
ing active resident memberships in California professional or 
social organizations; maintaining California vehicle plates and 
operator’s license; maintaining active savings and checking ac- 
counts in California banks; maintaining permanent military ad- 
dress and home of record in California if one is in the military 
service. 


The student who is within the state for educational purposes only 
does not gain the status of resident regardless of the length of the 
student’s stay in California. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 years of age) 
derives legal residence from the parent with whom the minor 
maintains or last maintained his or her place of abode. The 
residence of a minor cannot be changed by the minor or the 
minor’s guardian, so long as the minor’s parents are living. 

A married person may establish his or her residence independent 
of his or her spouse. 

An alien may establish his or her residence, unless precluded by 
the Immigration and Nationality Act from establishing domicile 
in the United States. An unmarried minor alien derives his or her 
residence from the parent with whom the minor maintains or last 
maintained his or her place of abode. 

Nonresident students seeking reclassification are required by law 
to complete a supplemental questionnaire concerning financial 
independence. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a California 
resident for at least one year immediately preceding the residence 
determination date in order to qualify as a “resident student” for 
tuition purposes. A residence determination date is set for each 
academic term. 

At the Fullerton campus, the residence determination date for 
the fall term is September 20, and for the spring term is January 
25. 

Questions regarding residence determination dates should be di- 
rected to the campus admissions office which can give you the 
residence determination date for the term for which you are 
registering. 

There are exceptions from nonresident tuition, including: 

1. Persons below the age of 19 whose parents were residents of 
California but who left the state while the student, who 
remained, was still a minor. When the minor reaches age 18, 
the exception continues for one year to enable the student to 
qualify as a resident student. 

2. Minors who have been present in California with the intent 
of acquiring residence for more than a year before the resi- 
dence determination date, and entirely self-supporting for 
that period of time. 

3. Persons below the age of 19 who have lived with and been 
under the continuous direct care and control of an adult, not a 
parent, for the two years immediately preceding the residence 
determination date. Such adults must have been a California 
resident for the most recent year. 


74 Admissions 


4. Dependent children and spouses of persons in active military 
service stationed in California on the residence determina- 
tion date. This exception applies only for the minimum time 
required for the student to obtain California residence and 
maintain that residence for a year. The exception, once at- 
tained, is not affected by retirement or transfer of the military 
person outside the state. 

5. Military personnel in active service stationed in California 
on the residence determination date for purposes other than 
education at state -supported institutions of higher educa- 
tion. This exception applies only for the minimum time 
required for the student to obtain California residence and 
maintain that residence for a year. 

6. Dependent children of a California resident who has been a 
California resident for the most recent year. This exception 
continues until the student has resided in the state the mini- 
mum time necessary to become a resident, so long as con- 
tinuous attendance is maintained at an institution. 

7. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of California 
school districts. 

8. Full-time State University employees and their children and 
spouses: State employees assigned to work outside the State 
and their children and spouses. This exception applies only 
for the minimum time required for the student to obtain 
California residence and maintain that residence for one 
year. 

9. Certain exchange students. 

10. Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppres- 
sion employees, w'ho were California residents, and who 
were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire suppres- 
sion duties. 


The initial campus determination of residency classification is 
made by the evaluations unit of Admissions and Records. The 
final campus residency decision is made by the Director of Ad- 
missions and Records. Written appeals may be made to the Direc- 
tor in Langsdorf Hall 102. 

Any student, following a final campus decision on his or her 
residence classification, only may make written appeal within 
120 calendar days of notification of the final decision on campus 
of the classification to: 

The California State University 

Office of General Counsel 

400 Golden Shore 

Long Beach, California 90802-4275 

The Office of General Counsel may make a decision on the issue, 
or it may send the matter back to the campus for further review. 
Students classified incorrectly as residents or incorrectly granted 
an exception from nonresident tuition are subject to reclassifica- 
tion as nonresidents and payment of nonresident tuition in ar- 
rears. If incorrect classification results from false or concealed 
facts, the student is subject to discipline pursuant to Section 
41301 of Title 5 of the California Code of Regulations. Resident 
students who become nonresidents, and nonresident students 
qualifying for exceptions whose basis for so qualifying changes, 
must immediately notify the admissions office. Applications for a 
change in classification with respect to a previous term are not 
accepted. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules regarding 
residency determination is by no means a complete explanation 
of their meaning. The student should also note that changes may 
have been made in the rate of nonresident tuition, in the stat- 
utes, and in the regulations between the time this catalog is 
published and the relevant residence determination date. 


Admissions 75 


Application Procedures 


Applications may be obtained from tbe admissions office at any 
of the campuses of The California State University or at any 
California high school or community college. Requirements for 
admission to California State University, Fullerton are in accor- 
dance with Title 5, Chapter 1, Sub-chapter 3, of the California 
Code of Regulations. A student unsure of these requirements 
should consult a high school or community college counselor or 
the admissions office at California State University, Fullerton. 

The CSU advises prospective students that they must supply com- 
plete and accurate information on the application for admission, 
residence questions and financial aid forms. Further, applicants 
must submit authentic and official transcripts of all previous aca- 
demic work attempted. Failure to file complete, accurate and au- 
thentic application documents may result in denial of admission, 
cancellation of academic credit, suspension or expulsion (Section 
41301, Article 1.1, Title 5, California Code of Regulations). 

Prospective students, applying for part-time or full-time programs 
of study, in day or evening classes, must tile a complete applica- 
tion as described in the admissions booklet. The $55 nonrefund- 
able application fee should he in the form of a check or money 
order payable to The California State University. The applica- 
tion fee may not he transferred or used to apply to another term. 
Applicants need file only at their campus of first choice. An 
alternative choice campus and major may he indicated on the 
application. Applicants should list as an alternative campus only 
that campus of The California State University that they would 
he able to attend. Generally, an alternative major will he consid- 
ered at the first choice campus before an application is redirected 
to an alternative choice campus. Applicants will he considered 
automatically at the alternative choice campus only if the first 
choice campus is unable to accommodate them. 

How to Apply for Admission 

1 . Submit a completed application for admission within the an- 
nounced filing period accompanied by the required applica- 
tion fee to: 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. When asked to do so request required transcripts of record of 
all previous scholastic work from each school or college at- 
tended. The transcripts required at CSUF are: 

— for undergraduate applicants with fewer than 56 transferable 
semester units: 



(a) the high school transcript, and 
(h) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 


76 Application Procedures 


— for undergraduates with 56 or more transferable semester 
units : 

(a) a transcript from each college or university 
attended. 

— for graduates: 

(a) applicants for unclassified postbaccalaureate stand- 
ing with no degree or credential objective must sub- 
mit a transcript from the college or university where 
the baccalaureate was earned. Further, one tran- 
script from other institutions attended is required as 
necessary so that the university has a complete re- 
cord of the last 60 semester units attempted prior to 
enrollment at Fullerton. 

(b) applicants for a master’s degree or teaching creden- 
tial, or both, must submit two copies of the tran- 
script from each college or university attended. 

Note: In addition, all students should have a personal set of 
college transcripts for advising purposes. All transcripts must 
be received directly from the issuing institutions and become 
official records of the university; such transcripts therefore 
cannot be returned or reissued. Foreign language transcripts 
must he accompanied by certified English translations. 

3. All undergraduate students who have completed fewer than 
56 semester or 84 quarter units of transferable work are re- 
quired to submit scores from either one of two national testing 
programs before eligibility for admission to the university can 
be determined. This requirement does not affect undergrad- 
uate students who have previously attended CSUF and who 
have submitted ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first 
admission. Registration forms and test dates for either test 
may be obtained from school or college counselors, from the 
address below, or from campus testing offices. For either test, 
submit the registration form and fee at least one month prior 
to the test date. 

ACT Address 

American College Testing Program, Inc. 

Registration Unit, RO. Box 168 
Iowa City, Iowa 52240 

SAT Address 

College Entrance Examination Board 
RO. Box 592 

Princeton, New Jersey 08541 

Applicants to graduate programs must submit the scores of any 
qualifying examinations required in their prospective programs of 
study. 


Impacted Programs 

The CSU designates programs to be impacted when more appli- 
cations are received in the first month of the fall and spring filing 
period than the spaces available. Some programs are impacted at 
every campus where they are offered; others are impacted at some 
campuses but not all. You must meet supplementary admissions 
criteria if applying to an impacted program. 

The CSU will announce before the opening of the fall filing 
period which programs are designated impacted tor the academic 
year. That announcement will be published in the CSU Sch(X)l 
and College Review, distributed to high school and college coun- 
selors. We will also give information about the supplementary 
criteria to program applicants. 

You must file your application for admission to an impacted 
program during the first month of the filing period. Further, if you 
wish to be considered in impacted programs at two or more 
campuses, you must file an application to each. Nonresident 
applicants are rarely admitted to impacted programs. 

Supplementary Admission Criteria: Each campus with impacted 
programs uses supplementary admission criteria in screening ap- 
plicants. Supplementary criteria may include ranking on the 
freshman eligibility index, the overall transfer grade point aver- 
age, and a combination of campus-developed criteria. If you are 
required to submit scores on either the SATor ACT, you should 
take the tests no later than December if applying for fall admis- 
sion. The supplementary admission criteria used by the individ- 
ual campuses to screen applicants appear periodically in the CSU 
SchixA and College Review and are sent by the campuses to all 
applicants seeking admission to an impacted program. 

Unlike unaccommodated applicants to locally impacted pro- 
grams, who may be redirected to another campus in the same 
major, unaccommodated applicants to systemwide impacted pro- 
grams may not be redirected in the same major, but may ch<x>se 
an alternative major either at the first choice campus or another 
campus. 

At the time of the preparation of this catalog, no majors at 
California State University, Fullerton have been declared im- 
pacted. Such circumstances are liable to change so early applica- 
tion is advised. 

Application Filing Periods 

Terms Filing Period Begins Filing Pemxl Duraticm 

Fall Previous November Until application 

Spring Previous August categories are filled 


Application Procedures 77 


Application Acknowledgment 

Applicants who can be accommodated will receive letters ac- 
knowledging their application. The letters are not statements of 
admission but are commitments by Cal State Fullerton to admit 
the applicants who establish their eligibility for admission. The 
acknowledgment letters direct applicants to arrange to have ap- 
propriate records forwarded promptly to the admissions office. 
Applicants will normally receive their acknowledgments within 
two weeks of the receipt of their applications. 

Acknowledgment letters may not be transferred to another term 
or to other campuses. 

Hardship Petitions 

Fullerton has established procedures to consider qualified appli- 
cants who would be faced with an extreme hardship if not admit- 
ted. Prospective hardship petitioners should write to the director 
of admissions and records regarding specific policies governing 
hardship admission. 


Records Retention 

The university retains the admissions materials for those who 
apply, but who for whatever reason do not enroll for two years. 
For those who do enroll the university will retain the materials in 
student folders, including transcripts of the record of work com- 
pleted elsewhere, for five years beyond the date of last atten- 
dance. 

Records of academic performance at California State University, 
Fullerton, including individual student records, faculty grade 
lists, and graduation lists are kept permanently. 


78 Application Procedures 


Admission Requirements 

Admission Requirements for 
First-Time Freshmen 

High School Graduates 

You will qualify for regular admission as a first-time freshman if 
you 

1. are a high school graduate 

2. have a qualifiable eligibility index (see previous chart), and 

3. have completed with grades of C or better the courses in the 
comprehensive pattern of college preparatory subject require- 
ments: 

English: 4 years 

Mathematics, 3 years: algebra, geometry, and intermediate 
algebra 

U S. History or U.S. history and government: 1 year 

Science, 1 year with laboratory: biology, chemistry, physics, or 
other acceptable laboratory science 

Foreign Language: 2 years in the same language (may be waived 
for applicants who demonstrate competence in a language 
other than English equivalent to or higher than expected of 
students who complete two years of foreign language study) 

Visual and Performing Arts, 1 year: art, dance, drama/ theater, 
or music 

Electives, 3 years: selected from English, advanced mathemat- 
ics, social science, history, laboratory science, foreign lan- 
guage, visual and performing arts, and agriculture 

Subject Requirements 

The California State University requires that all undergraduate 
applicants for admission complete with a C or better a compre- 
hensive pattern of college preparatory study totaling 15 units. A 
“unit” is one year of study in high school. California secondary 
school courses that meet the subject requirements are listed in 
“Courses to Meet Requirements for Admission to the University 
of California,” published for, and available at each high school. 



Admissions Requirements 7 9 



Making Up Missing College Preparatory Subject Requirements: Urv 
dergraduate applicants who did not complete the subject require- 
ments while in high school may make up missing subjects in any 
of the following ways: 

1. Complete appropriate courses with a C or better in adult 
school or high school summer sessions. 

2. Complete appropriate college courses with a C or better. 

3. Earn acceptable scores on specified examinations. 

4. Applicants with 56 or more semester (84 quarter) units may 
complete, with a C or better in each course, one of the 
following alternatives: 

a. 1987 or earlier high school graduates: the CSU general edu- 
cation requirements in communication in the English 
language (at least 9 semester units) and mathematics 
(usually 3 semester units); 

b. 1988 and later high school graduates: complete a minimum 
of 30 semester (45 quarter) units to be chosen from 
courses in English, arts and humanities, social science, 
science, and mathematics of at least equivalent level to 
courses that meet general education or transfer curricu- 
lum requirements. Each student must complete all CSU 
general education requirements in communication in the 
English language (at least 9 semester units) and math- 
ematics (usually 3 semester units). 

Please consult with any CSU admissions office for further infor- 
mation about alternative ways to satisfy the subject requirements. 

Substitutions for Disabled Students 

Disabled student applicants are strongly encouraged to complete 
college preparatory course requirements if at all possible. If an 
applicant is judged unable to fulfill a specific course requirement 
because of a disability, alternative college preparatory courses 
may be substituted for specific subject requirements. Students 
who are deaf and hearing impaired, are blind and visually im- 
paired, or have learning disabilities, may in certain circum- 
stances qualify for substitutions for the foreign language, labora- 
tory science, and mathematics subject requirements. Substitu- 
tions may be authorized on an individual basis after review and 
recommendation by the applicant’s academic adviser or guidance 
counselor in consultation with the director of CSUF’s Disabled 
Student Services. 

Although the distribution may be slightly different from the 
course pattern required of other students, students qualifying for 
substitutions will still be held for 15 units of college preparatory 
study. Students should be aware that course substitutions may 
limit later enrollment in certain majors, particularly those in- 
volving mathematics. For further information and substitution 
forms, please contact the director of CSUF’s Disabled Student 
Services. 


Provisional Admission 

The university may provisionally admit first-time freshman appli- 
cants based on their academic performance through the junior 
year of high school. California State University, Fullerton will 
monitor the senior year of study of those provisionally admitted 
to ensure that those so admitted complete their senior year of 
studies satisfactorily, including the required college preparatory 
subjects, and graduate from high school. 

Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants over 18 years of age, but who have not graduated from 
high school, will be considered for admission as first-time fresh- 
men only when preparation in all other ways is such that the 
university believes promise of academic success is equivalent to 
that of eligible California high school graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for en- 
rollment in certain special programs if recommended by the prin- 
cipal and the appropriate campus department chair and if prep- 
aration is equivalent to that required of eligible California high 
school graduates. Such admission is only for a given program and 
does not constitute the right to continued enrollment. 

Adult Students 

As an alternative to regular admission criteria, an applicant who 
is twenty-five years of age or older may be considered for admis- 
sion as an adult student if the following basic conditions are met: 

1. Possesses a high school diploma (or has established equiv- 
alence through either the Tests of General Educational Devel- 
opment (GED) or the California High School Proficiency 
Examination). 

2. Has not been enrolled in college as a full-time student for 
more than one term during the past five years. Part-time 
enrollment is permissible. 

3. If there has been any college attendance in the past five years, 
has earned a C average or better. 

Consideration will be based upon a judgement as to whether the 
applicant is likely to succeed as a regularly admitted freshman or 
transfer and will include an assessment of basic skills in the 
English language and mathematical computation. 

Admission Requirements for 
Undergraduate Transfer Students 

You will qualify for admission as a transfer student if you have a 
grade point average of 2.0 (C) or better in all transferable units 
attempted, are in good standing at the last college or university 
attended, and meet the following standard: 


80 Admission Requirements 


1. were eligible as a freshman, or 

2. were eligible as a freshman except for the college preparatory 
subjects and have completed appropriate college courses in 
the missing subjects or 

3. have completed at least 56 transferable semester (84 quarter) 
units and have completed appropriate courses to make up any 
missing subjects in college preparatory courses (Nonresidents 
must have a 2.4 grade-point average or better.) 

For these requirements, transferable courses are those designated 
for that purpose by the college or university offering the courses. 

Admission Requirements for 
International Students 

The university is pleased to accept applications from internation- 
al students. Freshman applicants applying directly from overseas 
should have outstanding academic qualifications and meet 
TOEFL score requirements. Applicants who are graduates of for- 
eign secondary schools must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The univer- 
sity will carefully review the previous record of all such applicants 
and only those with promise of academic success equivalent to 
that of eligible California high school graduates will be admitted. 
Undergraduate transfers, who have completed a two-year pro- 
gram in an accredited institution of higher education, with a 
good academic record and satisfactory TOEFL scores, shall re- 
ceive priority for admission. 

Postbaccalaureate applicants who have completed a bachelor s 
degree or its equivalent, with a strong academic record, and 
satisfactory TOEFL scores from an accredited institution may be 
considered for admission as graduate students. 

The university has established deadlines to insure the timely 
processing of all applications and to enable admitted applicants 
to make arrangements to reach the U.S. and the campus prior to 
orientation and registration. Early application is strongly advised 
due to strong demand for programs. Newly admitted students are 
required to take an English Placement Examination prior to 
enrollment in classes (mid- August for fall semester and mid- 
January for spring semester). 

Applications may be submitted according to the following schedule: 

For Fall Semester 

Apply beginning November 1 of preceding year. Application 
must be completed with supporting documents by April 15. 


For Spring Semester 

Apply beginning August 1 of preceding year. Application must 
be completed with supporting documents by October 1 . 

All international student applicants must declare a major field of 
study when the application is filed. Campus programs of study 
which receive more applications than spaces are available, have 
been declared impacted, and are not open to nonresidents, for- 
eign or domestic. 

All applicants whose native language is other than English are 
required to present scores for the Test of English as a Foreign Lan- 
guage (TOEFL) before they can be admitted to the university. 
Undergraduate applicants must achieve a score of 500; graduate 
applicants a score of 550 and MBA applicants a score of 570. 
Adequate performance on the TOEFL is mandatory for admission. 

Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin of Information and 
registration forms well in advance. Copies of this bulletin and 
registration forms are often available at American embassies and 
consulates, offices of the United States Information Service, 
United States educational commissions and foundations abroad, 
bi-national centers, and several private organizations. Those who 
cannot obtain locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should 
write to: Test of English as a Foreign Language, Box 899, Prince- 
ton, New Jersey, USA, 08541. 

International student applicants must include a statement of 
financial support accompanied by a bank statement from their 
sponsor. Students sponsored by an international organization or 
home government agency must include a letter of scholarship 
support specifying this university and the students proposed de- 
gree and program of study. For an international student studying 
in 1991-92 the cost for nonresident tuition and fees was $7,102 
based upon 15 units of course work each semester with living 
expenses estimated at $8,360, totalling $17,038 (subject to 
change). Financial support documents must reflect availability of 
this amount. 

Transcripts of all educational documents in languages other than 
English must be accompanied by translation into English certi- 
fied by independent agencies. All academic records must be 
received directly from the issuing institutions and become official 
records of the university. 

International student applicants who are admitted by the univer- 
sity will be issued form 1-20 which is used to obtain an F- 1 student 
visa from a U.S. Embassy or Consulate overseas. Students trans- 
ferring from a U.S. institution will use form 1-20 to apply for 
transfer authorization through the Immigration and Naturaliza- 
tion Service. Arrival, orientation and registration information 
from the Office of International Education and Exchange will 
accompany the admission materials mailed to new students. 


Admission Requirements 81 


Admission Requirements for 
Postbaccalaureate and Graduate 
Students 

See admissions information in the “Graduate Regulations" sec- 
tion of this catalog. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student admitted to the university for a given semester but who 
does not register in the specified semester will have the admission 
canceled. The student must file a new application form when 
again seeking admission and must follow the complete applica- 
tion procedure and meet the current admission requirements. 

Admission Requirements for 
Summer Session Students 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course 
offerings are the same as in the regular session, the university does 
not require an advance application or transcripts from students 
registering for credit courses in the summer session. Students 
normally must be high school graduates, however, and are ex- 
pected to have satisfied the prerequisites for the courses in which 
they register. In addition, students are expected to file a request 
to register in the summer session. Admission to summer session 
does not grant admission to the regular session. 

Readmission of Former Students 

A student previously enrolled in the university, planning to return 
after an absence of more than one semester, must file a new applica- 
tion for admission. A student absent for one semester, and who 
enrolls elsewhere in the interim, must also file an application for 
readmission. Unless a leave of absence was granted, catalog require- 
ments at the time of readmission will apply. Please see the “Stop- 
Out Policy” section in the regulations subchapter of this catalog for 
further information on applications for readmission. 


Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will be read- 
mitted provided any academic work attempted elsewhere since 
the last attendance does not change his or her scholastic status. 
Transcripts of the record of any work attempted in the interim are 
required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of the last enrollment will be 
readmitted on probation provided he or she is otherwise eligible. 
The student must furnish transcripts of any college work taken 
during the absence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special 
action only. Ordinarily the university will consider an applica- 
tion for reinstatement only after the student has remained absent 
for a minimum of one year following disqualification and has 
fulfilled all recommended conditions. In every instance, readmis- 
sion is based on evidence, including transcripts of study complet- 
ed elsewhere after disqualification, that in the judgement of the 
university warrants such action. If readmitted, the student is 
placed on scholastic probation. 


82 Admission Requirements 


Transfer Credits 



Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

When a student is admitted, the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords will evaluate previous college work in relation to the re- 
quirements of Fullerton. All degree candidates will he issued a 
credit summary during the first semester of attendance which 
serves as a basis for determining remaining requirements for the 
students specific objectives. The admissions office will convert 
quarter units of credit transferred to the university to semester 
units by multiplying quarter-unit totals by two-thirds. 

Once issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as 
the student enrolls at the date specified, pursues the objective 
specified, and remains in continuous attendance. The student 
will not be held to additional graduation requirements unless 
such requirements become mandatory as a result of changes in 
the California Administrative Code or the California Education 
Code. If the student does not remain in continuous attendance 
and has not applied for and been granted a formal leave of 
absence, the evaluation issued upon readmission will specify the 
remaining requirements for the students objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the 
Office of Admissions and Records immediately of a change in the 
objective specified in the evaluation. While the evaluation for a 
student remains valid, the student is held responsible for comply- 
ing with all changes in regulations and procedures which may 
appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other than 
course work identified by such institutions as remedial or in other 
ways as being nontransferable, will be accepted toward the satis- 
faction of baccalaureate degree and credential requirements at 
the university within limitations of residence requirements and 
community college transfer maximums. 


Transfer of Credit From a 
Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a com- 
munity college. Credential credit is not allowed for courses in 
professional education taken in a community college. This does 
not invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a com- 
munity college, such as introduction to education, art or design, 
arithmetic, or music for classroom teachers. After a student has 
completed 70 units of college credit at a community college, no 
further community college units may be accepted for unit credit. 


Transfer Credits 83 


Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the ad- 
vanced placement program of the College Entrance Examination 
Board (defined as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted 
credit for each advanced placement course toward graduation, 
advanced placement in the university’s sequence of courses and 
credit for curriculum requirements. 

Cal State Fullerton grants credit toward its undergraduate degrees 
for successful completion of examinations of the Advanced 
Placement Program of the College Board. Students who present 
scores of three or better will he granted semester units of college 
credit as listed below. 


Advanced Placement 

Equivalent 

Semester 

Course 

Course: CSUF 

Units 

American History 

History 180 

3 

Art History 

Art 201A,B 

3-6* * 

Studio Art 

Art 103 or 104 

Art 107A or 107B 


Biology 

Bio Sci 101 

3 

Chemistry 

Chemistry 

120A,B 

6“ 

Computer Science 

Computer Science 121 

3“* 


Computer Science 131 

3“* 

English 

English 101 

3 


English 200 

3 

European History 

History 1 10B 

3 

French 

French 101, 102 

10““ 

German 

German 101, 102 

10“ ** 

Latin 4 

Latin 101 

3 

Latin 5 

Latin 101, 102 

6 

Math A & B 

Math 150A 

4 

Math B & C 

Math 150A.B 

8 

Physics 

Physics 2 1 1 A, B 

6 

Spanish 

Spanish 101, 102 

10““ 


Credit for Extension and 
Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and 
extension courses which may he allowed toward the bachelor’s 
degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable. 


'Consult the Department of Art for applicability of advanced placement exami- 
nation credit. 

* ‘To complete the requirement for Chemistry 120A.B, the student must success- 
fully complete four units of Chemistry 120A and 120B laboratory at Cal State 
Fullerton. 

* * 'Consult the Department of Computer Science for applicability of advanced 
placement examination credit. 

* * * 'No Credit for literature. 

To complete the requirement for Physics 2 1 1 A, B the student must successful- 
ly complete two units of Physics 21 1 A and 21 IB laboratory at CSUF. 


Credit for Noncollegiate 
Instruction 

Cal State Fullerton grants undergraduate degree credit for sue- 
cessful completion of non-collegiate instruction, either military 
or civilian, appropriate to the baccalaureate, that has been rec- 
ommended by the Commission on Educational Credit and Cre- 
dentials of the American Council on Education. The number of 
units allowed are those recommended in the Guide to the Evalua- 
tion of Educational Experience in the Armed Services and the Nation- 
al Guide to Educational Credit for Training Programs. Students who 
have at least one year of active military service may be granted six 
or 12 units of undergraduate credit. 

College Level Examination 
Program 

The university shall accept three semester units of credit for each 
of the following College Level Examination Program (CLEP) 
examinations, subject to achievement of the scores indicated, 
provided the examination was not taken previously within one 
calendar year and that degree credit has not been granted for 
previous course work at the equivalent or at a more advanced 
level than for the examination in question. 


Examination Passing score 

Mathematics General Exam 50* 

College Algebra-Trigonometry 49 

Introductory Calculus and Analytic Geometry 48 

Statistics 49 

General Chemistry 48 


Fullerton may grant additional credit and advanced standing based 

upon CLEP examination results using as minimum standards: 

General Examinations 

1 . That the student achieve a score at or above the 50th percen- 
tile, college sophomore norms. 

2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the general 
examinations, but that up to six units of general education 
requirements be waived for each test completed with the 
appropriate score. 

Subject Examinations 

1 . That the student submit a score at or above the 50th percen- 
tile of those in the norm group who earned a mark of C or 
better. 

2. That equivalency to Fullerton courses be determined by the 
appropriate academic department in conjunction with the 
Office of Admissions and Records. 


'On both parts of examination. 


84 Transfer Credits 


3. That university credit shall have not been previously earned 
in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count toward residence credit. 

English Equivalency Examination 

Students passing the California State University English Equiva- 
lency Examination shall be awarded six semester units of credit 
(English 101 and 200 — GE categories A. 1. & C.4) provided 
credit has not been granted previously at the equivalent or at 
more advanced levels. Further, those who pass this optional ex- 
amination are exempt from the requirement to take the English 
Placement Test. 

Following are the categories of performance and scores which 
qualify for credit and/or exemption of the English Placement 
Test: 


1 . Pass for credit and exemption from the English Placement Test 
(EPT). 

A student receiving a minimum score of 14 on the EEE essay 
and a minimum multiple choice converted score of 51 shall 
receive credit and exemption. A student earning a minimum 
score of 15 on the EEE essay and a minimum multiple choice 
converted score of 43 shall also receive credit and exemption. 

2. Exemption from the English Placement Test (EPT) only. 

Students scoring at least 12 on the essay with a minimum 
converted multiple choice score of 36 or more shall receive 
exemption from the EPT, but no credit. Also, students with 
an essay score of at least 15 shall be awarded exemption, 
regardless of the converted multiple choice score. 


Transfer Credits 85 




































Registration Information 

Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain 
information relating to academic programs, student services and 
activities, and other aspects of university life. Information about 
specific programs is published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule 

A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the class 
schedule published prior to the start of each semester. This publi- 
cation, which may he purchased in the Titan Bookstore, also 
includes detailed information pertaining to the semester includ- 
ing class enrollment and fee payment procedures. 

It is important that students familiarize themselves not only with 
the academic policies stated in this catalog hut also with the 
requirements and procedures in the class schedule as both are 
used in the selection of classes for the semester. 


Registration 

Registration involves two steps — class enrollment and fee pay- 
ment, and may he accomplished through early registration by 
mail, walk-through registration during the month preceding the 
first day of instruction, or through late registration during the 
first three weeks of instruction. Most students should find early 
registration by mail advantageous. 

At registration, every student is required to file a study program 
with the Office of Admissions and Records. The filing of a pro- 
gram by the student and its acceptance by the university obligates 
the student to perform the designated work to the best of his or 
her ability. It is emphasized that registration does not become 
official until all fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student records system, including the registration process, is 
computerized. It is a fact of life in a large institution such as Cal 
State Fullerton that computerization is essential. Thus, there are 
requirements for data cards, code numbers, student file numbers 
and for meeting precise criteria for recording data, w'hich intro- 
duce impersonal elements in the student records system. Despite 
these conditions, every effort is made to provide courteous, effi- 
cient and personalized service to students and the entire universi- 
ty community. To assist in providing this service, students are 
urged to he careful and accurate in preparing forms, especially the 
course request registration forms and change of program forms. 
Accurate preparation of information will assure each student of 
error-free records. 



88 Registration Information 


Controlled Entry Classes 

In general, all courses listed in the semester class schedule shall 
be available to all matriculated students except for appropriate 
academic restrictions as stated in the schedule and the catalog. 
These restrictions, including special qualifications and other aca- 
demic limitations, on class entry shall be published in the class 
schedule as appropriate footnotes to the designated class or class 
section and shall be consistent with the catalog. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in 
the class schedule. Late registrants will find themselves handi- 
capped in arranging their programs and must pay a $25 late 
registration fee in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program After 
Registration 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses listed at 
registration. Changes may be made thereafter only by filing a 
change of program form in the Office of Admissions and Records 
following procedures announced in the class schedule. 

Students may add classes to their programs of study during the 
first three weeks of instruction. They may drop classes through 
the first two weeks. After the second week of instruction the 
university expects students to complete all courses in which they 
are enrolled. If students must withdraw after the deadline for 
dropping classes published in the class schedule, they are subject 
to the withdrawal policy contained in the “University Regula- 
tions” section of this catalog. In all instances, dropped classes 
must be reported to the Office of Admissions and Records; stu- 
dents not attending class are not dropped automatically. 

Concurrent Enrollment Outside 
the CSU System 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently for 
additional courses at another institution outside the CSU system 
without advance written approval from the student’s academic 
adviser or the Office of Admissions and Records. Students are 
reminded that the study load in the proposed combined program 
of study may not exceed the maximum number of units autho- 
rized at this university. 


Enrollment at Other CSU 
Campuses 

Fullerton students may enroll at other campuses of The Califor- 
nia State University either while concurrently enrolled at Cal 
State Fullerton or as visitors. There are certain eligibility require- 
ments and enrollment conditions that must be met, including 
completion of at least one semester at Cal State Fullerton and 
being in good academic standing. Information and application 
forms may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and Re- 
cords. 

Visitor Enrollment 

Students enrolled at other campuses of The California State 
University may enroll at Cal State Fullerton while concurrently 
enrolled at their home campus or as visitors. Information about 
eligibility requirements, enrollment conditions and application 
forms are available from the Office of Admissions and Records at 
the home campus. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. 
The student must meet the regular university admission require- 
ments and must pay the same fees as other students. See the 
description of Audit in the “University Regulations” section of 
this catalog under “Administrative Symbols.” 

Disabled Students 

Disabled students who require assistance should consult with 
Disabled Student Services prior to the announced semester regis- 
tration period so that special arrangements can be made. 

Veterans 

California State University, Fullerton is approved by the Bureau 
of School Approvals, State Department of Education, to offer 
programs to veterans seeking benefits under state and federal 
legislation. All students seeking veterans’ benefits must have a 
degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the 
semester in which the veteran plans to use these benefits to have 
the authorization at the time of registration. 


Registration Information 89 


Schedule of Fees 

1991 '92 


Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California. The 1991 - 
92 and 1 992-93 schedule of fees will he published in the class 
schedules for those years. The following are the fees and nonresi- 
dent tuition assessed at the time of preparing this catalog. 

Application fee (nonrefundahle) 

Payable by check or money order at time 
application is made $55 

All Students (Per Semester Fees) 


State University fee 

0 to 6 units $231 

7 or more units 402 

Facilities fee 3 

Associated Students fee 24 

University Union fee 49 

Instructionally-related activity fee 10 


Nonresident and Foreign Visa Students 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees 
charged all students) per unit $205 

Summer Session 

Course fee per unit see current bulletin 

Associated Students fee $3 

University Union fee 5 


Extension Fees 

Per unit see current bulletin 

Other Fees or Charges 


University I.D. card $3 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees 

listed above) 25 

Check returned from hank for any cause 10 

Transcript fee 4 

Graduation and diploma fee 25 

Failure to meet an administrative time limit 20 


Miscellaneous course fees Selected courses 

require instructional fees as indicated in the class sched- 
ule and under the course description in the catalog. 





90 Schedule of Fees 




Consult current class schedule for further information. 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The California State 
University without advance notice. 

Alan Pattee Scholarships 

Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression 
employees, who were California residents and who were killed in 
the course of law enforcement or fire suppression duties, are not 
charged fees or tuition of any kind at any California State Uni- 
versity campus, according to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act, 
Education Code Section 68121. Students qualifying for these 
benefits are known as Alan Pattee scholars. For further informa- 
tion contact the Admissions Office, which determines eligibility. 

Waiver of Fees 

Section 32320 of the California Education Code provides for the 
waiver of certain fees other than nonresident tuition, for certain 
veterans’ dependents. Those who meet one or more of the follow- 
ing criteria should present to the university registrar a certificate 
of eligibility obtained from the Division of Educational Assis- 
tance, California Department of Veterans Affairs, on or before 
the date of registration. 

A. Children of veterans who have service-connected disabilities 
and whose annual income not including governmental com- 
pensation for such service-connected disability does not ex- 
ceed $5,000. 

B. Children of veterans killed in action or because of a service- 
connected disability, where the annual income of such chil- 
dren, including the value of any support received from par- 
ents and the annual income of surviving parents, does not 
exceed $5,000. No limitations on age or length of residency. 

Refund of Fees 

Details concerning fees which may be refunded, the circum- 
stances under which fees may be refunded, and the appropriate 
procedure to be followed in seeking refunds may be obtained by 
consulting Section 41803 (parking fees), 41913 (nonresident 
tuition), 42019 (housing charges) and 41802 (all other fees) of 
Title 5, California Code of Regulations. In all cases it is important 
to act quickly in applying for a refund. 

Information concerning the policy and appropriate procedure to 
be followed in seeking a refund may be obtained from the Office 
of the Registrar or the Cashier’s Office. 


Parking Fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces): 

Regular and limited students 

(4-wheeled vehicle) $54. 00 

Regular and limited students 

(2-wheeled vehicle) 13.50 

Coin operated gate per exit 1.50 

Summer session (4-wheeled vehicle) 36.00 

Summer session (2-wheeled vehicle) 9.00 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living at 
home or making other housing arrangements will vary widely. It 
is estimated that, including a $4,700 yearly allowance for room 
and board, and $400 for books and supplies, the total cost will 
approximate $7,600 for an unmarried person. Nonresident stu- 
dents must also allow for nonresident tuition in addition to those 
fees listed above. 

State University Fee 

The state university fee provides financing for the following stu- 
dent services. 

1. Social and Cultural Development Activities. Provides for the 
coordination of various student activities, student organiza- 
tions, student government and cultural programs. 

2. Counseling. Includes the cost of counselors’ salaries and cleri- 
cal support, plus operating expenses and equipment. 

3. Testing. Covers the cost of test officers, psychometrists, cleri- 
cal support, operating expenses and equipment. 

4. Placement. Provides career information to students and faculty 
for academic program planning and employment information 
to graduates and students. 

5. Financial Aids Administration. Includes the cost of the counsel- 
ing and business services provided in connection with the 
financial aid programs. 

6. Health Services. Provides health services to students and cov- 
ers the cost of salaries of medical officers and nurses and 
related clerical and technical personnel, as well as operating 
expenses and equipment. 

7. Housing. Supports personnel who provide housing informa- 
tion and monitor housing services available to students. 

8. Student Affairs Administratum. Covers 50 percent of the cost of 
the office of the vice president for student affairs, which has 
responsibility for the overall administration of student 
services. 


Schedule of Fees 9 1 


Associated Students Fee 

The law governing The California State University provides that 
a student body fee may be established by student referendum with 
the approval of two-thirds of those students voting. The Associ- 
ated Students fee was established at California State University, 
Fullerton by student referendum in December 1959. The same 
fee can be abolished by a similar two-thirds approval of students 
voting on a referendum called for by a petition signed by ten 
percent of the regularly enrolled students ( Education Code, Sec- 
tion 89300). The level of the fee is set by the Chancellor who 
may approve a fee increase only following a referendum approved 
by a majority of the students. The Associated Students fee sup- 
ports a variety of cultural and recreational programs, child care 
centers and special student support programs. 

Average Annual Costs and 
Sources of Funds Per Full-Time 
Equivalent Student 

The 20 campuses and the Chancellor’s Office of The California 
State University are financed primarily through funding provided 


by the taxpayers of California. The total State appropriation to 
the CSU for 1990-91, including capital outlay and employee 
compensation increases, is $1,904,029,000. The total cost of 
education for CSU, however, is $2, 1 11,513,409 which provides 
support for a projected 274,500 full-time equivalent (FTE) J 
students. 

The total cost of education in the CSU is defined as the expendi- 
tures for current operations, including payments made to the 
students in the form of financial aid, and all fully reimbursed 
programs contained in State appropriations, but excluding cap- 
ital outlay appropriations. The average cost of education is deter- 
mined by dividing the total cost by the total FTES. The average 
cost is further differentiated into three categories: State support 
(the State appropriation, excluding capital outlay), student fee 
support, and support from other sources (including federal 
funds). 

Thus, excluding costs which relate to capital outlay (i.e., build- 
ing amortization), the average cost of education per FTE student 
is $7,692. Of this amount, the average student fee support per 
FTE is $1,183. The calculation for this latter amount includes 
the amount paid by nonresident students. 


Source of Funds and Average Costs for 1990/91 CSU Budget 
(Projected Enrollment: 274,500 FTE) 




Average 




Cost Per 



Amount 

Student (FTE) 

Percentage 

Total Cost of Education 

$2, 111, 513, 409" 

$7,692 

100.0 

State Appropriation 

1,691, 403,000 

6,162 

80.1 

Student Fee Support 

324,672,787 

1,183 d 

15.4 

Support from Other Sources 

95,437,622 

348 

4.5 


* For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates total head count into total academic student load equivalent to 15 units per term. Some students enroll for 
more than 15 units; some students enroll for fewer than 15 units. 

b The total cost of education does not include the amount related to lottery and the capital investment of the CSU. The estimated replacement cost of all the system’s 
permanent facilities and equipment on the 20 campuses is currently valued at $6.5 billion, excluding the cost of land. 

' This figure docs not include the capital outlay appropriation of $212,626,000. 

J The average costs paid by a student include the State University Fee, Application Fee, and Nonresident Tuition. Individual students may pay less than $1,183 depending on 
whether they are part-time, hill-time, resident or nonresident students. 


92 Schedule of Fees 


Financial Aid 

Financial Aid refers to a wide variety of programs designed to 
assist students in meeting the cost of attendance at California 
State University Fullerton. These programs include gift aid in the 
form of scholarships and grants which do not require repayment 
or performance of work, student loans which require repayment 
over a period of time at a specified interest rate, and employment 
programs through College Work-Study or Student Assistance. 
The Emergency Loan program also provides students with re- 
sources to meet unusual or unexpected emergencies through a 
short-term loan. 

Students who have specific questions regarding financial aid or 
who would like further information should contact the Financial 
Aid Office. 

Eligibility Requirements 

The following eligibility requirements apply to all financial aid 
programs except emergency loans and scholarships. 

To he considered eligible for most student assistance programs, 
the demonstration of financial need is one of the primary require- 
ments. However, alternate forms of financial assistance such as 
scholarships, emergency loans, and parental loan programs 
should also be explored since many of these alternate sources of 
aid do not necessarily require the demonstration of financial 
need. Financial need is the difference between the reasonable 
and approved costs incurred by a student at CSUF and all of the 
resources available to the student, including contributions from 
parents, student (and spouse, if applicable), and other aid the 
student may be eligible to receive. The university uses a national- 
ly accepted formula developed by the federal government in 
determining the family contribution. In addition to demonstrat- 
ing financial need, all applicants for federal student financial 
assistance must meet the following eligibility requirements: 

1. be a U.S. citizen or national or permanent resident of the 
U.S. Eligible students also include citizens of the Marshall 
Islands and permanent residents of the Trust Territories as well 
as other eligible non-citizens who can document their status 
in the United States as other than for a temporary purpose. 
Students should be aware that the citizenship requirements 
apply to all forms of federally-funded assistance but may differ 
for State supported grant programs and private scholarships; 

2. be admitted to or enrolled on at least a half-time basis in a 
program of study leading to a degree, certificate or recognized 
credential offered by the institution. (Graduate students pur- 
suing prerequisites required to gain admission to a graduate 
program may be eligible for limited loan eligibility); 



Financial Aid 93 


3. maintain satisfactory academic progress in the course of study 
according to the standards and practices of the university; 

4. not he in default on any loan made from a student loan fund 
and not owe a refund on grants previously received for atten- 
dance at any college or university. 

5. submit a completed Student Aid Application for California 
(SAAC) and all documentation requested by the Financial 
Aid Office; and 

6. he registered for the Draft with the Selective Service or certify 
that he/she is not required to register. 

Scholarships & Institutional 
Grants 

Scholarships 

Scholarships and awards should not he viewed as merely another 
form of financial aid, even though many scholarships and awards 
do take financial need into consideration during the review pro- 
cess. They are given to honor outstanding achievement. Many 
scholarships are available to all students and are known as general 
scholarships; other scholarships have special objectives may be 
awarded to students pursuing selected majors, underrepresented 
students, students with certain career goals, or to those living in 
certain geographic areas. 

Most scholarship applications are due the last Friday in February. 
Generally, the recipients are selected during the spring semester 
and the funds are awarded the next academic year. Full details 
regarding scholarship requirements and application deadlines are 
in the Scholarship and Awards Bulletin which is available the 
first week in December. The bulletins and applications can be 
picked up at the Financial Aid Office and all the Deans’ Offices. 

Educational Opportunity Program Grant 
(EOPG) 

The Educational Opportunity Program Grant of the California 
State University system is available to disadvantaged undergrad- 
uate students who are residents of California and who are officially 
enrolled in the EOP (contact the EOP Office for program enroll- 
ment procedures). EOP grants range from $200 to $1,000 per 
year for a total of five academic years. 

State University Grant (SUG) 

The State University Grant is available for graduate and under- 
graduate students who are residents of California and who are 
enrolled in at least six units. All applicants who file a SAAC will 
be considered for this grant. The maximum SUG for 1990/91 was 
$567 for undergraduate and graduates. 


State Grants 

Cal Grant A & B 

The State of California through the California Student Aid 
Commission, administers grant programs for undergraduates 
seeking a postsecondary education. To qualify for Cal Grant A or 
B, a student must be a California resident attending an eligible 
school or college within the State, must be making satisfactory 
academic progress, and must not owe a refund on any State or 
Federal grant or have defaulted on a student loan. Applicants for 
Cal Grant funds are required to complete a Student Aid Applica- 
tion for California (SAAC) no later than March 2 prior to the 
fall semester for which the grant will be used. 

Cal Grant A is designed to assist low and middle income students 
with the cost of tuition and fees. Recipients are selected on the 
basis of financial need and grade point average. During the 1990/ 
91 academic year awards averaged approximately $950 at Califor- 
nia State University. 

Cal Grant B is designed to provide very low income students with 
a living allowance. In addition, Cal Grant B recipients may also 
receive assistance with tuition and fee cost. First year students 
receiving Cal Grant B will generally receive a living allowance up 
to a maximum of $ 1 ,4 10 for the academic year. During their 2nd, 
3rd and 4th year of postsecondary education, Cal Grant B recipi- 
ents will receive the living allowance in addition to tuition and 
fee assistance. During the academic year of 1990/91 the maxi- 
mum Cal Grant B award at California State University, Fullerton 
was approximately $2,362. 

Graduate Fellowships 

The Student Aid Commission awards approximately 500 Gradu- 
ate Fellowships annually. Candidates must be a legal resident of 
California, plan to pursue recognized graduate degrees at an eligi- 
ble California graduate school and must demonstrate their intent 
to become college or university faculty members. Teacher creden- 
tial or certificate programs do not meet the requirements of the 
fellowship program. 

The fellowships assist w-ith tuition and fees at both independent 
and public colleges and universities. In 1990/91 , awards averaged 
$844 at CSU. 

Applicants for Graduate Fellowship funds are required to com- 
plete a Student Aid Application tor California (SAAC) no later 
than March 2 prior to the fall semester for w hich the grant will be 
used. Applicants must also submit a 1991-92 Graduate Fellow- 
ship endorsement form to the Student Aid Commission no later 
than April 10. The endorsement form serves to demonstrate the 
student’s intent to pursue a teaching career at the university or 
college level. 


94 Financial Aid 


Federal Programs 

Pell Grant 

The Pell Grant program is the largest of all federal student grant 
programs and is the “foundation” of all forms of student assis- 
tance. Pell Grants are available to undergraduates who meet all 
eligibility requirements described earlier and who have not al- 
ready obtained a bachelor’s degree. The amount of the grant is 
based on financial need and ranged from $200 to $2,300 for 
students enrolled full-time during the 1990-91 award year. Part- 
time undergraduates are also eligible as long as half-time enroll- 
ment is maintained. Pell eligibility is generally limited to five full 
years of undergraduate study. Students may apply by completing a 
Student Aid Application for California (SAAC) or the Applica- 
tion for Federal Student Aid ( AFSA) if the student is applying for 
Pell Grant funds only. 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant 
(SEOG) 

The federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant sup- 
plements other forms of financial assistance offered to an eligible 
student. Applicants must meet all other eligibility requirements. 
Although designed to meet the needs of undergraduate students 
with the greatest amount of need, SEOG funds are provided to 
schools and colleges by the federal government and awards to 
students are made according to the school’s awarding practices. 
During 1990-91, award amounts to CSUF students ranged from 
$200 to $1,000. 

Perkins Loans 

Perkins Loans are low-interest federal loans (5 percent interest) 
available to undergraduate and graduate students. Based on their 
demonstrated financial need, students may borrow up to $4,500 
during the first two years of study and up to a maximum borrow- 
ing limit of $9,000 for completing an undergraduate degree. The 
combined borrowing limit for completion of undergraduate and 
graduate study is $18,000. Students borrow through the Perkins 
Loan program at their school or college and availability of funds is 
dependent on repayment of the school’s previous borrowers and 
annual federal allocations to the program. During the 1990-91 
award year, loan amounts ranged from $400 to $1,000 at CSU 
Fullerton. Interest does not accrue on the loan and there is no 
repayment while the student is enrolled at least half-time. Repay- 
ment begins nine months following graduation, withdrawal, or 
enrollment below half-time status. 

College Work-Study 

The College Work-Study program provides students with em- 
ployment opportunities both on and off campus. Eligibility for 
the program is determined by the school or college based on the 
student’s demonstrated financial need. Students awarded College 
Work-Study receive an allocation of funds to be earned through 
part-time employment with an approved employer. The hourly 


wage will depend on the type of job and placement assistance is 
provided by the school or college. Students can take advantage of 
this employment opportunity to work in areas related to their 
studies or career plan as well as to minimize their student loan 
borrowing. Undergraduates and graduate students are eligible to 
participate in the program. 

Stafford Student Loan 

The Guaranteed Student Loan is a long-term loan made to stu- 
dents by banks, savings and loan associations and credit unions. 
The loans are guaranteed by the State of California and insured 
by the federal government. 

The federal government pays interest on the loan while the 
student is in school. Six months following graduation, withdraw- 
al or less than half-time enrollment, borrowers begin repayments 
at eight percent annual interest. Effective July 1, 1988, new 
Stafford Student Loan borrowers will be required to repay the 
loan at 8% annual interest through the fourth year of repayment 
with an increase to 10% beginning with the fifth year of repay- 
ment. Prior Stafford Student Loan borrowers will continue to 
borrow at their previous interest rate. 

Undergraduates may borrow a maximum of $2,625 per year for 
the first two years and a maximum of $4,000 per year for the 
remaining years of undergraduate study to a maximum of 
$17,250. 

Graduate and professional students may borrow up to $7,500 per 
year. The aggregate loan maximum for combined undergraduate 
and graduate borrowing is $54,750. Each lending institution has 
different policies regarding this program, so it is important to ask 
questions of your lender. 

Application Periods 

The deadlines listed below are approximate and are subject to 
annual changes. Consult with the Financial Aid Office for cur- 
rent dates. 

Emergency Loans 

Emergency loans are available from the first day of classes until 30 
days before the end of the semester. 

Scholarships 

Applications for scholarships are due in the Financial Aid Office 
by late February. Students should contact the Financial Aid Of- 
fice for an application in mid-January. 

Bureau of Indian Affairs Grants 

Consult with the BI A for exact dates. The application deadline is 
usually in mid-June. 


Financial Aid 95 


Stafford Loans (Formerly GSL) 

Apply after June 1 for the fall semester and academic year, and 
after November 1 for the spring semester. 

Cal Grants and Graduate Fellowships 

First-time applicants must complete and mail the Student Aid 
Application for California (SAAC) and for graduate students 
also the SAAC Supplement form by March 2. 

Pell Grant only (no other aid desired) 

Apply by May 1 of the academic year for which aid is desired. 

All Other Aid 

Priority is given to SAAC applications mailed between January 1 
and March 2 for the next academic year. 

Rights and Responsibilities of 
Students Receiving Aid 
Rights 

All students are entitled to and are guaranteed fair and equitable 
treatment in the awarding of financial aid. In addition, there 
shall be no discrimination of any kind. Appeals procedures exist 
for anyone who feels that a violation has occurred; consult with 
the director of financial aid for details. 

All students have the right to receive full and open information 
about various financial aid programs and the status of their eligi- 
bility. In addition, they have the right to know the selection and 
review processes used in awarding financial aid. 

All students have the right to know the costs of attending the 
institution, the refund policies in case of withdrawal from the 
university, the academic programs offered by the university, the 
faculty and physical facilities of the institution, and data regard- 
ing student retention at the university. 

Responsibilities 

All financial aid recipients agree to carry and complete a specific 
number of units each semester, report graduation or withdrawal 
from the university and to notify the Financial Aid Off ice of any 
changes in their financial or marital status, or unit load. 

Recipients of financial aid must use the funds only to meet educa- 
tion costs. Any other use of the funds is prohibited by law. 

Students who are receiving financial aid must maintain satisfac- 
tory academic progress. See the section below for details. 


Satisfactory Academic Progress 
Standards 

The Higher Education Act, as amended, requires that students 
maintain satisfactory academic progress in the course of study 
they are pursuing according to standards and practices set by each 
college and university. 

Students should be aware that these standards must be the same 
or stricter than the standards for a student enrolled in California 
State University, Fullerton in the same academic program who is 
not receiving assistance under a Title IV program. 

Qualitative Standards (Measurement by 
Grades) 

All students, including financial aid recipients, must maintain 
scholastic academic progress as outlined in the California State 
University, Fullerton catalog. 

Students are expected to complete their educational objective, 
degree, or certificate according to the following schedule: 

Required for Degree Max. Completed Units 

Undergraduate: 

124 units (B.A.) 150 

Graduate: 

30 or more depending 50 

upon program 

A student who cannot complete his/her objective within the 
maximum attempted units outlined above according to his/her 
degree standing will not be eligible for any financial aid from any 
federal or state source. 

Successful Completion Requirement 

In order to maintain satisfactory academic progress, each student 
must have a cumulative C average or an academic standing con- 
sistent w ith the institution’s requirements for graduation by the 
end of the student’s second academic year. This requirement is in 
addition to the requirement that a student maintain scholastic 
academic progress at the end of each semester as defined by 
California State University, Fullerton. Since California State 
University, Fullerton academic probation and disqualification 
standards permit a student to enroll on academic probation with 
a cumulative grade-point average of 1.86 or better with fewer 
than 60 semester units, the equivalent of the end of the student’s 
second academic year, CSUF meets the provisions of the Higher 
Education Amendments of 1986. As a result, a student who 
maintains a 1.86 or better cumulative grade-point average at the 
end of the second academic year will be considered to be making 
satisfactory academic progress. 

Semester Grade Review 

Even though California State University, Fullerton will measure 
Satisfactory Academic Progress according to the number of units 
successfully completed at the end of each academic year, federal 


96 Financial Aid 


financial aid program regulations require each college and uni- 
versity to determine that a student is maintaining Satisfactory 
Academic Progress each payment period and each time it certifies a 
Stafford Loan or SLS. To meet this requirement, a student will 
have been certified as having made Satisfactory Academic Pro- 
gress for payment purposes at the end of the fall semester if the 
student meets the “qualitative standards” as outlined above. 

Determination of Units Completed 

The following grades will be counted in determining units suc- 
cessfully completed: A, B, C, D, CR (credit). 

SP (Satisfactory Progress) and RD (Report Delayed) will he tem- 
porarily considered as units completed provided these designations 
are replaced with an acceptable final grade within one calendar 
year from the beginning date of the semester. If the final SP grade 
is not posted within one year, the student must submit a written 
appeal to the Financial Aid Office. If a Report is Delayed beyond 
one year, the student must submit to the Financial Aid Office a 
statement from the faculty member explaining the cause for the 
extended delay. 

The following grades will count as units attempted but will not 
count as units completed: F, NC (No Credit), W (Withdrawal), 
AU (Audit), l (Incomplete), U (Unofficial Withdrawal). 

If a grade is changed after the official posting for a semester, it is 
the student’s responsibility to bring verification of the change to 
the Financial Aid Office. 

Repeated Courses: A repeated course in which the student initial- 
ly received a D or F will not count as units attempted or complet- 
ed since an improved grade will only result in a grade change and 
not additional unit credit. A repeated course in which a student 
withdrew or received an unauthorized incomplete will count as 
units attempted and completed. 

Remedial Courses will he considered as units completed for pur- 
poses of reviewing a student’s Satisfactory Academic Progress 
only when the university or department requires a student to take 
a remedial course(s) as part of his/her program whether or not the 
student receives unit credit towards graduation. 

Failure to Maintain Satisfactory Academic 
Progress 

A student who fails to maintain the qualitative or quantitative 
measurement standards will be defined as having failed to main- 
tain Satisfactory Academic Progress and will be ineligible to 
receive any federal or state financial aid. 

Reinstatement of Financial Aid Eligibility 

Students whose financial aid eligibility has been terminated for 
failure to complete the minimum number of units may have their 
aid eligibility reevaluated when the deficit units are completed 


and the student has demonstrated capability of making satisfac- 
tory academic progress in accordance with the incremental com- 
pletion rate. 

Appeal 

Students who fail to meet the Satisfactory Academic Progress 
standards and who are disqualified from financial aid eligibility 
may appeal their disqualification to the Director of Financial Aid 
by completing and submitting a written appeal within 10 days of 
receipt of the “Notification of Financial Aid Disqualification.” 
No appeal will be approved unless the mitigating circumstance is 
unique and compelling, e.g., documented injury which prevent- 
ed the student from attending classes, parental or spousal death, 
extended illness, etc. 

The “Financial Aid Petition” is available in the Financial Aid 
Office. 

Eligibility for Multiple Degrees 

Students will he eligible to receive financial aid towards the 
completion of their first bachelor s degree and towards their first 
graduate degree. 

Refund Policy 

As stated in the appropriate CSUF Class Schedule, a student may 
be entitled to a refund of fees if he/she withdraws from the 
University or drops units. If a student received financial aid, fee 
refunds will be credited partially or completely to various finan- 
cial aid accounts according to the formulas below: 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educational costs, 
financial aid is considered to be used first for direct educational 
costs (fees). Therefore, if a student withdraws and is scheduled to 
receive a refund of fees, all or part of this refund will be used to 
reimburse the financial aid program(s) from which the student 
received funds. 

If a student received financial aid in excess of direct fees, a 
repayment of additional financial aid funds may be required. 

I. Refund to be returned to Title IV programs: 

A = Amount of fee refunded 

B = Total Title IV aid (excluding CWS) for semester Total 
aid awarded (excluding CWS) for semester. 

Ax B = Amount of refund to Title IV 


Financial Aid 97 


II . Distribution order of Title IV portion of refund among Title 
IV programs: 

1. Perkins (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SEOG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. PELL (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

4. Stafford (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

5. SLS (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

III. When the Stafford is the only Title IV aid received (exclud- 
ing CWS) the following distribution formula will be used: 

Refund to Stafford = Amount of Stafford Estimated 

cost of attendance for 
loan period 

IV. Any remaining refund amount not credited to Title IV pro- 
grams as per the above formulas will be distributed as follows: 

1. EOPG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

2. SUG (not to exceed the amount disbursed) 

3. Student (remaining amount of refund) 

Repayment Policy 

Since financial aid is awarded to help meet educational costs, 
financial aid is considered to be used first for direct educational 
costs (fees). Therefore, if a student withdraws and is scheduled to 
receive a refund of fees, all or part of this refund will be used to 
reimburse the financial aid program(s) from which the student 
received funds. 


If a student received financial aid in excess of direct fees, a 
repayment of additional financial aid funds may be required. 

Students who receive financial aid and later terminate their 
enrollment by dropping out or by withdrawing and who received 
cash disbursements of Title IV financial aid for payment of their 
non-institutional costs require institutional review to determine 
if there has been an overpayment, and therefore, if a repayment is 
required. Repayment designates the amount that a student must 
repay of the funds he/she received in cash that could not have 
reasonably been spent for non-institutional costs during the por- 
tion of the term that the student was enrolled. 


Total Title IV funds disbursed in cash to the student minus Staf- 
ford, SLS, CWS minus non-institutional costs paid by the stu- 
dent from the disbursement for the portion of the payment period 
during which the student was enrolled (room, board, books, 
supplies, transportation, miscellaneous expenses) = overpay- 
ment. 


Overpayment X Total amount of Title IV (minus CWS, Stafford, 
SLS) -r Total amount of aid (minus CWS, Staf- 
ford, SLS) = Title IV Repayment 


Order of distribution for repayment: Perkins, SEOG, then Pell. 


98 Financial Aid 



University Regulations 

Each student is responsible for meeting the requirements printed 
in the university catalog and all published regulations of the 
university. 

The university establishes certain academic policies and require- 
ments which must he met before a degree is granted. These 
include major and unit requirements and prerequisites. While 
advisors, directors, deans and faculty will provide a student with 
information and advice, responsibility for meeting these require- 
ments rests with the student. Since failure to satisfy these require- 
ments may result in the degree being withheld, it is important for 
each student to become thoroughly acquainted with all regula- 
tions. The catalog and the semester class schedule, available in 
the Titan Bookstore, are the best sources of information on 
current policy and regulations. 

The student also has the responsibility for securing the consent of 
the instructor before enrolling in a course with prerequisites that 
the student has not completed. 

To ensure receipt of timely information and accurate grade re- 
ports from the university, each student must keep the Office of 
Admissions and Records informed of changes in personal data, 
including changes in name, address and program of study. Each 
student is mailed a student data verification each semester during 
the third week of classes to ensure the accuracy of demographic 
and official enrollment data for that term; enrollment corrections 
must he reported to the registrar by the 20th day of classes, using 
Change of Program forms. Between the 1 5th and 20th day of 
classes, a $20 administrative late fee will he required to make 
such changes. Other corrections should be reported on the form 
and returned to the Office of Admissions and Records. 


100 University Regulations 


Enrollment Regulations 


Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work per 
week for one semester. Courses are of three types: 

Lecture: one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

Activity: two hours of class plus one hour of study. 
Laboratory: three hours of laboratory activity in class plus 
one hour of study outside class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. All 
required courses carry unit credit. 

Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29 semester units 
of work are classified as freshmen, 30-59 semester units as sopho- 
mores, 60-89 semester units as juniors, and 90 or more as seniors. 

Maximum Number of Units 

Undergraduate students’ requests to enroll for more than 19 units 
must he approved by the student’s advisor and the department 
chair of the major. If such requests are denied, appeals may he 
made to the appropriate school dean. (Undeclared majors must 
receive the approval of the coordinator of undergraduate studies. ) 
The minimum full-time program is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in excess of 
the normal may request to he allowed to enroll for extra units. 
Request forms may he obtained from the Office of Admissions 
and Records. In general, only students with superior academic 
records are allowed to enroll for more than the maximum. In 
addition, the need to enroll for the extra study must be estab- 
lished. Factors such as time spent in employment or commuting, 
the nature of the academic program, extracurricular activities 
and the student’s health should be considered in planning a study 
program. Students who are employed or have outside responsibil- 
ities are advised to reduce their program of study. 

The minimum and maximum units of a full-time program of study 
for graduate students are defined in the “Graduate Regulations” 
section of this catalog. 

Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate 
students. Undergraduate students may be permitted to enroll in a 
graduate level course if: 

a. they have reached senior status (completed a minimum of 90 
semester units) 


b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites required for 
entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500-level coursework taken during their 
undergraduate degree toward a master’s degree should read the 
section on postgraduate credit in the “Graduate Regulations” 
section of this catalog. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by the universi- 
ty, regular attendance in class is often essential to success in a 
course. The policy on class attendance is within the discretion of 
the individual faculty member and shall be announced by the 
faculty member at the first class meeting of the semester. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It is especially important that students attend the first meeting of 
a class. Students absent from the first meeting and who tail to 
notify the instructor or departmental office no later than 24 hours 
after the class meeting may be denied admission to the class. 
Instructors may deny admission to absentees to admit persons on 
waiting lists. 

Instructor-Initiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name appears on the 
first-day-of-class list should attend all class meetings in the first 
week. If the student is absent without notifying the instructor or 
departmental office within 24 hours after any meeting missed 
during that week, the student may then be dropped administra- 
tively from the class by the instructor; however, ultimately it is the 
student’s responsibility to ensure that he/ she has been dropped from the 
class and if not, to follow the appropriate procedures for withdrawing 
from the class. An instructor may also administratively drop a 
student who does not meet prerequisites for the course. These 
administrative withdrawals shall be without penalty and must be 
filed by the instructor with the registrar no later than the end of 
the second week of instruction (the specific date is published in 
the class schedule each semester). 


Enrollment Regulations 101 


Grading Policies 

Grading System 

Every student of the university will have all course work evaluat- 
ed and reported by the faculty using letter grades or administra- 
tive symbols. 

The university uses a combination of traditional and nontradi- 
tional grading options as follows: 

Traditional 

Option 1 . Letter grades, defined as: 

A — outstanding performance 
B — above average performance 
C — average performance 

D — below average performance, though passing 
F — failure 

Nontraditional 

Option 2. CR (Credit) for satisfactory (equivalent to C or better 
in undergraduate courses; B or better in graduate courses) and 
NC (No Credit) for less than satisfactory work. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does not complete a 
particular course, or withdraws, certain administrative symbols 
may be assigned by the faculty. Grades and symbols are listed in 
the chart on the following page together with grade-point values. 
The chart also illustrates the academic btxikkeeping involved for 
all grades and symbols used. 

Selection of Grading Option 

Selection of a grading option, with certain exceptions, is the 
responsibility of the student. Graduate students must use Option 
1 for courses that are on study plans leading to master’s degrees. 
Undergraduates must use Option 1 for major, minor and general 
education requirements. 

Exceptions are those courses designated by the faculty to be 
graded solely on an Option 2 basis. 

These courses will be so designated in the class schedule (and 
shall not be changed by the faculty after publication of the class 
schedule) for each semester and may be included in major, core or 
special program requirements. 

Students shall inform the registrar up to the end of the third week 
of classes regarding the selection of grading options in designated 
courses. If a student does not do so, Option 1 will be used. 



102 Grading Policies 


The faculty shall grade all students using the traditional A, B, C, 
D or F grades except in Credit/No Credit courses, and the regis- 
trar shall make the necessary changes from A, B, C, D or F, 
converting A, B, C to Credit, and D and F to No Credit in 
undergraduate courses and A, B to Credit, and C, D and F to No 
Credit in graduate courses. In those courses offered only on a 
Credit/No Credit basis, the instructor shall assign grades of CR or 
NC or appropriate administrative symbols. 

Nontraditional Grade Option 

A nontraditional grading option is available to undergraduate 
students, nonobjective graduate students and to classified gradu- 
ate students for courses not included in the approved study plan. 
Any student attempting a course using the nontraditional grad- 
ing option must meet the prerequisites for that course. Each 
student shall be permitted to select courses in subjects outside of 
the major, minor and general education requirements for enroll- 
ment on a Credit/No Credit basis (grading Option 2). The phrase 
“major requirements” shall be taken to include core plus concen- 
tration (or option) requirements in departments using such 
terms, and professional course requirements in teacher education 
curricula. A student in any one term may take one course under 
Option 2. In addition, he or she may enroll in a required course 
offered only under Option 2; however, a maximum of 36 units of 
Credit/No Credit courses, including those transferred from other 
institutions, may be counted toward the baccalaureate. 

Under Option 2 the term “Credit” signifies that the student’s 
academic performance was such that he or she was awarded full 
credit in undergraduate courses with a quality level of achieve- 
ment equivalent to a C grade or better. In all graduate level and 
professional education courses Credit signifies academic perfor- 
mance equivalent to B or A grades. No Credit signifies that the 
student attempted the course but that the performance did not 
warrant credit toward the objective. 

Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one nonmajor course per 
term using this option, exclusive of courses offered only on a 
Credit/No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his or her major field of 
study to one where he or she has completed courses with CR 
grades, such lower division courses shall be included in major 
requirements. Upper division courses may be included at the 
option of the department upon petition by the student. 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students who 
plan to pursue graduate or professional studies later are 
advised to be selective in opting for courses on a credit/no 
credit basis. As a general rule (advisory only), course work 
that is preparatory or prerequisite to advanced specialized 
study should be completed and evaluated on a letter grade 
basis and not Credit/No Credit. 


Administrative Symbols 

Incomplete Authorized (I) 

The symbol I signifies that a portion of required course work has 
not been completed and evaluated in the prescribed time period 
owing to unforeseen but fully justified reasons and that there is 
still a possibility of earning credit. It is the responsibility of the 
student to bring pertinent information to the instructor and to 
reach agreement on the means by which the remaining course 
requirements will be satisfied. A final grade is assigned when the 
work agreed upon has been completed and evaluated. 


Grade or 



Grade 


Symbol 

Units 

Units 

Point 

Full 

Option 1 

Attempted 

Earned 

Value 

Credit 

A 

Yes 

Yes 

4 

Yes 

B 

Yes 

Yes 

3 

Yes 

C 

Yes 

Yes 

2 

Yes 

D 

Yes 

Yes 

1 

No 

F 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

Option 2 

CR 

• 

Yes 

None 

Yes 

NC 

• 

No 

None 

No 

Administrative 

Symbols 

1 (Incomplete 
authorized) 

t 

No 



U (Unauthorized 
incomplete) .... 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

WF (Withdrawal) 

Yes 

No 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) .... 
SP (Satisfactory 

No 

No 

None 

No 

progress) 

RD (Report 

No 

No 

None 

No 

delayed) 

No 

No 

None 

No 

TOTALS 

Used 

Counted 

Used 



In 

in 

Toward 



GPA 

Objective 

GPA 



*Credit/No Credit course units are not included in GFA computations. 

tlf not completed within one semester the 1 will he changed to an F (or NC). 

An Incomplete must be made up during the semester immediate- 
ly following the end of the term in which it was assigned. This 
limitation prevails whether or not the student maintains con- 
tinuous enrollment. Failure to complete the assigned work will 
result in an Incomplete being changed to an F or an NC. 

A grade of Incomplete may be given only when, in the opinion of 
the instructor, a student cannot complete a course during the 
semester of enrollment for reasons beyond the student’s control. 


Grading Policies 103 



Such reasons are assumed to include: illness of the student or of 
members of the student’s immediate family, extraordinary finan- 
cial problems, loss of outside position and other exigencies. In 
assigning a grade of I, the instructor shall file with the depart- 
ment for future reference and student access a Statement of 
Requirements for Completion of Course Work. The requirements 
shall not include retaking the course. The instructor will also 
designate a time limit (up to one semester) for completing re- 
quirements. Upon request, a copy of the document will he fur- 
nished to the student. The student should review this statement 
at the earliest opportunity. 

The statement of requirements will include an indication of the 
quality of the student’s work to date. This not only provides an 
interim evaluation for the student hut assists the department 
chair in assigning a final grade in those instances where the 
instructor is no longer available. 

When the specific requirements are completed, the instructor 
will report a change of grade. The responsibility for changing the 
incomplete grade rests with the instructor. 

Withdrawal (W, WF) 

Students may withdraw from class during the first two weeks of 
instruction. After that time students should complete all courses 
in which they are enrolled. 

The university authorizes withdrawal after the first two weeks of 
instruction and prior to the last three weeks of instruction only 
with the approval of the instructor and the department chair or 
school dean. All requests for permission to withdraw and all 
approvals shall he made in writing on the Change of Program 
form and shall he filed at the Office of Admissions and Records by 
students or their proxies. 

Prior to the 20th day of instruction, students may withdraw from 
classes without record of enrollment. Students withdrawing from 
class after the 20th day of instruction shall receive grading sym- 
bols of Wor WF. The symbol W signifies that the student dropped 
the course after the 20th day of instruction and that the quality of 
performance at the time of withdrawal was C or better. The 
symbol WF signifies that the student dropped the course after the 
20th day of instruction and that the quality of performance at the 
time of withdrawal was below average. W’s are not counted in 
grade-point average calculations; WF’s are counted in the same 
way as F grades. When signing the Change of Program form, the 
instructor shall indicate to the student whether Wor WF will be 
given. 

Students may not withdraw during the final three weeks of in- 
struction except in cases, appropriately documented, such as 
accident or serious illness, where the assignment of an Incom- 
plete is not practicable. Ordinarily, withdrawals of this nature 
will involve withdrawal from all classes except that Credit or 
Incomplete Authorized (I) may be assigned for courses in which 


students have completed sufficient work to permit an evaluation 
to be made. Petitions for permission to withdraw from all classes 
under these circumstances, with authorizations as described 
above, shall be submitted with Change of Program forms by the 
students (or their proxies) to the registrar. 

Unauthorized Incomplete (U) 

The symbol U indicates that an enrolled student did not with- 
draw from the course but failed to complete course requirements. 
It is used when, in the opinion of the instructor, completed 
assignments or course activities or both were insufficient to make 
normal evaluation of academic performance possible. For pur- 
poses of grade-point average computations this symbol is equiv- 
alent to an F. 

Students may petition for retroactive withdrawal from individual 
courses or from an entire semester, provided they can document 
both the serious and compelling reasons or circumstances that 
required the withdrawal and the date of such withdrawal. Such a 
petition must be filed within 30 days after the first class day of the 
following semester. 


ADVISORY NOTE: Students who unofficially withdraw 
and who are receiving financial aid or benefits which are 
dependent on completion of specified course units are 
advised that they may have such benefits suspended and 
may be subject to repayment of allowances received after 
date of unofficial withdrawal. 


Audit (AU) 

The symbol AU is used by the registrar in those instances where a 
student has enrolled in a course either for information or other 
purposes not related to the student’s formal academic objective. 
Enrollment as an auditor is subject to the permission of the 
instructor, provided that enrollment in any course as an auditor 
shall be permitted only after students otherwise eligible to enroll 
in the course on a credit basis have had an opportunity to do so. 
Auditors are subject to the same fees as credit students and 
regular class attendance is expected. Once enrolled as an auditor, 
a student may not change to credit status unless such a change is 
requested prior to the last day to add classes. A student who is 
enrolled for credit may not change to audit after the third week of 
instruction. An auditor is not permitted to take examinations in 
the course; therefore, there is no basis for evaluation nor a formal 
grade report. 

Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The SP symbol is used in connection with thesis, project or 
similar courses that extend beyond one academic term. It indi- 
cates that work is in progress, and has been evaluated and found 
to be satisfactory to date, but that assignment of a final grade 
must await completion of additional course work. Cumulative 
enrollment in units attempted may not exceed the total number 


104 Grading Policies 



applicable to the student’s educational objective. Work is to be 
completed within a stipulated period which may not exceed one 
year except for graduate degree theses or projects for which the 
time may be longer, but may not exceed the overall limit for 
completion of all master’s degree requirements. Any extension of 
time must receive prior authorization by the dean of the school 
(or the dean’s designee) in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The RD symbol is used where a delay in the reporting of a final 
grade is due to circumstances beyond the control of the student. 
The symbol is assigned by the registrar and will be replaced as 
soon as possible. An RD shall not be included in calculation of a 
grade-point average. 

Student Records 

Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes is sent to each 
student at the end of each semester. Many students also leave 
self-addressed post cards for instructors of specific courses to send 
them earlier reports. 

Class Grade-Point Averages 

Beginning with the fall semester 1978, information is included 
on student grade reports and permanent academic records that is 
intended to depict the level of achievement of students in rela- 
tion to other students in a particular class. The information is 
displayed in parentheses before each course grade. The first set of 
figures indicates the number of students officially completing the 
course and the second set is the class grade-point average. In 
making the computations, marks of W,I, CR, NC, and SP are 
excluded. This same information is displayed for summer session 
classes, but not for extension or intersession classes sponsored by 
the Office of Extended Education. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be given at 
times scheduled by the university. Once established, the final 
examination schedule may not be changed unless approved by 
the dean of the school. No makeup final examination will be 
given except for reason of illness or other verified emergencies. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit toward the baccalaureate and to 
meet curriculum requirements in certain designated courses by 
the satisfactory completion of challenge examinations in the 
courses. The examinations are to be comprehensive and adminis- 
tered by the sponsoring departments. Well in advance of the 
semester in which a challenge examination is to be administered, 
the student, using the appropriate university form, will secure 
written approval of his or her major advisor and the chair of the 
department in which the course is offered. In general, prior work 
or academic experience will be required. 


Courses to be offered as challenge examinations will be deter- 
mined by the academic departments. Matriculated students may 
either enroll in these courses during registration or add them 
during the first three weeks of the semester. The examination 
must be administered not later than the end of the third week of 
instruction. 

Upon successful completion of the examination, the instructor 
will report the grade of CR. Students who fail the challenge 
examination may elect to continue the course for credit or may 
officially withdraw from the course through the normal class 
withdrawal procedure. The challenge examination for any course 
may be administered only once. 

A maximum of 30 credits can be earned by challenge examina- 
tion, including those earned by advanced placement. Credit by 
examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirements. 

Grade-Point Averages 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading system chart are 
intended to give an exact determination of a student’s scholastic 
standing. To compute the grade-point average for course work at 
Fullerton, the grade-point value of each grade, with the exception 
noted in the “Repetition of Courses” section, is multiplied first by 
the unit value of each course to obtain a total of all grade points 
earned. The total is then divided by the total units attempted in all 
courses in which grades of A, B, C, D, F, U and WF were received. 
The resulting figure is the grade-point average. 

Repetition of Courses 

Undergraduate students may repeat courses at California State 
University, Fullerton for which D or failing grades were earned 
either at Cal State Fullerton or at other institutions; in repeating 
such courses, the traditional grading system shall be used. In 
computing the grade-point average of a student who repeats 
courses in which he or she received D or failing grades, only the 
most recently earned grades and grade points shall be used for the 
first 16 units repeated. Nevertheless, the original grade on the 
academic record shall not be changed or eradicated. 

In exercising this option, an undergraduate student must repeat the 
course at Cal State Fullerton and may request application of this 
policy when a course has been repeated. This should be accom- 
plished using the appropriate form, immediately following the term 
in which the course has been completed, so that the student s grade- 
point average can be revised. In the absence of student requests, 
courses successfully repeated are routinely credited by the Office of 
Admissions and Records during disqualification cycles and degree 
requirement reviews at the time of graduation. 

This policy may also be applied to courses in which U or WF 
grades were assigned, as a means of eliminating such marks from 
grade-point average computations. 


Grading Policies 105 


In the case of any repetition beyond the 16-unit limit or in 
courses for which a C or better grade was awarded, both grades 
are considered in computing grade-point averages. Successful 
repetition of a course originally passed carries no additional unit 
credit toward a degree or credential except for certain courses 
such as independent study, practicum, or other courses specified 
in this catalog as “may be repeated for credit.” 

Students transferring from other colleges where courses were 
taken and repeated may be eligible for consideration under this 
policy. In general, the policy of the college where the course was 
repeated shall be followed; however, units for the courses taken 
and repeated at the transfer institution are included in the 16- 
unit limitation. 

Subject to the following restrictions, if a graduate or postbacca- 
laureate student (excluding students with a second bachelor’s 
degree objective) repeats courses for which a grade of U (unauth- 
orized incomplete) was received, only the most recently earned 
grade(s) and grade points shall be used in computing the grade 
point average; however, the original U grade(s) will remain on 
the permanent record. This policy may be applied only to grades 
earned during the first semester in which U grades are received. 
Repeated courses must be taken at Cal State Fullerton using the 
traditional grading system. Students who have successfully re- 
peated U-graded courses must notify the Admissions and Records 
office using the appropriate form if they wish adjustment to their 
grade point averages. 

Grade Changes 

The university recognizes the long-standing prerogatives of facul- 
ty to set standards of performance and to apply them to individual 
students. The university will seek to correct injustices to students 
but at the same time believes that the instructor’s judgment at the 
time the original grade is assigned is better than a later reconsi- 
deration of an individual case. Equity to all students is of funda- 
mental concern. The following policies apply to changes of 
grades except for changes of Incomplete Authorized and Unauth- 
orized Incomplete symbols. 

1. In general, all course grades are final when filed by the in- 
structor in the end-of-term course grade report. Each student 
is notified by mail of the grades earned during the term, and 
these grades become a part of the official record. 

2. A change ot grade may occur only in cases of clerical error, 
administrative error, or where the instructor reevaluates the 
original course assignments of a student and discovers an error 
in the original evaluation. A clerical error is an error made by 
the instructor or an assistant in calculating or recording the 
grade. A change of grade shall not occur as a consequence of 
the acceptance of additional work or reexamination beyond 
the specified course requirements. 


3. A request for a change of grade shall be initiated by the 
student affected and shall be directed to the instructor within 
60 calendar days of the first day of classes of the regular 
semester following the award of the original grade. If the 
instructor determines that there is a valid basis for the change, 
a Change of Grade form shall be used to notify the Office of 
Admissions and Records. These forms are available in depart- 
ment offices and are not to be handled by students. If the 
instructor determines that there is not a valid basis for the 
change, and denies the student’s request, the instructor’s deci- 
sion is final. The student may file a petition with the Academ- 
ic Appeals Board on the basis of capricious or prejudicial 
treatment by the instructor. 

4. The Change of Grade form completed and signed by the 
instructor, noting the basis for the change, shall not be ac- 
cepted by the registrar unless approved separately by the de- 
partment chair and school dean. 

5. If a request for change of grade is initiated after 60 calendar 
days into the following semester, it will be approved only in 
extraordinary circumstances. An explanation of such circum- 
stances must accompany the request and must be approved 
separately by the instructor, department chair, and the dean 
before acceptance by the registrar. 

Academic Dishonesty 

Academic dishonesty includes such things as cheating, inventing 
false information or citations, plagiarism, and helping someone 
else commit an act of academic dishonesty. It usually involves an 
attempt by a student to show possession of a level of knowledge or 
skill which he or she does not possess. 

Cheating is defined as the act of obtaining or attempting to 
obtain credit for work by the use of any dishonest, deceptive, 
fraudulent or unauthorized means. Examples of cheating include, 
but are not limited to: using notes or aids or the help of other 
students on tests and examinations in ways other than those 
expressly permitted by the instructor, plagiarism as defined be- 
low, tampering with the grading procedures, and collaborating 
with others on any assignment where such collaboration is ex- 
pressly forbidden by an instructor. 

Plagiarism is defined as the act of taking the specific substance of 
another and offering it as one’s own without giving credit to the 
source. When sources are used, acknowledgment of the original 
author or source must be made following standard scholarly 
practice. 

The initial responsibility for detecting and dealing with academic 
dishonesty lies with the instructor concerned. An instructor who 
believes that an act of academic dishonesty has occurred is obligated 
to discuss the matter with the student involved. The instructor 
should possess reasonable evidence, such as documents or personal 
observation. However, if circumstances prevent consultation with 
the student, the instructor may take whatever action, subject to 
student appeal, the instructor deems appropriate. 


106 Grading Policies 


An instructor who is convinced by the evidence that a student is 
guilty of academic dishonesty shall: 

1 . Assign an appropriate academic penalty. This may range from 
an oral reprimand to an F in the course. To the extent that the 
faculty member considers the academic dishonesty to mani- 
fest the student’s lack of scholarship and to reflect on the 
students academic performance and academic integrity in a 
course, the student’s grade should be adversely affected. Sug- 
gested guidelines for appropriate actions are an oral reprimand 
in cases where there is reasonable doubt that the student knew 
that his or her action constituted academic dishonesty; an F 
on the particular paper, project or examination where the act 
of dishonesty was unpremeditated, or where there were sig- 
nificant mitigating circumstances, or an F in the course where 
the dishonesty was premeditated or planned. 

2. Report to the student involved, to the department chair, and 
to the vice president for student affairs the alleged incident of 
academic dishonesty, including relevant documentation, and 
make recommendations for action that he or she deems 
appropriate. 

The vice president for student affairs shall maintain an academic 
dishonesty file of all cases of academic dishonesty with the appro- 
priate documentation. Students shall be informed when their 
names are inserted into the file and provided with copies of any 
appeals or disciplinary procedures in which they may become 
involved. The vice president for student affairs or his or her 
designees may initiate disciplinary proceedings under Title 5, 
California Code of Regulations , Section 41301, and Chancellor’s 
Executive Order 148; when two or more incidents involving the 
same student occur, he or she shall do so. Opportunities for 
appeal regarding sanctions resulting from disciplinary proceed- 
ings are provided by Executive Order 148. 

A student may appeal any action taken on a charge of academic 
dishonesty under the University Policy Statement 300.030, “Ac- 
ademic Appeals.” If the Academic Appeals Board decides that a 
student is innocent of academic dishonesty, then no entry shall 
be made in the academic dishonesty file. 

If the Academic Appeals Board decides either that a student is 
innocent of academic dishonesty, or that a faculty member has 
acted arbitrarily or capriciously towards a student, it shall instruct 
the faculty member to meet with his or her department chair and, 
if appropriate, the dean of the school for the purpose of reassess- 
ing the student’s performance. If the faculty member refuses to do 
so, or if the Board’s recommendation does not specify a particular 
grade as the one to be assigned, the matter shall be referred to an 
ad hoc committee, to be established by the department, which 
shall have ultimate authority to act in the case. 

Academic Renewal 

Under certain circumstances, the university may disregard up to 
two semesters or three quarters of previous undergraduate course 


work taken at any college or university from all considerations 
associated with requirements for the baccalaureate. These cir- 
cumstances are: 

1. that the student has requested the action formally and has 
presented evidence that work completed in the terms under 
consideration is substandard and not representative of present 
scholastic ability and level of performance; and 

2. that the level of performance represented by the terms under 
consideration was due to extenuating circumstances; and 

3. that there is every evidence that the student would find it 
necessary to complete additional terms to qualify for the bac- 
calaureate if the request were not approved. 

Final determination that one or more terms shall be disregarded 
in the determination of eligibility for graduation shall be based 
upon a careful review of evidence by the Review Committee for 
Academic Renewal and shall be made only when: 

1. five years have elapsed since the most recent work to be 
disregarded was completed; and 

2. the student has completed at Fullerton, since the most recent 
work to be disregarded was completed, 1 5 semester units with 
at least a 3.0 grade-point average, or 30 semester units with at 
least a 2. 5 GPA, or 45 semester units with at least a 2.0 GPA. 
Work completed at another institution cannot be used to 
satisfy this requirement. 

When such action is taken, the student’s permanent academic 
record shall be annotated so that it is readily evident to all users of 
the record that no work taken during the disregarded terms, even 
if satisfactory, may apply toward baccalaureate requirements. All 
work must remain legible on the record ensuring a true and 
complete academic history. 

This policy is not intended to merely allow students a means by 
which they may improve their overall grade-point averages. 

Transcripts 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are issued 
only with the written permission of the student concerned. Par- 
tial transcripts are not issued. A fee of $4 for each transcript must 
be received before the transcript can be released. 

Normally, transcripts are available within three working days, 
except at the end of the semester when the student should allow 
about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been presented 
for admission or evaluation, become a part of the student’s per- 
manent academic file and are not returned or copied for distribu- 
tion. Students desiring transcripts covering work attempted else- 
where should request them from the institutions concerned. 


Grading Policies 107 


Continuous Residency 
Regulations 


Good Standing 

Good standing indicates that a student is eligible to continue and 
is free from financial obligation to the university. A student 
under academic disqualification, disciplinary suspension or disci' 
plinary expulsion is not eligible to receive a statement of good 
standing on transcripts issued by the university or on other docu- 
ments. 

Choice of Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions 
and continuing in the same curriculum at any campus of the 
California community colleges or in any combination of Califor- 
nia community colleges and campuses of The California State 
University may, for purposes of meeting graduation require- 
ments, elect to meet the graduation requirements of such cam- 
puses from which he or she will graduate in effect either at the 
time of entering the curriculum or at the time of graduation 
therefrom, except that substitutions for discontinued courses may 
he authorized or required by the proper university authorities. 

Stop-Out Policy 

With certain exceptions, undergraduate students and postbacca- 
laureate unclassified students may be absent for one semester and 
maintain their continuing student status. This includes election 
of curriculum requirements for graduation and eligibility to regis- 
ter for the next semester. The exceptions are as follows: 

Disqualified Stiidents — Students who are disqualified at the 
end of a semester and have not been reinstated will not 
receive registration materials; they must apply for readmis- 
sion, and it admitted, may he subject to new curriculum 
requirements. 



ForeigJt-Visa Students — Students with foreign visas are re- 
quired to maintain continuous enrollment. The stop-out 
policy is not applicable. 

Students absent for more than one semester must apply for read- 
mission should they wish to return to Fullerton. In some cases, 
however, election of catalog requirements will not be jeopardized 
for certain students. Students should consult an evaluator in the 
Office of Admissions & Records. 


108 Continuous Residence Regulations 


Leave of Absence 

A leave of absence may be granted based on certain documented 
extenuating circumstances and normally is granted for not more 
than one year. 

Such an approved leave of absence authorizes the student to 
return without reapplying to the university and continue under 
the catalog requirements that applied to the enrollment prior to 
the absence. 

Undergraduate and postbaccalaureate unclassified graduate stu- 
dents on approved leaves of one year (two academic semesters) or 
less are eligible to register for the semester immediately following 
the end of the leave and will be mailed registration materials 
automatically. 

The leave of absence policy for conditionally classified and classi- 
fied graduate students and credential students is defined in the 
“Graduate Regulations” section of this catalog. 

Withdrawal from the University 

A student who wishes to withdraw from the university during a 
semester must complete a Change of Program form and obtain 
the required approvals. See the section on refund of fees for 
possible refunds. No student may withdraw after the date shown 
on the university calendar as the last day of instruction. Com- 
plete withdrawal from the university is accomplished by follow- 
ing the procedures for dropping classes. 

Retention, Probation and 
Disqualification 

For purposes of determining a student’s ability to remain in the 
university both quality of performance and progress towards the 
educational objective will be considered. 

Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on academic probation 
if in any semester the cumulative grade-point average or the 
grade-point average at Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on a 
four-point scale). The student shall be advised of probation status 
promptly and, except in unusual instances, before the start of the 
next consecutive enrollment period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from academic pro- 
bation and restored to clear standing upon achieving a cumula- 
tive grade-point average of 2.0 in all academic work attempted, 
in all such work attempted at Fullerton, and is making satisfac- 
tory progress towards his or her educational objective. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified or unde- 
clared status but not second baccalaureate degree students) shall 
be subject to academic probation if after completing 1 2 or more 


units his or her postbaccalaureate cumulative grade-point average 
for units attempted at California State University, Fullerton falls 
below a 2.50 average. The GPA will determine whether a student 
is subject to probation only after the student has completed 12 
semester units. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program in 
either conditionally classified or classified standing shall be sub- 
ject to academic probation if he or she fails to maintain a cumula- 
tive grade-point average of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a four- point 
scale) in all units attempted. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation shall be sub- 
ject to academic disqualification if: 

1 . as a lower-division student (fewer than 60 semester units of 
college work completed) he or she falls 15 or more grade 
points below a 2.0 average on all college units attempted or in 
all units attempted at this institution; or 

2. as a junior (60 to 89 Vi semester units of college work complet- 
ed) he or she falls nine or more grade points below a 2.0 
average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted 
at this institution; or 

3. as a senior (90 or more semester units of college work complet- 
ed) he or she falls six or more grade points below a 2.0 average 
on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution. 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program shall he 
subject to disqualification if while on probation sufficient grade 
points are not achieved to remove probationary status. Disqualifi- 
cation may be either from further registration in a particular 
program or from further enrollment in the university, as deter- 
mined by appropriate campus authority. 

A postbaccalaureate student who is on probation shall be subject 
to disqualification if he or she fails to earn at least a 2. 50 grade- 
point average each term after the completion of 12 units at 
California State University, Fullerton in postbaccalaureate sta- 
tus. Disqualification may be either from further registration as a 
postbacca laureate, credential or certificate program student or 
from enrollment at California State University, Fullerton, as 
determined by the vice president for academic affairs or designee. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in atten- 
dance to secure a sound education and that they will conduct 
themselves as mature citizens of the campus community. Compli- 
ance with all regulations of the university is therefore expected. 
If, however, on any occasion a student or an organization is 
alleged to have compromised accepted university standards, ap- 


Continuous Residency Regulations 109 


propriate judiciary procedures shall be initiated through the es- 
tablished university process. Every effort will be made to encour- 
age and support the development of self-discipline and control by 
students and student organizations. The vice president for stu- 
dent affairs, aided by members of the faculty, is responsible to the 
president of the university for the behavior of students in their 
relationships to the university. The president in turn is responsi- 
ble to the chancellor and the trustees of The California State 
University, who themselves are governed by specific laws of the 
State of California. 

Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions 
taken by appropriate university authorities. Regulations govern- 
ing original hearings and appeal rights and procedures have been 
carefully detailed to provide maximum protection to both the 
individual charged and the university community. 

If the issue cannot be resolved informally, students should consult 
with the coordinator of academic appeals. 

Inappropriate conduct by students or by applicants for admission 
is subject to discipline as provided in Sections 41301 through 
41304 of Title 5, Code of Regulations. These sections follow. 

Article 1.1, Title 5, California Code of 
Regulations 

41301. Expulsion, Suspension and Probation of Students. Fol- 
lowing procedures consonant with due process established pursu- 
ant to Section 41304, any student of a campus may be expelled, 
suspended, placed on probation or given a lesser sanction for one 
or more of the following causes which must be campus-related: 

(a) Cheating or plagiarism in connection with an academic 
program at a campus. 

(b) Forgery, alteration or misuse of campus documents, re- 
cords, or identification of knowingly furnishing false infor- 
mation to a campus. 

(c) Misrepresentation of oneself or of an organization to be an 
agent of a campus. 

(d) Obstruction or disruption, on or off campus property, of the 
campus educational process, administrative process, or 
other campus function. 

(e) Physical abuse on or off campus property of the person or 
property of any member of the campus community or of 
members of his or her family or the threat of such physical 
abuse. 

(0 Theft of, or non-accidental damage to, campus property, or 
property in the possession of, or owned by, a member of the 
campus community. 

(g) Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or misuse of 
campus property 


(h) On campus property, the sale or knowing possession of 
dangerous drugs, restricted dangerous drugs, or narcotics as 
those terms are used in California statutes, except when 
lawfully prescribed pursuant to medical or dental care, or 
when lawfully permitted for the purpose of research, in- 
struction or analysis. 

(i) Knowing possession or use of explosives, dangerous chemi- 
cals or deadly weapons on campus property or at a campus 
function without prior authorization of the campus presi- 
dent. 

(j) Engaging in lewd, indecent, or obscene behavior on cam- 
pus property or at a campus function. 

(k) Abusive behavior directed toward, or hazing of, a member 
of the campus community. 

(l) Violation of any order of a campus president, notice of 
which had been given prior to such violation and during 
the academic term in which the violation occurs, either by 
publication in the campus newspaper, or by posting on an 
official bulletin board designated for this purpose, and 
which order is not inconsistent with any of the other provi- 
sions of this Section. 

(m) Soliciting or assisting another to do any act which would 
subject a student to expulsion, suspension or probation 
pursuant to this Section. 

(n) For purposes of this Article, the following terms are de- 
fined: 

( 1 ) The term “member of the campus community” is de- 
fined as meaning California State University trustees, 
academic, non-academic and administrative person- 
nel, students, and other persons while such other per- 
sons are on campus property or at a campus function. 

(2) The term “campus property” includes: 

(A) Real or personal property in the possession of, or 
under the control of, the Board of Trustees of 
The California State University, and 

(B) All campus feeding, retail, or residence facilities 
whether operated by a campus or by a campus 
auxiliary organization. 

(3) The term “deadly weapons” includes any instrument or 
weapon of the kind commonly known as a blackjack, 
sling shot, billy, sandclub, sandbag, metal knuckles, 
any dirk, dagger, switchblade knife, pistol, revolver, or 
any other firearm, any knite having a blade longer 
than five inches, any razor with an unguarded blade, 
and any metal pipe or bar used or intended to be used as 
a club. 

(4) The term “behavior” includes conduct and expression. 


110 Continuous Residency Regulations 


(5) The term “hazing” means any method of initiation into 
a student organization or any pastime or amusement 
engaged in with regard to such an organization which 
causes, or is likely to cause, bodily danger, or physical 
or emotional harm, to any member of the campus 
community; but the term “hazing” does not include 
customary athletic events or other similar contests or 
competitions. 

(o) This Section is not adopted pursuant to Education Code 
Section 89031. 

(p) Notwithstanding any amendment or repeal pursuant to the 
resolution by which any provision of this Article is amend- 
ed, all acts and omissions occurring prior to that effective 
date shall be subject to the provisions of this Article as in 
effect immediately prior to such effective date. 

41302. Disposition of Fees: Campus Emergency; Interim Sus- 
pension. The President of the campus may place on probation, 
suspend, or expel a student for one or more of the causes enumer- 
ated in Section 41301. No fees or tuition paid by or for such 
student for the semester, quarter, or summer session in which he 
or she is suspended or expelled shall be refunded. If the student is 
readmitted before the close of the semester, quarter, or summer 
session in which he or she is suspended, no additional tuition or 
fees shall be required of the student on account of the suspension. 

During periods of campus emergency, as determined by the Presi- 
dent of the individual campus, the President may, after consulta- 
tion with the Chancellor, place into immediate effect any emer- 
gency regulations, procedures, and other measures deemed nec- 
essary or appropriate to meet the emergency, safeguard persons 
and property, and maintain educational activities. 

The President may immediately impose an interim suspension in 
all cases in which there is reasonable cause to believe that such an 
immediate suspension is required in order to protect lives or 
property and to insure the maintenance of order. A student so 
placed on interim suspension shall be given prompt notice of 
charges and the opportunity for a hearing within 10 days of the 
imposition of interim suspension. During the period of interim 
suspension, the student shall not, without prior written permis- 
sion of the President or designated representative, enter any 
campus of the California State University other than to attend 
the hearing. Violation of any condition of interim suspension 
shall be grounds for expulsion. 

41303. Conduct by Applicants for Admission. Notwithstand- 
ing any provision in this Chapter 1 to the contrary, admission or 
readmission may be qualified or denied to any person who, while 
not enrolled as a student, commits acts which, were he enrolled 
as a student, would be the basis for disciplinary proceedings 
pursuant to Sections 41301 or 41302. Admission or readmission 
may be qualified or denied to any person who, while a student, 
commits acts which are subject to disciplinary action pursuant to 
Section 41301 or Section 41302. Qualified admission or denial of 
admission in such cases shall be determined under procedures 
adopted pursuant to Section 41304. 


41304. Student Disciplinary Procedures for The California 
State University. The Chancellor shall prescribe, and may from 
time to time revise, a code of student disciplinary procedures for 
The California State University. Subject to other applicable law, 
this code shall provide for determinations of tact and sanctions to 
be applied for conduct which is a ground of discipline under 
Sections 41301 or 41 302, and for qualified admission or denial of 
admission under Section 41303; the authority of the campus 
president in such matters; conduct-related determinations on 
financial aid eligibility and termination; alternative kinds of pro- 
ceedings, including proceedings conducted by a hearing officer; 
time limitations; notice; conduct of hearings, including provi- 
sions governing evidence, a record, and review; and such other 
related matters as may be appropriate. The chancellor shall re- 
port to the Board his actions taken under this section. 

Debts Owed to the University 

Should a student or former student fail to pay a debt owed to the 
university, the university may “withhold permission to register, to 
use facilities for which a fee is authorized to be charged, to receive 
services, materials, food or merchandise or any combination of 
the above from any person owing a debt” until the debt is paid 
(see Title 5, California Code of Regulations, Sections 42380 and 
42381). For example, the institution may withhold permission to 
receive official transcripts of grades for any person owing a debt. 
If a student believes that he or she does not owe all or part of an 
unpaid obligation, the student should consult the business office. 
The business office, or another office to which the student may 
be referred, will review the pertinent information, including 
information the student may wish to present, and will advise the 
student of its conclusions with respect to the debt. 

Student Rights 

Right of Petition 

Students may petition for review of certain university academic 
regulations when unusual circumstances exist. It should he not- 
ed, however, that academic regulations when they are contained 
in Title 5, California Code of Regulations, are not subject to 
petition. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admissions and 
Records. The university petitions committee will take action on 
the petition based on recommendations provided by appropriate 
officers and the student will be notified of the decision. Results of 
the action will be placed in the student’s folder in the Office of 
Admissions and Records. 

The petitions committee members shall consist of the associate 
dean of each school, or designee, a professional staff member 
appointed by the director of admissions and records, the coordin- 
ator of undergraduate studies, one faculty member of the Univer- 
sity General Education Committee, and the assistant registrar, 
who will serve as the secretary. 


Continuous Residency Regulations 111 


Right of Noncompliance 

Certain university activities either within or outside of the class- 
room may involve varying degrees of risk to the participants. It is 
university policy that the instructor directing such activities fully 
divulge to all potential participants the specific nature of such 
risks and obtain from them their expressed or implied consent 
prior to undertaking activities. 

The student who at any time comes to believe that the risks, 
whether physical or psychological, are excessive has the responsi- 
bility to withdraw from participation at the time and to inquire of 
the instructor if there are alternative means of fulfilling the re- 
quirements without penalty. If there is none, the student may 
petition for withdrawal from the course without penalty or appeal 
for an appropriate modification of the activity. The appeal may 
be made either to the chair of the department concerned, or to 
the chair of the Committee on Activities Involving Human Sub- 
jects, or both. 

Right of Academic Appeal 

The right of due process, appeal and peer judgment is established 
by the Student Bill of Rights and Responsibilities for students 
who feel they have been treated capriciously or with prejudice by 
faculty or administrators. Students should make every effort to 
resolve the issue informally by consulting the individual con- 
cerned, and if necessary the department chair and dean of the 
school. 

Students who still believe the problem has not been resolved 
should consult with the coordinator of academic appeals. Upon 
the student’s request, the coordinator will convene the Academic 
Appeals Board to hear the students complaint. Students must 
initiate the appeals process by contacting the faculty member 
and/or the department chair within one academic month after 
they could reasonably be expected to be aware of the action in 
question. 

Copies of the governing documents are available in the Academ- 
ic Appeals Office. 

Privacy Rights of Students 

The federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 
(20 U.S.C. 1232g) and regulations adopted thereunder (34 
C. F. R. 99)and California Education Code Section 67 1 00 et seq. , 
set out requirements designed to protect the privacy of students 
concerning their records maintained by the campus. Specifically, 
the statute and regulations govern access to student records main- 
tained by the university, and the release of such records. In brief, 
the law provides that the university must provide students access 
to official records related to them and an opportunity for a hear- 
ing to challenge such records on the grounds that they are inaccu- 
rate, misleading or otherwise inappropriate. The right to a hear- 
ing under the law does not include any right to challenge the 
appropriateness of a grade as determined by the instructor. The 
law generally requires that written consent of the student be 
received before releasing personally identifiable data about the 


student from records to other than a specified list of exceptions. 
The institution has adopted a set of policies and procedures 
concerning implementation of the statutes and the regulations 
on the campus. Copies of these policies and procedures may be 
obtained from the vice president for student affairs. Among the 
types of information included in the campus statement of policies 
and procedures are: (1) the types of student records and the 
information contained therein; (2) the official responsible for the 
maintenance of each type of record; (3) the location of access 
lists which indicate persons requesting or receiving information 
from the record; (4) policies for reviewing and expunging records; 
(5) the access rights of students; (6) the procedures for challeng- 
ing the content of student records; (7) the cost which will be 
charged for reproducing copies of records; and (8) the right of the 
student to file a complaint with the Department of Education. 
An office and review board have been established by the Depart- 
ment to investigate and adjudicate violations and complaints. 
The office designated for this purpose is: The Family Educational 
Rights and Privacy Act Office (FERPA), U.S. Department of 
Health, Education and Welfare, 330 C Street, Room 4511, 
Washington, D.C. 20202. 

The campus is authorized under the Act to release “directory 
information” concerning students. “Directory information” in- 
cludes the student’s name, address, telephone listing, date and 
place of birth, major field of study, participation in officially 
recognized activities and sports, weight and height of members of 
athletic teams, dates of attendance, degrees and awards received, 
and the most recent previous educational agency or institution 
attended by the student. The above designated information is 
subject to release by the university at any time unless it has 
received prior written objection from the student specifying in- 
formation that the student requests not be released. Written 
objections should be sent to the vice president for student affairs. 

Hie campus is authorized to provide access to student records to 
campus officials and employees who have legitimate educational 
interests in such access. These persons are those who have re- 
sponsibilities in connection with the university’s academic, ad- 
ministrative or service functions and who have reason for using 
student records connected with university or other related aca- 
demic responsibilities. Disclosure may also be made to other 
persons or organizations under certain conditions (e.g. as part of 
accreditation or program evaluation; in response to a court order 
or subpoena; in connection with financial aid; to other institu- 
tions to which the student is transferring). 

Use of Social Security Number 

Applicants are required to include their Social Security account 
number in designated places on applications for admission pursu- 
ant to the authority contained in Title 5, California Code of 
Regulations, Section 41201. The Social Security account number 
is used as a means of identifying records pertaining to the student 
as well as identifying the student for purposes of financial aid 
eligibility and disbursement and the repayment of financial aid 
and other debts payable to the institution. 


112 Continuous Residency Regulations 



Graduate Applications 

All applicants for any type of postbaccalaureate or graduate 
standing (e.g., master’s degree applicants, those seeking creden- 
tials, and those interested in taking courses for personal or profes- 
sional growth) must file a complete application within the appro- 
priate filing period. Second baccalaureate degree candidates should 
apply as postbaccalaureate students with an undergraduate degree 
objective. A complete application for postbaccalaureate or gradu- 
ate standing includes all of the forms and fees described in the 
application booklet, including the supplementary graduate ad- 
missions application. Applicants who completed undergraduate 
degree requirements and graduated the preceding term are also 
required to complete and submit an application and the nonre- 
fundable application fee. In the event that an applicant wishes to 
be assured of initial consideration by more than one campus, it is 
necessary to submit a separate application (including fee) to 
each. 

Applications may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and 
Records or the Graduate Studies Office of any California State 
University campus. Instructions for completing the application 
forms are included in the material supplied. Since some programs 
require the completion of an additional form as part of the appli- 
cation process, students should inquire concerning this possibil- 
ity at the office of the academic unit offering the particular 
program. 

Transcripts 

When an applicant for graduate standing, with a master’s degree 
objective, a credential-only objective, or a master’s degree and 
credential objective, receives the application acknowledgement, 
requests should be submitted to all of the institutions of higher 
learning in which previously registered, requesting that two offi- 
cial transcripts from each institution be sent to the university 
Admissions and Records office. 

One copy of each transcript will be forwarded to the academic 
unit offering the degree or credential program specified by the 
student as the objective; and the other official transcript will be 
retained for use by both the Admissions and Records Office and 
the Graduate Studies Office. 

Students who receive their baccalaureate degree at Cal State 
Fullerton and continuing graduate students who change their 
declared objective subsequent to admission must obtain whatever 
additional transcripts are needed to provide two complete sets 
of transcripts, but do not need to request Cal State Fullerton 
transcripts. 



114 Graduate Applications 


Postbaccalaureate applicants with no degree or credential objec- 
tive must submit a transcript from the college or university where 
the baccalaureate was earned. Further, one transcript from other 
institutions attended is required as necessary so that Cal State 
Fullerton has a complete record of the last 60 semester units 
attempted prior to enrollment at Fullerton. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institu- 
tions and become official records of the university; such tran- 
scripts therefore cannot be returned or reissued. Transcripts 
which include course work from other than the issuing institu- 
tion are not sufficient evidence of course work taken elsewhere. 
Foreign language transcripts must be accompanied by certified 
English translations. 

Tests 

The Graduate Record Examination (GRE), or another test, may 
be required for conditionally classified admission, or subsequent- 
ly for the granting of classified standing. Test requirements vary 
from department to department. Students should refer to mas- 
ter s degree requirements outlined by each department in the 
“Curricula” section of this catalog. Applications and information 
on test dates for nationally administered tests (e.g. GRE, 
GMAT) are available in the Testing Center. 

TOEFL Requirement 

All graduate and postbaccalaureate applicants, regardless of citi- 
zenship, whose preparatory education was principally in a lan- 
guage other than English, must demonstrate competence in En- 
glish. Those who do not possess a bachelor’s degree from a post- 
secondary institution where English is the principal language of 
instruction must receive a minimum score of 550 on the Test of 
English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). Students interested in 
the MBA program must present a minimum score of 570 on the 
TOEFL. 


International Students 

See procedures outlined in the international student portion of 
the “Admissions Policies” section of this catalog. 

Second Master’s Degree or 
Concentration 

Students may wish to pursue a second master’s degree or concen- 
tration. Approval for admission to graduate standing in the sec- 
ond degree program or concentration may be given only after the 
first degree has been awarded. Units used for the first degree or 
concentration may not be applied to the second. Students who 
have completed a master’s degree at Cal State Fullerton in one 
concentration and wish to complete another will not be awarded 
a second degree. 

Nonaccredited Schools 

An applicant who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school must 
apply for admission as an undergraduate to complete require- 
ments for a bachelor’s degree from this institution. However, 
once admitted, a student in this category who gives evidence of 
unusual promise and superior background may petition for gradu- 
ate standing as conditionally classified. If the petition is granted, 
the student may then proceed in the graduate program. If the 
petition is denied, the student may be requested to complete a 
specified number of undergraduate units in order to establish 
equivalency to the bachelor’s degree or to complete requirements 
for a bachelor’s degree at CSUF. For further information, contact 
the Graduate Studies Office. 


Graduate Applications 115 


Graduate Admissions 


Following completion of application procedures and subsequent 
review of the student’s eligibility by the Admissions Office and 
appropriate academic unit, the student will be notified by the 
Admissions Office concerning admission. Only a written notice 
from the Admissions Office is valid proof of admission. Academic 
advisement prior to admission is tentative and cannot be con- 
strued as granting official admission to a program or establishing 
requirements for the degree. 


Students may apply for a degree objective, a credential or certifi- 
cate objective, or no program objective. Four admission categor- 
ies are defined in terms of these academic objectives. 

Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Unclassified 

To qualify for admission with no degree objective, students must 
( 1 ) hold an acceptable bachelor’s degree from a regionally accre- 
dited institution or have equivalent preparation as determined by 
the appropriate campus authority; (2) have a grade point average 
of at least 2.5 (A = 4.0) in the last 60 semester (90 quarter) 
units; and (3) have been in good standing at the last college 
attended. In unusual circumstances, exceptions may be made to 
these criteria. 


Admission with posthaccalaureate-unclassified standing does not 
constitute admission to graduate degree or credential programs. If 
a student wishes to change academic objective after admission, 
an application for change of objective must be filed in the Admis- 
sions Office. 

Postbaccalaureate Standing: 
Classified 

To qualify for admission with a credential or certificate objective, 
students must ( 1 ) meet the requirements for posthaccalaureate- 
unclassified standing and (2) satisfy any additional professional, 
personal, scholastic, and other standards, including qualifying 
examinations. Refer to specific credential requirements under 
the departmental section of this catalog. 


Graduate Standing: Conditionally 
Classified 

To qualify for admission with a graduate degree objective, stu- 
dents must ( 1 ) meet the admission requirements for postbacca- 
laureate-unclassified standing and (2) meet any additional re- 
quirements of the particular program including a favorable rec- 
ommendation from the academic unit. 

An applicant who has deficiencies in prerequisite preparation or 
in grade-point average may be considered for admission in condi- 
tionally classified standing with the approval and recommenda- 
tion of the appropriate campus authority. A student admitted in 
conditionally classified standing may subsequently be granted 
classified standing in an authorized graduate degree curriculum if 
professional, personal, scholastic, or other standards including 
qualifying examinations are met. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

Determination of the student’s prerequisites and assignment of 
courses, units, and grade points required to remove deficiencies is 
made by the academic unit. For specific information on prerequi- 
sites to classified standing, consult departmental program re- 
quirements. 

Classified standing is normally granted when all prerequisites 
have been satisfactorily completed, the official study plan formu- 
lated, and the recommendation made by the appropriate gradu- 
ate adviser and committee to the Dean of Graduate Studies who 
gives final approval. An eligible student may be granted classified 
standing prior to the first registration or during the first semester 
of registration. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at this institution 
prior to classified standing will be applied to a master’s degree study 
plan. Any acceptable transfer work is excluded from the nine units 
permitted. 

It is the student’s responsibility to initiate the request for classi- 
fied standing in the appropriate academic unit by making an 
appointment w'ith the departmental graduate adviser. The stu- 
dent will be sent a copy of the approved study plan by the 
Graduate Studies Office. Copies will be filed in the academic 
unit, university records, and the Graduate Studies Office. A 
student is not officially classified until an approted study plan is on file 
in the Graduate Studies Office. 


116 Graduate Admissions 


Requirements for the 
Master’s Degree 



To he granted the master’s degree, a student must have been 
classified, advanced to candidacy, and completed a satisfactory 
pattern of study in an approved field. Requirements which apply 
to all programs follow. For specific requirements of particular pro- 
grams, see the program descriptions in the departmental section of this 
catalog. 

Each student’s program for a master’s degree (including eligibility, 
classified standing, candidacy, and award of the degree) must be 
approved by the graduate program adviser, the graduate commit' 
tee, and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

University Writing Requirement 

Students working toward a master’s degree are required to dem- 
onstrate writing ability commensurate with the baccalaureate 
degree. This requirement should be met within the first nine 
units of graduate work by successfully completing one of the 
following: 

1 . An upper-division writing requirement at any CSU campus. 

2. An upper-division course at another university equivalent to a 
course which meets the Cal State Fullerton requirement. 
Such equivalence must be certified by the department or 
program responsible for the student’s academic work. 

3. Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency. 

4. An upper-division or graduate-level course that is certified as 
meeting the writing requirement and is approved by the de- 
partment or program responsible for the student’s academic 
work. The grade received must be a C or better. 


Any student who has not met the requirement within the first 
nine units of graduate work shall be required to enroll in a 
certified course at the earliest opportunity. 

Departments and programs may, at their discretion and with 
approval of the Graduate Education Committee, establish addi- 
tional writing requirements for their graduate students. For fur- 
ther information, students should consult their program adviser 
or the Graduate Studies Office. 


Requirements for the Master’s Degree 117 


Study Plan 

General requirements for the master’s degree study plan include: 

1. A minimum of 30 approved semester units, or more, as 
determined by the particular program. 

2. A minimum of 21 semester units in residence (transfer and 
Cal State Fullerton extension or intersession course work are 
not considered to be in residence). 

3. A unit of course work taken at a college or university on the 
quarter system will be considered as equivalent to two-thirds 
of a unit when such course work is considered acceptable as 
transfer work. See additional requirements for transfer credit 
under “Graduate Enrollment Policies.” 

4. Upper-division and graduate- level courses only. The inclu- 
sion of 300- level course work is generally discouraged. The 
graduate program adviser must submit to the Dean of Gradu- 
ate Studies a written justification for any 300-level course 
work proposed for inclusion on the study plan unless it is an 
existing program requirement. 

5. Not less than one-half of the total units in graduate (500- 
level) courses. 

6. Not more than six semester units for a thesis, if a thesis is 
required. 

7. A maximum of six units of independent study (exceptions 
subject to approval by the appropriate school dean). 

8. No courses taken to satisfy prerequisite requirements includ- 
ed in the minimum of 30 units. 

9. None of the following: correspondence courses, credit by 
examination, or similar. 

10. No courses with nontraditional grades (e.g., CR, S, P). 

11. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 (B) in all courses 
attempted to satisfy requirements for the degree. 

12. All courses completed within five years of the date of award 
of the degree or satisfactorily validated. 

13. All courses taken after the baccalaureate (or postbaccalaur- 
eate credit granted) and not credited toward another degree. 

14. A final evaluation, which may be a thesis, a project, a 
comprehensive examination, or any combination of these. 


The approved study plan is valid as long as the student maintains 
continuous enrollment in regular semesters at the university; 
otherwise it is necessary to reapply and meet any changed or 
additional requirements approved in the interim. 

Election of Curriculum 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular semes- 
ters and continuing in the same curriculum may elect to meet the 
degree requirements in effect either at the time of entering the 
curriculum or at the time of completion of degree requirements, 
except that substitution for discontinued courses may be ap- 
proved by the graduate program adviser. 

Advisers and Committees 

University policy provides that each student’s program for the 
master’s degree shall be under the guidance of an adviser and 
committee. In some areas a graduate program adviser has been 
designated to give overall supervision for the graduate program. 
In others, the graduate program adviser also serves as the individ- 
ual student’s adviser. The student’s adviser is usually a member of 
the committee. The committee is responsible for all major rec- 
ommendations to the Dean of Graduate Studies regarding the 
student’s achievement of classified standing, advancement to 
candidacy, and completion of the master’s degree. 

It is the responsibility of the student to arrange appointments for 
advisement and other information in the office of the academic 
unit offering the degree program. As a minimum, the student 
should obtain advisement ( 1 ) either prior to or during the first 
semester of attendance, (2) when requesting classified standing, 
and (3) when applying for a graduation check prior to the final 
semester. 

It is advisable for the student to maintain a personal file of 
transcripts and other evidences of grades and achievements, and 
to carry these whenever seeking advisement. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

A student who has been granted classified standing is normally 
advanced to candidacy after a request is filed for graduation by 
the student and an affirmative recommendation made by the 
graduate program adviser. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 
(B) for all study plan course work is required; other scholastic, 
professional and personal standards, the passing of examinations, 
and other qualifications, may be prescribed. Only those students 
who continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic 
competence and fitness, as determined by the appropriate au- 
thorities, shall be eligible to continue in graduate programs. 


118 Requirements for the Master’s Degree 


Completion of Requirements and 
Award of Degree 

The degree is awarded upon the satisfactory completion of all 
state and university requirements, the specific requirements for 
the particular program, the recommendation of the appropriate 
graduate adviser and committee (advancement to candidacy), 
and the approval of the faculty and the Dean of Graduate Stud- 
ies. It is highly recommended that all work for the degree, except 
final course examinations, be submitted by the last day of classes, 
in order to assure granting of the degree by the end of the semes- 
ter or session. 

If a thesis is required, it must be deposited in the Titan Bookstore 
in accordance with the instruction shown under “Theses and 
Projects,” no later than the last day of final examinations for the 
semester or session in which the degree is to be awarded. 

It is the student’s responsibility to file an application for a gradua- 
tion check and pay the graduation and diploma fee prior to the 
beginning of the final semester. Forms are available at the Admis- 
sions and Records information counter, the Graduate Studies 
Office, and the Registrar’s Office graduation unit. 

The application for graduation initiates review of degree requirements 
and formal approval by the faculty as well as serving as a diphmui 
order. The last date to file the application is listed in the academic 
calendar of the class schedule for each regular semester. Candi- 
dates for August graduation must file their requests prior to regis- 
tration for the spring semester. 

Students who fail to complete requirements as planned must 
update the application for a graduation check and do so by the 
appropriate deadline. An additional fee may be required. 

Since Cal State Fullerton is on the semester basis, master’s degree 
programs are ordinarily completed in January and June. A stu- 
dent who wishes to complete requirements during the summer 
must obtain written approval prior to summer term on a form 
available in the Graduate Studies Office. The approved form 
must be returned to Graduate Studies during the spring semester. 

The effective date of graduation will be the last day of the specific 
term in which requirements are completed. 

Commencement ceremonies are held only at the end of the 
spring semester. Students completing requirements at the end of 
the fall and spring semesters and during the following summer 
may participate in those ceremonies. Information concerning 
commencement activities is sent to students by the Registrar 
during the final semester. Arrangements for cap, gown and hood 
rental are made in the Titan Bookstore. 


Time Limit for Completion 

All requirements for the master’s degree, including all course 
work on the student’s study plan, normally should be completed 
within five years. This time limit commences with the semester 
of the earliest course used on the student’s study plan and consists 
of a total of ten (10) consecutive semesters. When individual 
circumstances warrant, this time limit may be extended for up to 
two years (four additional consecutive semesters). 

A student may request an extension of the five year time limit by 
filing a petition with the Graduate Studies Office. The petition 
must contain a full explanation of the circumstances which pre- 
vented completion of the degree requirements within the normal 
five-year limit and must be approved (signed) by the graduate 
program adviser, the chair of the appropriate graduate committee 
and the Dean of Graduate Studies. Approvals for extension must be 
obtained prim to the expiration of the five-year limit. 

Outdated course work (course work older than the student’s ap- 
proved time limit; i.e. , normally five years but with approval may 
be a maximum of seven years) must be repeated. A maximum of 
nine ( 9) units of course work may be exempt from this policy if it can be 
validated. Copies of the “Petition for Validating Outdated 
Coursework” may be obtained from the Graduate Studies Office. 
Validation is allowed at the discretion of the graduate program 
adviser, the academic unit offering the subject course and the 
Dean of Graduate Studies. Validation must be accomplished by 
passing a written comprehensive test of the materials covered by 
the course being validated or by some equivalent method with 
prior approval of both the graduate program adviser and the Dean 
of Graduate Studies. Any outdated course work which cannot be 
validated either because of a denial of the petition or because it is 
in excess of the nine units allowed for validation, must be repeat- 
ed or updated through the use of additional study plan course 
work. If course work is repeated or additional course work is 
required to update, the units and grades will be added to the study 
plan. 

NOTE: Outdated transfer course work cannot be validated. 

Changes in Study Plan 

If a classified graduate student wishes to make a change in the 
approved study plan, a request should be made to the appropriate 
graduate program adviser. Requests must be made prior to regis- 
tration for any course work to be substituted or added. No course 
may be removed from the study plan after a student has taken it. 
Forms which may be used to file a request are available in the 
Graduate Studies Office. 

Changes in study plan may also be warranted by outdated 
coursework or grade-point average (see “Time Limit for Comple- 
tion” and “Grade-point Average Standards”). 


Requirements for the Master’s Degree 119 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 


Consult previous sections of this catalog and the class schedule 
for other information and regulations relating to registration and 
enrollment. 

Residence Requirement 

A student is considered to be in residence when registered during 
regular semesters at this university. Of the minimum of 30 semes- 
ter units of approved course work required for the master’s degree, 
not less than 21 shall he completed in residence at this institu- 
tion. Approved units earned in summer sessions may be substitut- 
ed for regular semester unit requirements on a unit for unit basis. 
Extension or intersession course work may not be used to fulfill 
the minimum residence requirement. 

Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective should main- 
tain continuous enrollment during regular semesters (summer 
sessions and extension excluded) until award of the degree. This 
policy is designed to eliminate the need for readmission to the 
university, provide opportunity for continuous use of facilities, 
including the Library, and assure the development of an integrat- 
ed program, adequately supervised, and effectively terminated 
within the time limitations allowed by regulations. 

Unless granted an approved leave of absence, a graduate student 
who fails to register each semester has discontinued enrollment in 
the graduate degree program. If the student wishes to resume 
studies, it will be necessary to reapply for admission to the univer- 
sity and to the degree program and meet any changed or addition- 
al requirements approved in the interim. 

Students who may have completed all course work, but who may 
not have satisfactorily completed a comprehensive examination 
or other requirement, are expected to maintain continuous en- 
rollment until award of the degree. 



A graduate student who finds it impossible to attend during a 
certain semester and is not eligible for a leave of absence, must 
register in Graduate Studies 700. Registration in this course is 
restricted to conditionally classified or classified graduate stu- 
dents. It carries no unit credit and does not require class atten- 
dance. Registration in this course in each semester when no 
other course work is taken will be necessary until award of the 
degree. 


120 Graduate Enrollment Policies 


Similarly, Credential Studies 701 is available for students with a 
credential-only objective who find it impossible to enroll in 
course work and are not eligible for a leave of absence. 

Leave of Absence 

Graduate degree or credential students may request a leave of 
absence for up to one year. Conditionally classified or classified 
graduate students qualify for a leave if they are in good academic 
standing and have completed at least six credit hours’ work to- 
ward the degree in residence at Cal State Fullerton. Students 
with a credential-only objective qualify if they have completed at 
least one semester of course work in good academic standing. 
Forms to request a leave of absence are available at the Admis- 
sions and Records information counter or in the Graduate Stud- 
ies Office. 

Any one of the following circumstances may he grounds for 
requesting a leave of absence: 

1. Illness or disability (permanent or temporary) or similar per- 
sonal exigencies including pregnancy which make it impossi- 
ble or inadvisable for a student to register for classes. 

2. Activities which enhance a student’s professional career ob- 
jectives. 

3. Active duty in the armed forces of the United States. 

4. Other reasons at the discretion of the Dean of Graduate Stud- 
ies. 

After review by the Graduate Studies Office, the academic unit 
(where applicable), and the Registrar’s Office, a response is 
mailed to the student. 

A first-time leave of absence of one semester only will normally 
be granted upon request for students who qualify and will not 
require an application for readmission to the university. Registra- 
tion materials for the semester following the leave will be sent to 
the student. 

Students requesting a subsequent leave or a leave longer than one 
semester are required to provide appropriate documentation 
(e.g. , doctor’s recommendation, verification of employment). 
Such requests must also be endorsed by the program adviser. A 
leave granted for more than one semester does not reserve a place 
for the student at this university. An application for admission 
must be filed in order to be readmitted and permitted to enroll 
when the leave terminates. 

A leave granted to a degree objective student preserves the elec- 
tion of curriculum rights regarding catalog requirements. Howev- 
er, leaves of absence do not change the time limit for completion 
of the degree. For credential students, a leave granted by the 
University does not exempt them from new requirements im- 


posed by the State regardless of the catalog year and also does not 
extend time limitations imposed by the State for completing 
specific teaching credential requirements. 


Study Load 

Graduate students must carry a study load of 12 units of course 
work a semester or nine units of which six are in 500-level courses 
for full-time enrollment certification by the university. A normal 
full-time load in summer session is one and one-third units per 
week of instruction. The maximum study load for students work- 
ing toward a master’s degree is 12 units per semester; in excep- 
tional cases, however, a student may take more with the approval 
of the graduate program adviser. 

Enrollment in Extended Education 
Programs 

In addition to its regular academic programs, the university offers 
a number of courses through its extended education program. 
These include the summer session, the extension program and 
adjunct enrollment (a program permitting those who are not 
formally enrolled to take regular university courses). 


The applicability of credit earned through courses taken in any of 
the programs sponsored by the Office of Extended Education is 
subject to approval by the graduate program adviser and Dean of 
Graduate Studies. 


Summer Sessions 

Appropriate courses taken during the summer session may be 
applied to a graduate degree program, providing the courses are 
approved in advance. 


Extension 

No more than nine units of credit earned in the university exten- 
sion program (including intersession course work) may he applied 
to a graduate degree. Consultation with a graduate adviser before 
taking an extension course is strongly recommended. 


It should be noted that enrollment in summer session or exten- 
sion courses does not constitute admission to the university or 
enrollment as a continuing student in the university. Any student 
desiring a master’s degree must be admitted to a regular semester 
(fall or spring). 


Graduate Enrollment Policies 121 


Enrollment in 500-Level Courses 
by Seniors 

Undergraduate students may enroll in graduate level courses (500 
level) if they: 

a. have reached senior status (i.e. , completed a minimum of 90 
semester units) 

b. have the academic preparation and prerequisites required for 
entry into the course 

c. gain the consent of the instructor. 

Students wishing to use 500- level course work taken during their 
undergraduate degree toward a master’s degree should read the 
following section on Postgraduate Credit. 

Postgraduate Credit 

A graduate student may petition for a maximum of nine units of 
postgraduate credit for course work (either 400 or 500 level) 
taken during the undergraduate degree if: 

a. the course work was not used to meet any of the university’s 
requirements for the baccalaureate degree (including major, 
minor or concentration) 

b. the course work was taken during the final two semesters 
prior to the student’s graduation 

c. approved by the registrar of the appropriate university. 

Petition forms are available at the Admissions and Records infor- 
mation counter. If approved, appropriate notations will he en- 
tered on the student’s permanent record. 

The use of postgraduate course work on a student’s graduate study 
plan is governed by the general regulations for all graduate de- 
grees and must he approved by the program adviser, the appropri- 
ate graduate committee and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Transfer Credit Policy 

Graduate students may be able to use a limited amount of transfer 
course work in meeting the requirements for a master’s degree. 


The use of transfer course work on a student’s study plan is subject 
to the following provisions: 

1. The course work being transferred must: 

a. have been taken at an accredited college or university. 

b. be acceptable for credit toward a graduate degree at the 
institution where the course work was taken. 

c. have been completed with a grade of B or better. 

d. not have been used in meeting the requirements for an- 
other earned degree (either graduate or undergraduate). 

e. have been completed within the student’s five-year time 
period which is required for completion of the require- 
ments for the master’s degree at CSUF. 

2. An absolute minimum of 21 semester units toward any mas- 
ter’s degree at CSUF must be in residence units. For master’s 
degrees requiring more than 42 semester units, a minimum of 
half of the units used on the student’s study plan must be in 
residence units. Residence units include regular courses and 
extension courses offered as special sessions. 

3. Use of transfer work on a student’s study plan is subject to all 
other policies concerning study plan course work; e.g., fifty 
percent must be graduate level work, no correspondence 
course work, no credit by examination, no courses with non- 
traditional grades. 

4. In all cases, the use of transfer course work on a student’s study 
plan is subject to the acceptance and approval of the academic 
unit’s graduate adviser and the Dean of Graduate Studies. 
Course work taken at another institution after admission to 
CSUF as a graduate student is rarely accepted for credit to- 
ward a master’s degree and can only be accepted if the student 
has received prior approval of both the graduate adviser and 
the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

5. Total approved transfer units and grade points will be entered 
on the CSUF transcript at graduation. 


122 Graduate Enrollment Policies 


Graduate Academic Standards 


Grade-Point Average Standards 

Prerequisites 

The grade-point average required for prerequisites prior to classi- 
fied standing varies according to the particular program. See 
requirements in departmental sections of this catalog. 

Study Plan 

Grade-point averages are calculated by dividing grade points 
earned by units attempted. The 30 or more semester units of 
approved study plan course work, including transfer work, re- 
quired for the degree must be completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum 
grade-point average. If a student approaches the completion of 
the degree requirements with less than a 3.0 average, a request 
may be made for a change in the study plan to add no more than 
six units of course work in order to achieve at least a 3.0. Requests 
for course work to be added to the study plan must be approved by 
the graduate program adviser and Dean of Graduate Studies prior 
to registration (see “Changes in Study Plan”). If the grade-point 
average at any time falls below such a level that it cannot be 
raised to a 3.0 within the prescribed limits of course work, this 
has the effect of withdrawing the student from the master’s degree 
program. 

If permission is given to repeat a course, and the course is success- 
fully repeated, both grades are considered in computing grade- 
point averages. However, successful repetition of a course origin- 
ally passed carries no additional unit credit toward a degree. 

University 

A graduate degree student is expected to earn a 3.0 average in all 
postbaccalaureate course work taken at this university. Exception 
to this rule may be granted only if courses for which grades are not 
to be computed in the GPA have never been part of the student’s 
study plan for the degree, and if it is evident that they are 
inapplicable and inappropriate to the degree program. 

Academic Probation and 
Disqualification 

A graduate student enrolled in a graduate degree program in 
either conditionally classified or classified graduate standing is 
subject to academic probation if a cumulative grade-point aver- 
age of at least 3.0 (grade of B on a four-point scale) is not 
maintained. 


If sufficient grade points to remove probationary status are not 
earned while on probation, the student is subject to disqualifica- 
tion. Disqualification will prevent further registration in a par- 
ticular program or further enrollment in the university, as deter- 
mined by appropriate campus authority. 

A graduate student may also be placed on probation or may be 
disqualified for unsatisfactory scholastic progress regardless of 
cumulative grade-point average. Such actions may be due to 
repeated withdrawal, failure to progress toward an educational 
objective, and non-compliance with an academic requirement. 

A postbaccalaureate student (credential, unclassified, or unde- 
clared status) shall be subject to academic probation if after 
completing 12 or more units, the cumulative grade-point average 
falls below a 2.5 average. A postbaccalaureate student on proba- 
tion shall be subject to disqualification if at least a 2.50 grade- 
point average is not earned each term after the completion of 12 
units in postbaccalaureate status. Disqualification may be either 
from further registration toward a postbaccalaureate credential or 
certificate program, or from further enrollment in the university 
as determined by the appropriate campus authority. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate standing shall he declas- 
sified upon the recommendation of the appropriate academic 
unit, with a change to postbaccalaureate standing, unclassified, 
when one or more of the following conditions exist: 

1. The student’s request for declassification has been recom- 
mended for approval by the graduate committee. 

2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average required 
in the master’s degree program. 

3. The student has failed to demonstrate a satisfactory level of 
scholastic competence and fitness. 

4. The student fails to complete the degree within the prescribed 
time limit. 

A recommendation for declassification is sent to the Graduate 
Studies Office by the graduate program adviser for the particular 
degree. 


Graduate Academic Standards 123 


Theses and Projects 


Definition 

A thesis is defined as the written product of a systematic study of a 
significant problem. It identifies the problem, states the major 
assumptions, explains the significance of the undertaking, sets 
forth the sources for and methods of gathering information, ana- 
lyzes the data, and offers a conclusion or recommendation. The 
finished product evidences originality, critical and independent 
thinking, appropriate organization and format, and thorough 
documentation. Normally, an oral defense of the thesis is re- 
quired. 

A project is a significant undertaking appropriate to the fine and 
applied arts or to professional fields. It also evidences originality 
and independent thinking, appropriate form and organization, 
and a rationale. It is described and summarized in a written 
abstract that includes the projects significance, objectives, 
methodology and a conclusion or recommendation. An oral de- 
fense of the project may be required. 

Annual Thesis Award 

An award of $300 along with an engraved plaque will be given 
each year to the student whose thesis represents the highest 
standard of scholarly accomplishment as determined by a panel ot 
judges chosen from emeriti professors. Interested students should 
contact the Graduate Studies Office or their program adviser for 
further information on eligibility and deadlines. Finalists from 
each sch(K>l may also be recommended for Honorable Mention by 
the judges; these will receive a certificate of Honorable Mention 
and a cash award. 

General Regulations 

Of the minimum of 30 semester units of approved course work 
required for the master’s degree, no more than six are allowed for 
a thesis. 



When a thesis is required, the Library is to be provided with the 
approved original copy, or a hilly acceptable duplicated copy, in 
the approved binding, and an acceptable microfilm of it. An 
abstract accompanies the thesis and will normally be published in 
the University Microfilms International journal. Masters Ab- 
stracts. Copies are thereby made available for order by interested 
scholars. 


124 Theses and Projects 



When a project is required, it will be filed with the academic unit 
offering the degree program. Some record of the project, or the 
project itself, is preserved in the academic unit and, when appro- 
priate, in the Library. When the appropriate authority recom- 
mends, a project or its written record may he treated as a thesis. 

Although a minimum of three faculty members supervise and 
approve the thesis, it is possible for a qualified person who is not a 
regular university faculty member to serve as a visiting examiner 
and join in the approval of the written record. This person serves 
as the fourth member of the committee. 

Title to theses (and projects when treated as theses, as above) 
passes to the university upon their acceptance by the evaluating 
faculty. 

Variations from procedures and regulations should be referred to 
the Office of Graduate Studies for approval. 

Format Guidelines and Style 
Manuals 

All-university format guidelines are included in a thesis manual 
which has been developed to assist the student in preparation of a 
thesis or a project which is to be treated as a thesis. Copies are 
available in the Office of Graduate Studies. It is the students 
responsibility to make certain that the requirements are met. The 
student is strongly advised to become familiar with the instructions in 
the manual. Theses from the library or departmental offices 
should not be used as examples of correct format. 

The academic unit, through the student’s adviser and/or commit- 
tee, is responsible for the academic content and English usage in 
the thesis and for the student’s correct use of forms of documenta- 
tion and bibliography. In addition to the university format guide- 
lines, each academic unit may select a supplementary style man- 
ual to be followed in matters of documentation and bibliography. 
Students should consult their academic program adviser or thesis 
committee chair concerning the style manual used. 

It the supplementary style manual presents regulations which 
conflict with the all-university format guidelines published in the 
thesis manual, the university regulations take precedence. 

Some graduate programs require style manuals or guides designed 
for journal articles. Although these are helpful for abbreviations, 
tables, figures and footnoting, as well as other purposes, students 
should be aware of the difference between a thesis and an article 
and make appropriate adaptations, approved by the graduate 
program adviser. 


If the academic unit does not recommend a specific style manual, 
the student should refer to A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, 
Theses, and Dissertations (Fifth Edition) by Kate L. Tirabian. 

Thesis Typists 

The student makes all necessary arrangements for the typing of 
the thesis. A list of thesis typists is available in the Office of 
Graduate Studies. The university Career Development Center 
also maintains a listing of students and others who have indicated 
their availability for typing assignments. An experienced typist is 
strongly advised, although the university does not endorse or 
recommend individual typists. 

Deadlines 

Adequate time should be allowed for typing, reading and approv- 
al by the adviser, the committee members, and the university 
thesis reader. 

It is recommended that the academic area sponsoring the degree 
program require that the final version of the thesis be submitted 
for approval at least six weeks prior to the last day of classes of the 
appropriate semester. The deadline for submission to the univer- 
sity thesis reader is tu'o weeks prior to the last day of classes. For 
summer completion, the student should check with the academic 
unit and the Office of Graduate Studies for appropriate deadlines. 
The Office of Graduate Studies must receive notification from 
the Titan Bookstore by the last day of final examinations for the 
appropriate semester or session that the thesis has been deposited 
there and the fees paid. Ample time should be allowed for any 
special arrangements, such as duplication of the thesis by the 
Titan Bookstore or elsewhere, prior to the deadline. 

Final Procedures 

1. Approval Signatures: When the final draft is completed, the 
student obtains signatures on the approval page of all of the 
members of the committee. The title/approval page may be 
photocopied onto the correct paper stock; however, the signa- 
tures must be original. Photocopied signatures are not accept- 
able for binding or microfilming. The signatures must be in 
black ink. If there is a disagreement within the committee 
concerning the acceptability of the thesis, the approving sig- 
natures of a majority of the committee will be sufficient. 
Nonavailability of one member of the committee is not an 
adequate reason for acceptance of signatures by less than the 
full committee. No changes or additions will be allowed after 
the final signatures have been obtained. The student should 
arrange for at least three original title pages to be signed by the 
committee members. (Two originals are submitted to the 
bookstore with the thesis or project; one may be the student’s 
personal copy or be used for the departmental copy.) 


Theses and Projects 125 


2. University Thesis Reader: The thesis is ready for review by the 
university thesis reader after the faculty have signed off and 
the thesis has been typed in its final form. One unbound copy 
of the thesis including the original approval page is taken to 
the Office of Graduate Studies for review by the thesis reader 
for conformity to all-university format guidelines. The copy 
submitted to the Graduate Studies Office may be a photocopy 
provided it is copied on the correct paper stock. The student, 
graduate program adviser, and thesis committee chair will be 
notified of any revisions or corrections which need to be 
made. Final approval on format is given by the Office of 
Graduate Studies on the “Thesis Approval Form.” 

3. Binding and Microfilming: The student takes the approved copy 
of the thesis, two signed title and approval pages, and the 
signed Thesis Approval Form to the Titan Bookstore and pays 
the appropriate fees. The bookstore arranges for the binding 
of the thesis by a local bindery and other services hy Universi- 
ty Microfilms International (UMI). Once submitted and re- 
ceipted, the thesis may not be withdrawn by the student from 
the Titan Bookstore. The Titan Bookstore sends the approved 
original or duplicated copy (including the original signed ap- 
proval page) to University Microfilms International for film- 
ing and publication of the abstract, and upon its return sends 
it to the bindery. 


An agreement is normally completed for UMI to publish the 
abstract in Masters Abstracts, prepare a negative microfilm, and 
sell microfilm or xerographic copies to interested scholars. The 
university will accept alternative methods of microfilming, dupli- 
cation of printed copies and binding, subject to the specifications 
on file in the Graduate Studies Office. Arrangements for copy- 
righting are also possible, if desired, through UMI. 

4. Notification for Award of the Degree: The grade for the thesis is 
reported in the usual manner to the Office of the Registrar by 
the appropriate faculty. The Titan Bookstore notifies the Of- 
fice of Graduate Studies that the approved thesis has been 
deposited, the fees paid, and the agreement for microfilming 
and publication of the abstract completed by the student. 

5. Depositing of Thesis in Library : When the thesis is returned by 
the bindery, the bound copy is deposited for circulation in the 
library. One set of the slides or separately mounted illustrative 
material is housed with the bound copy. The second set is 
placed in the university archives with the microfilm copy. 


126 Theses and Projects 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 


There may be additional steps for individual students in particu- 
lar programs; for these, consult the program description and the 
academic unit (school, department or program) offering the de- 
gree program. 

• Action initiated by student (as indicated below) 

J. Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

• Apply for admission 

• Declare objective(s), using precise codes on the applica- 
tion form 

• Receive application acknowledgement from the Admis- 
sions Office 

• Request two sets of official transcripts of all previous col- 
lege-level course work attempted to be sent to Admissions 
Office 

• Take tests, if required by program, and order test scores 
sent to Cal State Fullerton, designating appropriate aca- 
demic unit on the test registration form 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any other support- 
ing statements or materials, as required 

Recommendation for admission made by academic unit to 

Admissions Office 

Receive notification of admission from Admissions Office 

2. Graduate Standing: Classified 

• Complete any course prerequisites and/or remove deficien- 
cies 

• Apply for classified standing in the academic area offer- 
ing the particular program prior to completion of nine 
units of study plan course work 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement, includ- 
ing development of official study plan 

• Provide appropriate academic unit with any other support- 
ing statements or materials, as shown in program descrip- 
tions in this catalog 

• Take tests if required by program, and order test scores sent 
to Cal State Fullerton, designating appropriate academic 
unit on the test registration form 

Recommendation made by academic unit to the Dean of 

Graduate Studies 


Receive notification of classified standing being granted from 
Graduate Studies when the study plan is sent, showing approval 
by the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

• If not received within a reasonable length of time, call the 
academic unit sponsoring the degree or Graduate Studies. 

3. Completion of Requirements 

• Apply for a graduation check and advancement to candi- 
dacy prior to the beginning of the final semester and no 
later than the deadline initiating university review and 
formal approval by faculty. The form is available at the 
Admissions and Records information desk, the Gradua- 
tion Unit and the Graduate Studies Office. A graduation 
and diploma fee must be paid when filing request with the 
university cashier. 

• Consult appropriate academic unit for advisement 

• Complete written and/or oral examination, if required 

• Complete thesis or project, if applicable 

• Obtain approval of committee 

• Obtain approval of university thesis reader (thesis 
only) 

• Deposit approved copy of thesis and make arrangements 
for binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract 
in the Titan Bookstore by the applicable deadline 

Final, approved study plan, with recommendation, sent by 
appropriate academic unit to Dean of Graduate Studies 

Preliminary approval, pending adequate grades, and com- 
pletion of any other requirements, granted by Dean of 
Graduate Studies. 

• Complete all general and specific requirements, other 
than final course examinations, by the last day of classes, 
in order to assure granting of the degree by the end of the 
semester 

Final verification of completion of requirements sent by 
the Graduate Studies Office to the registrar 

Receive notification of award of degree from registrar ap- 
proximately six weeks after the end of the semester 

4. Commencement 

• Make appropriate arrangements for cap, gown and hood 
rental in Titan Bookstore 

Commencement information sent by the Registrar s Office 


Steps in the Master’s Degree 127 











•!;>'! p .M.Livti .sn- >d yjsjn.fli ::ri * 




i I* ». i . *■" i..:«UC, - li K3C*> • (K>i ,t VM 

> w * griif U 0^ ’ci ' ^ 


ljd) V fioitu.>il'?oq bctfi ^trqJ&otMm 4 hI, A v4 
vidl . -th ! j^i'iqr. idt d m/P • • •'* m ' ni 


; ipj m r. iq &r*z fui'toa a nI 

sobfQ <• .tot m> • rokcimbt* i*j rtoo^ibtort 


-Pico but ,*ab*. r*4 Stifl' «be pfilbrtaq f I*varqqi; “ isrin r i 

rxiio ,*) t imsm/pst >rhatq bo* !fa$n 9 $ iiu iiaiqnxx) * 
>*•,*»] 3 *0 y«b wys! sdi yd ,fjK*n. njiiujx^ anxo knft /lorii 

yd Jim *Jnani»tujp « to nafiafqcBOv to aotiiBMvjx lurtr} 

xtttiO g'lfiTttiga# arb J jrrv 1: baondkn< : ■ orr-or • 7 ?«0 


'H !Mtek jvoirw i i 1. / .jupninq 4tuito yne stsJqrnoO • 

/:ko cm ib*. . w • c:i ^nibrusli L* bisiab lui /JqqA • 
lin V) noiJj qrncQ « ic q mfin^ *>q itiiiimnq %■ jr 

rulq >ui. Isbitk* V > ttemqo b */d5 gni 


;i. «w><JA'> p ¥ ,ih tti v" 


f 



Degree Programs 


California State University, Fullerton offers the following bacca- 
laureate degree programs which are described on the pages listed: 


B.A. American Studies 383 

B.A. Anthropology 388 

B.A. Art 171 

B.F.A. Art 171 

B.S. Biochemistry 516 

B.A. Biological Science 507 

B.A. Business Administration 221 

B.A. Chemistry 516 

B.S. Chemistry 516 

B.S. Child Development 321 

B.A. Communications 263 

B.A. Communicative Disorders 271 

B.A. Comparative Literature 401 

B.S. Computer Science 286 

B.A. Criminal Justice 398 

B.A. Economics 229 

B.S. Engineering 293 

B.A. English 401 

B.A. Ethnic Studies (with option in Afro-Ethnic studies 

and Chicano studies) 379 

B.A. French 412 

B.A. Geography 432 

B.S. Geology 525 

B.A. German 412 

B.A. History 440 

B.S. Human Services 355 

B.A. International Business with a concentration in 
French, German, Japanese, Portuguese or Spanish . . . 240 

B.A. Latin American Studies 448 

B.A. Liberal Studies 451 

B.A. Linguistics 453 

B.A. Mathematics 530 

B.A. Music 184 

B.M. Music 184 

B.S. Nursing 361 

B.A. Philosophy 460 

B.S. Physical Education 344 

B.S. Physics 538 

B.A. Political Science (including concentration in public 

administration) 461 

B.A. Psychology 474 

B.A. Religious Studies 483 

B.A. Russian & East European Area Studies 489 

B.A. Sociology 493 

B.A. Spanish 412 

B.A. Special Major 163 

B.A. Speech Communication 271 

B.A. Theatre Arts 198 


The following master’s degree programs are offered: 


M.S. Accountancy 214 

M.A. American Studies 383 

M.A. Anthropology 388 

M.A. Art 171 

M.F.A. Art 171 

M.A. Biology 507 

M.B.A. Business Administration 221 

M.S. Chemistry 516 

M.A. Communications 263 

M.A. Communicative Disorders 271 

M.A. Comparative Literature 401 

M.S. Computer Science 286 

M.S. Counseling 324 

M.A. Economics 229 


M.S. Education (with concentrations in bilingual/bi- 
cultural education [Spanish-English], elementary curricu- 
lum and instruction, reading, educational administration, 
special education and teaching English to speakers of other 


languages) 319 

M.S. Engineering 293 

M.A. English 401 

M.S. Environmental Studies 410 

M.A. French 412 

M.A. Geography 432 

M.A. German 412 

M.A. History 440 

M.A. Interdisciplinary Studies 163 

M.A. Linguistics 453 

M.S. Management Science 249 

M.A. Mathematics 530 

M.A. Music 184 

M.M. Music 184 

M.S. Physical Education 344 

M.A. Political Science 461 

M.A. Psychology 474 

M.S. Psychology (Clinical/Community) 474 

M.PA. Public Administration 461 

M.A.T. Science 542 

M.A. Social Sciences 491 

M.A. Sociology 493 

M.A. Spanish (including emphasis in bilingual 

studies) 412 

M.A. Speech Communication 271 

M.S. Taxation 214 

M.A. Theatre Arts 198 

M.F.A. Theatre Arts (with concentrations in Acting, 

Directing, and Technical Theatre and Design) .... 198 


130 Degree Programs 


Graduation Requirements 
for the Bachelor’s Degree 



Unit Requirements 

A. Total Unit Requirements 

The minimum number of semester units necessary for a bache- 
lor’s degree, exclusive of remedial courses (i.e. course numbered 


0-99) is as follows: 

1. For the Bachelor of Arts degree 124 

2. For the Bachelor of Fine Arts degree 132 

3. For the Bachelor of Science degree 124' 132 

4. For the Bachelor of Nursing degree 128 

5. For the Bachelor of Science in Engineering 

degree 135 

6. For the Bachelor of Music degree 132 

B. Upper-Division Requirement 


A minimum of 40 semester units of upper division coursework is 
required for any CSUF bachelor’s degree. Courses offering upper 
division credit are those numbered at the 300- and 400- levels. 

All units from upper division courses are applicable to the upper 
division units requirement, including units from courses in the 
major, the minor, and general education. 

C. Special Unit Totals 

The maximum number of special semester units accepted for a 
bachelor’s degree is as follows: 

1. Transferable units from community or junior 

colleges 70 


2. Transferable units from a four-year university or college or 
from a combination of two and four-year institutions ... 94 

3. From credit by examination 30 


4. From extension & correspondence courses 24 

5. From credit/no credit courses 36 

6. From Reading Skills courses numbered at the 100- and 

200-levels 4 

7. From Internship courses 6 

8. From Independent Study courses 9 


Graduate Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 131 




Residence Requirement 

A minimum of thirty (30) semester units must he earned in courses 
taken at California State University, Fullerton. Twenty 'four (24) of 
these units must he earned in upper division courses. At least twelve 
(12) upper division semester units in the major must be taken at this 
institution. Courses taken in extension (except for summer session 
and intersession courses offered as part of the special sessions pro* 
gram) and units earned through credit by examination may not be 
used to fulfill these requirements. 

Grade Point Average 
Requirements 

Three grade point averages, each 2.0 or higher, are required for 
graduation: 

A. An average based on all units attempted, including those 
attempted at other institutions. 

B. An average based on all units attempted at CSUF. 

C. An average based on all units attempted in the major. 

Distribution of Requirements 

A. General Education 

A minimum of 51 semester units are needed to complete CSUF’s 
general education requirements. See the “General Education” 
section of this catalog. 

B. Major 

The unit requirements in a major varies substantially from major 
to major. Some majors require as little as 36 semester units while 
others require as much as 105 units. Refer to the Department 
listings for the specific requirements of any particular major. 

C. Upper-Division Baccalaureate Writing 
Requirement 

The university requires that every person completing bachelor’s 
degrees under 1980-81 and later catalog requirements, demonstrate 
writing ability acceptable for graduation. The upper-division writing 
requirement has two parts; students must satisfy each: 

Upper-division course requirement: Each major requires that 
students pass a specially designated upper-division course or 
courses of at least three semester units. Examination require- 
ment: The university faculty requires that each student pass 
the University Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP), 
which has been designed to measure writing ability. 

Courses. The University Board on Writing Proficiency must certify 
the course or courses that each major department designates to 
fulfill the requirement. Departments and programs may specify ei- 
ther a single course of at least three units which involves intensive 
instruction in writing, or two or more courses (a total of at least six 
units) in which students are required to write one or more lengthy 


papers, or several shorter ones, which involve the organization and 
expression of complex ideas. In these courses students will be given 
careful and timely evaluations of their writing and suggestions for 
improvement. An assessment of writing competence will be includ- 
ed in determining the final course grade. 

Students must pass these courses with a grade of C or better. A list 
of courses designated for each major will appear in the class 
schedule each semester. 

Examination. After completing 60 units toward the baccalaure- 
ate, students must take the University Examination in Writing 
Proficiency (EWP). The EWP consists of two parts, a machine- 
scored test of Standard Written English, and a 90-minute essay 
which is evaluated by faculty readers. Students who fail the 
examination may retake it until they pass it. A limited number of 
students who have failed the EWP two or more times may enroll 
in English 199, Intensive Writing Review. Credit in English 199 
will be equivalent to passing the examination. This course will 
not count toward graduation requirements, nor will it satisfy the 
upper division writing course requirement described above. Infor- 
mation about registration for the EWP and testing dates is pub- 
lished in the class schedule each semester. 

Petitions. In certain cases, students may petition the University 
Board on Writing Proficiency for exemption from or modification 
of the requirement. 

1. Transfer students and candidates for a second baccalaureate 
may be certified as meeting the requirement after they have 
submitted to the Board acceptable evidence of having com- 
pleted the equivalent to CSUF’s upper division requirement. 

2. Students may petition for substitution of an alternative to the 
EWP when exceptional circumstances, e.g. a clinically iden- 
tified learning disability, make the examination inappropri- 
ate. Petitions must include documentation of the special cir- 
cumstances and propose specific alternative means of demon- 
strating writing proficiency. 

D. Minors 

A minor is not required for the baccalaureate; however, students 
may elect to complete one or more minors from those available 
and have that noted on their records. A minor consists of an 
academic program specified by the academic departments in the 
catalog. In completing the requirements for a minor, a minimum 
of twelve (12) units, of which at least six (6) must be upper 
division, must be distinct and different from the units used to 
complete the requirements of the major. Any units above this 
minimum requirement which can be used to satisfy both the 
requirements for the minor and for the major may be double 
counted. General education courses, however, may be used to 
meet minor requirements. 

E. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, and a specific 
major (and possibly a minor), each student is ffee to choose the rest 
of the courses needed to complete the semester units required for 


132 Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 


graduation. Different majors vary considerably in both the number 
of units they require in their own and related fields. They also vary 
considerably in the amount of latitude or choice they permit in 
selecting courses to satisfy the major requirement. The general 
education requirement encourages freedom of choice within the 
natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, and basic 
subjects. Students at the university use their electives to broaden 
their general education, deepen some aspect of their specialties, 
pursue work in related fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusiasms 
for particular subjects or areas of interest. 

Advisement on general education and electives is provided by 
the Academic Advisement Center. 

F. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate 
Degrees 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possible for a 
student to complete the requirements for more than one major 
within a degree program when the additional major is within the 
degree of the first major. At least 24 units, including 1 2 at the upper- 
division level, in each bachelor of arts major, or 36 units, including 
18 at the upper-division level, in each bachelor of science major, 
must be applied exclusively to the respective major and may not be 
used to meet requirements in other majors or in general education. 
The student shall declare the additional major with the appropriate 
department not later than the beginning of the students final year 
of study. The completion of additional majors will be noted at the 
time of graduation by appropriate entries on the academic record 
and in the commencement program. 

It is also possible for a student to complete a major in one degree 
program and an additional major from a different program, pro- 
vided the minimum units described in the preceding paragraph 
are applied exclusively to the respective major and are not used in 
other majors or in general education. In this instance, the stu- 
dent has the option of which degree he or she will receive with 
the major appropriate to that degree. The completion of the 
additional major will be noted on the student’s academic record. 
The university does not award two degrees to the individual who 
completes multiple majors in a four-year degree program. 

Second baccalaureate degrees: 

First degree completed elsewhere, second at Fullerton. Students seek- 
ing a bachelor’s degree from Fullerton after having received a 
baccalaureate from another institution may qualify for graduation 
with the approval and recommendation of the faculty upon com- 
pletion of the following: 

( 1 ) General Education requirements: Students holding a baccalau- 
reate degree from an accredited institution will be held to (a) 
the breadth requirements of Executive Order 338, i.e. 12 units 
in each of the areas of arts and humanities, social sciences, and 
math and science, (b) the statutory requirements and (c) the 
English Writing Proficiency requirements. Students willnot be 
held to specific CSUF categories or courses. 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 


Tiro baccalaureates from Fulkrton. With the approval and recom- 
mendation of the faculty, a student may qualify for a second 
baccalaureate under the following circumstances: 

(1) a minimum of 30 units beyond the awarding of the first 
degree have been earned 

(2) a minimum of 24 upper-division units are included among 
the 30 units mentioned above 

(3) a minimum of 1 2 units must be offered by the department in 
which the second degree is being sought 

(4) two or more degrees may not normally be awarded at the 
same time 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply 
to graduate degrees or credential programs. 

Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation must File an application for a graduation 
requirements check before the first day of instruction of the semester 
prior to the semester in which the student expects to graduate. The 
graduation and diploma fee is required when the application is filed. 
Application forms are available at the Admissions and Records 
information counter and in the graduation unit. 

Candidates for the baccalaureate should refer to the semester class 
schedule for application filing dates. A senior should have complet- 
ed at least 100 units (including the current work in progress) and a 
substantial portion of the major requirements before requesting a 
graduation check. If the candidate does not complete the require- 
ments in the semester indicated, a change of graduation date must 
be filed in the Office of Admissions and Records. 

Faculty Approval and 
Recommendation 

Under provisions of the Academic Senate, the Office of Admissions 
and Records publishes a list of degree candidates twice a year: in the 
fall and in the spring (for both spring and summer 
graduates). After review and approval by the faculty, and upon 
verification of the completion of requirements, diplomas are issued 
with the last day of the respective term as the official date of 
graduation. 

Annual commencement exercises are held at the end of the 
spring semester for those who completed degree requirements 
mid-year and for those completing degree requirements in the 
spring semester or summer session. The president of the universi- 
ty, with the authority of the Board of Trustees, confers all degrees, 
subject to the completion of remaining requirements. 

Note: Students completing bachelor degree requirements who 
wish to continue their studies at the university for postbaccalaur- 
eate or graduate degree objectives must apply for admission de- 
claring their new objectives. 




Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor’s Degree 133 


General Education 

General Education Objectives 

The general education-breadth requirements are designed so 
that, taken with the major-depth program and electives present- 
ed by each baccalaureate candidate, they will assure that gradu- 
ates have made noteworthy progress toward becoming truly edu- 
cated persons. Particularly, the purpose of these requirements is 
to provide means whereby graduates: 

A. will have achieved the ability to think clearly and logically, 
to find and critically examine information, to communicate 
orally and in writing, and to perform quantitative functions; 

B. will have acquired appreciable knowledge about their own 
bodies and minds, about how human society has developed 
and how it now functions, about the physical world in which 
they live, about the other forms of life with which they share 
that world, and about the cultural endeavors and legacies of 
their civilization; 

C. will have come to an understanding and appreciation of the 
principles, methodologies, value systems, and thought pro- 
cesses employed in human inquiries. (Executive Order 338) 

General Education Requirements 

All students beginning studies fall 1987 or later must complete a 
minimum of 51 semester units of general education courses se- 
lected in accordance with the pattern designated on the follow- 
ing pages. General educaticm courses must be selected from an ap - 
proved list and taken fen a letter grade. Students should refer to the 
latest university Schedule of Classes for the most up-to-date list 
of approved classes. A student who has a break in enrollment for 
more than one semester in any calendar year may be liable for 
new catalog requirements. 

Students must complete at least nine units of upper-division (i.e. 
300- or 400-level) general education course work taken after the 
student has achieved junior standing (i.e. 60 units). At least nine 
units of general education must be earned in residence at Califor- 
nia State University, Fullerton. 

A grade of C or better must be earned for each course in Basic 
Subjects: Oral Communication (I. A.), Written Communication 
(I.B. ), Critical Thinking (I. C. ). Reading (optional) (I.D.),and 
Mathematics (II I. A. 4 ). All general education courses must be 
taken on a grade option 1 basis (A, B, C, D, F). An option 2 
(credit/no credit) course may be used tor general education it that 
is the only grade option for the course. Consult the course de- 
scription in the departmental sections of this catalog for grade 
option information on a specific course. 



134 General Education 



Courses offered by the department of the student’s major may not 
be used to fulfill the unit requirement of categories III or IV with 
the exception of categories offering choices from only one depart' 
ment. Courses which are cross-listed meet general education 
category requirements for all majors except those in the home 
department of the cross-listed course. The “home” department is 
the one under which the course description appears in the cata- 
log. For example, Anthropology is the “home” department for 
Anthropology /Religious Studies 305; hence, it may not be used 
by an Anthropology major to meet general education require- 
ments. Also, no more than nine units from any single depart- 
ment may be used in meeting the requirements of general educa- 
tion. Upper-division courses offered by the department of the 
student’s major may not be used for general education credit. 

At least three (3) semester units of Cultural Diversity course work 
must be taken from among the asterisked courses in Section IV. 
At least one laboratory course must be taken from among the 
courses marked with a dagger (t) in Sections III.A.l., III. A. 2., 
or III.A.3. 

Among the following list of requirements a few courses appear in 
more than one category. These courses may be used to fulfill the 
requirements of only one, and not both, of the categories within 
which they appear. 

A score of T 145 or higher on the English Placement Test (EPT), or 
completion of English 99 with a grade of C or better, is a prerequisite 
for enrollment in courses in category I. A. 2. Written Communica- 
tion, for all students except those with an exemption. 

A score of 480 or higher on the Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) 
examination is a prerequisite for enrollment in courses in Cate- 
gory II. A. 4. Mathematics for all students except those with an 
exemption. 

Certification Policy 

Under provisions of Executive Orders 338 and 342, accredited 
colleges and universities may certify the completion of part of the 
48-51 units required in general education. Within the policy of 
the Board of Trustees, Cal State Fullerton will accept such certifi- 
cation of general education up to a maximum of 39 semester 
units, but may accept no more in general education than the 
number of units required in each area and no more than 30 units 
in areas in which the student has not been certified. 

Transfer students who are certified in any category with fewer 
than the required units will be subject to additional units and will 
be permitted to take the additional units in upper-division cate- 
gories. 

California Articulation Number 

California State University, Fullerton is authorized to cross- 
reference certain courses with California Articulation Number 
(CAN). This is a system of equating courses between campuses in 


California. It is used by an increasing number of community 
colleges and four-year universities and colleges to identify some 
of the transferable, introductory courses in several academic 
disciplines. 

The system assures students that CAN courses noted in the 
catalog of one campus will be accepted in lieu of the comparable 
CAN course on another participating campus. An example is our 
Anthropology 101 Introduction to Biological Anthropology; 
CAN ANTH 2 is accepted in lieu of courses similarly marked in 
other university or college catalogs. 

The California Articulation Numbers are listed in parentheses by 
the course descriptions in the catalog. A listing of courses cur- 
rently approved for CAN follows: 

California 

Articulation 


hi umber 

Cal State Fullerton Courses 

CAN ANTH 2 

Anthro 101 Introduction to Biological 
Anthropology 

CAN ANTH 4 

Anthro 102 Introduction to Cultural 
Anthropology 

CAN ANTH 6 

Anthro 103 Introduction to 

Archaeology 

CAN ART 2 

Art 201 A Art and Civilization 

CAN ART 4 

Art 20 IB Art and Civilization 

CAN ART 8 

Art 107 A Beginning Drawing and 
Painting 

CAN ART 10 

Art 107B Beginning Drawing and 
Painting 

CAN ART 14 

Art 103 Two-dimensional Design 

CAN BIOL 6 

Biology 241 Principles of Botany 

CAN BUS 8 

Management 246 Business Law 

CAN ECON 2 

Economics 202 Principles of 
Macroeconomics 

CAN ECON 4 

Economics 201 Principles of 
Microeconomics 

CAN ENGL 2 

English 101 Beginning College Writing 

CAN ENGL 6 

English 105 Introduction to Creative 
Writing 

CAN ENGL 20 

English 206 Introduction to Poetry 

CAN ENGR 2 

EG-ME 102 Graphical Communications 

CAN ENGR 4 

EG-ME 202 Material Science 

CAN ENGR 8 

EG-CE 201 Statics 

CAN GEOG 2 

Geological Sci 1 10 Principles of 

Physical Geography 

CAN GEOG 4 

Geological Sci 160 Culture and 
Environment 

CAN GEOL 2 

Geological Sci 101 4 - 


General Education 135 


California 

Articulation 

Number 

Cal State Fuller um Courses 

Geological Sci 101 L Physical Geology 
and Lab 

CAN GEOL 4 

Geological Sci 201 Earth History 

CAN GOVT 2 

Poli Sci 100 American Government 

CAN HIST 2 

History 1 10A Western Civilization to 
the 16th Century 

CAN HIST 4 

History HOB Western Civilization since 
the 16th Century 

CAN HIST 8 

History 170A United States to 1877 

CAN HIST 10 

History 170B United States Since 1877 

CAN JOUR 2 

Comm 101 Writing for the Mass Media 

CAN JOUR 4 

Comm 233 Mass Communication in 
Modern Society 

CAN MATH 2 

Mathematics 110 Mathematics for 
Liberal Arts Students 

CAN MATH 18 

Mathematics 150A Analytic Geometry 
and Calculus 

CAN MATH 20 

Mathematics 150B Analytic Geometry 
and Calculus 

CAN MATH 22 

Mathematics 250A Intermediate 
Calculus 

CAN PHIL 2 

Philosophy 100 Introduction to 
Philosophy 

CAN PHIL 6 

Philosophy 210 Logic 

CAN PHYS 2 

Physics 2 1 1 A and 2 1 1 AL Elementary 
Physics -1- Lab 

CAN PHYS 4 

Physics 2 1 1 B and 2 1 1 BL Elementary 
Physics + Lab 

CAN PHYS 8 

Physics 22 5 A and 225AL Fundamental 
Physics: Mechanics + Lab 

CAN PHYS 10 

Physics 225C + 


Physics 225CL Fundamental Physics: 
Waves, Optics, and Modern Physics and 
Lab 

CAN PHYS 12 

Physics 225B + 


Physics 225BL Fundamental Physics: 
Electricity and Magnetism and Lab 

CAN PSY 2 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology 

CAN SOC 2 

Sociology 101 Introduction to Sociology 

CAN SOC 4 

Sociology 102 Social Problems 

CAN SPCH 4 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking 

CAN SPCH 6 

Speech Comm 235 Essentials of 
Argumentation and Debate 


General Education Honors 

The General Education Honors Program offers students many of 
the educational benefits of a small college in the midst of the rich 
resources of a large university. The program’s small class sizes 
(twenty students maximum) provide challenging learning exper- 
iences, individual attention from professors, and closer interac- 
tion with other students. 

In honors sections of general education courses, students are en- 
couraged to develop and discuss ideas in an active, imaginative and 
original way. Professors contribute by making creative use of curricu- 
lar materials and student assignments. They interact personally and 
intensively with each student and encourage students to interact 
with each other. These courses do not simply demand a greater 
quantity of work. They create a learning environment in which 
students are encouraged to realize their intellectual potential. 

The General Education Honors Program gives officially accepted 
students an opportunity to earn recognition for distinguished aca- 
demic performance in general education courses. Those partici- 
pants who successfully complete the requirements for honors in 
general education will have a notation placed on their transcripts. 

Entrance to the Program 

Academic achievement in high school or college serves as the 
prerequisite for admission to the honors program. Those eligible 
for entrance include ( 1 ) first-time freshmen with a high school 
g.p.a. (grade point average) of 3.5 or better and (2) continuing 
students with a collegiate g.p.a. of 3.0 or better. 

Students should declare their intent to pursue the General Edu- 
cation Honors Program by submitting a formal letter of applica- 
tion to the coordinator of the General Education Honors Pro- 
gram. The letter should include the student’s name, current 
address and phone number, high school or college g.p.a., and a 
paragraph stating the reasons for pursuing the program. 

Entrance to Courses 

Individual honors courses are also open to any student who meets 
the program’s g.p.a. standards. Exceptions to this policy may be 
made with the consent of the honors course instructor and the 
authorization of the honors program coordinator. First priority for 
class entrance, however, goes to students formally admitted to 
the program. 

Requirements for Completion 

Program students are normally expected to average one honors 
course a semester. These course sections are officially designated 
in the class schedule by an U H" after the course number. Honors 
sections are offered for the following courses (not all are offered 
every semester): 


136 General Education 


American Studies 201 
American Studies 301 
American Studies 450 
Anthropology 100 
Anthropology 101 
Anthropology 102 
Anthropology 415 
Art 101 

Biological Science 101 
Chemistry 120A 
Comparative Literature 1 10 
Comparative Literature 1 1 1 
Economics 100 
English 1 10 
English 111 
English 200 
Geol Sciences 101 
History 110A 
History 11 0B 
History 430 


Linguistics 106 
Mathematics 110 
Mathematics 150A 
Music 100 
Music 350 
Philosophy 100 
Philosophy 110 
Philosophy 115 
Philosophy 116 
Philosophy 200 
Philosophy 210 
Philosophy 310 
Political Science 100 
Political Science 350 
Psychology 101 
Religious Studies 110 
Religious Studies 270 
Sociology 456 

Speech Communication 102 


To complete the honors program, a student must ( 1 ) complete 30 
units of general education honors courses with a grade of C or 
better in each course and (2) accomplish a g.p.a. of 3.25 or better 
for the 30 units of general education honors courses attempted. 
With approval of the honors program coordinator, up to six units 
of advanced placement credit with a score of 4 or higher may be 
substituted for general education honors credit. 


I. BASIC SUBJECTS (9 units minimum) 

NOTE: A grade of M C” or better is required in sections I. A. , I.B. , 
and I.C. and III. A. 4. 


A. Oral Communication (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to impart skills in the use of 
human symbolic interaction, focusing on effective speaking. 

Choices: 


Chicano Studies 102 
Speech Comm 100 

Speech Comm 102 
Theatre 110 


Communication Skills (3) 
Introduction to Human 
Communication (3) 

Public Speaking (3) 

Oral Communication of Literature (3) 


B. Written Communication (3 units minimum) 

The course in this area is designed to impart skills in organizing, 
analyzing, and expressing thoughts and concepts in standard 
written English. Students must pass the English Placement Test 
prior to enrolling in the course. 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 


C. Critical Thinking (3 units minimum) 


Students are responsible for requesting a review of their records to 
verify completion. Upon verification, a notation will be made on 
the students transcript indicating completion of the program. 


Transfer Course Work 

Students transferring into CSUF who have taken honors courses 
at another accredited institution may apply those courses to the 
General Education Honors Program. 

The following stipulations apply to the transfer of courses: 

1. The course is used in partial fullfillment of CSUF general 
education requirements. 

2. The course is designated and acknowledged as an honors 
course by the institution where the course was taken. 


Courses in this area are designed to develop skills in critical 
thinking, including the ability to distinguish fact from judgment 
and belief from knowledge, to reason inductively and deductive- 
ly, and to understand the formal and informal fallacies of lan- 
guage and thought. 


Choices: 


English 103 
Philosophy 200 
Philosophy 210 
Psychology 110 

Reading 290 

Speech Comm 235 


Critical Reasoning and Writing (3) 
Argument and Reasoning (3) 

Logic (3) 

Reasoning and Problem 
Solving (3) 

Critical Reading as Critical 
Thinking (3) 

Essentials of Argumentation and 
Debate (3) 


3. The course was completed with a grade of B or better. 


D. Reading Communication 


4. A maximum of nine units of transfer honors courses may be 
applied toward completion of the honors program. 

Any questions concerning the Honors Program should be direct- 
ed to the coordinator of the General Education Honors Program. 


The course in this area is designed to impart skills in the use of 
human symbolic interaction, focusing on effective reading. 

Reading 201 Academic Reading: Analysis & 

Strategies (3) 


General Education 137 


II. HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL 
FOUNDATIONS (12 units minimum) 

A. The Development of Civilization (6 units minimum) 


III. DISCIPLINARY CORE COURSES 
(21 units minimum) 

A. Mathematics and Natural Sciences (12 units) 


Courses in this area give a holistic view of the development of 
society — its values, traditions, and institutions. 

History 1 10A The West and the World to the 16th 

Century (3) 

AND 

History 1 10B The West and the World Since the 

16th Century (3) 


At least one laboratory course must be taken in IlI.A.l., 
111. A. 2., or III. A. 3. Approved laboratory courses are indicated 
with a dagger (t). 

1. Physical Science (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide the content and methodology that 
form the bases for studies in the physical sciences. 


B. American History, Institutions and Values (6 units mini' Choices: 
mum) 


Courses in this section meet Title 5, section 40404, requirements 
by providing “comprehensive study of American history and 
American government including the historical development of 
American institutions and ideals, the Constitution of the United 
States and the operation of representative democratic govern- 
ment under the Constitution, and the process of state and local 
government." 

1. American History (3 units minimum) 

Choices: 


Afro- Ethnic 190 

American Studies 201 

Chicano Studies 190 

History 170A 
History 170B 
History 180 
History 190 


Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 
Introduction to American 
Studies (3) 

Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 
United States to 1877 (3) 

United States Since 1877 (3) 
Survey of American History (3) 
Survey of American History with 
Emphasis on Ethnic Minorities (3) 


Chemistry 100 
Chemistry 100Lt 
Chemistry U5t 

Chemistry 120At 
Geological Sci 101 
Geological Sci 101 Lt 
Physics 123 

Physics 123Lt 

Physics 2 1 1 A 
Physics 2 1 1 ALt 
Physics 22 5 A 

Physics 22 5 ALt 


Survey of Chemistry (3) 
Survey of Chemistry Lab ( 1 ) 
Introductory General 
Chemistry (4) 

General Chemistry (5) 
Physical Geology (3) 

Physical Geology Lab ( 1 ) 
Perspectives of Man’s Physical 
Universe (3) 

Perspectives of Man’s Physical 
Universe Lab ( 1 ) 

Elementary Physics (3) 
Elementary Physics Lab (1) 
Fundamental Physics: 
Mechanics (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Lab (1) 


2. Biological Science (3 units minimum) 


Courses in this area provide the content and methodology that 
form the bases for studies in the biological sciences. 


Choices: 


NOTE: Students who take History 170A must also take History 
170B and vice versa. 

2. Government (3 units minimum) 

Political Science 100 American Government (3) 

NOTE: Transfer students from outside the State of California 
who have ALREADY completed a basic course in American 
Government may substitute Political Science 300 Contemporary 
Issues in California Government and Politics (3) for Political 
Science 100. 


Biological Sci 101 Elements of Biology (3) 

Biological Sci 101 Lt Elements of Biology (1) 

Biological Sci 131 1 Principals of Biology (3) 

3. Alternatives in Natural Sciences and Mathematics 

Courses in this area are topical and thematic specialized inquiries 
into the contributions of the sciences and mathematics. These 
courses have a substantial scientific and/ or mathematical con- 
tent. In addition, they are either introductory to the major sub- 
disciplines or they relate science and/or mathematics to signifi- 
cant social problems or other related disciplines. 


138 General Education 


Choices: 

Introduction to Biological 
Anthropology (3) 

Science in Archaeology (3) 
Environmental Biology (3) 

Human Heredity & 

Development (3) 

Biology of Aging (3) 

Human Physiology (3) 

Nutrition & Disease (3) 

Human Genetics (3) 

Human Issues in Genetics ( 1 ) 

Wildlife Conservation: Current Issues 
and Future Directions ( 1 ) 

Wildlife Conservation (3) 

Marine Biology (3) 

Marine Biology Lab (1) 

Biology of Sexually Transmitted 
Diseases (STD) (1) 

Plants and Life (3) 

Principles of Horticulture (2) 
Principles of Horticulture Lab (1) 
Biology Of Human Sexuality (1) 
Insects & The Human Ecosystem (3) 
Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Nutrition & Disease (3) 

Molecules & Life (3) 

The Computer Impact (3) 

Knowledge Engineering (3) 

Principles of Physical Geography (3) 
Environment and Change (3) 
Introduction to Earth Science (3) 
Earth Science Lab (1) 

Earths Atmosphere (3) 

Earth History (4) 

Topics in California Related 
Geology (1-3) 

Oceanography (3) 

General Hydrology (3) 

General Meterology (3) 

Applied Geology (3) 

Ascent of Man (3) 

Molecules and Life (3) 

History of Science: Copernicus to the 
Present (3) 

Introduction to Philosophy of 
Science (3) 

Philosophy of the Physical Sci (3) 
Philosophy of Biology (3) 

Man & His Physical Environment (4) 
Man & His Physical Environment (4) 
Fads & Fallacies in the Name of 
Science (1) 

Nuclear Energy and Its Impact on 
Society (1) 


Physics 200 

Introduction to Astronomy (4) 

Physics 384 

Philosophy of the Physical Sci (3) 

Sociology 303 

Statistics for the Social 

Sciences (3) 

Speech Comm 303 

Biology of Human 

Communication (3) 

Mathematics 338 

Statistics Applied to Natural Sciences 

(3) 

Mathematics 368 

First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Philosophy 368 

First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

4. Mathematics (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are 

designed to provide a basis for understanding 

mathematical concepts and methodologies and their applications. 
A grade of “C” or better is required in this section. Students must pass 
the Entry Level Mathematics (ELM) test before taking any course in 

this section. No more 

than four (4) units of lower-division course 

work may be counted 

in this section. 

Choices: 


Management Sci 361 

Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business & Economics (4) 

Mathematics 110 

Mathematics for Liberal Arts Students 

(3) 

Mathematics 115 

College Algebra (4) 

Mathematics 120 

Introduction to Probability & 

Statistics (3) 

Mathematics 125 

Precaculus (4) 

Mathematics 130 

A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 135 

Business Calculus (3) 

Mathematics 150A 

Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (4) 

B. Arts and Humanities (6 units minimum) 

1. Introduction to the Arts (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area are designed to motivate students to cultivate 
and refine their affective, cognitive and physical faculties 
through studying great works of the human imagination. 

Choices: 


Art 101 

Introduction to Art (3) 

Art 201 A 

Art and Civilization (3) 

Art 201 B 

Art and Civilization (3) 

Art 311 

Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Art 312 

Modern Art (3) 

Dance 101 

Introduction to Dance (3) 

Music 100 

Introduction to Music (3) 

Music 101 

Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Theatre 100 

Introduction to the Theatre (3) 


Anthropology 101 

Anthropology 375 
Biological Sci 300 
Biological Sci 305 

Biological Sci 306 
Biological Sci 310 
Biological Sci 311 
Biological Sci 313 
Biological Sci 314 
Biological Sci 317 

Biological Sci 318 
Biological Sci 319 
Biological Sci 319Lt 
Biological Sci 323 

Biological Sci 352 
Biological Sci 353 
Biological Sci 353Lt 
Biological Sci 360 
Biological Sci 367 
Chemistry 111 
Chemistry 3 1 1 
Chemistry 321 
Computer Sci 313 
Computer Sci 381 
Geography 110 
Geography 120 
Geological Sci 120 
Geological Sci 120Lt 
Geological Sci 140 
Geological Sci 201 
Geological Sci 310 

Geological Sci 333 
Geological Sci 335 
Geological Sci 340 
Geological Sci 376 
History 230 
History 321 
History 430 

Philosophy 303 

Philosophy 384 
Philosophy 386 
Physical Sci 100 
Physics 100 
Physics 105 

Physics 107 


General Education 139 


2. Introduction to the Humanities (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area introduce students to reflective inquiry into 
the values and subjective responses of civilization in its language, 
philosophy, and literature. 

Choices: 


Anthropology 100 
Comparative Lit 110 
Comparative Lit 111 


Comparative Lit 324 
Comparative Lit 325 
Comparative Lit 373 
English 1 10 


English 1 1 1 


English 200 
English 3 1 1 

English 312 

English 321 
English 322 

Foreign Lang 101 
Foreign Lang 102 
Foreign Lang 203 
Foreign Lang 204 
French 103 

French 230 

French 240 

German 103 

German 213 
German 214 
Linguistics 106 
Linguistics 301 
Spanish 103 

Spanish 201 
Spanish 213 
Spanish 214 
Philosophy 100 
Philosophy 110 


Non-Western Cultures & the Western 
Tradition (3) 

Literature of the Western World from 
Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 
Literature of the Western World from 
the Renaissance through the 19th 
Century (3) 

World Literature to 1650 (3) 

World Literature from 1650 (3) 

Masters of Russian Literature (3) 
Literature of the Western Warld from 
Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 
Literature of the Western World 
from Renaissance through the 19th 
Century (3) 

Introduction to Literature (3) 

Masters of British Literature to 
1760 (3) 

Masters of British Literature from 
1760 (3) 

American Literature to Whitman (3) 
American Literature from Twain to the 
Moderns (3) 

Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Fundamental Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Intermediate Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Intermediate Foreign Languages (3-5) 
Intensive Review of Fundamental 
French (5) 

Intermediate Diction and 
Phonetics (2) 

Intermediate Conversation and 
Composition (2) 

Intensive Review of Fundamental 
German (5) 

Intermediate Reading (2) 

Intermediate Reading (2) 

Language and Linguistics (3) 

Sanskrit (4) 

Intensive Review of Fundamental 
Spanish (5) 

Spanish for Hispanics (3) 

Intermediate Conversation (2) 
Intermediate Composition (2) 
Introduction to Philosophy (3) 
Comparative Study of the World’s 
Great Religions (3) 


Philosophy 1 1 5 
Philosophy 116 
Philosophy 290 

Philosophy 300 

Philosophy 310 
Relig. Studies 101 
Relig. Studies 102 
Relig. Studies 110 

Relig. Studies 200 
Relig. Studies 2 10 
Relig. Studies 301 


Western Philosophy to 1600 (3) 
Western Philosophy since 1600 (3) 
History of Philosophy: Greek 
Philosophy (3) 

History of Philosophy: Rationalism & 
Empiricism (3) 

Ethics (3) 

Fundamental Hebrew-A (4) 
Fundamental Hebrew- B (4) 
Comparative Study of the World’s 
Great Religions (3) 

Introduction to Christianity (3) 
Introduction to Judaism 
Sanskrit (4) 


C. Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 

I. Introduction to the Social Sciences (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area provide an introduction to the conceptual 
and methodological aspects of the social sciences to human, 
social, political, and economic institutions and behavior in their 
contemporary and historical settings. 

Choices: 


American Studies 101 

Anthropology 102 

Economics 100 
Economics 201 
Economics 210 
Geography 100 
Political Sci 200 
Psychology 101 
Sociology 101 


Introduction to American Culture 
Studies (3) 

Introduction to Cultural 
Anthropology (3) 

The Economic Environment (3) 
Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Economics (5) 

World Geography (3) 

Intro to the Study of Politics (3) 
Introductory Psychology (3) 
Introduction to Sociology (3) 


IV. IMPLICATIONS, EXPLORATIONS 
AND LIFE-LONG LEARNING 
(9 units minimum) 

At least one asterisked (*) course in IV. must be taken. Aster- 
isked courses fulfill the cultural diversity requirement. Cultural 
diversity' courses are designed to enhance understanding of cul- 
tural differences within or between western and/or non-western 
societies. 


A. Implications and Explorations (6 units minimum) 

1. Implications, Explorations and Participatory' Experience in 
the Arts and Humanities (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this area deepen the appreciation of the content of 
IILB.l. and III.B.2. 


140 General Education 


Choices: 

Afro-Ethnic 314 

Afro-Ethnic 320 

Afro-Ethnic 352 
Afro- Ethnic 403 

Afro-Ethnic 410 
Afro- Ethnic 437 

Afro- Ethnic 460 

Anthropology 104 
Anthropology 305 
Anthropology 306 

Art 100 
Art 103 
Art 104 
Art 106 A 
Art 107A 
Art 107B 
Art 205A 
Art 216A 
Art 3 26 A 
Art 338A 
Art 364A 

Chicano Studies 302 
Chicano Studies 304 
Chicano Studies 316 
Chicano Studies 336 

Chicano Studies 337 
Chicano Studies 430 

Chicano Studies 433 
Chicano Studies 440 
Comparative Lit 312 
Comparative Lit 315 

Comparative Lit 352 
Comparative Lit 374 
Comparative Lit 380 
Comparative Lit 423 
Dance 112 
Dance 122 A 
Dance 126 
Dance 132 
Dance 301 
Dance 325 
English 105 
English 204 
English 320 


Pan-African Dance and 
Movement (3)* 

Black American Intellectual 
Thought (3)* 

African Literature (3) 

Oral History of Ethnic 
America (3)* 

Afro-American Literature (3) 
American Indian Religions and 
Philosophy (3) 

Afro-American Music 
Appreciation (3)* 

Traditional Cultures of the World (3)* 
Anthropology of Religion (3)* 
Comparative Aesthetics and 
Symbolism (3)* 

Exploratory Course in Art (3) 
Two-dimensional Design (3) 
Three-dimensional Design (3) 
Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Beginning Drawing (St Painting (3) 
Beginning Drawing & Painting (3) 
Beginning Crafts (3) 

Beginning Sculpture (3) 

Ceramic Sculpture (3) 

Creative Photography (3) 

Stained Glass (3) 

Ancient Mexican Culture (3)* 

Music of Mexico (3)* 

The Chicano Music Experience (3)* 
Main Trends in Spanish-American 
Literature (3) 

Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 
The Evolution of Mexican 
Literature (3) 

Mexican Literature Since 1940 (3) 
Mexican Intellectual Thought (3)* 
The Bible as Literature (3) 

Classical Mythology in World 
Literature (3) 

African Literature (3) 

Soviet Literature (3) 

Introduction to Asian Literature (3)* 
Topics In Asian Literature (3)* 
Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Dance Improvisation (2) 

Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Dance and Cultural Diversity (3)* 
Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 
Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 
Intermediate Creative Writing (3) 
Literature of the American 
Indians (3)* 


English 352 
English 353 

English 354 
English 410 

English 433 
French 315 
French 375 
German 315 

German 375 
Japanese 315 

Japanese 316 
Japanese 375 
Portuguese 320 

Spanish 315 

Spanish 316 

Spanish 375 
History 405 
History 46 5 A 
History 483 
Libraty 200 

Linguistics 354 
Music 183 
Music 184 A 
Music 184B 
Music 185A 
Music 185B 
Music 301 
Music 302 
Music 303 
Music 304 
Music 352 

Music 355 
Music 361 A 
Music 36 IB 
Music 361C 
Music 36 ID 
Music 36 IE 
Music 36 IF 
Music 36 1W 
Music 362 B 
Music 362D 
Music 362E 
Music 362L 
Music 362M 
Music 362P 
Music 362R 


African Literature (3) 

Cultural Pluralism in American 
Literature (3)* 

Linguistics & Literature (3) 
Introduction to Afro-American 
Literature (3) 

Children’s Literature (3) 

Origins of Modern France (3)* 
Introduction to Literature (3) 
Introduction to German 
Civilization (3)* 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
Introduction to Japanese 
Civilization (3)* 

Modern Japan (3)* 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
Introduction to Luso- Brazilian Culture 
and Civilization (3)* 

Introduction to Spanish 
Civilization (3)’ 

Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3)* 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 
History of The Jews (3) 

History of India (3)* 

American Religious History (3) 
Elements of Bibliographic 
Investigation (3) 

Linguistics and Literature (3) 

Voice Class for Non- majors ( 1 ) 

Piano Class for Non-majors ( 1 ) 

Piano Class for Non-majors ( 1 ) 

Guitar class for Non-majors (1) 

Guitar class for Non-Majors (1) 
Techniques of Song Writing (3) 
History of Jazz (3)* 

Ethnic Music (3)* 

Music of Mexico (3)* 

Symphonic Music in Western/Eastern 
Cultures (3)* 

Film Music (3) 

Symphony Orchestra ( 1 ) 

University Choir ( 1 ) 

Symphonic Band (1) 

Opera Theatre ( 1 ) 

University Singers ( 1 ) 

University Wind Ensemble ( 1 ) 
Women’s Choir ( 1 ) 

Varsity Band (1) 

Percussion Ensemble (1) 

Brass Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Lab Band (1) 

Horn Ensemble (1) 

Choral Lab ( 1 ) 

Chamber Orchestra ( 1 ) 


General Education 141 


Music 362S 
Music 362X 
Music 363B 
Music 363G 
Music 363J 
Music 363K 
Music 363S 
Music 363W 
Music 363X 
Philosophy 312 
Philosophy 314 
Philosophy 323 
Philosophy HO 
Polit k ; il Sc i HI 
Political Sci 340 
Relig. Studies 250 
Relig. Studies 270 

Relig. Studies 305 
Relig. Studies 345A 

Relig. Studies 345B 

Relig. Studies 346A 


Relig. Studies 346B 

Relig. Studies 347A 

Relig. Studies 347B 

Relig. Studies 350 
Relig. Studies 405 
Theatre 163 
Theatre 277 
Theatre 310 
Theatre 410A 

Theatre 41 0B 
Theatre 4 10C 
Theatre 4 1 1 


Stage Band (1) 

Beginning Opera Techniques (1) 
Chamber Ensemble Brass ( 1 ) 

Chamber Ensemble Guitar (1) 

Jazz Combo (1) 

Chamber Ensemble Keyboard ( 1 ) 
Chamber Ensemble Strings ( 1 ) 
Chamber Ensemble Woodwind ( 1 ) 
Chamber Ensemble Saxophone ( 1 ) 
Business & Professional Ethics (3) 
Medical Ethics (3) 

Existentialism (3) 

Oriental Philosophy (3)* 

Comparative Third World Politics (3) 
Political Philosophy (3) 

The Religion of Islam (3)* 
Introduction to the Oriental 

Rdig or 

Anthropology of Religion (3)* 

History & Development of Christian 
Thought: The Beginning to 1274 (3) 
History & Development of Christian 
Thought: 1275 to the Present (3) 
History & Development of Jewish 
Thought: Biblical Origins to 
Maimonides (3) 

History & Development of Jewish 
Thought: 1204 to the Present (3) 
History & Development of Hinduism 
to 1200 (3)* 

History & Development of Hinduism 
from 1200 (3)* 

Major Christian Traditions (3) 

History of the Jews (3) 

Beginning Acting (3) 

Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Oral Interpretation of Prose 
Literature (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3) 


2. Implications and Explorations in the Social Sciences (3 units 
minimum) 


Courses in this area are topical and thematic, specialized inquir- 
ies into the contributions of the social sciences to the under- 
standing of human behavior, both within and across traditional 
disciplines. 

Choices: 

Afro-Ethnic 101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3)’ 


Afro- Ethnic 107 

Afro- Ethnic 220 

Afro-Ethnic 245 
Development to 1900 


Introduction to Afro-American 
Studies (3)* 

The Indian in American 
History (3)’ 

A Study of Black Political 


(3)* 

Afro- Ethnic 280 
Afro- Ethnic 301 
Afro- Ethnic 309 
Afro-Ethnic 310 
Afro-Ethnic 311 

Afro-Ethnic 312 
Afro- Ethnic 317 
Afro-Ethnic 331 
Afro-Ethnic 335 
Afro-Ethnic 346 
Afro-Ethnic 422 
Afro-Ethnic 430 
Ethnic Minority 
Behavior (3)* 
Afro-Ethnic 485 

American Studies 

American Studies 
American Studies 
American Studies 

American Studies 

American Studies 
American Studies 
Anthropology 103 
Anthropology 300 
Anthropology 302 
Anthropology (3) 
Anthropology 309 
Anthropology 321 
Anthropology 325 
Anthropology 327 
Anthropology 328 
Anthropology 340 
Anthropology 345 


Afro-American History (3)’ 
Afro-American Culture (3)’ 

The Black Family (3)’ 

Black Women in America (3)’ 
Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3)* 

American Indian Women (3)* 

Black Politics (3)* 

Tribalism and Reservation Life (3)* 
History of Racism (3)’ 

The African Experience (3)* 
Psychology of the Afro-American (3)* 
A Social Psychological Study in 


Pan-Africanism and Contemporary 
Issues (3)* 

300 Introduction to American Popular 
Culture (3) 

301 The American Character (3)* 

345 The American Dream (3) 

386A American Social History, 

1750-1860 (3) 

386B American Social History, 

1865-1930 (3) 

41 1 The White Ethnic in America (3)’ 
450 Women in American Society (3)* 
Introduction to Archaeology (3) 
Language and Culture (3) 

Culture and Personality: Psychological 

Applied Anthropology (3) 

The American Indian (3)* 

Peoples of South America (3)* 

Origins of Civilizations (3) 

Peoples of Africa (3)* 

Peoples of Asia (3)’ 

Peoples of the Middle East & North 
Africa (3)* 


Anthropology 347 
Anthropology 360 
Anthropology 450 
Chicano Studies 106 
Chicano Studies 220 
Chicano Studies 305 
Chicano Studies 403 
Southwest (3)’ 
Chicano Studies 406 


Peoples of the Pacific (3)’ 
Contemporary American Culture (3)* 
Culture and Education (3) 
Introduction to Chicano Studies (3)* 
Mexican Heritage (3)’ 

The Chicano Family (3)* 

Cultural Differences in Mexico & the 

La Chicana (3)* 


142 General Education 


Chicano Studies 431 

The Chicano Child (3)* 

Political Sci 

300 

Contemporary Issues in California 

Chicano Studies 432 

The Chicano Adolescent (3)* 



Government & Politics (3) 

Chicano Studies 445 

History of the Chicano (3)* 

Political Sci 

309 

Intro to Metropolitan Politics (3) 

Chicano Studies 450 

The Chicano and Contemporary 

Political Sci 

310 

American Political Behavior (3) 


Issues (3)* 

Political Sci 

315 

American Political Process (3) 

Chicano Studies 453 

Mexico Since 1906 (3)* 

Political Sci 

317 

Black Politics (3)* 

Chicano Studies 460 

The Chicano and Politics (3)* 

Political Sci 

320 

Politics, Policy and Administration (3) 

Child Dev 312 

Human Growth & Development (3) 

Political Sci 

330 

Comparative Political Analysis (3) 

Communications 233 

Mass Communication in Modern 

Political Sci 

350 

World Politics (3) 


Society (3) 

Political Sci 

352 

American Foreign Policy (3) 

Counseling 380 

Theories and Techniques of 

Political Sci 

375 

Public Law (3) 


Counseling (3) 

Political Sci 

445 

Political Learning & Socialization (3) 

Criminal Justice 300 

Introduction to Criminal Justice (3) 

Political Sci 

460 

The Chicano & Politics (3)* 

Economics 201 

Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Psychology 3 1 1 

Educational Psychology (3) 


Economics 202 
Economics 330 
Economics 331 
Economics 332 
Economics 333 

Economics 334 

Economics 350 
Economics 361 
Economics 362 

Geography 160 
Geography 170 
Geography 332 
Geography 333 
Geography 340 
Geography 344 
Geography 346 
Geography 350 
History 270 
History 350 

History 360 

History 370 
History 386 A 
History 386B 
History 452 
History 455 
Human Services 3 1 1 

Human Services 380 

Linguistics 108 
Linguistics 369 
Linguistics 412 
Philosophy 302 
Philosophy 341 
Philosophy 385 
Physical Educ 381 


Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Comparative Economic Systems (3) 
The Soviet Economy (3) 

Economic Problems of Asia (3) 
Economic Development: Analysis & 
Case Studies (3) 

Economics of Latin America & the 
Caribbean (3) 

American Economic History (3) 
Urban Economics (3) 

Environmental and Resource 
Economics (3) 

Culture and Environment (3) 

The City (3) 

United States and Canada (3)* 

Latin America (3)* 

Asia (3) 

Africa (3)* 

The Pacific World (3) 

Conserv & Ecology in America (3) 
Women in American History (3)’ 
History of Latin American 
Civilization (3)* 

Modern Asia: Nationalism & 
Revolutionary Change (3)* 

American Sex Reformers (3) 

Amer Social History, 1750-1860 (3) 
Amer Social History, 1865-1930 (3) 
20th Century Brazil (3)’ 

Latin America Since 1945 (3) 
Intracultural Socialization 
Patterns (3)’ 

Theories and Techniques of 
Counseling (3) 

Linguistics and Minority Dialects (3)’ 
Language, Sex Roles & the Brain (3) 
Sociolinguistics (3) 

Introduction to Women’s Studies (3)* 
Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 
Philosophy of Social Sciences (3) 
Human Movement in Cultural 
Perspective (3) 


Psychology 312 

Psychology 331 
Psychology 341 
Psychology 350 
Psychology 351 
Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 
Soc 


ology 133 
ology 361 
ology 371 
ology 407 
ology 43 1 
ology 436 
ology 450 
ology 451 
ology 455 
ology 456 
ology 465 


Speech Comm 320 


The Psychology of Human Sexual 
Behavior (3) 

Psychology of Personality (3) 
Abnormal Psychology (3) 
Environmental Psychology (3) 

Social Psychology (3) 

Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 

Introduction to Gerontology (3) 
Population Problems (3) 

Urban Sociology (3) 

Women in Contemporary Society (3) 
Minority Group Relations (3)* 

Social Stratification (3)* 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 

Sociology of the Family (3) 

Medical Sociology (3) 

Mental Illness (3) 

Law and Society (3) 

Intercultural Communication (3)* 


B. Life-Long Learning (3 units minimum) 

Courses in this section facilitate understanding of the human 
being as an integrated physiological, social, and psychological 
organism. They may also integrate major areas of earlier portions 
of the general education program (Sections II. through IV. A. 2.). 


Choices: 

American Studies 450 
Anthropology 415 
Anthropology 417 
Anthropology 432 

Biological Sci 306 
Biological Sci 31 1 
Biological Sci 314 
Biological Sci 360 
Chemistry 111 
Chemistry 3 1 1 


Women in American Society (3)' 
Culture & Nutrition (3) 

Life Quests (3) 

Women in Cross-Cultural 
Perspective (3) 

Biology of Aging (3) 

Nutrition and Disease (3) 

Human Issues in Genetics ( 1 ) 
Biology of Human Sexuality ( 1 ) 
Nutrition & Drugs (3) 

Nutrition and Disease (3) 


General Education 143 


Child Dev 312 
Child Dev 330 
Chicano Studies 305 
Comparative Lit 355 
Ed Sec 386 
English 355 
English 356 
Geography 357 

Health Science 101 
Health Science 301 
Human Services 300 
Music 350 
Nursing 301 
Nursing 302 


Human Growth and Development (3) 
Adolescence & Early Adulthood (3) 
The Chicano Family (3) 

Images of Wom<*n in Literature (3) 
Adolescence (3) 

Images of Women in Literature (3) 
The Literature of Aging (3) 

Social Geography: Perception & 
Behavior (3) 

Personal Health (3) 

Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Character and Conflict (3) 

Music in Our Society (3) 

Promotion of Optimal Health (3) 
Health Delivery System and the 
Consumer (3) 




Philosophy 120 
Philosophy 312 
Philosophy 324 
Physical Ed. 350 

Psychology 312 

Psychology 361 
Psychology 362 
Sociology 341 
Sociology 450 
Sociology 451 
Sociology 460 
Speech Comm 345 


Philosophy of the Person (3) 
Business & Professional Ethics (3) 
Existential Group (3) 

Physical Activity & Lifelong Well- 
being (3) 

The Psychology of Human Sexual 
Behavior (3) 

Developmental Psychology (3) 
Psychology of Aging (3) 

Social Interaction (3) 

Sociology of Sex Roles (3) 
Sociology’ of the Family (3) 
Sociology of Death and Dying (3) 
Communications and Aging (3) 









144 General Education 


Teaching Credential 

Programs 



California State University, Fullerton offers a full range of State- 
approved credential programs leading to careers in education. 
From its earliest days to the present, this has been one of the chief 
missions of the university. Pursuing a teaching credential in Cali- 
fornia is a complicated matter because of the number of specific 
requirements that must be met. Credential requirements are es- 
tablished by the Legislature and enforced by the Commission on 
Teacher Credentialing (CTC). This commission also reviews and 
approves all credential preparation programs, such as those at the 
university. An academic major in education is not permitted in 
California, thus students seeking teaching credentials must do so 
in conjunction with, or after the completion of, a baccalaureate 
degree program in an academic area outside of education. CSUF 
offers programs leading to basic teaching credentials, specialist cre- 
dentials, and services credentials. The specialist and services cre- 
dentials, described briefly below, are more advanced programs 
designed to be taken in conjunction with graduate study. 

In this section of the catalog information is presented regarding: 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

B. The Multiple Subject Credential and Waiver Program 

C. The Single Subject Credential and Waiver Programs 

D. Supplementary Authorizations for the Basic Teaching 
Credentials 

E. Specialist and Services Credentials 

A. Basic Credential Programs 

In California there are two basic teaching credentials, the Multi- 
ple Subject Credential and the Single Subject Credential. The Multi- 
ple Subject Credential authorizes a person to teach in a classroom 
where many different subjects are taught by a single individual, 
such as in elementary schools. The Single Subject Credential au- 
thorizes a teacher to teach in a classroom where only one subject 
is taught, such as a classroom in departmentalized high schools 
and some junior high schools. Thus the person interested in 
elementary school teaching should pursue the program designed 
for the Multiple Subject Credential, and the person interested in 
teaching a specific subject at the junior high or high school level 
should pursue the program for the Single Subject Credential. 

In California a person can earn first a preliminary and then a clear 
basic teaching credential. The requirements for the clear creden- 
tial are built on those for the preliminary credential. The prelimi- 
nary credential is the level that authorizes beginning teaching. 


Teaching Credential Programs 145 


Minimum Requirements for a Preliminary 
Multiple or Single Subject Credential 

Although it is possible to complete the minimum requirements 
for a preliminary basic teaching credential in four years, it gener- 
ally takes a good student with accurate academic advising about 
four and a half years full time to complete all the requirements for 
a preliminary basic teaching credential and a baccalaureate de- 
gree. The minimum requirements for a preliminary basic creden- 
tial include: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree in a field other than professional edu- 
cation from a regionally accredited college or university. 

2. An approved program of professional preparation, including 
supervised student teaching. A two semester program may be 
taken during the fourth and/or fifth year of study. Cal State 
Fullerton offers State approved professional preparation pro- 
grams through the School of Human Development and Com- 
munity Service. An alternative plan is the three semester 
Intern Credential Program, which combines one semester of 
supervised student teaching and coursework. This alternative 
is offered in both Multiple Subject and Multiple Subject with 
a Bilingual Emphasis Credential Programs. Further informa- 
tion about these programs, including admission and prerequi- 
site requirements, is provided in this catalog under the De- 
partment of Elementary and Bilingual Education, and the Sec- 
ondary Teacher Education Program. 

3. Passage of the California Basic Education Skills Test 
(CBEST), a test of reading, writing, critical thinking and 
mathematics skills. CSUF is one of the State-approved test- 
ing centers for this examination as well as for other examina- 
tions used in the teacher credentialing process. 

4. Demonstration of subject matter knowledge appropriate to 
the specific credential being authorized. This can be achieved 
either by passing a State-approved subject matter examina- 
tion or by completing a State -approved examination Wxiver 
Program. Cal State Fullerton offers Waiver Programs for the 
Multiple Subject subject matter examination and for 14 Sin- 
gle Subject examination areas. These programs are described 
in more detail below. 

5. Satisfactory completion of at least two semester units of work 
on the provisions and principles of the U.S. Constitution or 
passage of an examination on this area. 

6. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods of 
teaching reading. 

To help ensure that all credential requirements are met with a minimum 
of difficulty, it is essential that people seek sound academic advising as 
soon as possible. The Office of Admissions to Teacher Education, 
located in Education Classroom 207, provides information on 
waiver program advising and specific credential requirements, 


details on procedures for admission to the professional program in 
teacher preparation, information on preprofessional prerequi- 
sites, and advice on a number of other important matters of 
concern to students interested in the possibility of becoming a 
teacher. Students are encouraged to seek the information offered 
by this Office at their earliest convenience. 

B. The Multiple Subject 
Credential and Waiver Program 

In California Professional Teacher Preparation is a two- or three- 
semester program taken during the fourth and/or fifth year of 
college; there is no major in education. Since students will be 
devoting their first three years of work to completing general 
education, major and waiver program requirements, it is essential 
that students consider their selection of an academic major care- 
fully. Most persons interested in earning a Multiple Subject Cre- 
dential at CSUF select child development, liberal studies or 
human services as an academic major. Persons interested in work- 
ing as bilingual teachers by earning a Multiple Subject Credential 
with a Bilingual Emphasis, might consider majoring in a foreign 
language. Majors in the social sciences, humanities or natural 
sciences can also be excellent backgrounds for careers in elemen- 
tary school teaching. According to California law, any major 
(other than education) can be selected. 

Transfer students and students interested in qualifying for a CSUF 
waiver program should seek a transcript evaluation from the 
Credential Preparation Center, Education Classroom 207. 

A person seeking a Multiple Subject Credential will also be 
required to demonstrate a broad general knowledge of the arts, 
humanities, social sciences, mathematics, language arts, and 
natural sciences. There are two ways to demonstrate that knowl- 
edge: one is by passing a State-approved examination, the other 
is by completing the CSUF State-approved Multiple Subject Waiv- 
er Program. 

A student evaluated under an earlier waiver program retains the 
option of being evaluated under subsequent waiver programs. 

Multiple Subject Waiver 

The specific requirements of the CSUF waiver program are sub- 
ject to change by the California Commission on Teacher Creden- 
tialing. Students wishing to complete waiver requirements as 
stipulated below must receive an official waiver evaluation 
through procedures established by the Credential Preparation 
Center located in the Education Classroom Building, Room 207. 

All students who have documented advisement as of December 
31, 1990, under a previously- approved Multiple Subject Waiver 
may complete that waiver if they can do so by August 3 1 , 1994. A 
grade of C or better is required in all classes used to meet waiver 
program requirements. The following coursework requirement is 
effective January, 1991. 


146 Teaching Credential Programs 


1. Language and Literature (21 units minimum) 

1.1 Composition (6 units minimum) 

1.11 Completion of the “Written Communication” 
requirement of the campus general education 
program 

1.12 Any course approved by the University Board on 
Writing Proficiency as meeting the upper divi- 
sion writing requirement 

1.2 Literature (6 units minimum) 

*1.21 Children’s literature (3 units minimum) — one 
of the following: English 433 or Theatre 411 

1.22 Literature (3 units minimum) — one of the fol- 
lowing: Chicano Studies 336, 337, 430 or 433; or 
Comparative Literature 111 or 325; or English 
200, 311, 312, 321, 322 or 352 

1.3 Speech (3 units minimum) — Completion of the “Oral 
Communication” requirement of the campus general 
education program 

1.4 Language acquisition (6 units minimum) 

*1.41 Grammar: English 303 

1.42 Language acquisition — one of the following: 
Anthropology 300; Linguistics 106; Speech 
Communication 403; or one semester college 
level study of a modem foreign language 

1.5 Interdisciplinary Studies (optional): Speech Communi- 
cation 305 (NOTE: Students completing this course 
may waive section ) 

2. Mathematics (9 units minimum) 

2.1 Completion of the “Mathematics” requirement of the 
campus general education program 

*2.2 Math education: Mathematics 303 A and 303 B 

3. Science (15 units minimum) 

3. 1 Completion of the “Biological Science” requirement of 
the campus general education proram 

3.2 Completion of the “Physical Science” requirement of 
the campus general education program 

3.3 Completion of the laboratory requirement of the cam- 
pus general education program 

3.4 Other coursework to complete the GE mathematics and 
natural sciences requirement (2 units minimum) 

*3.5 Science Education (6 units minimum) 

Science Education 310 
Science Education 453 

4 . Social Sciences and History (21 units minimum) 

41 U.S. govemment/political science (3 units minimum) 
— completion of the “Government” requirement of the 
campus general education program 


4 2 American History (3 units minimum) — completion of 
the “American History” requirement of the campus gen- 
eral education program 

4.3 World History and Culture (3 units minimum) — one of 
the following: Anthropology 100; or History 110A, 

1 10B, 303A, 303B, 400A or 400B 

4 4 Geography (3 units minimum) — one of the following: 
Geography 100 or 160 

4 5 Economics (3 units minimum) — one of the following: 
Economics 100, 201, 202 or 210; or Geography 360; or 
Political Science 457 

4-6 Anthropology/Psychology/Sociology (3 units mini- 
mum) — one of the following: Anthropology 102; or 
Psychology 101; or Sociology 101 

4 7 Cultural Diversity in the Social Sciences (3 units mini- 
mum) — one of the following GE cultural diversity 
classes: 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 309 or 311; or American Studies 
301; or Anthropology 432; or Chicano Studies 305 or 
431; or Sociology 431; or Speech Communication 320 

4 8 Interdisciplinary Studies (optional): Liberal Studies 308 
(NOTE: Students completing this course may waive 
section 4.5 or 4.6) 

5. Humanities (9 units minimum) 

5. 1 Logic (3 units minimum) — completion of the “Critical 
Thinking” requirement of the campus general education 
program 

5.2 Philosophy/Ethics/Classics (3 units minimum) — one of 
the following: Latin 101; or Comparative Literature 
1 10, 315, 320 or 324; or History 41 5A, 41 5B, 41 7A or 
41 7B; or Philosophy 100, 115, 116, 290, 300 or 310 

5.3 Comparative Arts (3 units minimum) — one of the 
following: American Studies 395; or Anthropology 306; 
or Dance 301; or Liberal Studies 306; or Music 350 or 
352; or Theatre 402 A 

6. Visual and Performing Arts (12 units minimum) 

6. 1 Completion of the “Introduction to the Arts” require- 
ment of the campus general education program 

*6.2 Children’s art (3 units minimum) — must take Art 380 

*6.3 Children’s music (3 units minimum) — one of the fol- 
lowing: Music 333 or 433 

*6.4 Children’s theatre and dance — one of the following: 
Dance 471 or Theatre 402 A 

7. Health and Movement (6 units minimum) 

* 7. 1 Health (3 units minimum) — must take Health Science 
355 

*7.2 Movement for children (3 units minimum) — Physical 
Education 372 


Teaching Credential Programs 147 


8. Human Development (3 units minimum) 

*8.1 Child Development 325 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ART 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (36 units) 


9. Field Experience (0-3 units) 

9.1 Elementary Education 315 (or equivalent experience) 

The above waiver program has been designed for maximal com- 
patibility with the campus general education program. Neverthe- 
less, gixxJ academic advising and careful course selection each 
semester are essential if a person is to complete major require- 
ments, waiver requirements and general education requirements 
with the least amount of difficulty. 


* Assessment Portfolio courses. 


Art 103 

Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 104 

Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Art 106 A 

Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Art 107A.B 

Beginning Drawing and Painting (6) 

Art 117 

Life Drawing (3) 

Art 201A.B 

Art and Civilization (6) 

Art 205A 

Beginning Crafts (3) 

Art 207A 

Drawing and Painting (3) 

Arr M0A 

Watercolor (3) 

Art 312 

Art of the 20th Century 1900 to 
Present (3) 


C. Single Subject Credentials and 
Waiver Programs 

Although a person seeking a Single Subject Credential may com- 
plete any academic major, most people decide to complete the 
degree major closest to the subject field in which they wish to be 
authorized to teach. CSUF offers a Single Subject Credential 
program in each of the following 14 State-authorized subject 
fields: 

Art 

Business Education 

English (English, Speech, Theater) 

French 

German 

Government (Political Science) 

History 

Life Science (Biology) 

Mathematics 

Music 

Physical Education 

Physical Sciences (Chemistry, Geology and Physics) 
Social Sciences (Anthropology, American Studies, 
Economics, Geography, Chicano Studies, Fhstory, Afro- 
Ethnic Studies, Psychology and Sociology) 

Spanish 

Ti> demonstrate subject matter competence a person must either 
pass the appropriate State-approved examination, or complete a 
State-approved waiver program. These waiver programs generally 
coincide sufficiently with the degree major to make it possible to 
complete major requirements and waiver requirements using 
many of the same courses. But degree programs and waiver pro- 
grams serve different purposes; taking one is not a guarantee that 
you will have satisfied the requirements o i the other. Good advis- 
ing and careful planning are crucial. Transfer students seeking a 
CSUF waiver should seek a transcript evaluation from the Cre- 
dential Preparation Center, Education Classroom 207. The 
CSUF waiver programs for each of the Single Subject fields listed 
above are presented below: 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


Students select one of the following areas of emphasis 


Drawing, Painting and General Art 


Art 207B 
Art 347 
Art 307 A, B 
Art 317 


Drawing and Painting (3) 
Printmaking-Etching (3) 

Advanced Drawing and Painting (6) 
Life Studies: Draw, Paint and 
Sculpting (3) 


Crafts and Ceramics 

Art 205B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Art 305 A Advanced Crafts (3) 

Art 306A,B Advanced Ceramics (6) 

Art 315A Jewelry (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: BUSINESS 
EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30-33 
units) 

(All students must meet the following core requirements. In 
addition, each student must meet the requirements of one of the 
four specializations which are: accounting, marketing, econom- 
ics, and office administration.) 

Demonstration of Typewriting Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) five-minute timed writing; minimum 
score 40 words gross per minute with five errors maximum, and 
(2) demonstration of problem-solving ability: Setting up a busi- 
ness letter, tabulation problem and rough-draft material from 
unarranged copy and in mailable/usable form and (3) passing a 
written exam covering correct form and style (including punctua- 
tion, syllabication, and grammar) applicable to typewriting 
skill.) 


148 Teaching Credential Programs 


Demonstration of Office Machines Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: (1) Demonstration of ability to produce a 
complex business letter, containing tabulation, on a microcom* * 
puter or wordprocessor, in mailable form, and (2) ability to add 
columns of figures on a 10*key calculating machine using the 
touch system.) 


Management 339 Managing Business Operations and 
Organizations (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 
Students must take 15 units selected from the following: 


Students pursuing a single subject waiver must take all of the 
following: (15 units) 


Economics 201 
Economics 202 
Accounting 201A,B 
Management 246 


Principles of Microeconomics (3)' * 
Principles of Macroeconomics (3)* * 
Elementary Accounting (6) 

Business Law (3) 


One of the following: (3 units) 


Manag Sci 263 

Manag Sci 264 
Manag Sci 265 

Computer Sci 1 12 


Intro to Information Systems and 
Microcomputer Applications (2) and 
Intro to Computer Programming (2) or 
Introduction to Information Systems 
and Computer Programming (3) or 
Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 


All of the following: (9 units) 


Accounting 302 
Accounting 308 
Accounting 401 
Economics 310 
Economics 320 
Management 344 
Finance 320 
Management 340 
Marketing 352 
Philosophy 312 
Mathematics 135 
Computer Sci 223F 
Manage Sci 270 

Management 339 

Manage Sci 361 


Cost Accounting (3) 

Concepts of Federal Income Tax (3) 
Advanced Accounting (3) 

Intermediate Microeconomics (3)* 
Intermediate Macroeconomics (3)" * 
Intro to Systems Concepts (3) 

Business Finance (3) 

Organizational Behavior (3) 

Principles of Retailing (3) ' * * 
Business/Professional Ethics (3) 
Business Calculus (3) 

Workshop in Fortran* 7 7 (2) 

File Concepts and Cobal Programming 

(3) 

Managing Business 
Operations/Organization (3) * * * 
Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 


Business Admin 301 Business Writing (3) 

Finance 310 Personal Financial 

Management (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: ENGLISH 
(ENGLISH, THEATER, SPEECH) 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 units) 


And one area of specialization: (3*6 units) 

Accounting Specialization* 


Composition 

English 101 Beginning College Writing (3) 


Accounting 301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (6) 


One of the following: 


Marketing Specialization* 

Marketing 352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Marketing 370 Consumer Behavior (3) 

Economics Specialization* 


English 301 
Theatre 47 7B 

Speech Comm 300 


Advanced College Writing (3) 
Senior Seminar in Critical 
Techniques (3) 

Intro to Research in Speech 
Communications (3) 


Economics 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 

(3) 

Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 

(3) 

Office Administration Specialization* 

Demonstration of Shorthand Proficiency 

(Proficiency Exam: Ability to take dictation at a minimum of 80 
words per minute for three minutes and transcribe the material 
into mailable/usable form.) 


Linguistics 

English 303 Structure of Modem English (3) 


‘The concentrations for the business administration major in accounting, eco* 
nomics and marketing require a total of 18-20 units of in-depth course work in those 
areas. 

* * Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) may he substituted for Econ 201 and 
202. Students who have already completed Econ 100 and 200 may substitute this 
combination for Econ 201 and 202. 

* * 'These courses may not fulfill a portion of the breadth and perspective require- 
ments if they are used to meet part of the core (specialization) requirements. 


Teaching Credential Programs 149 


One of the following: 


Culture (Select 6 units from the following) 

Linguistics 106 

Linguistics and Minority 

French 315 

Origins of Modern France (3) 


Dialects (3) 

French 325 

Contemporary French 

English 305 

English Language in 


Civilization (3) 


America (3) 

French 407 

French Film (3) 

English 490 

History of English Language (3) 



Literature 


Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

All of the following: 






French 385 

Translation (3) 

English 300 

Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 

French 466 

Introduction to French 

English 31 1 

Masters of British Literature 


Linguistics (3) 


to 1760 (3) 

French 500 

Stylistics (3) 

English 312 

Masters of British Literature 




from 1760 (3) 

Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

English 321 

American Literature to 




Whitman (3) 

French 375 

Introduction to Literature (3) 

English 322 

American Literature from Twain to the 

French 415 

French Classicism (3) 


Moderns (3) 

French 425 

French Romanticism (3) 

English 334 

Shakespeare (3) 

French 475ABCD 

Senior Seminar (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 

French 485 

French Literature (3) 

Students may select one of the following areas of emphasis: 

Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected from 



courses listed above in 

consultation with an adviser based on 

Theatre: All of the following: 

candidate’s background 

, interest and teaching plans. 

Theatre 200 

Art of the Theatre (3) 



Theatre 263 

Acting (3) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: GERMAN 

Theatre 2 76 A 

Stagecraft ( 3) 

Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects Commonly Taught 

Theatre 370A 

Directing (3) 

(30 units) 


Theatre 402 B 

Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 



English Literature: Fifteen semester units of adviser- approved 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

literature courses. 






German 300 

German Conversation (3) 

Public Speaking: Five 

courses from the following: 

German 317 

Advanced Conversation and 




Composition (3) 

Speech Comm 102 

Public Speaking (3) 

German 401 

Advanced Conversation and 

Speech Comm 1 38 

Forensics (3) 


Vocabulary (3) 

Speech Comm 200 

Human Communication (3) 



Speech Comm 324 

Small Group Communication (3) 

Culture (Select 6 units 

from the following) 

Speech Comm 332 

Processes of Social Influence ( 3) 



Speech Comm 334 

Persuasive Speaking (3) 

German 315 

Introduction to German Civilization 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: FRENCH 

German 325 

(3) 

Current Trends in Culture of German- 

Upper-Division Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught 


Speaking Peoples (3) 

(30 units) 


German 482 

German Film (3) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 

Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following) 

French 300 

French Conversation (3) 



French 317 

Advanced Composition and Grammar 

German 399 

German Phonetics (3) 


(3) 

German 466 

Introduction to German 

French 318 

Advanced Composition and Grammar 


Linguistics (3) 


(3) 

German 500 

Advanced Structure and Style (3) 


150 Teaching Credential Programs 


Literature (Select 6 units from the following) 

German 375 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

German 430 

German Literature and Culture to the 
Baroque (3) 

German 440 

18th Century German Literature and 
Culture (3) 

German 450 

19th Century German Literature and 
Culture (3) 

German 460 

20th Century German Literature and 
Culture (3) 

German 485 

Seminar in German 

Literature (3) 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected from 
courses listed above in consultation with an advisor based on 
candidate’s background, interest and teaching plans. 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: 
GOVERNMENT 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 Semes- 
ter Units) 


Political Sci. 100 
Political Sci. 300 

Political Sci. 309 
Political Sci. 310 
Political Sci. 315 
Political Sci. 320 

Political Sci. 330 
Political Sci. 340 
Political Sci. 350 
Political Sci. 375 


American Government (3) 
Contemporary Issues in California 
Government and Politics (3) 

Intro to Metropolitan Politics (3) 
American Political Behavior (3) 
American Political Process (3) 
Politics, Policy & 

Administration (3) 

Comparative Political Analysis (3) 
Political Philosophy (3) 

World Politics (3) 

Public Law (3) 


Chicano 460 

The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Afro 335 

History of Racism (3) 

Law (3 units) 

One of the following: 

Chicano 360 

Chicanos and the Law (3) 

Political Sci. 376 

Research Proseminar in Public Law 

Political Sci. 470 

(3) 

Judicial Process (3) 

Political Sci. 473 

Introduction to Constitutional 

Political Sci. 474 

Law (3) 

Seminar in Constitutional Law: Civil 

Political Sci. 475 

Rights and Civil Liberties (3) 
Administrative Law (3) 


Comparative Systems/ International Politics (3 units) 

One of the following: 

Political Sci. 335 

Comparative Political Change (3) 

Political Sci. 351 

Research Proseminar in International 
Politics (3) 

Political Sci. 425 

Comparative Public Administration 

(3) 

Political Sci. 430 

Government Politics of a Selected 
Nation-State (3) 

Political Sci. 431 

Government and Politics of a Selected 
Area (3) 

Political Sci. 446 

Corruption, Ethics and Public Policy 

(3) 

Political Sci. 452 

Foreign Policy of a Selected Country 
or Group of Countries (3) 

Political Sci. 455 

Comparative Analysis of Foreign 
Politics (3) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15 Semester Units) 


U.S. Government (6 units) 
Two courses from the following: 


Political Sci. 311 

Research Proseminar in American 


Political Behavior (3) 

Political Sci. 347 

Political Theory and Political Practice 


(3) 

Political Sci. 407 

Quantitative Methods in Political 


Science (3) 

Political Sci. 410 

Political Parties (3) 

Political Sci. 413 

Pressure Groups and Public Opinions 


(3) 

Political Sci. 414 

The Legislative Process (3) 

Political Sci. 415 

Power and Participation in America 


(3) 

Political Sci. 416 

The American Presidency (3) 

Political Sci. 445 

Political Learning & 


Socialization (3) 


Public Administration (3 units) 

One of the following: 

Political Sci. 321 

Research Proseminar in Politics, Policy 
and Administration (3) 

Political Sci. 421 

Public Finance Administration (3) 

Political Sci. 422 

Public Personnel 

Administration (3) 

Political Sci. 423 

Regional Planning and Development 

(3) 

Political Sci. 424 

Urban Planning and 

Development (3) 

Political Sci. 425 

Comparative Public Administration 

(3) 

Political Sci. 426 

Collective Bargaining in the Public 
Sector (3) 

Political Sci. 427 

Current Issues in Urban & 
Metropolitan Policy (3) 

Political Sci. 429 

Public Personnel Training (3) 


Teaching Credential Programs 151 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: HISTORY u s - and North American History: (at least 6 units) 


Core Requirements 

in Subjects Commonly Taught (30-33 

History/ Amer Studies 


units) 


386A 

American Social 



History 1750-1860 (3) 


All of the following: 


History/ Amer Studies 




386B 

American Social History 

History 110A 

Western Civilization to the 16th 


1860-1930 (3) 


Century (3) 

Amer Studies 301 

The American Character (3) 

History 1 10B 

Western Civilization Since the 16th 

Amer Studies 345 

The American Dream (3) 


Century (3) 

Amer Studies 395 

American West in Symbol and 

History 383 

History of California (3) 


Myth (3) 

History 426 

Rise of Modern Europe (3) 

Amer Studies 416 

Southern California Culture: 

History 429 

Europe since 1914 (3) 


A Study of American 




Regionalism (3) 

North America and 

U.S.: take one from the following: 

Amer Studies 450 

Women in U.S. History (3) 



Chicano 453 

Modern Mexico (3) 

History 180 

Survey of American History (3) 

History 380 

Canada, 1534-1967 

History 170A,B 

United States History (6) 

History 350 

History of Latin American Civilization 

Amer Studies 201 

Intro to American Studies (3) 


(3) (If not used to satisfy core 




requirements) 

Latin America: take 

one from the following: 

History 453 

Modern Mexico (3) 



History 470 

American Colonial Civilization (3) 

History 350 

History of Latin American 

History 471 

United States ffom Colony to 


Civilization (3) 


Nation (3) 

History 453 

Modern Mexico (3) 

History 472 

Jeffersonian Themes in American 




Society, 1800-1861 (3) 

Asia: take one of the following (3 to 6 units) 

History 473 

Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 (3) 



History 474 

The United States 1876-1914 (3) 

History 360 

Modern Asia (3) 

History 475 

America Comes of Age, 

History 462 A, B 

History of China (6) 


1914-1945 (3) 

History 463 A, B 

History of Japan (6) 

History 476 

United States Since 1945 (3) 

History 464 A, B 

History of Southeast Asia (6) 

History 479 

The Urbanization of American 

History 465 A, B 

History of India (6) 


Life (3) 



History 485 

U.S. Foreign Relations (3) 

Africa and the Middle East: take one pair (6 units) 

History 486 

United States Cultural History (3) 



History 487 

History of American Parties & 

History 466 A, B 

History of Islamic Civilizations (6) 


Politics (3) 

History 467 

Middle East in the 19th 




Century (3) 

Western Civilization and Modern Europe: (at least 6 units) 

and History 468 

Middle East in the 20th 

History 341 

Tudor-Stuart England (3) 


Century (3) 

History 342 

Modem England and Great Britain (3) 

History 458 

Southern Africa in the 20th 

History 401 

European Intellectual History from 


Century (3) 


1500 to the Present (3) 

and Afro 346 

The African Experience (3) 

History 415A 

Classical Greece (3) 



History 415B 

Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

Breadth and Depth Requirements (15 units) 

History 417A 

Roman Republic (3) 



History 417B 

Roman Empire (3) 

Historical Methodology: (at least 3 units) 

History 42 5 A 

The Renaissance (3) 



History 425B 

The Reformation (3) 

History 300 A 

Historical Thinking (3) 

History 432 

Modem Germany from 18th 

Amer Studies 350 

Seminar in Theory and Method of 


Century (3) 


American Studies (3) 

History 434A 

Russia to 1890 (3) 

History 490 

Senior Research Seminar (3) 

History 434B 

The Russian Revolutions and the 

Amer Studies 401 

Proseminar in American 


Soviet Regime (3) 


Studies (3) 

History 437 

East Europe (3) 


152 Teaching Credential Programs 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: LIFE 
SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (31 units) 


All of the following: 

Biological Sci 141 
Biological Sci 14 1L 
Biological Sci 161 
Biological Sci 161 L 
Biological Sci 302 
Biological Sci 302L 
Biological Sci 312 
Biological Sci 315 
Biological Sci 316 

One of the following: 

Biological Sci 315L 

Biological Sci 316L 

One of the following: 

Biological Sci 362 
Biological Sci 410 
Biological Sci 468 

Biological Sci 444 


Principles of Botany (2) 
Principles of Botany Lab (2) 
Principles of Zoology (2) 
Principles of Zoology Lab (2) 
General Microbiology (2) 
General Microbiology Lab (2) 
Genetics (3) 

Cell and Molecular Biology (3) 
Principles of Ecology (3) 


Cell and Molecular Biology 
Lab (2) 

Principles of Ecology Lab (2) 


Mammalian Physiology (4) 
Cell Physiology (4) 
Comparative Animal 
Physiology (4) 

Plant Physiology (4) 


One of the following: 


Biological Sci 419 
Biological Sci 419L 

Biological Sci 446 
Biological Sci 461 
Biological Sci 475 


Marine Ecology (3j and 
Marine Ecology Lab (1) 

Phycology (4) 
Invertebrate Zoology (4) 
Ichthyology (4) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (27-30 units) 


Chemistry 120A,B General Chemistry (10) 

Physics 21 1 A,B 

and 

Physics 211AL,BL Elementary Physics (8) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: 
MATHEMATICS 


Unit Requirement (34 units) 


Math 150A.B 

Math 250A,B 
Math 335 
Math 380 
Math 401 


Math 402 


Analytic Geometry and 
Calculus (8) 

Intermediate Calculus (8) 
Mathematical Probability (3) 

History of Mathematics (3) 

Algebra and Probability for the 
Secondary Teacher (3) 

Logic and Geometry for the Secondary 
Teacher (3) 


One of the following: 


Math 435 
Math 438 


Mathematical Statistics (3) 
Introduction to Stochastic Processes (3) 


One of the following: 


Computer Sci 112 Introduction to Computer 
Programming (3) 

Computer Sci 121 Programming Concepts (3) 

Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 


Closely Related Subjects Requirement (15) 

Mathematics 302 Modern Algebra (3) 

Mathematics 307 Applied Linear Algebra (3) 

One of the following: 


Computer Sci 131 Data Structures Concepts (3) 
Computer Sci 231 File Systems Concepts (3) 


Two of the following courses: 


Math 3 50 A 
Math 370 
Philosophy 368 
Philosophy 369 


Advanced Calculus (3) 

Mathematical Model Building (3) 
First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 
Second Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: MUSIC 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (30 units) 


One of the following: 

Chemistry 301A,B Organic Chemistry (6) 

and 

Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 

or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 

One of the following: 


Math 130A A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Math 150A Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (4) 


Music 1 1 1 A,B 
Music 211 
Music 251 
Music 281B,P,S,W 
Music 319 
Music 351 A 

Music 35 IB 

Music 35 1C 

Music 391 A 


Diatonic Harmony (6) 

Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Survey of Musical Literature (3) 
Orchestral Instruments (1) 

Form and Analysis (3) 

History and Literature of Music 
(Greek through Renaissance) (3) 
History and Literature of Music 
(Baroque and Classics) (3) 
History and Literature of Music 
(Romantic to Present) (3) 

Choral Conducting (2) 


Teaching Credential Programs 153 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (15+ units) 

One of the following: (2 units) 

Music 320A 20th Century Techniques (2) 

Music 320B 20th Century Techniques (2) 

One of the following: (4 units) 


Music 323A 

Orchestration (2) 

and 

Music 324 

Scoring for the Band (2) 

Music 453A 

in 

Music 453B 

Choral Literature and Interpretation 
(2) 

and 
one of: 

Music 457A 

Song Literature and 

Interpretation (2) 

or 

Music 457B 

Song Literature and 

Interpretation (2) 

or 

Music 468 A 

Vocal Pedagogy (2) 

Music 381 

Survey of Recreational Instruments 
(1) 

and 

Music 435 

Music in the Modern 

Classroom (3) 

One of the following: (2 or 3 units) 

Music 333 

Music and Child Development (3) 

Music 354 

Survey of Public School Choral Music 
Materials (2) 

Music 444 

Survey of Marching Band Materials 
(2) 

Take at least five of the following: (5 units) 

Music 361 A 

Symphony Orchestra ( 1 ) 

Music 36 IB 

University Choir (1) 

Music 36 1C 

University Concert Band ( 1 ) 

Music 36 ID 

Opera Theatre ( 1 ) 

Music 36 IE 

University Singers (1) 

Music 36 IF 

University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Music 36 1M 

Men s Choir ( 1 ) 

Music 36 1W 

Women’s Choir ( 1 ) 

One of the following: (2 units) 

Music 39 IB 

Choral Conducting (2) 

Music 392A 

Instrumental Conducting (2) 


Performance Requirement: 

Perform at level sufficient to be admitted to Music 371 on princi- 
pal instrument (0-4) 

Piano Proficiency Requirement: 

Completion of Music 282 B or satisfactory passage of piano profi- 
ciency examination (0-4) 

SW ^ oifi 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION 

Core Requirements in, or directly related to, Subjects Com- 
monly Taught (30 units) 

All of the following: (15 units) 


Physical Ed 300 

Principles of Movement (3) 

Physical Ed 349 

Measurement and Evaluation (3) 

Physical Ed 352 

Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Physical Ed 364 

Motor Development (3) 

Physical Ed 371 

Principles of Human Motor Learning 

(3) 

Analysis of Sports: (4 units) 

Physical Ed 303 

Field Events (2) 

Physical Ed 304 

Swimming (2) 

Physical Ed 305 

Golf (2) 

Physical Ed 306 

Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 308 

Soccer (2) 

Physical Ed 309 

Badminton/Racquetball (2) 

Physical Ed 312 

Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 316 

Volleyball (2) 

Physical Ed 319 

Softball (2) 

Techniques of Coaching: (2 units ) 

Physical Ed 328 

Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 330 

Softball (2) 

Physical Ed 332 

Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 334 

Baseball (2) 

Physical Ed 335 

Football (2) 

Physical Ed 337 

Basketball (2) 

Physical Ed 338 

Volleyball (2) 


Activities (9 units: at least one course in each of the five com- 
monly taught areas; at least six of the nine units at the intermedi- 
ate, advanced or intercollegiate level) 


154 Teaching Credential Programs 


Dance 


Physical 

Ed 133 

Handball (1) 



Physical 

Ed 142 

Children’s Games (1) 

Dance 101 

Introduction to Dance (3) 

Physical 

Ed 147 

Olympic Power Lifting ( 1 ) 

Dance 112 

Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

Physical 

Ed 150 A 

Beginning Wrestling (1) 

Dance 212 

Intermediate Ballet (2) 

Physical 

Ed 150B 

Intermediate Wrestling (1) 

Dance 312 

Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Physical 

Ed 155 A 

Beginning Fencing (1) 

Dance 122 A 

Beginning Modern Dance (2) 

Physical 

Ed 155B 

Intermediate Fencing (1) 

Dance 222 

Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 

Physical 

Ed 160 

Baseball (1) 

Dance 323A 

Dance Composition (3) 

Physical 

Ed 161A 

Beginning Slow Pitch (1) 

Dance 132 

Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Physical 

Ed 16 1 B 

Intermediate Slow Pitch (1) 

Dance 232 

Intermediate Jazz Dance (3) 

Physical 

Ed 162 

Fast Pitch Softball (1) 

Dance 332 

Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Physical 

Ed 164 A 

Beginning Volleyball ( 1 ) 

Dance 142 

Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Physical 

Ed 164B 

Intermediate Volleyball (1) 

Dance 242 

Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 

Physical 

Ed 164C 

Advanced Volleyball ( 1 ) 



Physical 

Ed 165A 

Beginning Soccer (1) 

Basic Movement 


Physical 

Ed 165B 

Intermediate Soccer ( 1 ) 



Physical 

Ed 166 

Team Handball (1) 

Physical Ed 100 

Physical Conditioning ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 167A 

Beginning Basketball (1) 

Physical Ed 101 

Athletic Conditioning ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 167B 

Intermediate Basketball (1) 

Physical Ed 102 A 

Beginning Jogging (1) 

Physical 

Ed 167C 

Advanced Basketball ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 102 B 

Intermediate/ Advanced 

Physical 

Ed 171 

Intercollegiate Golf (2) 


Jogging (1) 

Physical 

Ed 172 

Intercollegiate Cross Country (2) 

Physical Ed 104 

Horseback Riding (1) 

Physical 

Ed 174 

Intercollegiate Track-Field (2) 

Physical Ed 105 

Cycling (1) 

Physical 

Ed 175 

Intercollegiate Tennis (2) 

Physical Ed 108 

Roller Skating ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 176 

Intercollegiate Wrestling (2) 

Physical Ed 125 

Rock Climbing ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 177 

Intercollegiate Fencing (2) 

Physical Ed 144 

Exercise Weight Control ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 178 

Intercollegiate Basketball (2) 

Physical Ed 146 

Body Building (1) 

Physical 

Ed 179 

Intercollegiate Baseball (2) 

Physical Ed 151 A 

Beginning Aikido (1) 

Physical 

Ed 180 

Intercollegiate Soccer (2) 

Physical Ed 151 B 

Intermediate Aikido (1) 

Physical 

Ed 184 

Intercollegiate Football (2) 

Physical Ed 152A 

Beginning Karate (1) 

Physical 

Ed 185 

Intercollegiate Volleyball (2) 

Physical Ed 152 B 

Intermediate Karate (1) 

Physical 

Ed 186 

Intercollegiate Softball (2) 

Physical Ed 1 54 

Self-Defense (1) 




Physical Ed 246A 

Basic Hatha Yoga (2) 

Aquatics 


Physical Ed 246B 

Intermediate Hatha Yoga (2) 






Physical 

Ed 1 10A 

Beginning Swimming (1) 

Sports and Games 


Physical 

Ed 1 10B 

Intermediate Swimming (1) 



Physical 

Ed HOC 

Advanced Swimming ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 1 17A 

Beginning Bowling (1) 

Physical 

Ed 111 

Life Saving ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 1 17B 

Intermediate Bowling (1) 

Physical 

Ed 112 

Water Polo ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 1 1 7C 

Advanced Bowling (1) 

Physical 

Ed 114 

Skin Diving (1) 

Physical Ed 1 18A 

Beginning Archery (1) 

Physical 

Ed 116 

Springboard Diving (1) 

Physical Ed 118B 

Intermediate Archery (1) 

Physical 

Ed 122 A 

Beginning Sailing (1) 

Physical Ed 118C 

Advanced Archery ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 122B 

Intermediate Sailing (1) 

Physical Ed 1 19A 

Beginning Golf (1) 

Physical 

Ed 173 

Intercollegiate Water Polo (2) 

Physical Ed 1 19B 

Intermediate Golf ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 210 

Water Safety Instructor (2) 

Physical Ed 1 19C 

Advanced Golf ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 214 

Basic Scuba (2) 

Physical Ed 130 A 

Beginning Badminton ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 343 

Intermediate Scuba (2) 

Physical Ed 130B 

Intermediate Badminton (1) 




Physical Ed 131 A 

Beginning Tennis (1) 

Gymnastics 


Physical Ed 13 IB 

Advanced/Beginning Tennis ( 1 ) 




Physical Ed 13 1C 

Intermediate Tennis (1) 

Physical 

Ed 120 A 

Beginning Gymnastics (1) 

Physical Ed 13 ID 

Advanced Tennis ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 120B 

Intermediate Gymnastics ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 132 A 

Beginning Racquetball ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 120C 

Advanced Gymnastics ( 1 ) 

Physical Ed 132B 

Intermediate Racquetball (1) 

Physical 

Ed 170 

Intercollegiate Gymnastics (2) 

Physical Ed 132C 

Advanced Racquetball ( 1 ) 

Physical 

Ed 306 

Gymnastics (2) 


Teaching Credential Programs 155 


Depth and Perspective Requirements (15 units) 


Breadth and Perspective Requirements (19 units) 


One of the following courses: 

Physical Ed 380 History of Physical Education (3) 

Physical Ed 382 Philosophical Perspectives (3) 

One of the following courses: 

Physical Ed 381 Human Movement in Cultural 

Perspective (3) 

Physical Ed 384 Sport Sociology (3) 


Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus (8) 


One of the following: 


Geological Sci 340 
Chemistry 361 A 
Chemistry 371 A 
Physics 310 


General Meteorology (3) 

Intro to Physical Chemistry (3) 
Physical Chemistry (3) 
Thermodynamics, Kinetic Theory, and 
Statistical Physics (3) 


Three of the following courses: 


Physical Ed 340 

Physical Ed 363 

Physical Ed 365 

Physical Ed 372 
Physical Ed 373 
Physical Ed 383 


Contemporary Movement 
Environments (3) 

Developmental Adaptations of the 
Atypical (3) 

Prevention and Care of Athletic 
Injuries (3) 

Movement and the Child (3) 
Movement Concepts (3) 

Sport Psychology (3) 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: PHYSICAL 
SCIENCE 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (39-42 
units) 

Chemistry 120 A, B General Chemistry (10) 


Two of the following: 

Biological Sci 101 (and Elements of Biology and Lab (4) 

101 L) 

Biological Sci 141 (and Principles of Botany and Lab (4) 

14 1 L) 

Biological Sci 161 (and Principles of Zoology and Lab (4) 

161L) 

SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SOCIAL 
SCIENCES 

Core Requirements in Subjects Commonly Taught (33-36 
units) 

One of the following courses: (3-6 units) 

History 180 Survey of American History (3) 

Amer Studies 201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 
History 170A.B United States History (6) 


One of the following: (5-8 units) 


All of the following: (24 units) 


Chemistry 301A,B Organic Chemistry (6) 

and 

Chemistry 302 Organic Chemistry Lab (2), 

or 

Chemistry 303 Survey of Organic Chemistry (5) 


All of the following: (24 units) 


Physics 22 5 A 

Physics 22 5 B 

Physics 225C 

Physics 225AL,BL,CL 
Geological Sci 101 
Geological Sci 101L 
Geological Sci 201 
Physics 350 


Fundamental Physics: 

Mechanics (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Electricity and 
Magnetism (3) 

Fundamental Physics: Modern Physics 

(3) 

Fundamental Physics Lab (1,1,1) 
Physical Geology (3) 

Physical Geology Lab ( 1 ) 

Earth History (4) 

General Astronomy (4) 


Three units of History of California or California Government 

(3) 

Six units of American Government (6) 

Three units in Economics (3) 

History 110A Western Civilization to 16th 

Century (3) 

History 1 10B Western Civilization Since the 16th 

Century (3) 

Anthropology 100 Non- Western Cultures and the 
Western Tradition (3) 

Geography 100 World Geography (3) 

One of the following: (3 units) 

Hum Set/ Afro 311 Intracultural Social Patterns (3) 
Chicano 445 History of the Chicano (3) 


156 Teaching Credential Programs 


One of the following: (3 units) 


Linguistics (Select 6 units from the following:) 


Amer Studies 301 The American Character (3) 
Amer Studies 450 Women in American Society (3) 

Breadth and Perspective Requirements (18 units) 


Spanish 466 

Spanish 467 
Spanish 468 


Introduction to Spanish 
Linguistics (3) 

Dialectology (3) 
Spanish-English Contrastive 
Analysis (3) 


One of the following courses: 


Literature (Select 6 units from the following:) 


Geography 330 California Landscape (3) 

Geography 332 United States and Canada (3) 

All of the following: 

Three units of Sociology 

Three units of Political Science 

Three units of Psychology 


Spanish 375 

Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Spanish 430 

Spanish Literature to 
Neoclassicism (3) 

Spanish 441 

Spanish American Literature (3) 

Spanish 461 

Spanish Literature since Neo- 
classicism (3) 

Spanish 475 

Topics in Spanish Peninsula 
Literature (3) 

Spanish 485 

Topics in Spanish American 
Literature (3) 


Six units from any combination of the following: 

Afro- Ethnic Studies 

American Studies 

Anthropology 

Chicano Studies 

Economics 

Geography 

History 

Political Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 


Electives: Six upper-division units of electives selected from 
courses listed above in consultation with an adviser based on 
candidates background, interest and teaching plans. 

D. Supplementary Authorizations 
for the Basic Teaching Credentials 

It is possible to expand the subject matter authorization a teach- 
ing credential initially carries to other subject fields. The State 
recognizes several subject areas that can be added to a Multiple 
Subject Credential; thereby qualifying person to teach in depart- 
mentalized junior high classrooms (grades 6-9). CSUF offers 16 
Supplementary Authorizations for the Multiple Subject Credential in: 


SINGLE SUBJECT WAIVER: SPANISH 

Upper-Division Requirement in Subjects Commonly Taught 
(30 units) 

Language (Select 6 units from the following) 


Spanish 300 
Spanish 317 


Spanish Conversation (3) 
Advanced Conversation and 
Composition (3) 

Spanish for Advanced Students (3) 


Spanish 400 
Culture (Select 6 units from the following:) 


Art German 

French Life Science 

Health Science Physical Education 

Music Social Science 

Spanish Mathematics 

Business Physical Science 

General Science English as a Second Language 

English Computer Concepts & Applications 

Supplementary Authorizations for the Single Subject Credential per- 
mit a person who holds a credential in one broad subject field to 
be also authorized to teach in another more specific subject area, 
one that might be quite different from the field of broader au- 


315 

Intro to Spanish Civilization (3) 

thorization. CSUF offers 37 supplementary authorizations for the 

316 

Introduction to Spanish-American 
Civilization (3) 

single Subject Credential in: 

415 

Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Accounting/Computer Literacy 

416 

Contemporary Spanish-American 

Animal Science (Zoology) 


Culture (3) 

Anthropology 


Teaching Credential Programs 157 


Biology 

Ceramics 

Chemistry 

Comparative Political Systems/International 
Relations 

Composition/Critical Thinking 
Computer Concepts and Applications 
Crafts (Arts) 

Dance 

Drama 

Drug Use and Abuse 
Earth Science (Geology) 

Economics 

Economic and Consumer Education 

Electronics 

Family Health 

Geography 

Graphic Arts 

Instrumental Music 

Jewelry 

Journalism 

Literature 

Marketing and Distribution 

Painting and Drawing 

Personal Health 

Photography 

Physics 

Plant Science 

Psychology 

Sociology 

Speech 

U.S. Government/Civics 
U.S. History/California History 
Vocal Music 
World History 

Also, to permit the holder of a single subjects credential to teach 
certain subjects in grades 9 and below, CSUF offers eight supple- 
mentary authorizations in: 


General Science 
Introductory English 
Introductory French 
Introductory German 
Introductory Health Sciences 
Introductory Mathematics 
Introductory Social Science 
Introductory Spanish 

Contact the Credential Preparation Center, Education Class- 
room 207, for details concerning course requirements for specific 
supplementary authorizations. 


E. Specialist and Services 
Credentials 

CSUF offers several State approved programs leading to more 
specialized credentials. Most of these programs build on the 
teaching experience that holders of a basic credential have 
achieved. Often these specialist or services credentials are orient- 
ed toward postbaccalaureate course work and coincide with Mas- 
ter’s degree programs. Further information about specific require- 
ments for each can be obtained under the appropriate depart- 
mental listing in this catalogue. 

CSUF offers the following Specialist Credential programs: 

1 . Learning Handicapped, to teach the learning handicapped in- 
cluding the behaviorally disordered and educationally retard- 
ed. See Department of Special Education, School of Human 
Development and Community Service. 

2. Reading Specialist, to teach reading to students of diversified 
grade and ability levels and to assist all teachers in being better 
reading teachers. See Department of Reading, School of Hu- 
man Development and Community Service. 

3. Resource Specialist (Certificate of Competency), to serve as a 
resource specialist in programs serving special education stu- 
dents, their parents and their regular teachers. See Depart- 
ment of Special Education, School of Human Development 
and Community Service. 

4. Severely Handicapped, to teach the severely-multiply-handi- 
capped, severely emotionally disturbed and autistic. See De- 
partment of Special Education, School of Human Develop- 
ment and Community Service. 

In addition CSUF is currently seeking approval for a newly au- 
thorized credential, Language Development Specialist, to teach 
limited or non-English proficient students. See Department of 
Foreign Language and Literature, School of Humanities and So- 
cial Science. 

CSUF offers the following Services Credential programs: 

1 . Administrate Internship, a field based internship program 
leading to a preliminary level administrative services creden- 
tial. See Department of Educational Administration, School 
of Human Development and Community Service. 

2. Administrative Services (Preliminary Level), the first step of the 
new two-step administrative services credential structure, au- 
thorizing service as a school site administrator, principal or 
other administrative officer of a school district. See Depart- 
ment of Educational Administration, School of Human De- 
velopment and Community Service. 


158 Teaching Credential Programs 


3. Administrative Services (Professional Level), the second step of 
the new two-step administrative services credential structure. 
See Department of Educational Administration, School of 
Human Development and Community Service. 

4. Clinical Rehabilitation (Language, Speech and Hearing), to pro- 
vide services to students with exceptional needs and/or neuro- 
physical disorders in language, speech, and hearing. See De- 
partment of Speech Communication, School of Humanities 
and Social Sciences. 


5. Clinical Rehabilitation (Special Class Authorization), to provide 
services to students with severe disorders of language. See 
Department of Speech Communication, School of Human- 
ities and Social Sciences. 

6. Pupil Personnel Services, to provide counseling and testing ser- 
vices to students. See Department of Counseling, School of 
Human Development and Community Services. 


Teaching Credential Programs 159 


Extended Education 


Extended Education Building 

(714) 773-261 1 

Extension Programs 

The Extension program is designed for those who are unable to 
take university work in residence hut who wish to pursue univer- 
sity-level study for various purposes, such as resuming an inter- 
rupted or incomplete education, augmenting professional or vo- 
cational abilities, or enhancing personal growth and fulfillment. 

Extension offerings include regularly established university credit 
courses as well as non-credit seminars and conferences, special 
weekend programs and travel study programs. Workshops and 
courses designed to meet the needs of particular groups and agen- 
cies may he initiated at any time during the year. Any adult may 
enroll in an extension course provided the prerequisites of the 
course are met. An individual does not have to be enrolled in the 
university in order to take extension courses. 

The maximum amount of extension credit which will he accepted 
toward a baccalaureate degree is 24 semester units. Nine semester 
units of extension credit may he applied toward a masters degree 
with appropriate approval. Extension credit may not he used to 
fulfill the minimum residence requirement for graduation. 

Extension courses are offered during fall, spring, summer session 
and intersession. 

Adjunct Enrollment 

Many of the regular university credit courses offered to enrolled 
students are also open on a space-available basis to extension 
students through Adjunct Enrollment. Matriculated students 
may not enroll through this program. Contact the Office of 
Extended Education for further information. 

Summer Session 

The summer session program is designed for regularly enrolled 
students, either at California State University, Fullerton or an- 
other university, who wish to accelerate progress toward a degree 
or credential; prospective students who wish to begin course work 
while admission to the university is in process; and members of 
the community who wish to enroll in a course or courses for 
professional advancement or personal enrichment. Summer ses- 
sion offerings consist of regular university courses and apply to- 
ward residence and graduation requirements. Students must sat- 
isfy all prerequisites for the course or courses in which they intend 
to register. The summer session curriculum consists of lower- 
division through graduate- level courses. 

The summer session bulletin is available in March and may be 
obtained by writing or calling the Office of Extended Education. 
The bulletin contains course descriptions, special offerings, regis- 
tration form and instructions. Registration may be completed by 
mail at specified times. Summer enrollment does not constitute 
admission to the university. 


Televised Courses 

Satellite teleconferences, credit and non-credit instruction, and 
conference activities are available for campus and public presen- 
tation via instructional television. Arrangements are made 
through the Office of Extended Education. 

Intersession 

Intersession is open to everyone — continuing and prospective 
students, community residents and visitors. Scheduled during 
January, the one-, two- and three-unit courses are primarily de- 
signed to meet the needs of students who wish to accelerate their 
academic progress. 

The intersession offers extension courses as w-ell as courses which 
earn resident credit and range from both lower- and upper-divi- 
sion credit courses to graduate-level offerings. 

Certificate Programs 

Certificate programs are designed for those who want formal 
recognition for completing a structured and rigorous course of 
study in a specific field, but who may not he interested in pursu- 
ing a university degree program. Certificates are awarded when 
participants complete the course requirements. The Office of 
Extended Education offers credit certificate programs in the fol- 
lowing areas: 

Gerontology’ Production and Inventory Practice 

Technical Writing School Business Management 

Non-credit certificate programs are available in several areas 
including: 

Commercial Bank Credit Analysis and Loan Extensior 
C Programming Language 
Effective Employee Management 
Entrepreneurship 

Excellence in Manufacturing Management 
Industrial Controls Technology’ 

Industrial Distribution 

International Marketing 

Magic: The Performance Art 

Managing Multicultural Work Environments 

Perioperative Nursing Care 

Perioperative and Post-anesthesia Nursing Care 

Transportation Demand Management 

New’ credit and non-credit programs are always being developed. 
For current titles, contact the Office of Extended Education. 

Community Programs 

The Office of Extended Education sponsors various community 
educational outreach programs including the Continuing Learn- 
ing Experience (CLE) program for retired and semi-retired per- 
sons. For a list of current activities contact the CLE office. 


160 Extended Education 


International Programs 



Now in its 27th year of continuous operation, the California 
State University (CSU) International Programs offers students 
the opportunity to continue their studies overseas for a full aca- 
demic year while they remain enrolled at their home CSU cam- 
pus. The International Programs’ primary purposes are to enable 
selected students to gain a firsthand understanding of other areas 
of the world and to advance their knowledge and skills within 
specific academic disciplines in pursuit of established degree ob- 
jectives. Since its inception, the International Programs has en- 
rolled nearly 10, (XX) CSU students. 

A wide variety of academic majors may he accommodated by the 
36 foreign universities cooperating with the International Pro- 
grams in 16 countries around the globe. The affiliated institu- 
tions are: the University of Queensland (Australia); the Univer- 
sity of Sao Paulo (Brazil); the Universities of the Province of 
Quebec (Canada); the University of Copenhagen (through DIS 
Study Program); the University of Provence (France); the Uni- 
versities of Heidelberg and Tubingen (Germany); the Hebrew 
University of Jerusalem (Israel); the University of Florence (Ita- 
ly); Waseda University (Japan); the IberoAmericana University 
(Mexico); Massey University and Lincoln University College 
(New Zealand); National Chengchi University (Republic of 
China/Taiwan); the Universities of Granada and Madrid (Spain); 
the University of Uppsala (Sweden) ; Bradford, Bristol, Sheffield, 
and Swansea Universities and Kingston Polytechnic (the United 
Kingdom) and the University of Zimbabwe (Zimbabwe). Infor- 
mation on academic course offerings available at these locations 
is in the International Programs Bulletin which may be obtained 
from the International Programs representative on campus. 

To be selected to participate, students must have upper-division 
or graduate standing at a CSU campus by the time of departure, 
possess a cumulative grade-point average of 2. 75 or 3.00, depend- 
ing on the program, for all college level work completed at the 
time of application, and have completed required language or 
other preparatory study where applicable. Selection is competi- 
tive and is based on home campus recommendations and the 
applicant’s academic record. Final selection is made by the Office 
of International Programs in consultation with a statewide selec- 
tion committee. 


The International Programs pays all tuition and administrative 
costs overseas for each of its participants to the same extent that 
such funds would be expended to support similar costs in Califor- 
nia. Students assume responsibility for all personal costs, such as 
transportation, room and board, and living expenses, as well as 
for home campus fees. Because they remain enrolled at their 
home CSU campus while studying overseas, International Pro- 
grams students earn full resident credit for all academic work 
completed while abroad and remain eligible to receive any form 
of financial aid (other than work-study) for which they can 
individually qualify. 


International Programs 161 


Information and application materials may be obtained from Dr. 
Lee Gilbert, McCarthy Hall 103; the Office of International 
Education and Exchange, or by writing to The California State 
University, International Programs, 400 Golden Shore, Long 
Beach, California 90802-4275. Applications for the following 
academic year overseas must be submitted by February 1. 

International Exchange Programs 

California State University, Fullerton has direct institutional 
exchange programs with universities throughout the world. Such 
agreements allow for the exchange of faculty and students for 
purposes of teaching, study, research and for the promotion of 
cultural understanding and interaction. 

Current programs link California State University, Fullerton 
with Fudan University, Shanghai; Zhejiang University, Hang- 
zhou; Northwest University, Xian, People’s Republic of China; 
eight campuses of the University of Paris, France; the Autono- 
mous University of Guadalajara; the Mexicali and Ensenada 
campuses of the Autonomous University of Baja California, 
Mexico; the Moscow Institute of Steel and Alloys, USSR; and 
Nanzan University, Nagoya, Japan. 

CSUF students pay home campus fees plus their living, transporta- 
tion and related expenses. They must maintain home campus full- 
time enrollment status in the exchange program. They thereby may 
qualify for any financial aid for which they normally would be 
eligible. Credit received while studying abroad is subject to CSUF 
departmental approval for determination of equivalency. 

Information and application forms are available in the Office of 
Academic Programs, McCarthy Hall- 129, and in the Office of 
International Education and Exchange, McCarthy Hall-79. 

American Language Program 

California State University, Fullerton welcomes international 
students who wish to perfect their English language skills. The 
American Language Program (ALP) course of study provides 
intensive practice in listening, speaking, reading, writing and 
study skills while promoting an understanding of U.S. culture 
and society. Classes are small, so students will receive individual 
attention which will help them achieve rapid fluency in English. 

All entering ALP students must take a placement test. On the 
basis of the test results, students are placed in one of six academic 
levels. At the beginning and intermediate levels, students attend 
multi-skills classes for 24 hours per week. Additional hours are 
required for homework and practice in the Language Laboratory. 
Advanced level students are in a semi-intensive program. In 
addition to multi-skills classes, they may take specialized classes 


such as English for Business, English for Science and Technology, 
or Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) preparation. 

No university credit is given for ALP classes; however, qualified 
advanced students may take one or two classes for university 
credit through Extended Education with the consent of the pro- 
gram director. Students should expect regular homework assign- 
ments in all their classes. For further information, contact the 
Director of the American Language Program (714) 773-2909. 

AIESEC 

AIESEC, the French acronym for International Association of 
Students in Business and Economics, is an international student 
organization which works in cooperation with local corporations 
to bring business trainees from all parts of the world to Orange 
County and, therefore, earns credits for placement of CSUF 
students in the 61 other participating countries. Students can be 
engaged for periods from six weeks to eighteen months and gain 
invaluable business experiences in another culture. For further 
information call (714) 773-2266. 

International Study Courses 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California State Univer- 
sity International Study Programs register concurrently at Cal 
State Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits 
assigned to the student which are equivalent to courses offered at 
Cal State Fullerton. Undergraduate students who discover appro- 
priate study opportunities at the host Institution but no equiv- 
alent course at Cal State Fullerton may use Independent Study 
499 and International Study 292 or 492. Graduate students may 
use Independent Graduate Research 599 and International Study 
592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University Interna- 
tional Programs. Study undertaken in a university abroad under 
the auspices of The California State University. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper-division 
units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University Interna- 
tional Programs. Study undertaken in a university abroad under 
the auspices of The California State University. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 
Open to students enrolled in California State University Interna- 
tional Programs. Study undertaken in a university abroad under 
the auspices of The California State University. 


162 International Programs 


Special Programs 


From the total curriculum of the university, students may wish to 
plan a specially designed program of study that does not duplicate 
significantly any existing major or concentration. The under- 
graduate special major and the graduate interdisciplinary studies 
program provide opportunities for selected students to pursue 
individualized programs of study leading to a degree when legiti- 
mate academic and professional goals can be satisfied by a judi- 
cious selection of courses from two or more fields, and when these 
aims cannot be satisfied by the authorized standard degree majors 
or double majors that are available on the campus (e.g., liberal 
studies, social sciences). The special major and interdisciplinary 
studies program are designed for exceptional cases of individual 
students only and provide an opportunity to develop a concentra- 
tion or specialization outside the framework of existing majors. 
These programs are not intended as a means of bypassing normal 
graduation requirements or as a means by which students may gradu- 
ate who fail to complete the degree major in which they are enrolled. 

B.A. Special Major 

Students desiring to work for a bachelor’s degree with a special 
major should consult with the Office of Academic Advisement. 

1. Entrance to the special major program is normally at the 
beginning of the junior year (60 units remaining for gradua- 
tion). 

2. The minimum requirement for the major is 48 units. A mini- 
mum of 36 upper-division units must be included in the major. 

3. Although students may include on their study plans, course 
work in progress and a maximum of 12 units of course work 
completed prior to the time of filing, approval of these courses 
is not automatic. 

4. No more than six units of 499 (Independent Study) and/or 
internship course work may be included in the major. 

5. Neither lower- nor upper-division courses applied to general 
education breadth requirements will be applicable toward the 
major. 

6. At least three units of appropriate course work in methodolo- 
gy shall be included in the student’s study plan. Where appro- 
priate this requirement may be waived by the University Cur- 
riculum Committee. 

7. All courses in the major must be taken for a letter grade 
(Grade Option 1). A GFA of 3.0 in the major is required for 
graduation. 


8. Prior to taking any substitute course work a petition for 
change of the study plan must he approved by the student’s 
adviser and the University Curriculum Committee. 

9. A senior thesis shall be written by the student in this program 
during the semester preceding graduation. This thesis should 
show scholarly evidence of the merit in the student’s choice of 
an interdisciplinary program. This paper shall be written un- 
der the direction of the student’s special major adviser and 
approved by the faculty designated by the departments repre- 
sented on the student’s study plan. 

M.A. Interdisciplinary Studies 

A graduate student desiring to work for a master’s degree in 

interdisciplinary studies should consult with the Office of Gradu- 
ate Studies and fill out an initial request form available at that 

office. 

1. Entrance to the program requires a grade-point average 
(GPA) of 3.0 in the undergraduate major and a GPA of 3.0 in 
the last 60 units of course work. 

2. The minimum requirement of units for an M.A. in Interdisci- 
plinary Studies is 30 units of which at least half must be 
graduate courses (500 level). 

3. Although students may include on their proposed study plan 
course work in progress or completed prior to the time of 
filing, approval of these courses is not automatic. No more 
than nine units of course work taken prior to classified stand- 
ing can be approved on the program. 

4. The program may contain no more than six units of Indepen- 
dent Study, Project or Thesis. 

5. All courses on the study plan must be taken for a letter grade 
(Grade Option 1). A GPA of 3.0 is required on all work on 
the study plan. 

6. Prior to taking any substitute course work, a petition for 
change of the study plan must be approved by the student’s 
graduate adviser and graduate committee. 

7. A Thesis or Project shall be required for the completion of the 
program. The completed thesis will be filed with the Library; 
whereas the project shall be filed with the Office of Graduate 
Studies. 


Special Programs 163 


Curricula Information 

Course Descriptions 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject matter 
to be covered and provide additional information on units of 
credit, the level of instruction (see course numbering code), 
prerequisites and the type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, 
seminar and individually supervised work). 

Course Numbering Code 

The first number in each course designation is intended to indi- 
cate the level of complexity of the course. In addition, the first 
number also is a rough index of the student’s year of study at the 
university. The following are guidelines for course numbering. 

001-099 Developmental or remedial level course work is pre- 
college in nature. It may not be counted toward a de- 
gree objective. 

100-199 First year or freshman level course work is introductory 
in nature. Such courses may provide the fundamental 
or essential elements or qualities important to a specific 
discipline. Emphasis in many first year courses may be 
on the development of preliminary skills. These courses 
are usually designed without prerequisites and may be 
characterized as emphasizing breadth rather than depth 
of instruction. 

200-299 Second year or sophomore level course work may in- 
clude preliminary history or survey-type courses or in- 
termediate skill development. Although there is no 
clear distinction made between lower division courses 
listed at the 100 or 200 level, there is an inherent 
assumption that students in the second year of study 
have acquired preliminary skills appropriate to universi- 
ty level work. 

300-399 Third year or junior level course work is likely to em- 
phasize specialization for majors in their disciplines. 

Work at this level is expected to be more challenging 
than lower division work. Usually, specific prerequisites 
are used to indicate the necessary competencies re- 
quired for study at this level. The “core” courses of 
many disciplines are offered at this level and provide the 
prerequisites necessary to senior level study. Many dis- 
ciplines use 300 level courses to focus on areas of spe- 
cialty or emphasis within the disciplines. These courses 
do not give graduate credit unless included on an ap- 
proved graduate study plan for a specific graduate 
student. 


rm 





164 Curricula Information 


400-499 Fourth year or senior level course work is intended to 
provide depth of understanding or special focus appro- 
priate to majors and generally requires prerequisite 
work. The student is expected to be able to theorize 
and/or practice at a professional level of competence. 
Students enrolled in 400 level course work are assumed 
to have advanced skills in writing proficiency. Courses 
at the 400 level are sufficiently sophisticated for inclu- 
sion on graduate study plans. 

500-599 Fifth year university study is for graduate students who 
are enrolled in advanced degree programs. The courses 
of study are advanced and specialized in nature and 
require substantial undergraduate preparation. Inde- 
pendent initiative is expected in the theoretical, practi- 
cal, critical, and analytical exploration of specialized 
topics. An essential feature of graduate study is the 
facilitation of independent decision-making, invention 
of theoretical constructs, application of research pro- 
cesses, and the development of original creations. 

700-701 Course numbers for graduate and postbaccalaureate stu- 
dents (including those seeking a credential) to main- 
tain continuous enrollment during a particular semes- 
ter, and who are not enrolled in regular courses. These 
numbers do not represent courses and do not therefore 
grant credit. 

900-999 Courses are specifically designed for professional groups 
seeking vocational improvement or career advance- 
ment. Credit for these courses does not apply to under- 
graduate or graduate degrees or credentials at the uni- 
versity. 

An honors course shall use the letter H. A laboratory course 
which accompanies another course should use the letter L. 

A controlled entry course is one which has enrollment require- 
ments in addition to any prerequisite courses. Additional require- 
ments include prior approval of the instructor, special academic 
advisement, a qualifying exam, a placement test, an audition, a 
teaching credential, or similar special qualifications. 

Special Course Numbers 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by all 
departments and schools with the same numbers: 499 and 599 are 
used respectively for undergraduate and graduate “independent 
study”; 196 or 496 for “student-to-student tutorials”; 597 for a 
graduate “project”; and 598 for a graduate “thesis.” 

Explanation of Course Notations 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course descriptions in 
this catalog. 


1. The figure in parentheses following the course title indicates 
the number of semester units for the course. Courses offered 
for varying units are indicated as (1-3) or (3-6). 

2. A course listing such as Afro-Ethnic Studies 108 (3) (Same as 
Linguistics 108) indicates that a student taking the course 
may choose to count it in either of those two disciplines. 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course title 
and the number of units indicates the same course previously 
was numbered 433. 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 

The “student-to-student tutorial” provides a formal way to en- 
courage students to learn through teaching. It also provides tutor- 
ing to all students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

In those departments which choose to offer such courses, the 
courses are numbered 196 or 496 and carry one to three units of 
credit. The prerequisites include a grade-point average of at least 
3.0 and/or consent of the instructor. The tutor and his/her tutee 
or tutees will work in mutually advantageous ways by allowing all 
involved to delve more carefully and thoroughly into the materi- 
als presented in this specific course. One to three students may be 
tutored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special 
circumstances warrant increasing the usual maximum of three 
tutees. Three hours of work per week are expected for each 
semester unit of credit, and this work may include, apart from 
contact hours with tutees, such other activities as: tutorial prep- 
arations; consulting with instructors; reporting, analysis and 
evaluation of the tutorial experiences; and participation in an all- 
university orientation and evaluation program for tutors. A 
maximum of three units may be taken each semester. No more 
than three units of any combination of tutorial courses (196 or 
496) may count toward an undergraduate degree program. The 
course must be taken as an elective and not counted toward 
general education, major or minor requirements. The course can 
be taken on a credit/no credit basis by the tutor. Requests for 
tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated up until the 
official university census date. Tutors electing to respond to such 
requests will receive credits at the end of the semester and can 
register in the course until the official university census date. 
Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, analyses and 
evaluations of their shared tutorial experience to the instructor, 
and both must participate in an all-university orientation pro- 
gram as well as in any conference or critique that the instructor of 
the course may require. 

Further information can be obtained from the department in 
which the student is interested in a “student-to-student tutorial.” 


Curricula Information 165 


Independent Study 

Under the independent study program, the student may pursue 
topics or problems of special interest beyond the scope of a regular 
course under the supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a 
research or creative nature, and normally culminates in a paper, 
project, comprehensive examination, or performance. Before 
registering, the student must get his topic approved by the in- 
structor who will be supervising independent study and by the 
department chair. 

A student may take no more than six units of independent study 
at the undergraduate level (299 and 499 numbered courses) in a 
given semester. No more than nine units of independent study 
may be applied toward completion of the baccalaureate degree. A 
graduate student may apply no more than six units of indepen- 
dent study (499 or 599 numbered courses) toward completion of 
masters degree, unless written approval is obtained from the 
appropriate school dean. 

Cross-Disciplinary University 
Programs 

A joint degree program is an endeavor involving two or more 
existing academic departments which need not be within the 
same school. Such programs are administered by program coun- 
cils composed of representatives elected by participating depart- 
ments. The joint degree programs are housed in administration 
units as follows: 

School of Human Development and Community Service 

Child Development, B.S. 

Human Services, B.S. 


School of Humanities and Social Sciences 

Environmental Studies, M.S. 

Latin American Studies, B.A. 

Liberal Studies, B.A. 

Russian and East European Area Studies, B.A. 

Social Sciences, M.A. 

The degree descriptions are located within the appropriate school 
section of this catalog. 

Bilingual/Cross-Cultural Studies 

Students may pursue a course of study with a bilingual/ cross- 
cultural emphasis. 

Complete course listings and details are available from the De- 
partment of Foreign Languages and Literatures, the Department 
of Chicano Studies, Division of Teacher Education and Educa- 
tional Opportunity Program advisers. 


Library Courses 

201 Introduction to Library Resources (1) 

A practical introduction to library materials and methods en- 
abling undergraduate students to locate information for course- 
related, as well as independent study and research. 

200 Elements of Bibliographic Investigation (3) 

A survey of important information sources in various subject 
fields and the application of research methods which will enable 
students to become effective library users. Particular attention is 
given to the assembling of material for term papers and reports, 
including the preparation of bibliographies. 

302 Library Research Methods for Specific Majors ( 1 ) 

Library research methodology and introduction to library re- 
sources in special subject areas such as business, education and 
science. 


166 Curricula Information 


OF THE ARTS 







School of the Arts 



Dean: Jerry Samuelson 

Associate Dean: Frank Cummings III 

The learning opportunities within the School of the Arts are 
based on a commitment to artistic and academic excellence. We 
provide an environment which encourages individual achieve- 
ment for performers, artists and scholars. 

Within the broader university liberal arts environment, the 
School of the Arts offers intensive programs in Art, Music, 
Theatre and Dance. We are also committed to the enhancement 
of artistic awareness of all students. 

We extend a warm welcome to you and we promise that with your 
perseverance, we will do everything possible to further your goals 
and objectives in whatever field of the arts you choose. 

Academic Advisement is available through the departments. 
Faculty advisors are available to assist students with career deci- 
sions and degree requirements. 

Several scholarships are available to students in the School of the 
Arts. Inquiries should be made to the respective department 
offices. 


J 


School of the Arts 169 


Programs Offered 
Art, Bachelor of Arts 

Art History 
General Studio Art 
Teaching 

Art, Bachelor of Fine Arts 

Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Graphic Design 

Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 

Minor in Art 
Art, Master of Arts 


Minor in Music 

Music, Master of Arts 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Music, Master of Music 

Performance 
Theory 'Composition 

Theatre Arts, Bachelor of Arts 

History and Theory 
Production/Performance 
Acting 
Directing 
Musical Theatre 
Oral Interpretation 
Playwriting 

Technical Production/Design 
Television 
Dance 
Teaching 

Theatre Arts, Master of Arts 

Theatre Arts, Master of Fine Arts 

Acting 

Directing 

Technical Theatre and Design 


Drawing and Painting (including Printmaking) 

Sculpture 

Crafts (including Ceramics, Glass, Fibers, Wood, 
Jewelry/Metalsmithing). 

Design (including Environmental Design, Graphic Design, 
Illustration, Exhibition Design, Creative Photography). 
Art History 


Art, Master of Fine Arts 

Drawing, Painting and Printmaking 
Sculpture 

Ceramics (including Glass) 

Crafts (including Fibers, Jewelry/Metalsmithing, and 
Woodworking/Furniture) 

Design (including Graphic Design, Illustration, 
Environmental Design, and Exhibition Design) 
Creative Photography 

Certificate in Museum Studies 


Music, Bachelor of Arts 

Liberal Arts 

Music Education 

Music History and Theory 

Music, Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 

Composition 

Instrumental 

Keyboard 

Voice 

Accompanying 


170 School of Arts 


Department of Art 



Department Chair: Darryl J. Curran 
Department Office: Visual Arts 102 

Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Art 

Art History 
General Studio Art 
Teaching 

Bachelor of Fine Arts in Art 


Drawing and Painting 

Printmaking 

Sculpture 

Crafts 

Ceramics 

Minor in Art 
Master of Arts in Art 


Graphic Design 
Illustration 

Environmental Design 
Creative Photography 


Drawing and Painting (including Printmaking) 

Sculpture 

Crafts (including Ceramics, Glass, Fibers, Wood, 
Jewelry/Metalsmithing) 

Design (including Environmental Design, Graphic Design, 
Illustration, Exhibition Design, Creative Photography) 
Art History 

Master of Fine Arts in Art 


Drawing, Painting, and Printmaking 
Sculpture 

Ceramics (including Glass) 

Crafts (including Fibers, Jewelry/Metalsmithing, and 
Woodworking/Furniture) 

Design (including Graphic Design, Illustration, 
Environmental Design, and Exhibition Design) 
Creative Photography 

Certificate in Museum Studies 


Faculty 

Ruth Capelle, John Carter, A1 Ching, Kyung S. Cho, Dorte 
Christjansen, Eileen Cowin, Frank E. Cummings III, Darryl 
Curran, Robert Ewing, Dextra Frankel, Maurice Gray, 
Raymond Hein, Thomas Holste, George James, Jim Jenkins, 
Lawrence Johnson, G. Ray Kerciu, Garland Kirkpatrick, 
Donald Lagerberg, Dana Lamb, Sergio Lizarraga, Clinton 
MacKenzie, Ronald Raetzman, Leo Robinson, Jerry Rothman, 
Jerry Samuelson, V. Joachim Smith, Jon Stokesbary, Vincent 
Suez, Kim Yasuda 


Advisers 

Undergraduate: Contact department office. 
Graduate: A1 Ching 


Art 171 


INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Art offers programs which include the schol- 
arly fields of art history, theory, analysis and criticism; the studio 
fields of drawing and painting, printmaking, sculpture, crafts 
(including fibers, jewelry, wood and metal), ceramics (including 
glass), graphic design, creative photography, illustration, envi- 
ronmental design, and exhibition design; and the single subject 
teaching field of art education. 

Curricular plans for the Bachelor of Arts and the Bachelor of Fine 
Arts have been developed to meet the individual needs and 
interests of students in art. 

The general objectives of the programs are to provide a compre- 
hensive learning environment which contributes technically and 
conceptually to the development of the art historian, the visual 
artist and the art teacher. Specifically, the programs provide 
opportunities for students to: ( 1 ) develop a knowledge and under- 
standing of fundamental visual experience and concepts basic to 
many forms and fields of art; ( 2 ) develop a critical appreciation of 
historical and contemporary art forms as they relate to individual 
and social needs and values; (3) express creatively ones personal 
experience and thought with skill and clarity in visual terms; and 

(4) to develop this knowledge and skills necessary to pursue 
graduate studies in visual arts, or to teach art in the schools, and 

(5) develop the understanding and advanced specialized skills 
applicable to professional practice. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

The 124-unit Bachelor of Arts degree offers concentrations in 
Art History, General Studio Art, and Teaching. The program 
objectives are to provide correlative experiences, information 
and theory. 

The Art History concentration provides for an emphasis in the 
area of art history, theory, and appreciation and is particularly 
recommended for those students who wish to pursue graduate 
studies in art history or museum studies. 

The General Studio Art concentration is a general curriculum 
that provides a broad education in the visual arts. 

The Teaching concentration is for students who wish to meet the 
requirements for single subject instruction (Ryan Act) for teach- 
ing art in grades K- 12 . 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, stu- 
dents must meet the other university requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Students in the Teaching concentration must also 
meet specific requirements for the desired teaching credential. 

All art majors must take Art 300, Writing in the Visual Arts, and 
pass the university’s Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 
after achieving junior standing (60 units). Testing dates for the 
EWP are available from the Testing Center or the Academic 
Advisement Center. 


To qualify for a bachelor of Arts in Art students must earn grades 
of C or better in all art courses required for the degree. 


Art History Concentration 

Preparation for the major (lower division — 21 units) 

Art 201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Lower division studio courses * 6 

Approved electives in art, American studies, anthro- 
pology, history, literature, music, philosophy or 
theatre 9 

The major (upper division — 33 units) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

480 Selected Topics in Art Hist 3 

481 Seminar in Art History 3 

Approved upper div. elec 3 

Upper division art history 21 

General Studio Art Concentration 

Lower Division (27 units) 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Art Electives — Select at least two courses from two of 

the following areas: design; printmaking; creative 
photography; sculpture; ceramics; crafts; drawing 
and painting 6 

Upper Division (27 units) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

Art History 6 

Studio area — include one course from each of the 
following: (1) drawing and painting; (2) sculpture, 
creative photography, printmaking; (3) crafts and 
ceramics; (4) design 12 


Electives — Choose two courses from at least two dif- 
ferent categories of the following: drawing and 
painting; printmaking; creative photography; sculp- 
ture; crafts (fibers and glass); ceramics; graphic de- 
sign; illustration; environmental design; exhibition 
design; art education 6 

Teaching Concentration 

Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

(Qualifies for Teaching Art in Grades K- 12) 

Preparation for the major ( lower division — 30 units) 


103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106 A Beginning Ceramics 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 3 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

205A Beginning Crafts 3 

207A Drawing/Painting 3 


172 Art 


Major requirements (upper division — 24 units) 
Select either Drawing/ Painting or Crafts Emphasis: 


Drawing and Painting Emphasis: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

307 A, B Drawing and Painting 6 

310A Watercolor 3 

317A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

347A Printmaking-Etching 3 

312 Modern Art 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Crafts Emphasis: 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts 3 

305A Advanced Crafts 3 

306 A, B Advanced Ceramics 6 

310A Watercolor 3 

312 Modern Art 3 

31 5A Jewelry 3 

441 A Media Exploration for Teaching Art 3 

Professional Preparation (24*27 units) 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary 

School 3 

Education course work 9-12 

Student teaching (one semester full-time) 12 


Program Requirements: 

1 . Be advised by a faculty adviser in art education assigned by the 
art department chair. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in the catalog within the 
School of Human Development and Community Service for 
the Ryan Act curriculum. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under the Teaching concentra- 
tion. 

4. Complete the major requirements prior to enrolling in the 
teacher education program. 

5. Be admitted to teacher education through the School of Hu- 
man Development and Community Service prior to enroll- 
ment in Art Ed 442, professional education courses and stu- 
dent teaching. 

6. Be accepted for teacher education and student teaching based 
on candidate quotas, portfolio review, and evidence of success 
in completed university course work. 

7. Be recommended by the faculty adviser in art education. 

8. Complete Secondary Education 310 and 386 or equivalents. 

9. Pass C- BEST exam prior to admission to Teacher Education. 

10. Have a G.PA. of 2.89 overall, 3.0 in major. 


Credential Information 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of arts 
degree, the student is eligible for a partial credential, which 
meets state requirements for teaching art in grades K-12. Within 
the specified period of time from the beginning of a teaching 
assignment, 30 units of course work must be completed at an 
accredited college or university to qualify for a clear credential. 
Credentials are issued from the institution where this require- 
ment has been completed. 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students 
intending to teach in the elementary schools in multiple subject 
classrooms. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Theatre 402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recom- 
mended for students who wish to expand their knowledge in any 
or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 106A, 107A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 330, 
380, 441 A, B 

Dance 101, 112, 122, 132, 142, 323A,B, 422 
Music 1 1 1A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281B,P,S,W, 283, 381 
Theatre 100, 263, 276A, 277, 370A.B, 402A,B, 403A,B 

BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Bachelor of Fine Arts degree is a professional program pro- 
viding directed studies in nine studio concentrations within the 
visual arts. The program is designed for students seeking in-depth 
preparation for specialized goals selected from one of the follow- 
ing areas: drawing and painting; printmaking; sculpture; crafts; 
ceramics; graphic design; illustration; environmental design; or 
creative photography. 

The program develops the understanding and advanced special- 
ized skills applicable to professional practice, and to meet en- 
trance requirements to graduate school. 

Admission Requirements 

All freshman students must apply to the B. A. (Bachelor of Arts) 
in Art program for their first semester of residence. After com- 
pleting a minimum of 12 lower-division preparation units with B 
or better grades, students may contact the Art Department to 
change their objective to the B.F.A. in Art program. 

Students who transfer from community colleges or other univer- 
sities may apply to the BFA, providing they qualify. To qualify, 
they must have completed 1 2 units of studio art courses with B or 
better grades. 


Art 173 


Program Requirements 

The 132-unit Bachelor of Fine Arts degree program requires a 
minimum of 70 units in art, with 28 lower-division units of 
preparation and 42 upper-division units, including 24 units in an 
area of concentration, six units of art history, three units of 
writing in art, and nine units of art electives. In addition to the 
minimum 70 unit requirement for the B.F.A. degree, students 
must meet the other university requirements for a bachelor’s 
degree (see the university Catalog and Class Schedule). 

To qualify for a bachelor of Fine Arts in Art, students must earn 
grades of C or better in all art courses required for the degree. 


Drawing and Painting Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

1 1 7 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

207 A, B Drawing and Painting 6 

Concentration ( upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

307 A, B Drawing and Painting 6 

317A.B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

487A Special Studies, Painting 3 

487B Special Studies, Life Drawing 3 

Upper division drawing and painting options from 

487A.B and/or C 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

LI pper-di vision art electives 9 

Printmaking Concentration 

Preparation (lou>er division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

207A Drawing and Painting 3 

247 Beginning Printmaking 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

307A Drawing and Painting 3 

317A,BorC Life Studies 6 

3 38 A Creative Photography 3 

347A, B Printmaking-Etching, Lithography 6 

487D Special Studies, Printmaking 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 


Sculpture Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107 A, B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

216A.B Beginning Sculpture 6 

Concentration ( upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

316A.B Sculpture 6 

317A.B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

326A Ceramic Sculpture 3 

336A Techniques and Theories, Cast Sculpture 3 

486A Special Studies, Sculpture 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Crafts Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 1 

123B Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

205 A, B Beginning Crafts 6 

Concentration ( upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

305 A, B Advanced Crafts 6 

Select 9 units from: 9 


306 A, B Advanced Ceramics 

315A,B Jewelry 

330 Fibers and Papers 

355 A, B Fibers, Fabric Printing & Dyeing 


364A,B Stained Glass 
365 A, B Weaving 

485A,B,C,D,E, or F Special Studies in Crafts 6 

495 Internship in Art 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Ceramics Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

106A.B Beginning Ceramics 6 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201A.B Art and Civilization 6 


174 Art 


Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

306 A, B Advanced Ceramics 6 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture 6 

424A,B Glass Forming 6 

484A or 484B Special Studies 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Graphic Design Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

223 A, B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

323 A, B Graphic Design 6 

338A Creative Photography 3 

363 A, B Illustration 6 

483A Special Studies, Graphic Design 6 

495 Internship 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Illustration Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

123 A Descriptive Drawing 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

223B Lettering, Typography & Rendering 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

317A,B Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 6 

323A Graphic Design 3 

363 A, B Illustration 6 

483C Special Studies, Illustration 6 

495 Internship 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 

Environmental Design Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design 3 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 1 


123B Descriptive Drawing 3 

201A,B Art and Civilization 6 

213A,B Beginning Environmental Design 6 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts' 3 

313A,B Environmental Design 6 

333 A, B Environmental Design 6 

453A Exhibition Design 3 

483B Special Studies, Environmental Design 6 

495 Internship in Art 3 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 


Creative Photography Concentration 

Preparation (lower division — 28 units) Units 

103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

104 Three-Dimensional Design < 3 

107A.B Beginning Drawing and Painting 6 

117 Life Drawing 4 

238 Photo Visual Concepts 3 

201 A, B Art and Civilization 6 

Art Elective: Select from 123A, 247 or 216A ....... 3 

Concentration (upper division — 42 units) Units 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts* 3 

317A Life Studies, Drawing and Painting 3 

338 A, B Creative Photography 6 

3 39 A Photo Illustration or 348 Artists’ Books 3 

438A.B Creative Color Photography 6 

489 Special Studies, Creative Photo 6 

Upper-division art history 6 

Upper-division art electives 9 


MINOR IN ART 

Twenty-four units are required for a minor in art; a minimum of 
12 units are to be in upper division courses and in residence. A 
basic course in each of the following areas is required: (1) art 
history, theory, analysis and criticism; (2) design; (3) drawing 
and painting; and (4) crafts. Recommended courses to meet the 
“basic courses” requirement are: ( 1 ) Art 201 A or B; (2) Art 103 
or 104; (3) Art 107 A or B; (4) Art 106A or 205A. Completion of 
these courses will provide an adequate foundation for entry into 
upper division courses. Those students planning to qualify for a 
standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary or 
secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain approval from 
the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper 
division requirements for a minor in art. 


‘Students must also take and pass the Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP). 


Art 175 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

This program provides a balance of study and practice for those 
who wish a career in the visual arts, or who want to prepare for 
further graduate work in the field. The program offers the follow- 
ing areas of concentration: (1) drawing and painting (including 
printmaking); (2) sculpture; (3) crafts (including ceramics, 
wixxl, glass, fibers, jewelry/metalsmithing); (4) design (includ- 
ing environmental design, graphic design, illustration, exhibi- 
tion design, or creative photography); and (5) art history. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Conditionally classified standing: 

a. A baccalaureate degree in art from an accredited institu- 
tion, or 24 upper division units in art of which 12 units 
must he in a concentration completed with grades of B or 
better. 

b. GFA minimum of 2.5 in the last 60 semester units at- 
tempted. 

c. (1) Studio program: satisfactory review of preliminary 
portfolio by a faculty member in the area of studio con- 
centration. 

(2) Art history program: satisfactory preliminary inter- 
view by a faculty member in art history. 

d. Enrollment is allowed in graduate- level courses with the 
exception of Art 500A,B; 511; 512; 597; and 598. 

e. Passing the comprehensive review will be required for 
classified standing. 

2. Classified standing: 

The same requirements as conditionally classified plus: 

a. Pass comprehensive review: held semi-annually, the com- 
prehensive review is an evaluation of the candidate by a 
committee comprised of faculty teaching in the area of 
concentration. The committee reviews the student’s cre- 
ative work, statement of purpose, academic and other 
relevant qualifications; assigned research papers are re- 
quired of art history applicants in lieu of a portfolio. 
Procedures, dates, and appointment times are available 
through the art department graduate office. 

b. Form a graduate committee. 

c. Development of an approved study plan. 

d. Art history program: reading knowledge of a foreign lan- 
guage may be required before advancement to candidacy. 


Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved 
by the student’s graduate committee of which 15 must be 500- 
level courses. The 30 units are distributed as follows: 

Units 

1. Core courses in art history, philosophy, analysis and 

criticism 9 

a. Studio program: 

Art 500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field 
(3 units) 

Art history program: 

Art 511 Seminar on the Content and Meth- 
od of Art History (3 units) (ADMISSION 
WITH CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

b. Studio Program: 

Art 500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field 
(3 units) 

Art history program: 

Art 512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art 
History (3 units) (ADMISSION WITH 
CLASSIFIED STANDING ONLY) 

c. Art 481 Seminar in Art History (3 units), or 
substitute of a 400-level course in art history, 
theory, analysis or criticism on the recommenda- 
tion of the major adviser. 

2. 500-and/or 400- level courses in the area of concentra- 
tion selected from one of the following (minimum of 

six units at 500-level) 12 

a. Drawing and painting (including printmaking) 

b. Sculpture 

c. Crafts (including ceramics, glass, fibers, wood, 
jewelry/metalsmithing) 

d. Design (including environmental design, graphic 
design, illustration, exhibition design, or cre- 
ative photography) 

e. Art history 

3. Additional course work in the area of concentration or 


approved electives .... 3 or 6 

4. Art 597 Project (for studio); or Art 598 

Thesis (for art history) 3 or 6 

Total 


176 Art 


The M. A. study plan must be completed with a B average, and all 
courses in the area of concentration he completed with grades of 
B or better. Every graduate student is required to demonstrate 
writing ability commensurate with the baccalaureate degree. 
Please refer to the section on Graduate Regulations for further 
clarification. The Department of Art requires the studio candi- 
date for the Master of Arts in Art to exhibit the project in one of 
the department’s graduate galleries prior to graduation. The art 
history candidate is required to submit a written thesis based on a 
specific topic of research. 

For further information consult the graduate program adviser. 

MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN ART 

The Master of Fine Arts in Art features a rigorous studio program 
for the seriously committed, responsible and talented student. 
The curriculum and faculty challenge the students to focus on the 
goal of becoming professional artists. 

The M.F.A. program provides in-depth study within a 60-unit 
approved study plan in the following areas of concentration: ( 1 ) 
design (including graphic design, illustration, environmental de- 
sign, and exhibition design); (2) ceramics (including glass); (3) 
crafts (including fibers, jewelry/metalsmithing, and woodwork- 
ing/furniture); (4) sculpture; (5) drawing, painting, and print- 
making; and (6) creative photography. 

Admission Requirements 

1. Conditionally classified standing: 

a. a baccalaureate degree in art from an accredited institu- 
tion, or 24 upper division units in art, 18 of which must 
be in the concentration completed with grades of B or 
better. 

b. a minimum grade-point average of 2. 5 in the last 60 units 
attempted and have been in good standing at the last 
college attended. 

c. participate in comprehensive portfolio review: held semi- 
annually, the comprehensive portfolio review is an evalu- 
ation of the candidate by a committee comprised of facul- 
ty teaching in the area of concentration. The committee 
reviews the student’s creative work, statement of purpose, 
academic and other relevant qualifications. Procedures, 
dates, and appointment times are available through the 
art department graduate office. 

If the student’s portfolio is not adequate, the applicant 
could still be recommended for conditionally classified 
standing by the faculty comprehensive review commit- 
tee. However, the comprehensive portfolio review' must 
be repeated. 

d. Conditionally classified students may enroll in graduate 
courses with the exception of Art 500A,B;511, 512, 597; 
and 598. 


2. Classified standing: 

The same requirements as a. and b. for conditionally classified 
standing plus: 

a. pass comprehensive portfolio review. 

b. form a graduate committee. 

c. develop an approved study plan. 

Study Plan 

The M.F.A. degree program requires 60 units of graduate study 
approved by the student’s graduate committee and the dean of 
graduate studies. The study plan must be completed with a grade- 
point average of 3.0 or better. The courses in the concentration 
must be completed with a grade of “B” or better. The 60 unit 
study plan is distributed as follows: 


Areas Units 

Theory, criticism: Art 500 A, 500B 6 

History 9 

Area of concentration 24 

Electives in art 12 

Independent study: research 3 

Project . 6 

Total 60 


Master of Fine Arts Project 

The M.F.A. project exhibition constitutes a professional one- 
person art exhibit. It is installed in one of the department’s 
graduate galleries and announced for public view by the student 
as the final phase of the M.F.A. program requirements. 

The Department of Art is nationally accredited at the highest 
level of quality and professionalism (Division I) by the National 
Association of Schools of Art and Design. For further details on 
the comprehensive portfolio review, communicate with the grad- 
uate coordinator or graduate secretary in the art department, 
Visual Arts 102 (714/773-3471). 

POSTBACCALAUREATE UNCLASSIFIED 

Students who do not have the prerequisites to qualify for the 
graduate program may apply to the university as a postbaccalaur- 
eate-unclassified student. Typically, students in this category 
have a bachelor’s degree in art but need to work on the prerequi- 
sites for a different concentration or did not major in art and must 
work on courses for the 24 upper division art units requirement. 
To qualify for admission an applicant must hold a baccalaureate 
degree from an accredited institution, have attained a grade- 
point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 units attempted and 
have been in good standing at the last college attended. Admis- 
sion with postbaccalaureate standing does not constitute admis- 
sion to the art graduate program or graduate degree curricula. 


Art 177 


CERTIFICATE IN MUSEUM STUDIES 

Courses leading to the certificate are designed to educate stu- 
dents in museum practices in preparation for entry into the muse- 
um profession. The curriculum includes instruction in the his- 
torical development and philosophical basis of collections, exhi- 
bitions and their design, and curatorship. A museum internship 
is required. The certificate in museum studies may he undertaken 
as a self-contained program or may be taken in conjunction with 
the Master of Arts in Art degree or the Master of Fine Arts in Art 
degree or, by special permission, with other graduate degrees in 
the university. (For an M.A. or M.F.A. in Art degree with an 
exhibition design emphasis see M.A. and M.F.A. emphases un- 
der the design concentration.) 

Prerequisites 

1. B.A. in Art or other major by special permission 

2. Specific course prerequisites: 

a. 12 units in upper-division art history 

b. 6 units in graphic design and exhibition design 

c. 3 units of advanced writing (Communications 435 Edito- 
rial and Critical Writing; or Communications 362 Public 
Relations Writing; or English 301 Advanced College 
Writing) 

d. 3 units of beginning accounting 

Study Plan 

The certificate program requires 24 units. The 24 units are dis- 
tributed as follows: 

Units 


Art 464 Museum Conservation 3 

Art 481 Seminar in Art History 3 

Art 483D Exhibition Design 3 

Art 495 Internship in Art 3 

Art 501 Curatorship 3 

Art 503D Exhibition Design 6 

Course in museum education 3 

Total 24 


For further information, consult the Department of Art. 


Art Courses 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Use of a variety of art materials, processes and concepts. Field 
trips required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permis- 
sion of Art Department. (6 hours activity) 


101 Introduction to Art (3) 

Historical and contemporary art forms of painting, sculpture, 
architecture and design. Field trips required. Not open to art 
majors for credit except by permission of Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of two-dimensional visual or- 
ganization. (6 hours activity) (CAN ART 14) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

Materials, concepts and elements of three-dimensional visual 
organization. (6 hours activity) 

106 A Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Form as related to ceramic materials, tools, processes. Kiln load- 
ing and firing, hand building, wheel throwing and raku. Instruc- 
tional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

106B Beginning Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A. Form as related to ceramics. Glaze 
batching and its application, and the presentation of ceramic 
technique. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

The traditional and contemporary use of drawing and painting 
materials integrated with visual experiences and concepts. 107 A 
emphasizes drawing; 107B emphasizes painting. (6 hours activ- 
ity) (107 A = CAN ART 8, 107B = CAN ART 10) 

117 Life Drawing ( 1 ) 

The live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. 
Duplicate enrollment of this coures within the same semester is 
permissible. (3 hours activity for each unit) 

123 A Descriptive Drawing (3) 

Descriptive drawing, rendering techniques and theories repre- 
senting forms of nature. (6 hours activity) 

123B Descriptive Drawing (3) 

The use of linear perspective with lights and shadows to correctly 
describe fabricated and mechanical forms. (6 hours activity) 

201A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

The ideas, forms and styles of the visual arts as they developed in 
various cultures from prehistoric time to the present. (201 A = 
CAN ART 2, 201 B = CAN ART 4) 

205 A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Traditional and contemporary concepts and processes with em- 
phasis on design principles in the development of esthetic forms 
based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

205B Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 205A. Art 104 may be taken 
concurrently. The development of esthetic forms based on func- 
tion, with emphasis on design principles and the creative use of 
hand tools and power equipment. (9 hours laboratory) 


178 Art 


207 A, B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and 
Materials) (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A,B or equivalents. Traditional and 
contemporary methods and materials. (6 hours activity) 

2 13 A Beginning Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Design methodology and com- 
munication skills in the environmental design field. (6 hours 
activity) 

213B Interior Space Planning and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104; 213A or consent of instructor. The 
planning and organization of residential and commercial interior 
space. (6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. The creative use of wood and metal, power 
equipment and hand tools. Instructional fee required. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

223 A, B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3,3) 
Prerequisite: Art 103. The history, design and use of letter forms; 
techniques for rough and comprehensive layouts; the use of hand- 
lettered forms and handset type. (6 hours activity) 

238 Photo Visual Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. An Introductory photography course for 
art majors. Course content includes the study of photographic 
vision and design, visual conceptualization and examination of 
the qualities of light through the use of instant and automatic 
cameras. 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A.B. An exploration of woodcut, linocut 
and monoprint as a medium of personal expression. Instructional 
fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

300 Writing in the Visual Arts (3) 

Principles, practices and objectives of writing in the visual arts. 
Includes descriptive, analytical and expressive essays; project and 
grant proposals; artist’s statements; resumes; and professional cor- 
respondence. Satisfies the classroom portion of the upper-divi- 
sion writing requirements for art majors. 

301 Ancient Art (3) 

The developments in art from the Paleolithic to late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

The developments in art from the late antiquity through the 
Gothic. 

303 Architectural and Interior Rendering (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 123B or consent of instructor. Rendering of 
architectural, interior and landscape environments, utilizing me- 
chanical perspective and contemporary design drawing delinea- 
tion techniques. Mixed media. (6 hour activity) 


305A,B Advanced Crafts (3,3) 

Prerequisites: 205 A and 205 B. Advanced concepts and processes 
in the development of esthetic forms based on function, empha- 
sizing individual growth and personal expression. (9 hours labo- 
ratory) 

306 A, B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103, 104 and 106A,B or consent of instructor. 
Forms and the creative use of ceramic concepts and materials; 
design, forming, glazing and firing. Instructional tee required. (9 
hours laboratory) 

307 A, B Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, 207A,B or equivalents. The 
concepts, materials and activities of drawing and painting, em- 
phasizing individual growth, plan and craft. (6 hours activity) 

310A,B Watercolor (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B or equivalents. An exploration of wa- 
tercolor media related to varied subject matter and design appli- 
cations. Includes field trip activity. Provides skills and concepts 
useful for school art programs. (6 hours activity) 

311 Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Painting and sculpture 
from the French Revolution to the end of the 19th century. 

312 Modern Art (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Painting, the graphic arts, 
& sculpture from late 19th century to World War II. 

313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 213. Environmental design pro- 
jects and the study of unit concepts. (6 hours activity) 

313B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) 
Prerequisite: Art 313A. Environmental design projects and sys- 
tems concepts. (6 hours activity) 

315A,B Jewelry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken 
concurrently. Design and creation of jewelry. (9 hours lab) 

316A,B Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 216A. Sculptural materials and pro- 
cesses. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

317 Life Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing, 
painting and sculpture from the live model. (9 hours lab) 

317A Drawing and Painting 
317B Drawing and Painting 
317C Sculpting 


Art 179 


318A Drawing and Painting the Head and Hands (3) 
Prerequisites: Art 107A,B and Art 1 17. Specialized problems in 
construction and anatomy of the human head and hands, and 
their principal use in drawing, painting and illustration. (9 hours 
laboratory) 


338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. The photographic media 
in personal expression. Historical attitudes and processes; new 
materials and contemporary esthetic trends. Field trips required. 
Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 


318B Portraiture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A, 107B, 3 units of Art 1 17. Comprehen- 
sive problems in composition, concept, content and execution of 
portraits. 

319 Landscape Pointing (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A and B. Contemporary concepts and 
techniques of painting the landscape. 

320 History of Architecture Before the Modern Era (3) 

A study of selected monuments from Stonehenge through the 
late Baroque. Interrelationship between patronage, style, func- 
tion, structural principles and technological developments. 

323A,B Graphic Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 223 A and 223B or consent of instructor. 
Development and projection of ideas in relation to the technical, 
esthetic and psychological aspects of advertising art. Instruc- 
tional fee required. (6 hours activity) 

324 Beginning Glass Forming (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or consent of instructor. Hot glass 
laboratory equipment and techniques. Handling hot glass. In- 
structional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 1 17 or consent of instructor. Devel- 
opment of ceramic technology into individual sculptural forms 
and techniques. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Fibers and Papers (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104, or consent of instructor. The use 
of fibers and papers as an art form. Instructional fee required. (9 
hours laboratory) 

333 A Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 313B. Materials and structural concepts as de- 
sign determinants. (6 hours activity) 

333B Environmental Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Change and growth as design determi- 
nants; experimental design concepts and methods. (6 hours ac- 
tivity) 

336A,B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture 

0,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 316A. Waxing, molding and metal casting 
techniques. Aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. (9 
hours laboratory) 


338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. The photographic medium in personal 
expression. Historical and new processes. Field trips required. 
Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

U ) *- -fiiriru ?omlnI Htttt 


339A Photo-Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 338. The use of specialized photo- 
graphic techniques such as lighting, camera position, color and 
motion for solutions to illustration problems of narration, visual 
description, juxtaposition and imagery. Instructional fee re- 
quired. (9 hours laboratory) 


339B Photo Illustration (3) 

Prerequisites: 338A and 339A, or consent of instructor. Con- 
cepts and attitudes in the field of photo illustration. Illustration 
problems using narrative, visual description, juxtaposition and 
imagery. Instructional fee required. 

347A Printmaking Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A.B, 117, and 247. Concept development, 
exploration and materials involved in printmaking techniques. 
Includes etching, aquatint. Instructional fee required. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

347B Printmaking Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 117, and 247. Concept development, 
exploration and materials involved in lithography. Instructional 
fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

348 Artists’ Books (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or 247, or consent of instructor. 
Personal vision and concepts applied to the book form as art; the 
history and aesthetics of artists’ books. 

353 Environmental Design Practice (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 213, 313 and 333, or consent of instructor. 
Environmental design practice, including research techniques, 
project administration, specification writing, estimating, forms 
and documents, evaluation techniques and ethics. Areas of em- 
phasis: interior design, architecture, landscape architecture. 

355 A, B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. De- 
sign concepts and printing and dyeing processes as applied to 
fabrics. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A,Band 117. Story, book, magazine, 
and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 


180 Art 


364 A,B Stained Glass (3,3) 

Leaded and stained glass; individual exploration, growth, plan- 
ning and craftsmanship. (6 hours activity) 

365 A, B Fibers: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or 205 A, B or consent of instruc- 
tor. The use of the loom and weaving processes to design and 
create fiber and fabric art forms. Instructional fee required. (9 
hours laboratory) 

371 History and Theory of Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A and B. The chronology of design in 
relation to the philosophical and theoretical ideologies which 
have, along with related socio-political and economic condi- 
tions, influenced its implementation and development. 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Art concepts, materials and processes as they relate to child 
development. (6 hours activity) 

413 History of Contemporary Art (3) 

Prerequisites: 312 and 46 IB or consent of instructor. A historical 
perspective of contemporary art beginning with major develop- 
ments in Europe and the United States in the 1950’s. Emphasis 
on new materials, new exhibition methods, and in particular the 
major conceptual issues raised by individual artists and groups. 

420 History of Modern Architecture (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 201 B (art majors) or Art 101 (non-art majors). 
Development of modern architecture. The interrelationship 
among architecture, technology and society, from the industrial 
and political revolutions of the 18th century to the present. 
Exploration of national differences and various approaches to city 
planning. 

424A,B Glass Forming (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 324 or consent of instructor. The 
chemistry, handling and manipulation of glass and its tools and 
equipment for the ceramic artist. Instructional fee required. (9 
hours laboratory) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 201 B (art majors) or Art 101 (non-art majors). 
Painting, sculpture and architecture from the late 13th to 16th 
century in Italy. 

432 Baroque Art (3) 

Painting, sculpture and architecture of the 17th century in Eu- 
rope. 

438A,B Creative Color Photography (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 338A,B. Concepts and techniques in creative 
color photography. Historical attitudes and contemporary trends. 
Personal involvement with the medium. Instructional fee re- 
quired. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 


441A,B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205 A or consent of instruc- 
tor. Exploring the art media used in secondary school art pro- 
grams today. Materials for secondary art curriculum. Two and 
three dimensional media in subject matter applications. (6 hours 
activity) 

443 Studio Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 223 A, B and 323 A, B. Admission by interview 
and portfolio review. Studio production of graphics for the 
School of the Arts, including printed mailers, posters, booklets, 
catalogs, advertisements. Students experience designer/client re- 
lationships and translate concepts into production. (9 hours ac- 
tivity) May be repeated once for credit. 

448 Special Studies: Artists’ Books and Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 102, 107A, or 347Ax/348 or consent of in- 
structor. A studio art course for advanced students who want to 
continue to explore the book form as it relates to their personal 
aesthetic goals. 

453 A, B Exhibition Design (3,3) 

Technical and esthetic experience in problem-solving exhibition 
design concepts, evaluation and design analysis. The production 
of exhibitions in the University Art Gallery, their selection, 
design, installation, lighting and supportive interpretive materi- 
al. (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

460B Pre-Columbian Art (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A, B or consent of instructor. An introduc- 
tion to the art and architecture of Meso and South America from 
the early formative stage to the Spanish Conquest. Emphasis on 
esthetic achievement with varying contexts of pre-Columbian 
culture. 

461 A American Art: Colonial Period to 1900 (3) 

The historical development of painting and sculpture in America 
from the Colonial Period until 1900. The role of the visual arts in 
helping to define, reflect and challenge American values and 
institutions. 

46 IB American Art: 20th Century (3) 

Painting and sculpture in America during the 20th century. The 
role of the visual arts in helping to define, reflect and challenge 
American values and institutions. 

464 Museum Conservation (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 453A, six units of art history or anthropology. 
The examination of the preservation of objects; the history, role 
and principles of conservation within a museum context. Three 
combined sessions at Conservation Center, LACMA; Hunting- 
ton Library; J. Paul Getty Museum; and Museum of Cultural 
History, UCLA. 


Art 181 


470 History and Esthetics of Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: 201 A, B. Photography from ancient optical obser- 
vations through 19th-century invention to 20th-century 
acceptan 

470 History and Esthetics of Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: 201 A, B. Photography from ancient optical obser- 
vations through 19th-century invention to 20th-century accep- 
tance as an art form. Esthetic movement and influential innova- 
tors. Lectures, slides and class discussion. 

475 Professional Practices in the Arts (3) (Formerly 375) 
Prerequisite: Art major with junior or above standing. Practices 
unique to the visual arts, including an overview of changing 
concepts in the art market, traditional roles in cultural context, 
portfolio development, strategies for protecting ideas and avoid- 
ing abuses, and long term professional development. 

480 Selected Topics in Art History (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 201 A or B and consent of instructor. Detailed 
study of the work of individual artists, patronage in particular 
places, specific pictorial, sculptural and architectural programs or 
art history periods. Topics will be listed in the class schedule. 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and evaluation in one 
area of art history and appreciation. May be repeated up to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

483 Special Studies in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but no 
more than 3 units in any one area in a single semester. 

483A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

483B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

483C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

48 3D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

483E Computer Assisted Graphics (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 3 13 A or Art 323 A or Art 363 A and consent of 
instructor. Theory and practice of design using the computer. 
Students will explore the numerous applications of the computer 
through lecture demonstration, studio/laboratory experience, 
guest speakers and field trips. Maximum of 12 units. 

484 Special Studies in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in ceramics. 
Maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units in any one 
area in a single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

484A Ceramics 
484B Glass Forming 
484C Glass Casting 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper-division units in designated 
area or consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, but no more 
than three units in any one area in a single semester. (9 hours 
laboratory) 


485A Jewelry 

48 5 B General Crafts 

485C Metalsmithing 

485D Fibers — Weaving Instructional tee required. 

485E Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing Instructional fee 
required. 

485F Fibers and Fabrics Instructional fee required. 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Maximum 
of 1 2 units but no more than three units in a single semester. (9 
hours laboratory) 

486A Modeling and Fabrication Instructional fee required. 
486B Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper-division units in drawing 
and painting, and consent of instructor. Maximum of 12 units, 
but no more than three units in any one area in a single semester. 
487 A Painting (6 hours activity) 

487B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

487C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

487D Printmaking Instructional fee required. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A,B. Photography as personal expression. 
Maximum of 12 units but no more than three units in a single 
semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

491 Professional Seminar (3) 

Guest speakers from professions in the visual arts. A lecture/ 
discussion seminar relevant to current issues and concepts in 
making and experiencing art. Topics will differ each semester. For 
the senior and graduate art major. May be repeated up to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

495 Internship in Art (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing as a declared BFA in Art major. 
Work in a specific art field in business or industry. 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of department 
chair and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for 
credit. 

500 A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: classified standing. Problems and issues in art. Intel- 
lectual clarification and verbal articulation of individual intent as 
an artist. Oral and written material in support of the master’s 
project, (with 500B meets graduate level writing requirement). 


182 Art 


500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 500A. Directed research in the area of major 
emphasis. Oral and written material on historical backgrounds 
and developments in art as they relate to individual intent as an 
artist (stated in Art 500A) and in support of the master’s project, 
(with 500A meets graduate level writing requirement) 

501 Curatorship (3) 

Prerequisites: B. A. in art, anthropology or other major by special 
permission, and Art 481 and 463. The curator collects, cares for 
and studies objects. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum of 12 
units in each area, but no more than three units in any one area 
in a single semester. 

503A Graphic Design (6 hours activity) 

503B Environmental Design (6 hours activity) 

503C Illustrations (6 hours activity) 

503D Exhibition Design (More than 9 hours laboratory) 

504 Graduate Problems in Ceramics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in ceramics, glass forming and 
glass casting. Maximum of 12 units in each area but no more than 
three units in a single semester. Instructional fee required. (9 
hours laboratory) 

504A Ceramics 
504B Glass Forming 
504C Glass Casting 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects listed below. Maximum of 12 
units in each area but no more than three units in a single 
semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

505A Jewelry 
505B General Crafts 

505D Fibers Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics Instructional fee 
required. 

506A,B Graduate Problems in Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. Maximum of 12 
units in each area but no more than three units in a single 
semester. Instructional fee required. (9 hours laboratory) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing, Painting and 
Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper-division drawing and painting. 
Planning, development and evaluation of individual projects list- 
ed below. Maximum of 12 units in each area but no more than 
three units in a single semester. 

507A Painting (6 hours activity) 

507B Life Drawing (9 hours laboratory) 

507C Drawing (6 hours activity) 

507D Printmaking Instructional fee required. (9 hours labora- 
tory) 


508A,B Graduate Problems in Creative Photography (3,3) 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in photography. Maximum of 12 
units in each area, but no more than three units in a single 
semester. (9 hours laboratory) 

511 Seminar on the Content & Method of Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 481. Methods of research, bibliography, and 
theories and philosophies of art historical scholarship. May be 
repeated up to a maximum of 6 units. 

512 Seminar on Selected Topics in Art History (3) 
Prerequisite: appropriate upper-division Art course approved by 
instructor and Art 5 1 1 or consent of instructor. Analysis and 
evaluation of specific historical significance including cultural, 
social and economic circumstances. May be repeated up to a 
maximum of 6 units. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. Art 500B 
may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of instruc- 
tor. Development and presentation of a creative project in the 
concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: Art 511, 512, written consent of instructor and 
recommendation of the student’s graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in art with consent of department chair 
and written consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


Art Education Courses 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, meth- 
ods and practices for teaching art in secondary schools. Required 
before student teaching of majors in art for the single subject 
teaching credential. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. 
See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher Edu- 
cation. Offered every fall semester. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the Ryan Act credential. 
See description and prerequisites under Division of Teacher Edu- 
cation. Concurrent enrollment in Art Education 449S required. 
Offered every spring semester. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Seminar for student teachers in art. The practical aspects of art 
instruction in secondary schools. Concurrent enrollment in Art 
Education 4491 required. Offered every spring semester. 


Art 183 


Department of Music 

Department Chair: Benton Minor 
Vice Chair: Gordon Paine 
Department Office: Performing Arts 262 

Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Music 

Liberal Arts 
Music Education 
Music History and Theory 

Bachelor of Music 

Commercial Music 
Composition 
Instrumental 
Keyboard 
Voice 

Accompanying 

Minor in Music 
Master of Arts in Music 

Music History and Literature 
Music Education 

Master of Music 

Performance 
Theory -Composition 

Single Subject (Secondary) Credential 

Faculty 

Charles Baker, Martha Baker, Marc Dickey, M’lou Dietzer, 

Mitchell Fennell, Rita Fuszek, Su Harmon, Carole Harrison, 

Nors Josephson, Burton Karson, Leo Kreter, Gary Maas, Txld 
Miller, Benton Minor, Gordon Paine, Jane Paul, William 
Reber, Lloyd Rodgers, Ernest Salem, Preston Stedman, Robert 
Stewart, David Thorsen, Laurance Timm, Rodger Vaughan, 

Robert Watson, Vance Wolverton, Mary Mark Zeyen 



1 84 Music 



INTRODUCTION 

Music is one of the most rewarding of all human endeavors, and 
the faculty and students in the Department of Music share a deep 
love for their art and a common desire to achieve excellence in it. 
The department offers a wide spectrum of degree programs and 
options with an overall emphasis in the area of performance. The 
curriculum provides basic preparation for careers in music or 
further graduate study, and is designed to provide a balanced 
education in the many facets of musical experience. Artist-teach- 
ers offer instruction in all areas of performance, while practicing 
composers and theorists teach courses in theory, and active musi- 
cologists provide instruction in history and literature. It is the 
goal of the department to develop each student’s musical and 
intellectual potential to the highest level of individual capability. 
The Department of Music is fully accredited by the National 
Association of Schools of Music, in addition to the overall uni- 
versity accreditation by the Western Association of Schools and 
Colleges. 

Credential Information 

The Department of Music offers course work leading to a CSUF 
Waiver Program in Music for the Ryan Single Subject Teaching 
Credential. For details, contact the Admission to Teacher Educa- 
tion Office and the coordinator of music education. 

The Department of Music offers supplementary authorizations for 
the Ryan Single Subject Teaching Credential in Instrumental 
Music and in Vocal Music. A supplementary authorization in 
music is offered for the Ryan Multiple Subject Teaching Creden- 
tial. For details contact the Office of Admission to Teacher 
Education. 

Advisement 

All music majors are required to obtain advisement each semes- 
ter. Area coordinators serve as advisers, and students are assigned 
according to their area of concentration. 

Requirements of the Music Department 

1 . All entering music majors are enrolled in the Bachelor of Arts 
degree program for at least the first semester of residence. 
Students may request a change in their degree objective to the 
Bachelor of Music upon completion of at least one semester of 
course work at the university, successful completion of a jury 
examination and recommendation of the faculty in the appro- 
priate area of concentration. Enrollment in the Bachelor of 
Music program is limited. 

2. Upon entering the university as a new music major or upon 
officially changing to a major in music, each student will 
present an audition in the appropriate principal performance 
area (instrument or voice) and a placement audition for class 
piano. 

3. All students must pass proficiency examinations in traditional 
harmony (sight-singing, dictation, keyboard and paperwork) 
and piano before being approved for graduation. Transfer stu- 


dents will fulfill the theory requirement by passing the en- 
trance examination in theory; first-time students and transfers 
with insufficient preparation at entrance will normally take 
the examination in Music 211. The piano-proficiency re- 
quirement may be met by completion of Music 282 B with a 
passing grade. Students whose principal performance area is 
piano satisfy the piano proficiency requirement upon reaching 
300 level in performance. 

4. Each music major must declare a single principal performance 
area, which must be approved by the faculty of that area upon 
completion of the entrance audition. In order to be approved 
for graduation, each student must achieve at least the 300 
level of proficiency in the principal performance area. B.A. 
Liberal Arts-option students who elect project option 2 (Mu- 
sic 497: Project) need reach only the 200 level. 

5. Each music major is required to present one or more recitals or 
a project appropriate to the degree program before being ap- 
proved for graduation. The project option is available only in 
the Liberal Arts and Music History and Theory options of the 
Bachelor of Arts degree. Recitals at the 300 level of perfor- 
mance are designated Music 398; recitals at the 400 level of 
performance are designated Music 498. See the sections be- 
low on the Liberal Arts and Music History and Theory op- 
tions for recital/project information applicable to those 
degrees. 

6. Undergraduate music majors are required to participate in a 
major performance ensemble (Music 361) and complete it 
with a passing grade each semester of residence as follows: 

a. Students who declare wind or percussion as the principal 
performance area must register for band; students who 
declare a string instrument as principal performance area 
must register for orchestra; students who declare voice as 
the principal performance area must register for chorus. 
(Bachelor of Music students in voice who have reached 
the 400 level may elect to substitute 36 ID, Opera The- 
atre.) A student whose principal performance area is key- 
board or classical guitar must register for one of the above 
major performance ensembles, according to the student’s 
qualifications and subject to audition. 

b. A music major admitted into the Bachelor of Music pro- 
gram whose senior recital instrument is keyboard or classi- 
cal guitar and who has participated in a major perfor- 
mance ensemble for at least five semesters (a minimum of 
two semesters at Cal State University Fullerton) may 
thereafter substitute chamber music and/or small perfor- 
mance ensembles (Mu 362, 363, 386) to satisfy the de- 
partmental major performance ensemble (Mu 361) 
requirement. 


Music 185 


c. The educational purpose of the requirement that all 
music majors participate in an appropriate major per- 
formance ensemble during each semester of residence 
is to permit each student to experience the highest 
level of ensemble music-making commensurate with 
the student’s skill. To this end, the CSUF band/orches- 
tra and choir programs are of the traditional graded 
structure. University Singers (36 IE), Wind Ensemble 
(36 IF) and Symphony Orchestra (361 A) are for the 
more advanced students; University Choir (361 B), 
Symphonic Band (36 1C) and Women’s Choir (361 W) 
are for students of less skill or experience. Placement in 
bands, orchestra and choirs will be based on student 
ability as determined by the directors of those ensem- 
bles. Music majors will be assigned to the ensemble for 
which they are best qualified. A student does not have 
the option of satisfying the requirements for participa- 
tion in a major performance ensemble by enrolling in 
an ensemble intended for those of less ability or experi- 
ence. 

7. Applied-music study in the principal performance area is re- 
quired as stipulated under the requirements for each degree 
program. The following conditions apply: 

a. If a student pursuing the Bachelor of Arts degree (Music 
History and Theory) or the Bachelor of Music degree 
(Composition) reaches the 300 level in the principal per- 
formance area before the required units in applied music 
are completed, Music Department electives may be sub- 
stituted for the remaining applied music units. 

b. In addition to the four units of applied music required in 
the principal performance area, Bachelor of Music stu- 
dents in the Composition option must complete six units 
of applied composition (including the 498 recital) after 
taking Music 422. The 498 recital will consist of a presen- 
tation of the student’s own compositions. 

c. Students pursuing the Bachelor of Music degree in any 
option except composition must achieve the 300 level in 
performance before giving the 398 recital and 400 level in 
performance before giving the 498 recital. Specific infor- 
mation on jury-level criteria is available from the Music 
Department office. 

d. In order to register in applied music, an undergraduate 
student (with the exception of a student who is within six 
units of completing all degree requirements) must be cur- 
rently enrolled for a minimum of six units of music classes 
(including applied music), at least two units of which 
must be in an academic area of music (any course other 
than performing ensembles and applied music). In addi- 
tion, the student must earn a passing grade in all music 
courses, be making satisfactory progress toward a degree, 
and be currently enrolled in the appropriate major perfor- 
mance ensemble, as stipulated in section 6 above. If the 


student fails to complete with a passing grade either the 
required six units of music classes or the major perfor- 
mance ensemble, applied lessons will be withheld in the 
subsequent semester. Students are eligible for a maximum 
of three semesters of lessons at a given level of perfor- 
mance. 

e. Students in the B. A. program are eligible for a maximum 
of eight units of applied music (398 and 497 included). 
B.M. students are eligible for a maximum of 14 units (398 
and 498 included.) 

8. Senior transfer students or graduate students in music enter- 
ing to satisfy the legal waiver for teaching credentials, are 
expected to complete a minimum of one semester of upper- 
division course work in music with a GPA of at least 3.0 before 
they may be approved for admittance to teacher education. 
Required courses and competencies must be satisfied before 
the faculty committee will consider endorsing the student’s 
acceptance into the credential program. 

9. A music major must maintain a 2.5 GPA in music course work 
at Cal State Fullerton in order to be approved for graduation. 
In addition a student must earn a grade of C or better in all 
music courses required for the Bachelor of Arts in Music or 
Bachelor of Music degree. 

10. All requests for exceptions to departmental or curricular 
requirements must be directed by petition to the department 
chair. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses that lead to 
baccalaureate and graduate degrees in teaching and the profes- 
sions. The baccalaureate degree may be earned in either of two 
degree programs (Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Music). With- 
in these programs, a student will pursue a concentration in liberal 
arts, music history and theory, music education, performance, 
composition or accompanying. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 50 
units of music, of which at least 29 shall be upper division (300 
level and above). All Bachelor of Arts students must complete 
the basic requirements listed immediately below and must select 
and complete the requirements listed in one of three concen- 
trations: Liberal Arts, Music History and Theory or Music 
Education. 

Core Requirements 

Units 

Music theory (Music 111A,B; 211; 319A; 320A 


or B) 14 

Music history and literature (Music 251; 

351A,B,C) 12 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 4 

Major performance ensemble 

(Music 361A,B,C,E,F,W) 4 

Total 34 


186 Music 


Liberal Arts Concentration 

This concentration allows a student to take an academic major in 
music without being involved in a program of professional prep- 
aration. The degree emphasis is historically the oldest such study 
plan in music in higher education and represents a liberal-arts 
response to the highly professional program of the Bachelor of 
Music degree. 

Units 


Core requirements for BA degree 34 

Music theory (Music 316 or 318, 323 or 422) 4 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Senior project (Music 398 or 497) 1 

Music literature (Music 453A through 459B) 2 

Electives (minimum of 6 upper division; no more than 2 
units of Music 193-493) 7 

Total . 50 


Senior Project 

Two alternatives are available to the student, each with a differ- 
ent focus and prerequisite: 

Alternative I (Music 398: Recital): Prerequisite is achievement 
of 300 applied music level in the area of principal performance 
one semester before the semester in which the student plans to 
present the recital. The student will present a brief recital in a 
regular recital time or in the appropriate workshop (at faculty 
discretion). 

Alternative 2 (Music 497: Project): Prerequisite is achievement of 
200 applied music level two semesters before the semester in which 
the student plans to present the project. The student will prepare a 
special project in the senior year which will culminate in a lecture, 
lecture-recital or other form of public presentation. To the greatest 
extent possible, this project should be an independent investigation 
into an area of special interest and should involve minimal faculty 
guidance. The public presentation will be evaluated by a faculty 
committee, as is the case with senior recitals, and must be approved 
by that committee prior to graduation. 

In the case of both alternatives, the recital or project will be 
included when calculating the students quota of state-funded 
private lessons. 

Music History and Theory Concentration 

This concentration is designed as a balanced program in music 
history and theory and provides suitable preparation for advanced 
degrees in theory, literature or musicology. It also provides basic 
preparation for advanced study in other fields, such as musical 
acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, library science in 
music, and music in industry and recreation. 


Students seeking the concentration in Music History and Theory 
must submit a paper to the music history or theory coordinator 
not later than the beginning of their junior year. Acceptance into 
the degree program is contingent on the submission of a satisfac- 
tory paper. 

Allied requirements for the Music History and Theory concen- 
tration: 

1. Twenty units in a secondary academic area (not music, but 
related to the student’s project or useful to prepare the student 
for future graduate work in music). The choice of a secondary 
academic area must be approved in writing by the coordina- 
tors of music history and theory. Suggested areas: art, English, 
theatre, history, physics (acoustics), anthropology, languages 
or computer science. 

2. Foreign language proficiency, preferably German, to be satis- 
fied by one of the following: 

a. Four years of study at the secondary school level, 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of For- 
eign Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing with a passing grade the second semester of 
the beginning university sequence of a foreign language. 

Units 


Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Music theory (Music 316, 319A) 4 

Conducting or composition (Music 382 A or 383 A or 

422) 2 

Project-proposal preparation (Music 499) 1 

Music history or theory project (Music 497) 1 

Electives in music 8 

Total 50 


Music Education Concentration 

Piano Pedagogy Emphasis: 

The emphasis in piano pedagogy is designed to provide in-depth 
preparation for individual and group piano instruction and will 
not lead to teaching in the California public schools. 


Units 

Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Keyboard Ensemble (363K) 1 

Applied Piano (393) 1 

Conducting (382 A or 383 A) 2 

Recital (398) 1 

Piano Literature and Interpretation (454A, B) 4 

Piano Pedagogy (467A,B,C)' 6 

Electives (recommended by advisement) 1 

Total 50 


* Co-enrollment in Observation and Practice leaching (Music 465 and 466) strong- 
ly advised. 


Music 187 


Instrumental, Vocal-Choral, General Music Emphases: 

The emphases in instrumental, vocal-choral and general music 
are designed to provide in-depth preparation for teaching in the 
California public schools under the provisions of the Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 


Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral instruments (Music 281B/C,P,S/T,W/X by 

advisement) 4 

Music theory (Music 323) 2 

Conducting (Music 382A,B) 4 

Chamber Music (363) , 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 1 

Total 50 

Vocal-Choral Emphasis: Units 

Core requirement for the Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 383A,B) 4 

Literature and Pedagogy (Music 453A or B and 468A) .... 4 

Chamber Music (Music 363) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives 1 

Total 50 

General Music Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for Bachelor of Arts 34 

Orchestral Instruments (Music 281B,P,S,W) 4 

Conducting (Music 383 A, B) 4 

Music and Child Development (Music 333) 3 

Music in the Modern Classroom (Music 435) 2 

Orff Techniques for Children (Music 436) 1 

Recital (Music 398) , 1 

Electives in music 1 

Total 50 


Credential Information 

Students desiring a California teaching credential in music must 
complete the following courses prior to enrolling in the profes- 
sional education program as required by the Department of Sec- 
ondary Education. 


Instrumental Emphasis: Units 

Music Education 295, 394, 395A; Music 324, 383A, 

353, 444, and 281 (C,T,X by advisement) 15 

Choral-Vocal Emphasis : 

Music Education 295, 394, 395B, 441; 

Music 354, 382 A and 380 12 


General Music Emphasis: 

Music Education 295, 394, 395B, 441 and Music 381 8 

Students who wish to earn a single subject credential in Music in 
addition to a Bachelor of Arts with a Music Education concentra- 
tion must complete the following: 

Units 

Music Education 442 (3) Music Education 449E (3) and 
professional education courses Secondary Education 440F 


and 440S 12 

Music Education 4491 (Student teaching) and Music Educa- 
tion 449S 12 

Total 24 


Prior to admission to teacher education, the student must reach 
300 level in the principal performance area and pass functional 
examinations in keyboard and voice. The functional examina- 
tion requirements may also be met by completing Music 282 B 
(piano) and Music 283B (voice) with minimum grade of B. 

BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training for the highly 
gifted students who show promise and capability of becoming 
professional performers and composers. 

The degree consists of 132 semester units. A minimum of 70 
semester units in music are required, at least 32 of which must be 
upper division. 


Core Requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Units 

Music Theory (Music 111 A, B: 211: 319A: 320A 

or 320B*) 14 

Music History and Literature (Music 251; 351A,B,C) .... 12 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (Music 498) 1 

Total 37 


'Music 320A and 320B required in Concentration in Composition 


Composition Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316; 318; 319B; 323; 422) 12 

Conducting (Music 382A or 383A) 2 

Applied composition ; 5 

Electives in music . . . . 14 

Total 70 


188 Music 


Instrumental Concentration 

Orchestral Instruments Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323, 422) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 382A,B) 4 

Chamber music (Music 362 and 363) 6 

Electives in music 10 

Total 70 

Classical Guitar Emphasis: Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music . . . ; 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 323, 422) 6 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Conducting (Music 382A) 2 

Chamber music (Music 363G) 6 

Electives in music 6 

Fingerboard skills (Music 385G) 2 

Guitar history and literature (Music 459A) 2 

Guitar pedagogy (Music 459B) . 2 

Total ... 70 

Keyboard Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 320A or B, 422) 4 

Music literature (Music 454A,B) 4 

Conducting (Music 382 A or 383 A) 2 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Chamber music (Music 362 or 363) 3 

Accompanying (Music 386) 1 

Pedagogy (Music 467A,B,C) . 6 

Harpsichord or Organ class (Music 372 or 373) 1 

Electives in music . . . 5 

Total . 70 

Voice Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 422) . . . . 4 

Music literature (Music 456; 457A,B) 7 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 6 

Opera Theatre (Music 36 ID) 2 

Diction (Music 380A,B,C) 3 

Conducting (Music 383A) 2 

Pedagogy (Music 468 A, B) 4 

Electives in music . 4 

Total 70 


Allied requirement for voice concentration: 

Proficiency in two foreign languages (French, German, Italian), 
each to be satisfied by one of the following: 


a. Four years’ study of foreign language at the secondary school 
level, or 

b. Passing an examination given by the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures, or 

c. Completing the second semester of the beginning university 
sequence of a foreign language. 


Accompanying Concentration Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music theory (Music 316, 318, 422) 6 

Music literature (Music 455, 457A) 5 

Principal performance area (Applied Music) 5 

Chamber music (Music 363) 2 

Harpsichord class (Music 372) 1 

Organ class (Music 373) 1 

Functional Skills (Music 385) 2 

Accompanying (Music 386) 2 

Conducting (Music 383 A) 2 

Diction (Music 380A,B,C) 3 

Recitals (Music 398, 498) 2 

Electives in music 2 

Total 70 

Commercial Music Concentration: 

Instrumental Emphasis Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A,B) 4 

History of American Commercial Music (Music 356) 3 

Principal Performance Area (Applied Music) 6 

Improvisation (Music 265A,B) 3 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Recital (398) 1 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Electives in Music 8 

Total 70 

Commercial Music Concentration: 

Composition^Arranging Emphasis Units 

Core requirements for the Bachelor of Music 37 

Music Theory (Music 312A,B; Music 314A,B; 

Music 323) ........ * 10 

History of American Commercial Music (Music 356) 3 

Applied Composition/Arranging 5 

Improvisation (Music 265 A) 1 

Major Performance Ensemble (Music 361) 4 

Lab Band or Stage Band (Music 362L or 362S) 4 

Recital (Music 398) 1 

Electives in Music . 5 

Total . . . 70 


Music 1 89 


MINOR IN MUSIC 

The minor in music may he used by persons whose majors are in 
other fields. A maximum of 14 lower-division units may be in- 
cluded in work counted toward the music minor. The minor 
requires a minimum preparation of 20 units as follows: 

Units 

Theory of music (selected from Music 101; 1 1 1 A, B; 21 1; 
or any 300- or 400-level theory classes for which the 

student is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Music 100; 251; 350 or 
351 A,B,C; or courses at the 400- or 500- level for which 

the student is qualified) 5-6 

Applied techniques (selected from Music 183, 184A,B; 
281B,P,S,W; 283A,B or any course in ensemble, con- 
ducting, piano, voice or orchestral instruments at the 
300- or 400-level for which the student is qualified) . 8-9 

Total 20 

MASTER OF MUSIC AND 
MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

Two graduate degrees in music are offered in the Department of 
Music: the Master of Music and the Master of Arts. Each degree 
seeks to serve a special group of graduate students. For those who 
intend to pursue advanced degrees beyond the masters level, the 
Master of Music normally leads to the D.M.A. degree, and the 
Master of Arts to the Ph.D. or the Ed.D. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Conditionally Classified 

All applicants admitted into the music program enter in condi- 
tionally classified graduate standing. University requirements in- 
clude: a baccalaureate from an accredited institution; a grade- 
point average of at least 2. 5 in the last 60 semester units attempt- 
ed; and good standing at the last college attended. Each applicant 
must also present a satisfactory audition, submit an acceptable 
written essay in the area of specialization, and pass entrance 
exams in music theory, music history and writing. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A graduate student may apply for classified graduate standing 
only upon attainment of the following prerequisites: (a) comple- 
tion of all requirements for conditionally classified standing as 
described above; (b) a major in music (or the equivalent of a 
major; i.e., 29 upper-division units in music) with a minimum 
grade-point average of 3.0 in the major; and (c) satisfactory 
completion of Music 500, Introduction to Graduate Study in 
Music. One objective of Music 500 is the preparation of a study 
plan listing all courses required for completion of the degree. This 
study plan must receive the approval of the coordinator of the 
students area of specialization, the Music Department graduate 
program adviser and the dean of graduate studies. Opportunity is 
given the student to remove any deficiencies in undergraduate- 
level preparation. Courses taken to satisfy deficiencies usually 
will not be included on the students study plan and thus will not 
count toward the master’s degree. 


Students who do not pass one or more of the entrance examina- 
tions shall take and complete specified coursework with a grade of 
A or B. Music 450 satisfies the entrance examination require- 
ment in music history, and Music 411 meets the requirement in 
music theory. Students may elect to bypass the history and theory 
entrance exams and take the appropriate class(es) instead. Those 
who do not meet required writing proficiency at entrance shall 
take an appropriate course specified by the Music Department. 
The writing proficiency requirement must be met before a stu- 
dent may take Music 500, and the music history requirement 
must be satisfied before a student may take any 500-level music 
history seminar. 

MASTER OF MUSIC 

The Master of Music provides an avenue of graduate study for the 
highly creative composer or for the superior performer in a pro- 
gram tailored to each student’s demonstrated talent and to each 
student’s professional development. Applicants must have com- 
pleted either a Bachelor of Music degree in performance or com- 
position or show evidence of equivalent rigorous training. For the 
entrance audition, applicants in performance must demonstrate 
proficiency equivalent to the 400 level, the level expected of a 
performance major in the Bachelor of Music program at the time 
of the senior recital, while composition applicants must submit a 
portfolio of scores for examination by the composition faculty. 
For admission to the programs in choral or instrumental conducting, 
applicants must show evidence of substantial conducting course 
work at the undergraduate level plus practical experience. Fur- 
ther, to audition for entrance into the program, each choral 
applicant must demonstrate conducting proficiency with a mixed 
chorus and each instrumental applicant must demonstrate con- 
ducting proficiency with a band or orchestra. Under exceptional 
circumstances, a tape may be substituted for the live audition. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Music degree program requires a minimum of 30 
units of graduate study in music, at least half of which must be in 
500-level courses. Music 500, Introduction to Graduate Study in 
Music, must be taken within the first nine units. At least one 
recital is required, in addition to a corollary written project. 
Under certain circumstances, and with departmental approval, a 
thesis may be substituted for the recital and written project. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

Two options are offered in this degree program: Option I in music 
history and literature, and Option II in music education. Both 
options provide for breadth of advanced study as well as an area of 
specialization. The degree is for teachers and supervisors of music 
and for college teaching careers in music history or music educa- 
tion. For the entrance audition in history and literature, applicants 
must submit an example of a previously written research paper on 
a musical subject, while applicants to the program in music educa- 
tion must submit a 30-minute tape demonstrating their teaching 
technique in a classroom situation. 


1 90 Music 


Study Plan 

The Master of Arts degree program requires a minimum of 30 
units of graduate study, no more than nine of which may be 
outside the field of music and at least half of which must be in 
500-level courses in the major. 

Option I in history and literature requires reading ability in a 
foreign language, preferably German or French, prior to ad- 
vancement to candidacy, a thesis and at least six units of study in 
a non-music field which is supportive of the major. Students in 
Option II, music education, shall complete a thesis, project, or 
comprehensive examination. Students selecting the comprehen- 
sive examination (0 units) shall complete three additional units 
in the concentration. Ten semester units are common to both 
options (Music 500, 3 units; Music 361-363, 2 units; Music 37 1 - 
571, 2 units; and Music 552-556, 3 units). Music 500, Introduc- 
tion to Graduate Study in Music, must be included within the 
first nine units taken as a graduate student under both options. 

For further details or advisement, consult the Department of 
Music. 


Music Courses 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

Musical enjoyment and understanding through a general survey 
of musical literature representative of styles and performance 
media. Music will be related to other arts through lectures, re- 
cordings and concerts. For non-music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to improve music perfor- 
mance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and relationship 
to keyboard and simple melodic instruments. For non-music 
majors. 

103 History of Rock (3) 

Rock music around the world; its origins and the development of 
national styles. Emphasis on listening. For non-music majors. 

111A,B Diatonic Harmony (2,2) 

Includes scales and intervals, triads and their inversions, harmo- 
nizations, non-harmonic tones, modulation and seventh chords. 
Co-enrollment in the corresponding section of Music 1 1 1 AL or 
111 BL is required for music majors and is recommended for 
others. 

111AL, 111BL Diatonic Harmony Laboratory (1,1) 
Application of materials in Music 1 1 1 A and 11 IB. Activity to 
include sightsinging, dictation and keyboard exercises. (2 hours 
activity) 


182 Piano Class for Music Majors (2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance instrument 
is not piano. (3 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non- 
music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

184 A Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary piano techniques for the non-music 
major. (2 hours activity) 

184B Piano Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 184A or consent of instructor. Continuation 
of 184A. 

185 A Guitar Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary classical guitar techniques for the 
non-music major. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

185B Guitar Class for Non-Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: Music 185 A or consent of the instructor. Elemen- 
tary classical guitar techniques for the non-music major. Con- 
tinuation of Music 185A. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours 
activity) 

193, 293, 393, 493 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with ap- 
proved instructor. Emphasis on technique and repertoire. Music 
majors must register for a minimum of one unit per semester. 
Performance majors approved by jury recommendation should 
register for two units per semester. Jury examination required. 
Instructional fee required. May be repeated for credit. 

196 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or higher grade-point average and/or consent 
of instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the course or pre- 
vious enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult 
“University Curricula” in this catalog for more complete course 
description. 

211 Chromatic Harmony (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 11 IB. Continuation of Music 111 A, B. The 
chromatic practice of the 19th century. Secondary dominants; 
ninth, eleventh and thirteenth chords; sequence, Neapolitan 
and augmented sixth chords. Co-enrollment in Music 21 1L is 
required for music majors and is recommended for others. 

21 1L Chromatic Harmony Laboratory (1) 

Application of materials in Music 211. Activity to include sight- 
singing, dictation and keyboard exercises. (2 hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

Literature of music in Western civilization. Open to minors and 
qualified students by consent of instructor. Students should be 
able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, design and 
style. Required of majors. (3 hours lecture) 


Music 191 


265A Jazz Improvisation 1(1) 

Prerequisite: Music 1 1 1 A,B, ability on a standard jazz instrument 
or consent of instructor. Application of scales and their relation- 
ship to chords, includes modes, jazz rhythmic phrasing, blues 
progressions, and cycle of dominant seventh chords. Basic jazz 
keyboard drills and ear training involved. 

265B Jazz Improvisation 11(1) 

Prerequisites: Music 265 A and 211, or consent of instructor. 
Continuation of modal patterns and jazz rhythms for improvisa- 
tion. Explores melodic construction in improvisation. Emphasis 
on playing II-V-I progressions in major and minor keys. Includes 
jazz keyboard drills and ear training. 

265C Jazz Improvisation III (1) 

Prerequisite: Jazz Improvisation I and II or consent of instructor. 
Continuation of Jazz Improvisational pedagogy and techniques 
with an emphasis on performance application. Includes form and 
stylistic analysis and ear training. 

281B,C,P,S,T,W,X Orchestral Instruments (1,1,1, 1,1, 1,1) 

Techniques and materials for teaching orchestral instruments. 
Required for music education emphasis. Instrumental majors re- 
quired to fulfill competency requirements for instruments listed 
in each course description except that of their major performance 
instrument. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee re- 
quired. (3 hours activity) 

28 IB Brass Instruments (1) 

Trumpet and French Horn. 

28 1C Brass Instruments (1) 

Trombone, Baritone and Tuba. 

28 IP Percussion Instruments (1) 

Snare dmm and mallet-played instruments with related work on 
other standard percussion instruments. 

28 IS String Instruments (1) 

Violin and Viola. 

28 IT String Instruments (1) 

Cello and String Bass. 

28 1W Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Flute, Clarinet and Saxophone. 

281X Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Oboe and Bassoon. 

282 A, B Piano Class for Music Majors (2,2) 

Keyboard skills for students whose major performance field is not 
piano. A — Prerequisite: Music 182 or placement by instructor. 
B — Prerequisite: Music 282 A or placement by instructor. Meets 
minimum piano proficiency requirements for degree. (3 hours 
activity) 

283 A, B Voice Class for Instrumentalists (1,1) 

A — Prerequisite: teaching credential candidate or consent of 
instructor. Vocal skills for students whose major performance 
field is not voice. Prepares music education students to work with 
young singers in group settings by understanding their own vocal 
problems and the solutions in a variety of vocal styles. B — 
Prerequisite: Music 283A. Continuation of Music 283A at more 
advanced level. Completion of Music 283 B satisfies voice profi- 
ciency requirement for music credential candidates. 


290 English Diction ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: Sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Stan- 
dard English for singers. Examples from American and British 
vocal literature explained through the use of the International 
Phonetic Alphabet. Individual performance of examples plus 
assigned repertoire. 

301 Techniques of Song Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 101 or consent of instructor. Melody writing 
and setting of text to music. Includes consideration of metric 
values of text, music and chord progressions. For non-music 
majors. 

302 History of Jazz (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or 101 or consent of instructor. Historical 
study of jazz music in America; chronological development and 
stylistic evolution with consideration of peripheral trends. Em- 
phasis on listening. For non-music majors. 

303 Ethnic Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or consent of instructor. Survey of music 
from Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, Oceania, the Caribbean 
and indigenous Indian music from North and South America. 
Emphasis on musical styles and forms, and religious and ritualis- 
tic functions of music in various cultural frameworks. 

304 Music of Mexico (3) 

Survey of the art, folk and traditional music of Mexico from pre- 
Cortesian aboriginal music to 20th-century style, including neo- 
Hispanic, folk (corrico, etc.), mestizo, mariachi, nationalistic, 
jazz and modem art music. Interrelationship between traditional 
(folk) and serious (art) music; effects of Mexico’s history on its 
music. 

305 Women in Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the 
contributions women have made as composers and performers as 
well as the historical limitations to which women musicians have 
been subject. Recitals by guest lecturers and presentation of a 
culminating study on selected topics by students. 

306 Business of Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 100 or consent of instructor. This course is 
designed as a comprehensive survey of the business aspects of 
songwriting, publishing, copyright, legal affairs, the record in- 
dustry, music in broadcast and film, and career planning and 
development. 

312A,B Commercial Arranging (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Harmonic practices in commercial mu- 
sic; stage band and jazz writing techniques. (May be repeated 
once for credit. ) 

314A Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 312B or consent of instructor. Three- and 
four-part voice accompaniment; planning and executing the 
multi-chorus small group arrangement. 


192 Music 


314B Special Projects in Commercial Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 314A or consent of instructor. Introduction 
to harmonic substitutions; planning and executing arrangements 
for larger groups of instruments. 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth-cen- 
tury counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering motet, 
canon, double counterpoint. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth- 
century counterpoint in two, three and four parts, covering in- 
vention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 

319A,B Form and Analysis (3,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 2 1 1 or consent of instructor. A — Analysis of 
structural elements of music such as motive phrase and period: 
binary, tenary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger musical forms in 
representative musical works. Required of all music majors. B — 
Continuation of A; larger musical works. 

320A,B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Music 211. Compositional practices of the 20th 
century; emphasis on written examples in the various styles, 
includes sightsinging, keyboard practice and dictation. A — 
Compositional techniques from 1890 to 1945. B — Comp- 
ositional techniques since 1945, to include the synthesis of 
sound. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

323 Orchestration (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 319A, 320 or consent of instructor. Writing 
and analysis of orchestral music. 

324 Scoring for the Band (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 323 or consent of instructor. Devices, tech- 
niques and skills required to produce complete transcriptions for 
the contemporary public school wind band. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 101 or equivalent or successful completion of 
proficiency test. The relationship of music to child growth and 
development for the child from 5 to 12. Survey of age-appropriate 
music materials. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or consent of instructor. Music in its 
relationship to general culture. A sociological approach; musical 
criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psychology and 
the political/religious/business aspects of the American musical 
scene. 

351 A History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 2 1 1 and 25 1 or consent of instructor. A study 
of the history and literature of music from early Greek beginnings 
through the Renaissance area. 


35 IB History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A. A study of the history and literature of 
music of the Baroque and Classic eras. Fulfills the course require- 
ment of the university upper division baccalaureate writing re- 
quirement for music majors. 

35 1C History and Literature of Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 35 IB. A study of the history and literature of 
music from the Romantic era to the present. 

352 Symphonic Music in Western and Eastern Cultures (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 100 or 101 or consent of instructor. Survey of 
symphonic music in Western and Eastern cultures from Baroque 
through Modern periods. 

353 Public-School Instrumental-Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 382 A or concurrent enrollment. The study of 
instrumental-music materials, repertoire, programming, and cur- 
riculum for public-school instrumental-music ensembles. Topics 
will include solo, chamber, and large-ensemble repertoire. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 383 A. Examination and analysis of choral 
repertoire suitable for junior and senior high choruses. 

355 Film Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 100 and an ability to read music or Music 
101. An historical survey of motion picture musical scores. Anal- 
ysis, listening and examination of motion picture scores. 

356 History of American Commercial Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 251, 312A, 319A and consent of instructor. 
A study of American commercial music in the 20th century: jazz, 
popular, rock, theatre, dance, film, and television; includes styl- 
istic, formal, and harmonic analysis of selected works. 

361A-W Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of standard and contemporary music lit- 
erature. Public concerts on campus and in the community each 
semester; participation is required. A concert tour may be includ- 
ed by some groups. (More than 3 hours major production) May be 
repeated for credit. 

361 A Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: audition or consent of instructor. Instructional fee 
required. 

36 IB University Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

36 1C Symphonic Band (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Instructional fee required. 

36 ID Opera Theatre (1) 

Roles and representative excerpts from standard and contempo- 
rary operas and the musical, dramatic and language techniques of 
the musical theatre. Performance of operatic excerpts and com- 
plete operas. Also open to non-vocal majors. 

36 IE University Singers (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced voice students or those accepted by 
audition. 


Music 193 


36 IF University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisite: advanced wind and percussion students accepted by 
audition. Instructional fee required. 

36 1W Women’s Choir (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Performance of choral 
literature. 

362B Varsity Band ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The Varsity Band provides 
music for Titan football and basketball games, and other related 
activities. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee required. 

362 D Percussion Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for the Percussion Ensemble. May be repeated for 
credit. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for large brass choir/ensemble. May be repeated for 
credit. Instructional fee required. (2 hours activity) 

362L Jazz Ensemble 1(1) 

Open by audition and consent of instructor. Numerous public 
performances on campus and in the community. Open to non- 
music majors. May be repeated for credit. 

362 M Horn Ensemble ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
music written for French Horn Ensemble with emphasis on the 
solution of various problems relating to multiple horn literature. 

362P Choral Laboratory (1) 

Open by audition or with consent of instructor. Performance of 
choral literature for small vocal ensembles using student conduc- 
tors. May be repeated for credit. 

362R Chamber Orchestra ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of 
representative chamber orchestra literature. Open to university 
students and qualified adults in the community. May be repeated 
for credit. 

362S Jazz Ensemble II (1) 

Prerequisite: Open by audition and consent of instructor. (For 
those who do not qualify by audition for 362L. ) Jazz and jazz-rock 
ensemble; public performance each semester. Open to non-music 
majors by audition. May be repeated for credit. 

362X Beginning Opera Techniques ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of voice faculty. Arias for the be- 
ginning opera student, and fundamentals of stage movement. 
May be repeated for credit. 


363B-X Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string or keyboard students. Ensem- 
bles will study, read and perform representative chamber litera- 
ture of all periods. May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee 
required (except in 363K and optional in 363J). (2 hours 
activity) 

363B Brass 
363G Guitar 
363J Jazz Combo 
363K Keyboard 
363S Strings 
363W Woodwind 
363X Saxophone 

363V Chamber Music Ensemble (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 36 IB, E, or W, and consent of instructor. 
Singers and student directors will study, read and perform repre- 
sentative choral chamber literature of all periods. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. (2 hours activity) 

365G Guitar Performance Workshop ( 1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Weekly workshop perfor- 
mances by students, faculty and guests. Recommended for guitar 
majors each semester. May be repeated for credit. 

3651 Instrumental Workshop (1) 

Application of instrumental technique to performance practices 
through lecture, demonstrations, master classes and ancillary 
recitals. Recommended for instrumental major each semester. 
May be repeated for credit. Instructional fee required. (1 hour 
activity and 1 hour TBA) 

365K Keyboard Workshop ( 1 ) 

Weekly workshop performances by students, faculty and guests. 
Recommended for keyboard major each semester. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. 

365V Vocal Workshop ( 1 ) 

Application of vocal technique to performance practices through 
lecture-demonstration, master classes and ancillary recitals. Rec- 
ommended for vocal major each semester. May be repeated for 
credit. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or organ or consent of in- 
structor. The harpsichord as an instrument, the application of 
baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudiments of 
continuo playing in ensemble with voices and instruments. (2 
hours activity) 

373 Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or consent of instructor. The 
organ as an instrument, the playing techniques, and repertoire. 
The differences between piano and organ techniques. (2 hours 
activity) 


1 94 Music 


380A,B,C Diction for Singers (1,1,1) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Proper 
singing diction; may not he considered a substitute for formal 
language study. Examples from standard vocal literature ex- 
plained through the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet. 
A — Italian. B — German. C — French. 

382A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281B,P,S,Wor consent of instruc- 
tor. A — Principles, techniques and methods of conducting 
orchestral and band groups. Required of all music education 
majors. Instructional fee required. (4 hours activity) B — Con- 
tinuation of 382A, including laboratory experience in conduct- 
ing instrumental groups, using standard instrumental literature. 
Instructional fee required. (4 hours activity) 

383A,B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of instructor. 
A — Principles, techniques and methods of conducting choral 
groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 hours activity) 
B — Continuation of 383A including laboratory work with class 
and vocal ensembles, using standard choral repertoire. (4 hours 
activity) 

385 Functional Skills for Keyboard Majors (2) 

Development of the ability to sight-read, harmonize, transpose 
and improvise. (4 hours activity) 

385G Guitar Fingerboard Skills (2) 

Prerequisite: upper-division guitar standing or consent of the 
instructor. Development of comprehensive understanding of the 
guitar fingerboard, with emphasis on scales, intervals, chord 
formation, harmonic progressions and sight-reading. 

386 Piano Accompanying ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. Piano accompaniments for instru- 
mentalists, vocalists and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, 
recitals and concerts required. May be repeated for credit. (2 
hours activity) 

395 Internship: Professional Experience (1-3) 

Fieldwork in music under supervision of resident faculty and 
professionals in the field. Requires minimum six hours fieldwork 
per week for each unit credit. May be repeated for credit to a 
maximum of six units. Open to all music students by consent of 
instructor. 

398 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 300- jury level in the principal performance area 
and consent of instructor. Corequisite: Enrollment in Music 
365K or V. Preparation and presentation of representative works 
in the principal performance area. In the semester of recital 
presentation, Music 398 will substitute for one unit of 393. In- 
structional fee required. 


41 1 Survey of Music Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Completion of all lower division theory require- 
ments, and at least senior standing or equivalent. An examina- 
tion of the theoretical basis of music from 1 500 to the present 
through analysis, readings, and discussion. Intended primarily for 
graduate and postbaccalaureate students. Fulfills graduate en- 
trance examination requirement in music theory. May not be 
applied to a graduate study plan. 

422 Composition (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 316, 319A and 320A or B or consent of 
instructor. Composition of smaller forms in various contempo- 
rary styles. 

424 Practicum: Electronic Music Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Music 320B, 471 level in applied music composi- 
tion and consent of instructor. Individual and group instruction 
in electronic music composition. May be repeated for credit. (3 
hours laboratory) 

433 Music in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior standing. Songs, creative activities, 
and materials for teaching music in early childhood education. 
Teaching-learning strategies. Instructional fee required. 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 
20th-century materials and techniques, of recordings for creative 
movement to music, and of choral materials and techniques 
appropriate for the elementary school choir. 

436 Orff Techniques for Children ( 1 ) 

Methods and techniques influenced by Carl Orff in teaching 
music for children. Rhythmic speech, song and movement, (one 
hour activity) 

444 Survey of Marching Bands (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques, materials, ad- 
ministration for marching band. Charting for field shows and 
parade activities. 

450 History of Musical Style (3) 

Prerequisites: Music 351A,B,C, or equivalent, or consent of 
instructor. Intensive review of the principal musical styles in 
Western music. Intended primarily for graduate and postbacca- 
laureate students. Fulfills graduate entrance examination require- 
ment in music history. May not be applied to a graduate study 
plan. 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

A — Prerequisites: Music 383 A or equivalent and 351A,B. Cho- 
ral literature from Medieval, Renaissance and Baroque eras ana- 
lyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate performance prac- 
tices. B — Prerequisites: Music 383 A or equivalent and 35 1C. 
Continuation of A with examples from the Classic, Romantic 
and Contemporary eras. 


Music 195 


454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 
Prerequisites: Music 351A.B and junior level piano standing, or 
consent of instructor. Performance of representative styles and 
schools of piano literature; solo and ensemble repertoire. A — 
contrapuntal forms, sonatas and variations. B — Character 
pieces, fantasies, suites and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of instruc- 
tor. The class will be grouped into ensembles for demonstration 
purposes. The stylistic differences required in performing works 
of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A,B,C or consent of instructor. All per- 
iods and nationalities, including stylistic and historical consider- 
ations. 

45 7 A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 319A, 380B or consent of instructor. Study 
and performance of German Lieder with representative examples 
of periods and styles. 

45 7B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 380C or consent of instructor. Study and 
performance of French art songs with representative examples of 
periods and styles. 

458 Church Music; History, Literature and Methods (2) 

Prerequisites: Music 35 1 A, B or consent of instructor. A survey of 
the role of music in the worship traditions of the Christian 
Church; methods for implementation and maintenance of a suc- 
cessful church music program. 

459A Guitar History and Literature (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 251, 21 1 or equivalent. Upper-division guitar 
standing or consent of the instructor. Historical survey of the 
literature for classical guitar. Important works for lute, vihuela 
and Baroque guitar, plus the compositions and transcriptions for 
modern guitar. 

459B Guitar Pedagogy (2) 

Prerequisite: Music 251, 21 1 or equivalent. Upper-division guitar 
standing or consent of the instructor. Fundamentals of teaching 
and coaching classical guitar. Materials and methods for individ- 
ual and group instruction. 

463 Seminar in Black Music (3) 

(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 463) 

466 Pedagogy Observation and Internship ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: junior level piano or consent of instructor. Co- 
enrollment in 467A,B or C required. Observation of and super- 
vised internship in piano teaching. Teaching techniques, devel- 
opment of lesson plans, and materials will be included. 


467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: junior piano or consent of instructor. A — Materials 
and methods for beginning and elementary students. Coenroll- 
ment in Music 466 recommended. B — Materials and methods of 
intermediate and early advanced students. Coenrollment in Mu- 
sic 466 recommended. C — Materials and methods for class 
piano. Coenrollment in Music 466 recommended. 

468 A, B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A — Fun- 
damentals of vocal pedagogy for studio and public school teach- 
ing; physiology and acoustics as they apply to singing. B — 
Application of the fundamentals discussed in A. Seminar discus- 
sions and actual studio teaching. The diagnosis and cure of spe- 
cific vocal problems. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or consent of 
instructor and simultaneous enrollment in the course or previous 
enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. Consult “Stu- 
dent-to-Student Tutorials” in this catalog for more complete 
course description. 

497 Senior Project ( 1 ) 

Independent investigation of an area of special interest in music 
culminating in a public performance, lecture, lecture-recital or 
other suitable demonstration. Instructional fee required. 

498 Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 400-jury level in the principal performance area 
(400-jury level in composition for composition majors) and con- 
sent of instructor. Corequisite: Coenrollment in Music 3651, K or 
V. Preparation and presentation of representative works in the 
principal performance area. In the semester of recital presenta- 
tion, Music 498 will substitute for one unit of Music 493. Instruc- 
tional fee required. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

A special topic in music selected in consultation with and super- 
vised by the instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (3) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Basic bibliography, litera- 
ture, and research techniques and materials useful in graduate 
music study. 

524 Seminar in Music Theory (3) 

Theoretical subjects (form/style analysis, history of music theory, 
etc.) to be chosen by instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The forms, styles, and charac- 
teristics of music between 1400 and 1600. Analysis of works by 
representative composers and theoretical writers. 


196 Music 


553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351A,B or consent of instructor. Musical 
forms, styles, and performance practices of the baroque period. 
Analysis of representative works. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (3) 

Prerequisite: Music 351 A, B or consent of instructor. The history 
and literature of music from approximately 1730 to 1826. Analy- 
sis of representative works. 


Music Education Courses 

295 Clinical Practice in Instrumental/Choral Techniques ( 1 ) 
(Formerly 299) 

Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental/choral 
techniques classes, as in public and private schools. Coenrol 1- 
ment in Music 383B or 382B recommended. (3 hours weekly to 
be arranged in nearby school) 

394 A Practicum in School Materials and Techniques (2) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295. For music education majors. 
Experience in sequential pedagogy, classroom delivery skills, and 
concurrent development of management skills, aural discrimina- 
tion skills, and aural and visual diagnostic skills. 

394B Practicum in Skills for Teaching Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 394A. Corequisite: Music Educa- 
tion 395A or 395B. For music education majors. Observation 
and application of musical concepts and materials, sequential 
pedagogy, nonverbal teaching strategies, and classroom delivery 
and management skills. Continued development of aural and 
visual diagnostic skills and aural discrimination skills. 

395 A Clinical Practice in Instrumental Conducting ( 1 ) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295. Clinical practice and field 
applications of concepts, materials and procedures as applied to 
field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment 
in Music Education 394. 


395B Clinical Practice in Choral Conducting (1) 

Prerequisite: Music Education 295. Clinical practice and field 
applications of concepts, materials and procedures as applied to 
field situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment 
in Music Education 394. 

441 Teaching General Music in Secondary Schools (2) 
Prerequisite: admission to teacher education, senior standing or 
consent of instructor. Objectives, methods and materials for 
teaching general music or allied art-humanities classes in secon- 
dary schools, including their relationship to specialized instru- 
mental and choral programs. Practical problems and field work 
are included. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public 
Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, principles 
of public education, grades K- 12, with emphasis on music. Phi- 
losophy, methods, materials and procedures for organizing and 
teaching music in elementary and secondary schools. Must take 
concurrently with Secondary Education 440F and 440S. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 442. For can- 
didates who have declared for the single subject credential in 
music. See description and prerequisite under Department of 
Secondary Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

For candidates who have declared for the single subject credential 
in music. See description and prerequisite under Department of 
Secondary Education. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

Must be taken concurrently with Music Education 4491. For 
candidates who have declared for the single subject credential in 
music. See description and prerequisites under Department of 
Secondary Education. 

501 Contemporary Music Education (3) 

Recent innovations and overview of the history, philosophy and 
methodology of the art of teaching music. Trends and applica- 
tions of educational theory in relation to the teaching of music. 
Required for M.A. in Music Education. 


Music 197 


Department of Theatre 
and Dance 

Department Chair: Joseph Arnold 
Department Office: Performing Arts 157 
Production Office: Performing Arts 126 

Programs Offered 
Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts 

Dance 

History and Theory 
Production/Performance 
Teaching 

Master of Arts in Theatre Arts 

Master of Fine Arts in Theatre Arts 

Acting 
Directing 

Technical Theatre and Design 

Secondary Teaching Credential 

Faculty 

Barbara Arms, Joseph Arnold, Don Finn, John Fisher, Susan 
Hallman, Dean Hess, Lawrence Jasper, Robin Johnson, 

Michael Kane, Gretchen Kanne, Gladys Kares, Alvin Keller, 

Arthur Lessac (Distinguished Visiting Professor), Araminta 
Little, Juan Lopez, Alex MacKenzie, Leonard Meenach, 

William Meyer, Sallie Mitchell, S. Todd Muffatti, Jerry 
Pickering, Jose Quintero (Distinguished Visiting Professor), 

Ron Wood, James Young, Allen Zeltzer, Abel Zeballos 

INTRODUCTION 

The Department of Theatre and Dance undergraduate and gradu- 
ate programs include the fields of acting, dance, directing, musi- 
cal theatre, oral interpretation, playwriting, technical produc- 
tion and design, television, theatre for young audiences, theatre 
history and theory. Specifically, the course work and theatrical 
production activities are arranged to provide opportunities for 
students (1) to develop an appreciation for theatre arts; (2) to 
become aware, as audience or participants, of the shaping force of 
theatre arts in society; (3) to improve the knowledge and skills 
necessary for work in the theatrical arts as a profession; (4) to 
pursue graduate studies; and (5) to prepare for teaching theatre. 



198 Theatre and Dance 


Public performance is at the center of the department’s programs. 
Therefore, continuing stage, dance and television production 
activities are essential for all students at California State Univer- 
sity, Fullerton, including the undergraduate and graduate theo- 
retical student as well as the undergraduate pre-professional and 
graduate conservatory student. In conjunction with on-campus 
dance productions the Department of Theatre and Dance offers 
dancers and choreographers additional experience in its adjunct 
company: Dance Repertory Theatre. The company is made up of 
carefully selected California State University, Fullerton gradu- 
ates and advanced students, chosen on the basis of demonstrated 
excellence in their work at the University. Dance Repertory 
Theatre presents lecture/ demonstrations and performs locally, as 
well as scheduled tours throughout the year. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

The concentration in History and Theory is for those who wish 
to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish to pursue 
graduate degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre history and 
theory. It is strongly recommended that students electing this 
plan support the major with approved electives from art, music, 
foreign languages, literature, philosophy or speech. 

The concentration in Production/Performance is designed to de- 
velop competency for pursuing the theatrical arts as a profession, 
or for pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an emphasis in an 
area of concentration other than history of the theatre. Areas of 
emphasis are: acting, directing, musical theatre, oral interpreta- 
tion, playwriting, technical design and television. 


Theatre 200, or its equivalent, is a prerequisite for all upper'division 
theatre courses with the exception of Theatre 478 A, B. Transfer stu- 
dents may take Theatre 200 concurrently with their first semester of 
upper-division courses. Prior to entering their junior year, or upon 
transferring to Cal State Fullerton, all students electing an Acting 
emphasis under the Production/Performance concentration or the 
concentration in Dance will be evaluated and advised as to poten- 
tial for advancement in the emphasis or concentration. 

Theatre History and Theory Concentration 
Lower Division (15 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)' 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Upper Division (42 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 

Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (15) 

Theatre 477A,B Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 
Electives in Theatre (3) 


The concentration in Dance is designed to develop competency 
for pursuing dance as a profession or for pursuing a graduate 
degree in dance. 

The concentration in Teaching meets the requirements of the 
teaching credential with specialization in secondary teaching. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, stu- 
dents must meet the other university requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Students pursuing a concentration in Teaching 
must meet all specific requirements for the desired teaching cre- 
dential. See description of secondary school teaching credential 
program under Department of Secondary Education. In addition, 
students pursuing the teaching concentration should see the de- 
partment’s secondary education adviser regarding course se- 
quence required for the single subject waiver. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in theatre, 
students must have a C or better in all theatre courses required for 
the degree. In addition to course requirements, all theatre and 
dance majors will enroll for two units of Theatre 478B each 
semester of residency up to a maximum of eight semesters. 

Theatre 477B (Dance 325 for dance concentration) with a grade 
of C or better fulfills the upper-division writing requirement. 


Production/Performance Concentration 
Acting Emphasis 

Lower Division (24 units required) 


Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 

Six units selected from: 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 


Upper Division (36 units required) 


Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 363A.B Intermediate Acting (6) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 
Theatre 463 A, B Advanced Acting (6) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (12) 
Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 482 Acting for Television (3) 


Theatre and Dance 199 


Directing Emphasis 

Lower Division (21 units required) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A.B Beginning Stagecraft/Drafting (6) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to TV Production (3) 
Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Upper Division (38 units required) 

Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 450 Theatre Management (3) 

Theatre 470A.B Advanced Directing (6) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, and E World Theatre (15) 
Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 


All theatre majors with an emphasis in directing must assistant stage 
manage a mains tage production either prior to or concurrently with 
Theatre 470A, Advanced Directing, and must stage manage a main - 
stage productkm prior to graduation. 


Musical Theatre Emphasis 

Lower Division (25 units required) 


Theatre 141A.B Voice/Movement for Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
Dance 142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Dance 212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Music 11 1A Diatonic Harmony (2) 

Music 184A Piano Class (1) or equivalent 


Upper Division (33 units required) 

Theatre 363A,B Intermediate Acting (3,3) 
Theatre 436A.B Musical Theatre Workshop (6) 
Theatre 475 World Theatre (A,B,C, or D) (9) 
Theatre 475E World Theatre (3) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Dance 332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Dance 336 Dance for Musical Theatre (3) 


All theatre majors with an emphasis in Musical Theatre must prove 
competency in piano. 

Oral Interpretation Emphasis 

Lower Division (21 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for the Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 


Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Upper Division (36 units required) 

Theatre 310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 
Theatre 370A.B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 410A,B,C Oral Interpretation of Prose, Poetry 
and Drama (9) 

Theatre 41 1 Oral Interpretation of Children’s 
Literature (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (12) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 

Playwriting Emphasis 

Lower Division (18 units required) 

Theatre 1 10 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) or 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

Upper Division (41 units required) 

Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 364 Seminar in Playwriting (3,3) 

Theatre 365 Television Writing (3) 

Theatre 370A.B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (12) 
Theatre 477 A, B Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 

Technical Production/Design Emphasis 

Lower Division (21 units required) 

Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 

Theatre 276A.B Beginning Stagecraft/Drafting (6) 
Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Upper Division (35 units required) 

Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 

Theatre 377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Theatre 379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 


200 Theatre and Dance 


Theatre 388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (9) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Theatre 488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 

Television Emphasis 

Lower Division (18 units required) 

Theatre 110 Oral Communication of Literature (3)* 
Theatre 184 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting — Majors (3) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

Upper Division (39 units required) 


Dance 424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) 
Dance 425 Dance Repertory (3) 

Dance 497 Production and Performance Projects in 
Theatre (1) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Teaching Concentration (Single Subject) 

Lower Division (27 units required) 

Theatre 141A,B Voice/Movement for the Stage (6) 
Theatre 200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 263A.B Beginning Acting — Majors (6) 
Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 


Theatre 365 Television Writing (3) 

Theatre 370A.B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 384 Television Production and Direction (3) 
Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 475A,B,C,D, or E World Theatre (6) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 
Theatre 480 Television/Film Aesthetics and 
Criticism (3) 

Theatre 489 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 
and 6 units electives selected from: 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Theatre 486 Advanced Lighting (3) 


Dance Concentration 

Lower Division (22 units required). 


Dance 112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 122A,B Beginning Modern Dance (4) 
Dance 126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Dance 212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 
Dance 222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 
Dance 226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 


Upper Division (37 units required) 


Dance 

Dance 

Dance 

Dance 

Dance 

Dance 

Dance 


312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

323 A, B Dance Composition (6) 

324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) 

325 Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 
372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

422 Advanced Modem Dance (3) 

423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 


Upper Division (29 units required) 

Theatre 350 Stage Management (2) 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theatre 402B Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 
Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 475A,D,E World Theatre (9) 

Theatre 477B Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
or English 301 Advanced College Writing (3) 

Theatre Education majors are required to complete the Waiver 
Program in English. 

‘Meets General Education requirement in oral communication for theatre and 
dance majors. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

The Master of Arts in Theatre Arts provides a program of coordh 
nated graduate studies built on undergraduate preparation; in' 
centive for intellectual growth reflected in teaching and profes- 
sional recognition; and a sound basis for continued graduate study 
in theatre. The student is expected to demonstrate a high degree 
of intellectual and creative competence. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

University requirements include a baccalaureate from an accre- 
dited institution and a grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the 
last 60 semester units attempted (see section of this catalog on 
admission of graduates for complete statement and procedures). 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student who meets the admission requirements and the follow' 
ing requirements may be granted classified graduate standing 
upon the development of an approved study plan: an appropriate 
undergraduate major in theatre, with a grade-point average of 3.0 
in all upper-division work in the major, or at least 24 units of 


Theatre and Music 201 


appropriate upper-division work in theatre, with a GPA of 3.0; 
satisfactory completion of the Graduate Writing Requirement; 
and, an oral interview. Upon recommendation of the student’s 
graduate committee, additional prerequisites may be required 
prior to classification and the approval of the area of emphasis. 

Study Plan 

The study plan will include at least 30 units of adviser- approved 
graduate studies, 15 units of which must be 500-level courses. 
Study plan course work must be completed with an overall mini- 
mum 3.0 grade-point 

Each program will consist of 24 units in theatre including a 
project or thesis. All students must also pass oral and written 
examinations. Written comprehensive examinations will be giv- 
en during the seventh and eighth weeks of the spring semester. 
Students must apply to the graduate coordinator prior to the 
beginning of the semester in which they intend to take the 
written examination. Students will be permitted to take the 
written examination twice. 

Required Courses (18 units) 

Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Studies (3) 
Theatre 501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre 
Theory (3) 

Theatre 573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 

Theatre 575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Theatre 583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Electives (9 units) 

As part of their electives, students may select a maximum of 
six units of adviser-approved supporting courses in related 
fields from courses outside the Department of Theatre and 
Dance. 

Thesis/Project (3 units) 

Theatre 597 Project (3) or 
Theatre 598 Thesis (3) 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre and 
Dance. 

MASTER OF FINE ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 
(TECHNICAL THEATRE/DESIGN, ACTING 
AND DIRECTING) 

This degree is for students who wish professionally oriented edu- 
cation and training in design/technical theatre, acting, and di- 
recting. It is the objective of the department to educate and train 
highly skilled, motivated individuals for careers in professional 
theatre (including television and film) or for careers as artist- 
teachers in college or university theatre. Only those who demon- 


strate an exceptional talent, a high degree of motivation, and a 
deep commitment to their education and training will be admit- 
ted into the program. The highest academic and creative stan- 
dards will be demanded throughout the program. A positive 
attitude and a rigid sense of theatre discipline are essential for 
success in the program. 

The degree requires 60 units of approved course work. Average 
length of time to complete the program is three years. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: Classified 

Prerequisites for admission to the program and granting of classi- 
fied standing are: 

1. B.A., B.F.A. orM.A. from an accredited college or university 
with a major in theatre; or a degree in a related field and 
extensive work in technical theatre, acting, or directing. 

2. Completion of an oral interview and satisfactory review of the 
student’s portfolio or audition. 

3. Acceptance by the faculty. 

4. Minimum GPA of 3.0 in all upper-division undergraduate 
work in theatre. A minimum GPA of 2.75 for the last half of 
the undergraduate program is also required. 

5. Completion of any additional prerequisites which may be 
required by the student’s individual committee prior to classi- 
fication. 

6. Selection of a graduate adviser and committee. Total commit- 
tee membership should be three or four faculty members, 
including the adviser. 

7. Submission of a formal M.F. A. study program approved by the 
individual committee, the department graduate adviser and 
the dean of graduate studies. 

8. Must meet the Graduate Writing Requirement. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Students w r ho do not meet certain prerequisites may be consid- 
ered for admission in conditionally classified graduate standing. 
Consult the graduate program adviser. 

M.F.A. Project 

The M.F.A. program shall be culminated by two creative projects 
which, by their nature, are of sufficient challenge and complexity 
to be accepted as worthy completion of the period of study. These 
projects, which shall be comparable to a professional undertak- 
ing, are determined by the individual committee and shall be 
design, acting or directing assignments for major productions. 


202 Theatre and Dance 


Each project shall he reviewed by the individual committee with- 
in two weeks after completion. If accepted, the student shall 
Submit a project book within a specified time. Before the degree is 
granted, each student will pass an oral examination over the 


project book. 

Study Plan — Acting 

Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 39 


Theatre 443 
Theatre 47 7 A 
Theatre 500 
Theatre 563 
Theatre 575 
Theatre 583 


Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 
Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Intro to Graduate Studies (3) 

Acting Studio (24) 

Seminar in Theatre History (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 


Take one of the following: 3 

Theatre 436A Musical Theatre Workshop (3) 

Theatre 436B Musical Theatre Workshop (3) 

Theatre 482 Acting for Film and Television (3) 

Theatre 483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 


Take dance elective (3) 3 

Take 9 units adviser-approved electives * 9 

Complete two creative projects: 

Theatre 597 Project (6) 6 

Total 60 


Study Plan — Directing 

Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 48 


Theatre 470A Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 470B Advanced Directing (3) 

Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Tech (3) 

Theatre 484 Television Dramatic Tech (3) 

Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Studies (3) 
Theatre 563 Acting Studio (6) 

Theatre 570A,B Styles of Directing (12) 

Theatre 573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 
Theatre 575 Seminar: Theatre History (3) 

Theatre 597 Graduate Project (6) 

Theatre 599 Independent Research (3) 

Take 12 units adviser-approved electives (includes 6 units 


technical coursework) 12 

Total 60 


Study Plan — Technical Theatre/Design 

Students should concentrate their activities in two of the follow- 
ing four technical theatre areas during their two year course of 
study: scene design, costume design-makeup, lighting-sound, 
and technical production. 


Course Requirements * Units 

Take all of the following: 9 


Theatre 477A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 
Theatre 500 Introduction to Graduate Study (3) 
Theatre 575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 


Take nine units from the following: 


9 


Theatre 566 
Theatre 577 
Theatre 578 
Theatre 586 


Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Lighting (3) 


Take the following four times: 


24 


Theatre 588 Design and Tech Theatre (6) 


Choose 12 adviser-approved units from technical courses in 
theatre, art or engineering 12 

Complete a creative project in two of the four technical 
areas: Theatre 597 Project (3) . 6 

Total 60 


‘Based on a student’s previous undergraduate or professional experience, substitu- 
tions or revisions in the study plan might be appropriate. 


Dance Courses 

101 Introduction to Dance (3) 

Historical and contemporary dance forms. Experiences in various 
dance forms such as ballet, modern, jazz, folk, Afro, mime. 
Recommended for non-majors . 

112 Beginning Classical Ballet (2) 

The fundamental structure and technique of classical ballet. May 
be repeated once for credit. (4 hours activity) 

122A,B Beginning Modem Dance (2,2) 

Prerequisites: A is prerequisite to B. A — Exploration and ma- 
nipulation of the instrument and materials of dance; develop- 
ment of aesthetic judgment. (4 hours activity) B — Expansion of 
Avia more complex technique and composition studies; develop- 
ment of performance quality. May be repeated once for credit. 
(4 hours activity) 


Theatre and Dance 203 


126 Dance Improvisation (2) 

Theory and practice of improvisation in movement. Practical use 
of improvisation in expressing imagery, developing choreograph- 
ic concepts, and enhancing performance. (4 hours activity) 

132 Beginning Jazz Dance (2) 

Modern jazz dance techniques and basic jazz choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

142 Beginning Tap Dance (2) 

Structure and technique of tap dance and tap choreography. 
(4 hours activity) 

212 Intermediate Classical Ballet (2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 1 12 and audition. Intermediate level tech- 
nique of classical ballet. May he repeated once for credit. (4 hours 
activity) 

222 Intermediate Modern Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 122 and audition. Intermediate modern 
dance and movement vocabulary in terms of composition and 
communication. May he repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

226 Rhythmic Analysis (3) 

Musical form and structure; musically notating dance rhythms 
and percussion accompaniment. 

232 Intermediate Jazz Dance (2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 132 and consent of instructor. Intermediate 
level skills in jazz technique and choreography. (4 hours activity) 

242 Intermediate Tap Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 142 or consent of instructor. Intermediate 
skills in tap technique and choreography. (4 hours activity) 

301 Dance and Cultural Diversity (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 or consent of instructor. Impact of var- 
ious dance forms, from primitive time to modem, on diverse 
cultures. Contributions ot immigrants, minorities and women to 
dance as a personal, social and cultural expression. 

312 Advanced Classical Ballet (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212 and audition. Stylization and perfor- 
mance of classical ballet. May be repeated once for credit. 
(6 hours activity) 

323A,B Dance Composition (3,3) 

A — Prerequisites: Dance 122, 126, or equivalents. Study of 
basic elements and forms of dance composition. B — Prerequi- 
site: Dance 323A or consent of instructor. Problem solving stud- 
ies in space, time, and energy, using choreographic devices 
in solo and group situations. Final project required. (6 hours 
activity) 


324 Forces and Figures in Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A history of dance from 
primitive times to the present. 

325 Dance Theory and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101, 122A or consent of instructor. Theory 
and criticism of dance. Comparison and relationship of dance 
principles and criticism among major dance genres, in addition to 
other art forms. Fulfills the course requirement for the university 
upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement for dance 
majors. 

332 Advanced Jazz Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 232 and consent of instructor. Advanced 
jazz techniques and choreography through grade three of profes- 
sional jazz dance. The relation of jazz to other forms of dance. 
(6 hours activity) 

336 Dance for Musical Theatre (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 132, and audition, or consent of in- 
structor. Dance utilized in musical theatre. Ensemble and indi- 
vidual approaches to the style. (6 hours activity) 

372 Dance Kinesiology (3) 

Structural aspects of the human body and factors that affect 
movement in dance. 

412 Classical Pointe (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 312 and consent of instructor. Techniques 
for performance of classical pointe. May be repeated once for 
credit. (6 hours activity) 

422 Advanced Modem Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 222 and audition. Advanced level skills in 
modem dance. Emphasis on individual techniques. May be re- 
peated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

423 Advanced Dance Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 323 A, B or equivalent. Elements and forms 
in dance composition. The choreographing of dances of concert 
quality. (6 hours activity) 

424 Fundamentals of Dance Instruction (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 112, 222, 226, 323A, 372, and consent of 
instructor. Philosophies, techniques and methods for developing 
progressions in dance instruction. 

425 Dance Repertory and Performance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 212. Learning and rehearsing choreography 
of established and/or new’ dance works with performance intent. 
May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

471 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Methods and materials for 
teaching creative dance to children. (6 hours activity) 


204 Theatre and Dance 


497 Production and Performance Projects in Dance (1*3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart - 
ment office prior to registration. Projects which culminate in pro- 
duction or performance. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart - 
ment office prior to registration. Undergraduate research projects. 
May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre Courses 

100 Introduction to the Theatre (3) 

For the general student leading to an appreciation and under- 
standing of the theatre as an entertainment medium and as an art 
form. Recommended for non-majors. 

110 Oral Communication of Literature (3) 

The analysis and performance of literary works through the medi- 
um of oral interpretation. An emphasis upon understanding the 
content of communication in literature as well as the form. An 
exploration of the techniques involved in the discovery, critical 
evaluation and performance of various literary speakers. Meets 
the General Education requirement in Oral Communication for 
Theatre/Dance majors. 

141A,B Voice/Movement for Stage (3,3) 

(Formerly 241, 251, 341) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 141 is prerequisite to 141 B. Intensive 
training in the integral use of the voice and body for the actor; 
developing skills for vocal and physical relaxation, flexibility, 
and strength. May be repeated once for credit. 

163 Acting for Non-Majors (3) 

The form and content of acting: improvisation, action, moti- 
vation, and behavior. Recommended for non'mqjors. (6 hours 
activity) 

180 Great Moments in Radio and TV (3) 

Presentation and analysis of radio and television programs from 
1926 to the present, including guest artists from the radio and 
television industry. 

184 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on our 
society. Broadcasting practices, audiences, production and 
programming. 

200 Art of the Theatre (3) 

Theatre as an art form, involving the interrelated processes of 
playwriting, directing, acting, design and theatre management. 
Study of plays, films and television with emphasis on dramatic 
analysis and cultural significance. Required of all theatre majors. 


263 A, B Beginning Acting — Majors (3,3) 

Prerequisite for 263 B: Theatre 200, 141 A,B and 263A. Improvi- 
sations, exercises, and techniques of acting for the stage. Motiva- 
tion and behavior in characterization. (6 hours activity) 

276A,B Beginning Stagecraft/Drafting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 2 76 A is prerequisite to 276B. A — Planning and 
construction of stage and television scenery. Use of tools and 
stage equipment. B — Drafting and reading of technical draw- 
ings. Work in the scene shop for department productions is required for 
A and B. May be repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Costuming theatrical and television productions. Construction 
techniques, organization and duties of the costume crew. (6 hours 
activity) 

284 Introduction to Television Production (3) 

The fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (3) 

Makeup for stage and television. Individual skill in character 
analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair, makeup, and se- 
lection and use of makeup equipment. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Scene design, including script analysis, formation of visual con- 
cepts, floor plan development and model building for stage and 
television. (6 hours activity) 

310 Oral Interpretation of Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing; Theatre 1 10 or consent of 
instructor. Development of techniques for oral interpretation of 
Shakespeare with special emphasis on the problems of verse. 

315 Chicano/Latino Theatre (3) 

(Same as Chicano Studies 315) 

350 Stage Management (2) 

Corerequisite: Theatre 370A. Backstage management, including 
interrelationships of production personnel for stage and television. 

363A,B Intermediate Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 200, 141 A,B, 263 A, B and audition. 
Characterization; roles, special problems, and application of act- 
ing techniques through exercises and two-character scenes from 
the contemporary theatre. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Play writing (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of interest in creative writing and consent 
of instructor. Study of superior models, development of style, and 
group criticism and evaluation of independent work, as it relates 
to playwriting. May be repeated for credit. 


Theatre and Dance 205 


365 Television Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101. The writing of scripts and other forms 
of continuity for television. May be repeated for credit. 

370A.B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263A, or consent of instructor. 370A is 
prerequisite to B. Prerehearsal problems and procedures, struc- 
tural analysis of plays, composition, picturization, pantomimic 
dramatization, movement and rhythm on stage and in television. 
Practice in directing scenes. (6 hours activity) 

377 Stage Costuming (3) 

Fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods of 
research; interpretation and communication of historical dress 
for theatrical statement. 

379 Rendering for the Theatre (3) 

Scenic and costume sketching and rendering for communication 
between production director and designers. Full scale costume 
and scenic painting required. Theoretical and actual production 
idea presentation and execution. (6 hours activity) 

381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 1 10. Control room operation, including prac- 
tice in microphone and camera techniques. (6 hours activity) 

384 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 284. Theory and practice in the production 
of television programs and announcements: the planning, organiz- 
ing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and editing of 
television programs and announcements. (6 hours activity) 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Problems in makeup including special 
techniques and materials: prosthetics, hairpieces, and masks for 
stage and television productions. (6 hours activity) 

386 Beginning Lighting (3) 

Theories of lighting for stage and television productions. (6 hours 
activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Practice necessary to integrate live and recorded sound into per- 
forming arts productions. Recording, reproduction and studio 
techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Historical Styles for Scene Design (3) 

Visual survey through lecture and slides of architecture, interior 
design and furniture from ancient to modern times. Provides 
necessary basis for advanced design course. 

402 A, B Dramatic Activities for Children (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Upper division standing. Creative dramatics as a 
tool for buiding and developing creative and socialized processes 
in children. A — Sense memory, movement/mime, dialogue, 
characterization, dramatization. B — Teaching techniques in- 
cluding concentration, imagination, dramatization, and impro- 
visation for adolescents. (6 hours activity') 


403 A, B Theatre for Young Audiences (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 403A prerequisite for 403B or consent of instructor. 
Theatrical production for an audience of children. A — Philos- 
ophy, theory and practice; B — Application of production prin- 
ciples. (6 hours activity) 

410A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and performance 
in the oral interpretation of prose literature. 

41 OB Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and performance 
in the oral interpretation of poetry. 

4 10C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Criticism and performance 
in the oral interpretation of drama. 

41 1 Oral Interpretation of Children’s Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Oral presentation of chil- 
dren’s literature in classroom, recreation and home situations 
including individual and group performance of fiction, non- 
fiction, fantasy and poetry. 

436A,B Musical Theatre Workshop (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363B, Dance 336, and audition. Theatre 
4 36 A prerequisite to B. Roles and excerpts from musical theatre: 
the musical, dramatic, language and dance techniques. Scenes 
and musical numbers in workshop. A — Large group and solo 
work. B — Small group and audition material preparation. 
(6 hours activity) 

443 Audition and Rehearsal Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363A.B. Auditioning and rehearsal pro- 
cesses for professional work in theatre, television and film. In- 
cludes techniques for selecting material and performance prep- 
aration. (6 hours activity') 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Oranizational principles of ffont-of-house and box office oper- 
ation. Participation in School of the Arts public presentations. 
(3 hours lecture, 6 hours activity) 

463 A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 310, Theatre 363A,B and audition. His- 
torical theories and techniques of styles of acting. A — Greek 
through renaissance periods. B — The neoclassic periods to 
contemporary’ styles. (6 hours activity) 

470A,B Advanced Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 288, 350, and 370A,B, or consent of in- 
structor. Readings in theory, analysis of scripts and practice in 
directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. A — 
Each student directs a one-act play. B — Each student directs two 
one-act plays or equivalent. (6 hours activity) 


206 Theatre and Dance 


475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (3,3,33,3) 

Prerequisite: upper-division standing. The historical and dramat- 
ic evolution of world theatre. A — Ancient Greece and Rome, 
Middle Ages; Italian renaissance; B — England from 1 558-1790; 
16th- and 17th-century Spain and France; C — 18th- and 19th- 
century Europe and Russia; 19th-century England; D — 18th- 
and 19th-century America; the Orient; the modern world; E — 
Historical background and contemporary view of the musical 
theatre. 

477A Seminar in Critical Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 200. Major critical theories in theatre. 

477B Seminar in Writing Critical Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 200. Practical criticism as applied to local 
dramatic productions. Fulfills the university upper-division bac- 
calaureate writing requirement for theatre arts majors. 

478A,B Production and Performance (2,2) 

A — Performing in stage or television productions. B — Techni- 
cal crew work on stage or television performances. One section of 
478B per semester required of all theatre majors as well as non- 
majors cast in theatre department productions. (More than 6 
hours activity) 

480 Television/Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 or consent of instructor. The nature of 
film and television; aesthetic and theoretical and critical bases for 
film and television evaluation and understanding. 

482 Acting for Television (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 363 A, B. The adaptation of stage tech- 
niques for the camera; audition, rehearsal, and final per- 
formance, utilizing videotape and studio equipment. (6 hours 
activity) 

483 Advanced Acting Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463 A, B and audition. Extensive scene 
study, based on particular needs and problem areas of the ad- 
vanced acting student. (6 hours activity) 

484 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 384 and consent of instructor. Techniques 
of production for the director, actor and designer in televised 
drama. (6 hours activity) 

486 Advanced Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. Design and 
technology of lighting for the stage and television. (6 hours 
activity) May be repeated for credit. 

487 Advanced Audio Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 387 or consent of instructor, advanced 
problems in the design and technology of live and recorded sound 
used in the performing arts. (6 hours activity) 


488 Advanced Design and Technology (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B, 277, 288 and consent of instruc- 
tor. Advanced design, coordination of scenery and/or costume 
design projects for various types of theatres and television. May 
be repeated for credit. 

489 Cable Television Production Workshop (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of television production and consent of 
instructor. Practical experience in the creation of full-length 
television dramatic productions for cable broadcasting. May be 
repeated for credit. (6 hours activity) 

495 Theatre Internship (3) 

Consent of appropriate faculty supervisor. Supervised work expe- 
rience in all areas of theatre to expand the dimensions of the 
classroom by integrating the formal academic training with direct 
application. Periodic seminar meetings to discuss work. 

497 Production and Performance Projects in Theatre (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart - 
ment office prior to registration. Projects which culminate in pro- 
duction or performance. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor; 
application form with appropriate signatures must be on file in depart - 
ment office prior to registration. Undergraduate research projects. 
May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 

Methodological problems in graduate research. Location of 
source materials, including library and original data; interpreta- 
tion of research and practice in scholarly writing. Must be taken 
the first semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research; the relationship 
between historical backgrounds and developments in the theatre 
and the student’s area of concentration. 

563 Acting Studio (6) 

Prerequisite: audition. Re-creation and interpretation of roles 
utilizing period and contemporary dramatic literature, interrelat- 
ing voice, movement, characterization and period style acting. 
Enrollment limited to M. F. A. students. May be repeated for credit. 

566 Graduate Seminar: Stagecraft (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced theories in the 
preparation and installation of scenery for theatrical production; 
engineering drawings, exploration of materials, and research into 
new methods of theatre technology. May be repeated for credit up 
to six units. 


Theatre and Dance 207 


570A,B Styles of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 470A,B or consent of instructor. Research 
in the theories of directing styles and practice in directing period 
plays. A — Staging problems from Greek tragedy through the 
Restoration. B — Staging problems from recent classical work 
(Ibsen, Strinherg, Chekhov) to present. May be repeated once 
for credit. 

573 Seminar in Dramatic Literature (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of contribu- 
tions of major dramatists or dramatic genres. Emphasis on dra- 
matic analysis. Topics will vary from semester to semester. May be 
repeated for credit. 

575 Seminar in Theatre History (3) 

Directed research and criticism in the examination of a signifi- 
cant historical period or movement in theatre history. Topics will 
vary from semester to semester. May be repeated for credit. 

577 Graduate Seminar: Costuming (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Costume production prob- 
lems and their solutions. Examination of specific designers, past 
and present. Research in pratical methods of interpreting the 
deisgner’s sketch. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

578 Graduate Seminar: Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Scenic design projects involv- 
ing in-depth production style and scheme development. May be 
repeated for credit up to six units. 

583 Graduate Seminar: Acting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 463 A, B. Investigation and delineation of 
current acting methods as techniques for solving problems pre- 
sented by popular dramatic literature. Development of a personal 
acting philosophy and methodology. May be repeated once for 
credit. 

586 Graduate Seminar: Lighting Design (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advance theoretical lighting 
design projects. Production problems and their solutions. Exami- 
nation of specific designers, past and present. May be repeated for 
credit up to six units. 


588 Graduate Projects in Design and Technical Theatre (6) 
Theoretical projects and designs for productions prior to final 
projects. Faculty and student critiques. Tailored to individual 
student needs. Enrollment limited to M.FA. students. 

597 Project (D3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student’s graduate committee 
and department executive committee. Development and presen- 
tation of a creative project beyond regularly offered coursework. 
May be repeated for credit up to six units. Student must complete 
course applicaticm form by the end of the seventh week of the semester 
preceding that in which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee; applica - 
turn form with apropriate signatures must be on file in department 
office prior to registration. Development and presentation of a 
thesis in the student’s area of concentration. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (D3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student’s graduate committee and in- 
structor; application form with appropriate signatures must be on file 
in department office prior to registration. Research in theatre. May 
be repeated for credit. 


Theatre Education Courses 

442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, meth- 
ods and materials for teaching in the secondary school. 

449E Externship in Secondary Teaching (3) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 

4491 Internship in Secondary Teaching (10) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 

449S Seminar in Secondary Teaching (2) 

See description under Department of Secondary Education. 


208 Theatre and Dance 


OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 












School of Business 
Administration and 

Economics 



Dean: Ephraim P. Smith 
Associate Deans: 

Dorothy Heide, Undergraduate Programs 
(Vacant), Graduate Programs 
Keith Lantz, Development 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentrations in: 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 
Management 

Management Information Systems 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Bachelor of Arts in Economics 

Bachelor of Arts in International Business 

Concentrations in: 

French 

German 

Japanese 

Portuguese 

Spanish 

Other Languages 

Minor in Business Administration 
Minor in Economics 

Minor in Management Information Systems 
Master of Science in Accountancy 

Master of Business Administration 

Concentrations in: 

Accounting 
Business Economics 
Finance 

International Business 
Management 
Management Science 
Marketing 

Master of Arts in Economics 

Master of Science in Management Science 
Concentrations in: 

Management Information Systems 

Operations Research 

Statistics 

Master of Science in Taxation 


School of Business Administration and Economics 211 



INTRODUCTION 

Programs of study in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics equip men and women with the intellectual and pro- 
fessional tools needed to assume responsible positions in business, 
industry, education, government, and social service. The school 
offers a broad exposure to business administration and econom- 
ics. Behavioral and quantitative sciences are studied in both 
theoretical and applied contexts. Mathematics is used as a key 
tool in the analysis of complex problems and in the interpretation 
of data. Emphasis is placed on effective oral and written commu- 
nication. Students are made aware of the need for imaginative, 
innovative solutions to business problems that encompass human 
needs and ethical objectives. 

The school provides the opportunity to develop technical exper- 
tise in a chosen discipline at a beginning professional level ac- 
ceptable to prospective employers. Seven concentrations are of- 
fered within the business administration major as well as an 
economics major, an international business major and a business 
education credential program. 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers the 
only programs in Orange County accredited by the American 
Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business. Accreditation as- 
sures a rigorous course of study covering the full spectrum of 
business administration. It also indicates a well-qualified faculty, 
high standards for students, and access to computing and an 
extensive library system. 

Mission Statement 

The University’s Mission has three major elements: (1) excel- 
lence in instruction, (2) actively involved faculty, and (3) sup- 
port for the instructional mission (see “Philosophy and Objec- 
tives” section of this catalog). 

In support of the University’s Mission, the School of Business 
Administration and Economics has built its Mission around its 
students and faculty as well as university service and community 
outreach. In each of these areas, the School will pursue specific 
goals: 

• Students: Provide students with opportunity to obtain an edu- 
cation that will enable them to grow intellectually, personally 
and professionally throughout life. 

• Faculty: Foster an intellectual climate that supports faculty in 
their efforts to advance and convey knowledge and learning 
through their teaching and research, recognizes differing 
viewpoints, respects academic and personal freedom and pro- 
motes teaching innovation. 

• Students and Faculty: Attract and retain a diverse student body 
and faculty through a collegial environment that endorses 
social responsibility and accountability, honesty and equity, 
and supports activities that enhance the learning opportunity. 


• Outreach: Encourage outreach activities that address commu- 
nity, regional and world needs. 

• Service: Support faculty involvement in collegial governance 
and shared decision-making processes. 

Preparation for Undergraduate Degree Programs 

Algebra and geometry are necessary for many required business 
courses. The equivalent of three years of high school mathemat- 
ics, including a second course in algebra, is the prerequisite for 
the required Math 135 Business Calculus. Students without 
the necessary background should enroll in Math 115 College 
Algebra. 

Proficiency in written English is essential to all college courses. 
Students should plan to take the written English component of 
General Eduation as soon as possible and take the English Writ- 
ing Proficiency (EWP) examination while juniors. 

Business students are encouraged to take courses in sociology, 
psychology, anthropology, speech communication, political sci- 
ence, history, philosophy, geography and foreign languages. 
Many courses in these fields may be used to meet general educa- 
tion requirements. For the international business degree, inter- 
mediate level competency in a foreign language, equivalent to 
Foreign Language 204 courses, is prerequisite to the required 
concentration courses. It is strongly recommended that students 
planning to major in international business complete a minimum 
of three years of foreign language study while in high school. 

Business Advising Center 
Langsdorf Hall, Room 700 

Undergraduate Program Advising 

The Business Advising Center serves business administration, 
economics and international business majors. Information is 
available on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, as well as on registration and grading procedures, resi- 
dence and similar academic matters. Transfer students should see an 
adviser immediately regarding transfer credit. For information on 
general education, consult the Academic Advisement Center in 
the Humanities Building. 

Graduate Program Advising 

The graduate adviser (in the Business Advising Center) provides 
academic advising for the graduate programs in accountancy, 
business administration, management science and taxation. In- 
formation is available on admissions, curriculum and graduation 
requirements, as well as on registration procedures, residence and 
similar academic matters. For information on admission, curricu- 
lum and graduation requirements for the M. A. in Economics, see 
the graduate program coordinator in the Economics Department. 
Students also should consult the faculty coordinators for the 
programs in accountancy, management science and taxation. 


212 School of Business Administration and Economics 


Transfer Credit for Business and Economics Courses 
Students should see an adviser immediately regarding transfer cred- 
it. College level courses successfully completed at another college or 
university may be applied towards the requirements of the SBAE 
subject to the approval of the appropriate department chair. Lower 
division courses completed at an appropriately accredited institu- 
tion with a grade of “C" or better that are equivalent in content and 
level may be considered. Upper division transfer courses will be 
considered if the course is (a) equivalent in content and level, (b) 
completed with a grade of “C” or better, and (c) taught in an 
American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business accredited 
program. Exceptions require thorough documentation evidencing 
the above standards. Lists of approved equivalent courses from local 
community colleges are available in the Business Advising Center. 
All other courses are subject to approval by the department chair 
concerned. In these cases, the student must supply catalog descrip- 
tions, course outlines and textbook titles. Courses taken in the 
extension division of another university, or by correspondence, are 
generally not acceptable. 

Internships and Cooperative Education 

Students may earn academic credit, first-hand work experience 
and financial remuneration as well. Opportunities exist in ac- 
counting and auditing; cost-benefit analysis and econometrics; 
finance and real estate; insurance and banking; management and 
industrial relations; marketing, sales and advertising; and busi- 
ness data systems. For more information, consult the internship 
adviser in your department or in the Center for Internships and 
Cooperative Education. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies have been 
established on campus with membership open to qualified stu- 
dents: Beta Alpha Psi (accounting), Beta Gamma Sigma (busi- 
ness), Delta Sigma Pi (business), Financial Management Associ- 
ation Honor Society (finance), Omicron Delta Epsilon (eco- 
nomics), Phi Kappa Phi (all-campus), Pi Sigma Epsilon 
(marketing). In addition there are the following clubs which 
students are encouraged to join: Accounting Society, AIESEC, 
APICS (American Production and Inventory Control Society 
Management), Black Business Students, Data Processing Man- 
agement Association, Economics Association, Finance Associ- 
ation, Inter-Club Council, American Marketing Association, 
Personnel and Industrial Relations Association (management), 
Personnel Management Association of Aztlan, Rho Epsilon (real 
estate-finance), Securities and Investment Association, and The 
Institute of Management Science. 


Prizes in Business Administration and Economics 

Stephen J. Barres Leadership Award 

Theodore H. Smith Outstanding Graduate Student Award 

Executive Council Outstanding Student Award 

Executive Council Outstanding Faculty Award 

See also awards listed under each department. 

For additional information on awards and scholarships available 
to business students, contact the office of the Dean, Langsdorf 
Hall 700. 

Computer Facilities 

The CSUF Computer Center in McCarthy Hall and the SBAE 
Satellite Computer Laboratory in Langsdorf Hall are available for 
student use. Facilities include terminals (which access the cam- 
pus’ main computers), microcomputers, and printers. Computer 
facilities are generally available evenings and weekends during 
the school year. 

Information on the Degree Requirements 

Accountancy, Master of Science 
See “ Department of Accounting ” 

Business Administration, Bachelor of Arts 
Business Administration, Master of Business Administration 
Business Administration, Minor 
See “Business Administration Degrees” 

Economics, Bachelor of Arts 
Economics, Master of Arts 
Economics, Minor 

See “Department of Economics” 

International Business, Bachelor of Arts 
See “International Business Program ” 

Management Information Systems, Minor 
See “Management Information Systems ” 

Management Science, Master of Science 
See “Department of Management Science” 

Taxation, Master of Science 
See “Department of Accounting” 


School of Business Administration and Economics 213 


Department of 
Accounting 


Chair: Ephraim Smith 

Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 630 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Accounting 
Master of Science in Accountancy 
Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Accounting 

Master of Science in Taxation 
Faculty 

Jack Coleman, Eugene Corman, Mary Fleming, Paul Foote, 
Clyde Hardman, Mahamood Hassan, A. Jay Hirsch, Gerald 
Hoth, Herbert Jensen, K.J. Kim, Keith W. Lantz, Andrew 
Luzi, Don Marshall, Robert McCabe, Robert Miller, Jacob 
Paperman, Christopher Petruzzi, Shirish Seth, Randy Swad, 
Dorsey Wiseman 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Accounting Department pro- 
vides advising on curriculum content and career opportunities: 

Accounting Keith W. Lantz 

CPA Examination Keith W. Lantz 

Taxation Clyde Hardman 

INTRODUCTION 

Accounting is often referred to as “the language of business.” Very 
generally, the accounting process is concerned with recording, 
classifying, reporting and interpreting the economic data of an 
organization. These data are important to users, who may include 
managers, investors and other interested groups. Accounting 
helps in decision-making processes by showing how money has 
been spent and where commitments have been made, by judging 
performance and by showing the implications of following differ- 
ent courses of action. Reliable information in a dynamic business 
environment is necessary for sound decisions concerning the 
allocation of scarce resources. Thus accounting plays a very sig- 
nificant part in our social and economic systems. 



214 Accounting 


Programs in accounting are designed for students who are inter- 
ested in careers in public accounting, industry, government, or 
social accounting, and for students who intend to work for ad- 
vanced degrees in accounting in preparation for teaching and 
research. 

Credential Information 

The Department of Accounting offers courses which may he 
included in the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business. Fur- 
ther information on the requirements for teaching credentials is 
contained in the Teacher Credential Programs section of this 
catalog. 

Prizes in Accounting 

Outstanding Senior Award 
Amy Vanasse Memorial Award 
Arthur Andersen & Co. 

BDO Seidman 
Coopers & Lybrand 
Deloitte & Touche 
Ernst & Young 
Frazer & Torbet 
Grant Thornton Co. 

Hugh Saddington & Co. 

Kenneth Leventhal & Co. 

KPMG Peat, Marwick, Main & Co. 

McGladrey & Pullen 
Moss Adams 

National Association of Accountants, O.C. Chapter 
Price Waterhouse 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting Concentra- 
tion/’ 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ACCOUNTANCY 

The Master of Science in Accountancy program provides the 
conceptual understanding and technical competence for a career 
in professional accounting. Employment opportunities include 
public accounting, industrial accounting and government. The 
program encompasses both a theoretical foundation and techni- 
cal skills. Emphasis is placed on the development of a professional 
attitude and the capacity to deal with issues of accounting policy 
and ethics. Graduates should be prepared for entry-level posi- 
tions, and for potential advancement in the profession. 

The M.S. in Accountancy program is scheduled especially for 
students who are employed full time. Courses are offered during 
the late afternoon and evening. Most students enroll on a part- 
time basis, taking two courses (6 units) per semester. 


The curriculum is designed for students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration with a concentration in ac- 
counting. In addition to seven accounting courses, there are two 
electives and a terminal, research -project course. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
at both the undergraduate and graduate level. This assures a 
rigorous program, a well qualified faculty, high standards for 
students, and access to an extensive library system. The qualifica- 
tions of the M.S. in Accountancy faculty include advanced de- 
grees in taxation, accounting, and law; practical tax experience; 
and professional standing as CPAs and attorneys. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “ classified SBAE status ” and are open only 
to students with classified standing in the M.B.A., M.S. in 
Accountancy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. in Management Science, 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate unclassified standing. 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accredited 
by a regional accrediting association, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at the last college at- 
tended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll in un- 
dergraduate courses (100 through 400 level) but generally are 
ineligible for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students 
may wish to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to 
meet the requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon 
completing the requirements, the student may file an “Applica- 
tion for Change of Academic Objective — Graduate” requesting 
admission to the M.S. in Accountancy program. Admission to 
the university as a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not 
constitute admission to the M.S. in Accountancy program, does 
not confer priority, nor does it guarantee future admission. Stu- 
dents planning to apply for admission to the M.S. in Accountan- 
cy program should confer with the graduate adviser in the School 
of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements may be 
admitted to the M.S. in Accountancy program with conditional- 
ly classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate Manage- 
ment Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a score of at 
least 950 according to one of the following formulas. Due to 
limited facilities and resources in the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics, a higher score is usually required of all 
applicants. 


Accounting 215 


A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and GMAT 
is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) 4 - GMAT — 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of course 
work* then score = (GPA x 200) -I- GMAT -100. 

9 All wtrrk within any given quarter or semester must be included even 
though that will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be 
included in the last 60 semester units may come only from the follow - 
ing: (I) work taken in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven 
years toward fulfilling M.S. in Accountancy course work require- 
ments; (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed to 
by the asscxriate dean, School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics; (3) units earned prior to the bachelor's degree. 


required. Any study plan course in which a D is received must be 
repeated and must receive at least a C grade regardless of the 
overall GPA of the student. 


Required Courses 


Accounting 502 Seminar 
Accounting 503 Seminar 
Problems (3) 

Accounting 505 Seminar 
Accounting 506 Seminar 
Communications (3) 
Accounting 507 Seminar 
Systems (3) 

Accounting 521 Seminar 
Accounting 572 Seminar 
Shareholders (3) 


in Accounting Theory (3) 
in Contemporary Accounting 

in Auditing (3) 
in Professional Accounting 

in Acctg. Information 

in Admin. Accounting (3) 
in Taxation of Corporations and 


Note: To be admitted as conditionally classified students, appli- 
cants must be within three courses (or 10 units) of meeting the 
requirements for classified standing (see below). Such courses 
must be completed within the first 1 2 months of study. Students 
who do not do so will not be allowed to continue in the program. 
Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
graduate courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the gradu- 
ate adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Applicants with a bachelm's degree in a field other than 
business administration (or whose deficiency is greater than three 
courses) should apply for the Master of Business Administration 
program. Upon completion of the M.B.A. foundation courses 
and Business Administration 590, an application for a change of 
objective may be filed for transfer to the M.S. in Accountancy 
program. 

Students meeting the following additiorud requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business administration 
and a concentration in accounting which meets the require- 
ments stated in this catalog for such degrees. The degree must 
include calculus and computer programming equivalent to 
passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 units), and 
Management Science 265, Introduction to Information Sys- 
tems and Computer Programming (3 units), with a minimum 
C grade. Courses in the major are to be no more than seven 
years old, and courses in the accounting concentration no 
more than five years old. Courses in the major (including the 
accounting concentration) must have at least a 3.0 (B) GPA. 
Courses with grades lower than C must be repeated. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. At least 24 of the 30 units required for 
the degree must be at the graduate level. A GPA of 3.0 (B) is 


Electives in Accounting or Related Business Fields 

Two courses (6 units) at the 400 or 500 level, to be selected in 
consultation with, and approved by, the program coordinator. 

Terminal Evaluation 

Accounting 597 Project (3) 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration Degrees, Accounting Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN TAXATION 

The Master of Science in Taxation program provides the concep- 
tual understanding and technical competence for a career in 
taxation. Employment opportunities include the tax depart- 
ments of CPA and law firms, as well as corporations and govern- 
ment tax agencies. For those already employed in this field, the 
M.S. in Taxation program should meet the continuing education 
requirements of professional associations and licensing boards. 

The M.S. in Taxation program is scheduled especially for students 
who are employed full time. Courses are offered during the late 
afternoon and evening. Most students enroll on a part-time basis, 
taking two courses (6 units) per semester. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration. In addition to six courses in 
the field of taxation, there are three electives and a terminal, 
research-project course. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business 
at both the undergraduate and graduate level. This assures a 
rigorous program, a well qualified faculty, high standards for 
students, and access to an extensive library system. The qualifica- 
tions of the M.S. in Taxation faculty include advanced degrees in 
taxation, accounting, and law; practical tax experience; and 
professional standing as CPA’s and attorneys. 


216 Accounting 


Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “classified SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M.B.A., M.S. in 
Accountancy, M.S. in Taxation, M.S. in Management Science, 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate unclassified standing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accredited 
by a regional accrediting association, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at the last college at' 
tended. 

Note: Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll in un- 
dergraduate courses ( 100 thru 400 level) but are generally ineligi- 
ble for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students may 
wish to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet 
the requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon com- 
pleting the requirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective Graduate” requesting admission 
to the M.S. in Taxation program. Admission to the university as 
a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not constitute ad- 
mission to the M.S. in Taxation program, does not confer prior- 
ity, nor does it guarantee future admission. Students planning to 
apply for admission to the M.S. in Taxation program should 
confer with the graduate adviser in the School of Business Ad- 
ministration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted to the M.S. in Taxation program with conditionally 
classified standing: 

3. Combination of GPA and score on the Graduate Manage- 
ment Admission Test (GMAT) sufficient to yield a score of at 
least 950 according to one of the following formulas. Due to 
limited facilities and resources in the School of Business Ad- 
ministration and Economics, a higher score may be required 
of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2. 5 and GMAT is at 
least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT - 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of course 
work* then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT — 100. 

* All work within any given quarter or semester must be included even 
though that will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be 
included in the last 60 semester units may come only from the follow- 


ing: ( 1) work taken in postbaccalaureate status during the last seven 
years toward fulfilling M.S. in Taxation course work requirements; 

(2) units taken under a prescribed remedial program agreed to by the 
Associate Dean, SchixA of Business Administration and Economics; 

(3) units earned prior to the bachelor's degree. 

Note: To be admitted as conditionally classified students, appli- 
cants must be within three courses (or 10 units) of meeting the 
requirements for classified standing (see below). Such courses 
must be completed within the first 12 months of study. Students 
who do not do so will not be allowed to continue in the program. 
Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
graduate courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the gradu- 
ate adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a field other than 
business administratum (or whose deficiency is greater than three 
courses) should apply for the Master of Business Administration 
program. Upon completion of the M.B.A. foundation courses 
and Business Administration 590, an application for a change of 
objective may be filed for transfer to the M.S. in Taxation pro- 
gram. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they qualify. 

4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business administration 
which meets the requirements stated in this catalog for such 
degrees, and Accounting 308, Concepts of Federal Income 
Tax Accounting (or an equivalent course or work experi- 
ence). The degree must include calculus and computer pro- 
gramming equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, Business 
Calculus (3 units), and Management Science 265, Introduc- 
tion to Information Systems and Computer Programming (3 
units), with grades of at least C. Courses in the major are to he 
no more than seven years old and must have at least a 3.0 (B) 
GPA. Courses with grades lower than C must be repeated. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. At least 21 of the 30 units required for 
the degree must be at the graduate level. A GPA of 3.0 (B) is 
required. Any study plan course in which a D is received must be 
repeated and must receive at least a C grade regardless of the 
overall GPA of the student. 

Required Tax Course 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Electives in Taxation and Related Fields 

Five courses (15 units) to be selected in consultation with, and 
approved by, the student’s adviser. 


Accounting 217 


Available courses include but are not limited to: 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Accounting 572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations and 
Shareholders (3) 

Accounting 573 Seminar in Taxation of Property 
Transactions (3) 

Accounting 574 Seminar in Taxation of International 
Business Operations (3) 

Accounting 575 Seminar in Estate, Gift and Inheritance 
Taxes and Estate Planning (3) 

Accounting 576 Seminar in State & Local Taxation (3) 
Accounting 577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee 
Compensation (3) 

Accounting 578 Seminar in Taxation of 
Partnerships (3) 

Other Electives 

Courses are to be selected in consultation with, and approved by, 
the students adviser. 

One course (3 units) in either economics or political science and 
two courses (6 units) in either business or non-business fields. 

Note: recommended courses in economics and political science 
include Econ 517, Poli Sci 421, 519, 528. 

Terminal Evaluation 

Accounting 597 Project (3) 


Accounting Courses 

201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: None. Accounting concepts and techniques essen- 
tial to the administration of a business enterprise: analyzing and 
recording financial transactions; accounting valuation and allo- 
cation practices; preparation, analysis and interpretation of fi- 
nancial statements; international accounting issues. Instruc- 
tional fee required. (Not open to freshmen) 

20 IB Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A. Introduction to managerial ac- 
counting; product costing; budgetary control and responsibility 
accounting; analysis and techniques for aiding management 
planning and control decisions; basic income tax concepts for 
planning business transactions. (Not open to freshmen) 


301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites for 301 A: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on the 
accounting qualifying examination, and completion of all lower 
division business administration core courses with grades of at 
least C in each course. Prerequisite for 30 IB: A grade of C or 
better in Accounting 301 A. Accounting theory; preparation of 
income statements, balance sheets and statements of changes in 
financial position; present value and amount concepts; assets, 
liabilities and stockholders equity; price-level accounting; pen- 
sions; leases; earnings per share; financial statement analysis; 
accounting changes and error analysis. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, a passing score on the account- 
ing qualifying examination, and completion of all lower division 
business administration core courses with grades of at least C in 
each course, or a grade of C or better in 301 A. Accounting 
information for management of manufacturing enterprises; cost 
records; cost behavior and allocation; product costing and inven- 
tory valuation; flexible budgeting; standard costs; responsibility 
accounting; cost planning and control; and operating decision 
analysis. 

303 Accounting for Governmental & Nonprofit Entities (3) 
(Formerly 403) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or equivalent with a grade of C or 
better. Fund accounting as applied to governmental and nonprof- 
it entities; state and federal governments, municipalities, hospi- 
tals and universities. Budgets, tax levies, revenues and appropri- 
ations, expenditures and encumbrances, various types of funds, 
and accounting statements. 

308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB, a passing score on the account- 
ing qualifying examination, and completion of all lower division 
business administration core courses with grades of at least C in 
each course, or a grade of C or better in 301 A. Provisions, 
legislative history and implications of the federal income tax. 

358 Principles of Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 A or instructor permission. The 
federal tax system, federal income taxation relating to federal tax 
system, federal income taxation relating to individuals, corpora- 
tions, partnerships, and fiduciaries. Federal estate and gift taxes. 
Not open to accounting majors. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 30 IB with a grade of C or better. Busi- 
ness combinations; meaning, usefulness and methodology of con- 
solidated financial statements; investments in non-subsidiary af- 
filiates and corporate joint ventures; consolidated financial state- 
ments for overseas units of U.S. -based multinational companies; 
translations of foreign currencies. 


218 Accounting 


402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 30 IB and 302 with a grade of C or 
better. The auditing standards and procedures used by financial 
and operational auditors. Management information and comput- 
er systems, internal control, audit evidence, professional respon- 
sibilities and legal liabilities, standards of reporting financial 
information. 

407 Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 A and 302 with a grade of C or 
better and Management Science 265 or equivalent. Alternative 
accounting systems used for the collection, organization and pre- 
sentation of information. Theory and practice of information 
processing, organizational, behavioral and mechanical. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308 with a grade of C or better. Federal 
income tax as it applies to corporations, partnerships, fiduciaries, 
and federal estate and gift taxes as they apply to taxable transfers. 

470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308 with a grade of C or better. The 
methodology of tax research including case studies; the manage- 
ment of a tax practice; administration procedures governing tax 
controversies; rights and obligations of taxpayers and tax practi- 
tioners. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B (may he taken concurrently), 
Accounting 302, a major in accounting, consent of the depart- 
ment internship adviser, and at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA 
and one semester in residence at the university. Planned and 
supervised work experience. May be repeated for credit up to a 
total of six units. Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval of department chair. 
Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue di- 
rected independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open 
to students on academic probation. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified SBAE status and con- 
sent of instructor. The effects of professional, governmental, 
business, and social forces on the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent of 
instructor. Current issues in financial reporting including pro- 
nouncements by the Financial Accounting Standards Board and 
the Securities and Exchange Commission. Coverage of topics 
will change as new issues in accounting emerge. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified SBAE status. Audit- 
ing theory and practices; professional ethics; auditing standards; 
Securities and Exchange Commission and stock exchange regula- 
tions; auditor s legal liability; statement trends and techniques. 


506 Seminar: Professional Accounting Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.S. in Accounting status or consent of 
instructor. Compilation and composition of accounting reports 
and client presentations relating to accountants’ working papers, 
client engagement letters, management advisory reports and pro- 
spectuses. 

507 Seminar in Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 407, or equivalent with consent of in- 
structor. Case studies of computer based accounting systems used 
by organizations such as universities, banks, industrial corpora- 
tions and CPA firms. Emphasis on accounting information, re- 
ports and internal controls. 

508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Substantive provisions of federal law; tax 
planning from a corporate viewpoint; case studies of the effect of 
federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Accumulation, organiza- 
tion, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data rel- 
evant to the activities of corporate business enterprise. Instruc- 
tional fee required. 

511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 5 10, consent of instructor and 
classified SBAE status. Accounting information for management 
decisions; elements of manufacturing, distribution and service 
costs; cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; cost analysis. 

518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 20 IB or 511 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Comparative analysis of accounting principles and practices 
outside the United States; international financial accounting 
standards; current problems of international financial reporting, 
accounting planning and control for international operations; 
multinational companies. 

521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302 or 511; classified SBAE status and 
consent of instructor. Integrative aspects of accounting, financial, 
and quantitative data for managerial decision-making; long-term, 
short-term profit planning; budgetary control; cost analysis; finan- 
cial analysis and planning; taxation; and transfer pricing. 

572 Seminar in Taxation of Corporations & Shareholders (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to corporations; 
organizing, distributions, liquidations and reorganizations. 

573 Seminar in Taxation of Property Transactions (3) 
Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to sales, ex- 
changes and other transfers. 


Accounting 219 


574 Seminar in Taxation of International Business 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to U.S. citizens 
and corporations with foreign source income and of foreign per- 
sons with U.S. source income; planning for foreign operations. 

575 Seminar in Estate, Gift, Inheritance Taxes and Estate 
Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal and California death taxes and the 
planning of personal estates. 

576 Seminar in State and Local Taxation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Application of interstate income alloca- 
tions; multi-state tax compact; separate v. apportionment ac- 
counting; foreign country sourced income. Also, California taxes 
as applied to businesses and individuals. 


577 Seminar in Taxation of Employee Compensation (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to employee com- 
pensation including pensions and profit sharing, stock options, 
ESOP’s, IRA’s, Keogh’s, maximum tax 5-year averaging, death 
benefits, group term life, etc. 

578 Seminar in Taxation of Partnerships (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 and classified SBAE status, or 
consent of instructor. Federal taxation relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts and other special entities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
approval by department chair. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 


220 Accounting 


Business Administration 

Degrees 



INTRODUCTION 

This major prepares students for entry level positions in business 
and administration in both the private and public sectors. Career 
opportunities range from accounting, cost analysis, marketing 
research and statistical forecasting to real estate, personnel, sales 
and information systems. This curriculum also provides a founda- 
tion for advanced study. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

Admission to the Business Administration Major 

Admission to the Business Administration major involves two 
steps. Students who apply to the major are initially classified as 
Pre-business. After completing the lower-division core require- 
ments with grades of at least M C”, students may apply to the 
Business Administration major. Pre-business students may take 
lower-division business courses, but most upper-division courses 
are not open to Pre-business students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. 
Students must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed 
below. However, a C average will he acceptable in the required 
concentration courses. For assistance in interpreting these re- 
quirements contact the Business Advising Center. 

Required Lower-Division Core Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

(Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be 
substituted for Economics 201 and Economics 202.) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 1 50A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Accounting 20 IB Managerial Accounting (3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems and 
Computer Programming (3) 


Note: Manag Sci 264, Computer Programming (2), and Manag 
Sci 263, Introduction to Information Systems and Micro-Com- 
puter Applications (2), may be substituted for Manag Sci 265. 

Collateral Requirement 

3-unit introductory social science course other than Economics, 
chosen from General Education section III.C. 1. 


Business Administration 221 


English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Business Admin 301 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Admin 301 W Business Writing Workshop (3) 

Note: Business Admin 301 Business Writing should be taken 
before registering for any 400- level SBAE courses. 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

Business administration majors shall not enroll in any required 
upper-division core course until they have completed all of the 
required lower-division core courses with a grade of at least C in 
each course. Students desiring to enroll in required upper-divi- 
sion core courses while concurrently completing the last of their 
required lower-division core courses may select only Business 
Administration 301, Business Writing, Economics 315, Interme- 
diate Business Microeconomics (or Economics 310, Intermediate 
Microeconomics), and/or Management Science 361, Probability 
and Statistical Methods in Business and Economics. 

The following are required: 

Econ 315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) 
or Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 
or Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) 

Note: Management concentration requires Econ 310 or 315. 
Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Principals of Management & Operations (4) 
Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Manag Sci 362 Management Science Methods in Business 
and Economics (3) 


Other subjects. Complete at least 50 percent of the coursework for 
the degree in subjects other than business administration or eco- 
nomics. Complete all university requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree. 

Grade' Point Average (GPA). Maintain at least a 2.0 GPA (C 
average) in all university courses and in the concentration 
courses. Earn at least a C grade in each course required for the 
major (other than concentration courses). 

Grade option. Take all required core courses and all required 
concentration courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The Credit/No 
Credit grading option may not be used for these courses, and a 
grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for the 
degree. Exception: Courses in calculus may be taken under the 
Credit/No Credit grading option, although courses taken to meet 
general education requirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence. At least nine units of courses in the area of concentra- 
tion and at least 1 5 of the last 24 units of courses must be taken in 
residence at the School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics. Students also must fulfill university residence requirements. 

Concentrations for the B.A. in Business Administration 

Business administration majors must complete the requirements 
of one concentration in addition to the degree requirements 
shown above. 

Accounting Concentration (21 units) 

All students with an accounting concentration are required to 
take the courses shown below. Before taking these courses, stu- 
dents must first complete all of the required lower division core 
courses with a grade of at least C in each course and must receive a 
passing score on the Accounting Qualifying Exam. The examina- 
tion must be passed during the two semesters prior to the semester 
of class enrollment. Exceptions to the requirement of completing 
lower division business core courses may be granted to students 
with non-business majors. 


Required Concentration Courses 

A minimum of 18 units of course work is required in one concen- 
tration. See listing of concentration requirements below. 

Required Capstone Core Course 

After completing all lower and upper-division core courses, take: 
Management 449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Global Awareness Requirement. Complete one course, of at least 3 
units, in the area of Global Awareness. The course must be 
selected from the list of Approved Global Awareness Courses, 
which is available from the Business Advising Center. 


Accounting 301 A, B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 
Accounting 302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Accounting 308 Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting 

( 3 ) 

Accounting 402 Auditing (3) 

Accounting 407 Accounting Info Systems (3) 
and one of the following courses: 

Accounting 401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Accounting 408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Accounting 470 Tax Research, Practice and Procedures (3) 


Business Economics Concentration (18 units) 

All students with an economics concentration are required to 
take Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) or 
Econ 315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) as part of 


222 Business Administration 


their business administration core requirements. In addition, the 
concentration requires Econ 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic 
Analysis (3) and Econ 410 Government and Business (3) and 12 
units of upper-division economics electives, 3 units of which 
must be at the 400- level. 


Students interested in economics also should consider the Bache- 
lor of Arts in Economics. 


Finance Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a finance concentration must choose one of the 
following emphases: 


Financial Institutions Emphasis (18 units) 


Note: To be eligible to sit for the Certified Financial Planner 
Examination, students must take all of the following: Finance 
340, 360, 410, 411, 455, and Accounting 358. 


Real Estate Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 
Finance 452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Finance 453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 
and one of the following courses: 

Finance 451 Real Estate/Land Use Law — Case Studies (3) 
Finance 454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 
Finance 455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Finance 456 Property Development and Real Estate Policy 
Analysis (3) 


Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)’ 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Finance 425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Finance 440 Money and Capital Markets (3) 
and 3 units of upper division finance electives (other than Fi- 
nance 310) 


Financial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)* 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 
and two of the following courses: 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 

Finance 432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Finance 433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

and 3 units of upper division finance electives (other than 

Finance 310) 


Investments and Financial Planning Emphasis (18 units) 

Finance 331 Financial Management and Computer 
Applications (3)’ 

Finance 332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Finance 340 Introduction to Investments (3) 
and three of the following courses: 

Finance 360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Finance 410 Theory and Practice of Personal Financial 
Planning (3) 

Finance 442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 
Finance 444 Options and Futures (3) 

Finance 455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 


Management Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a management concentration are required to 
take Econ 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) or Econ 
315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) as part of their 
business administration core requirements. In addition, students 
must choose one of the following emphases. 

Cmtract Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 347 Business Law (3) 
or Management 348 Business Law (3) 

Management 436 Government Contracts (3) 

Management 444 Project Management (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in consulta- 
tion with a departmental adviser. 

Entrepreneurial Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 345 Small Business Management (3) 
or Management 448 Sem in Small Business Consulting (3) 
Management 349 Law for the Small Business (3) 
or Management 444 Project Management (3) 
and 9 units of elective course work to be determined in consulta- 
tion with a departmental adviser. 

General Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 347 Business Law (3) 
or Management 440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 

Management 447 Management Decision Games (3) 
and 6 units of elective course work to be determined in consulta- 
tion with a departmental adviser. 


'Finance 331L Financial Management Lab (1) is optional and is highly recom- 
mended for students enrolled in Finance 331 


Business Administration 223 


Operations Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 421 Operations Systems Design (3) 
Management 422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 
Management 445 Operations Policy and Strategy (3) 

One course selected from the following: 

Management 436 Government Contracts (3) 

Management 441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 

Management 454 MIS Management and Design (3) 

Manag Sci 467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 
and two 3 unit electives chosen in consultation with a depart- 
mental adviser. 


Human Resources Management Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 433 Advanced Topics in Human Resource 
Management (3) 

Management 441 Labor- Management Relations (3) 
and 9 units of elective course work from the following to he 
determined in consultation with a departmental adviser: 
Management 431 Women in Management (3) 

Management 439 Organizational Change & Development (3) 
Management 440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 
Management 442 Grievance Handling and Arbitration (3) 
Management 443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Psychology 391 Industrial/Organizational Psychology (3) 


Organizational Behavior Emphasis (18 units) 

Management 343 Personnel Management (3) 

Management 439 Organizational Change & Development (3) 
Management 443 Group Dynamics (3) 

and 9 units of elective course work from the following to be 
determined in consultation with a departmental adviser: 
Management 431 Women in Management (3) 

Management 433 Advanced Topics in Human Resource 
Management (3) 

Management 441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Up to two upper-division social science courses 

Management Information Systems Concentration 

All students are required to take the Management Information 
Systems Qualifying Exam in addition to the following courses: 


Manag Sci 270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 
Manag Sci 309 Elements of Information Systems Design (3) 
Manag Sci 408 Database Management Systems (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Telecommunications and Business 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 365 Advanced BASIC Programming (3) OR 
Manag Sci 370 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 
Management 344 Intro to Management Information 
Systems (3) 

Management 454 
and Design (3) 


Management Information Systems Analysis 


One course selected from the following: 

Management 410 Information Resources Management (3) 
Manag Sci 41 1 Advanced Microcomputer Concepts and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 415 Decision Support and Expert Systems (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy and Security (3) 

Manag Sci 365 Advanced BASIC Programming (3) OR 
Manag Sci 370 Avanced COBOL Programming (3) 


Management Science Concentration (18 units) 

All students with a management science concentration are re- 
quired to take: 

Manag Sci 440 Deterministic Models in Management 
Science (4) 

Manag Sci 441 Probabilistic Models in Management Science 
(4) 

Manag Sci 461 Statistical Theory for Management Science 
(4) 

and 6 units of upper-division management science electives cho- 
sen from the following: 


Information Systems Courses 


Manag Sci 309 
Manag Sci 370 
Manag Sci 408 
Manag Sci 409 
Applications 
Manag Sci 41 1 
Applications 
Manag Sci 416 
Manag Sci 418 


Elements of Information System Design (3) 
Advanced COBOL Programming (3) 

Data Base Management Systems (3) 
Telecommunications and Business 

(3) 

Advanced Microcomputer Concepts and 

(3) 

Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 
Privacy and Security (3) 


Operations Research Course 

Manag Sci 448 Computer Simulation in Business and 
Economics (3) 


Statistics Courses 

Manag Sci 420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 
Manag Sci 422 Surveys and Sampling Design and 
Applications (3) 

Manag Sci 467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 


Marketing Concentration (18 units) 

Required Courses (9 units) 

Marketing 353 Marketing Analysis (3) 
Marketing 370 Buyer Behavior (3) 
Marketing 379 Marketing Research (3) 


224 Business Administration 


Electives (6 units) 

Choose two from the following: 

Marketing 401 Professional Selling (3) 

Marketing 405 Management Advertising (3) 

Marketing 415 Managing the Sales Force (3) 

Marketing 425 Retail Marketing Strategy (3) 

Marketing 435 Business Marketing Management (3) 
Marketing 445 Multinational Marketing Strategy (3) 
Marketing 465 Managing Services Marketing (3) 

Marketing 475 Export Marketing Strategies (3) 

Capstone Course (3 units) 

Marketing 489 Developing Marketing Strategies (3) 

MINOR IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The minor provides a basic understanding of the role of business 
in society and the methods used by business. This curriculum also 
provides a basis for advanced study. A working knowledge of 
algebra is necessary for several of the required courses. 

Business administration minors shall not enroll in any required 
upper-division course (in the minor) until they have completed 
all of the required lower-division courses (in the minor) with a 
grade of at least C in each course. Students must earn a grade of at 
least C in each course listed below. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
or Economics 210 Principles of Economics (5) instead of 
Econ 201 and Econ 202 
Accounting 201 A. B Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Management Science 265 Intro to Information Systems and 
Computer Programing (3) 

Required Upper- Division Courses 

Special Notice: Enrollment in these courses requires the comple- 
tion of all lower-division minor requirements with a grade of C or 
better in each course. 

Management 339 Principles of Management & Operations (4) 
or Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Economics Majors M inoring in Business Administration: Economics 
Majors can complete a minor in business administration by tak- 
ing Accounting 201 B, Management 246, Finance 320, Manage- 
ment 339 or 340 and Marketing 351. All other required courses 
for the minor are required for the major in Economics. 


MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

The M.B. A. degree program is accredited by the American Assem- 
bly of Collegiate Schools of Business. This assures a rigorous, in- 
depth program, covering the full spectrum of business administra- 
tion. Accreditation also indicates a well-qualified faculty, high 
standards for students, and access to computing and an extensive 
library system. 

Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two 
plans for the M.B. A. degree. 

The M.B. A. Generalist Plan is designed for students with little 
or no course work in business administration. The curriculum 
surveys the entire field of business administration, preparing stu- 
dents for general management responsibilities. The plan is struc- 
tured, keeping students together for most of their classes, and 
should be completed within three years. Courses may not be 
waived, although limited substitution of more advanced courses 
is allowed. This format requires a substantial and sustained com- 
mitment from students over the three-year period. Students who 
do not complete the curriculum within three years may change to 
the M.B. A. Specialist Plan. 

The M.B. A. Specialist Plan is designed for students with recent 
course work (or an undergraduate degree) in business administra- 
tion; for those who wish to include a specialized area of concen- 
tration in their curriculum; and/or for those unable to follow the 
structure of the M.B. A. Generalist Plan. Some courses may be 
waived on the basis of equivalent undergraduate course work. 
The program is not structured, and five years are allowed for 
completion. The areas of concentration are accounting, business 
economics, finance, international business, management, man- 
agement science and marketing. 

The M.B. A. program is scheduled especially for students who are 
employed full time. Courses are offered during the late afternoon 
and evening. Most students enroll on a part-time basis, taking 
two courses (6-7 units) per semester. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “classified SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M.B. A., M.S. in 
Accountancy, M.S. in Management Science, M.S. in Taxation 
or M.A. in Economics programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate ^unclassified standing: 

1 . Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an appropriately accredit- 
ed institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at last college attended. 


Business Administration 225 


Note: Postbaccalaureate-unclassified students may enroll in un- 
dergraduate courses ( 100 thru 400 level) but are generally ineligi- 
ble for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students may 
wish to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet 
the requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon com- 
pleting the requirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective-Graduate” requesting admission 
to the M. B. A. program. Admission to the university as a postbacca - 
laureate-unclassified student does not constitute admission to the 
M. B. A. program, does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee future 
admission. Students planning to apply for admission to the 
M.B.A. program should confer with the graduate adviser in the 
School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted to the M.B.A. program with conditionally classified 
standing: 

3. Admission into the MBA program is based upon an analysis of 
the following quantitative and qualitative considerations: 

A. A combination of GPA and Graduate Management Ad- 
mission Test (GMAT) score, sufficient to yield a mini- 
mum score of 1000 according to one of the following 
formulas. Due to limited space, a higher minimum score 
is usually required of all applicants. 

1. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and 
GMAT is at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + 
GMAT. 

2. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2. 5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT 
-50. 

B. A score in the top three-fourth’s of both the Verbal and 
Quantitative areas of the GMAT 


Economics. Students are expected to advance promptly to classi- 
fied standing. In particular, any deficiencies in calculus or com- 
puter programming must be removed during the first 12 months 
of study. Students who do not do so will not be allowed to 
continue in the program. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they are qualified. 

4. Proficiency in calculus and computer programming equiv- 
alent to passing Mathematics 135, Business Calculus (3 
units), and Management Science 265, Introduction to Infor- 
mation Systems and Computer Programming (3 units), with 
grades of at least C. Students with work experience in these 
fields may demonstrate proficiency by passing a challenge 
examination and should consult the chair of the Management 
Science Department for details. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum — M.B.A./Generalist Plan 

The M.B.A./Generalist curriculum includes 17 courses (51 
units). 

Any deficiencies in calculus or computer programming must be 
removed within one year. No courses may he waived, although 
limited substitutions of more advanced courses in the same field 
will be allowed. Any study plan course in which a D grade is 
received should he repeated, and must receive at least a C grade, 
regardless of the overall GPA of the student. 


C. A minimum TOEFL score of 570 (international students 
only). 

D. Review by the MBA admissions committee of the follow- 
ing: 

1. Academic preparation for graduate study 

2. Any prior work experience 

3. Two letters of reference 

4. A “Statement of Purpose” in pursuing the MBA, to be 
submitted by applicant 

Note: Conditionally classified students may take a limited num- 
ber of graduate courses (500 level), subject to the approval of the 
graduate adviser of the School of Business Administration and 


If a foundation course is waived on the basis of an undergraduate 
course or courses, it must he replaced by an advanced course in 
the same discipline. 


Foundation Courses 


Accounting 510 
Economics 515 
Allocation (3) 
Finance 517 
Management 516 
of Operations (3) 
Management 518 
Manag Sci 513 
Manag Sci 515 


Financial Accounting (3) 

The Price System and Resource 

Managerial Finance (3) 

Organizational Theory and Management 


Legal Environment of Business (3) 
Statistical Analysis (3) 
Management of Information in the 
Corporate Environment (3) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 
Business Admin 590 Issues in Policy-Management- 
Environment (3) 


226 Business Administration 


Advanced Courses 

Accounting 511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 
Economics 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 
Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 
(3) 

Management 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and 
Administration (3) 

Manag Sci 514 Decision Models for Business and Economics 
(3) 

Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

500-level elective chosen from any of the six SBAE 
departments 

Terminal Evaluation 

Business Admin 591 Strategy and Organization (3) 
Comprehensive Examination 

Completion of the individual written project in Business Admin 
591 with grade of M B” or better may serve as an option to the 
comprehensive examination. 

Students who are unable to complete the M.B. A. /Generalist 
Plan within three years may change to the M.B. A./ Specialist 
Plan. This change will result in adding an area of concentration. 

Curriculum M.B.A./Specialist Plan 

The M.B.A./Specialist curriculum includes a concentration in a 
specialized area and requires from 33 to 60 units of graduate 
course work. Students with a bachelor’s degree in business ad- 
ministration may be able to complete the program with the mini- 
mum of 33 units, whereas those with little or no recent course 
work in business administration may require the full 60 units. 
Any deficiencies in calculus or computer programming must be 
removed within one year. Any study plan course in which a D 
grade is received must be repeated, and must receive at least a C 
grade, regardless of the overall GPA of the student. 

Foundation Courses 

Foundation courses may be waived on the basis of equivalent 
undergraduate course work, providing that the equivalent courses 
are no more than seven years old and have grades of at least C 
with a GPA of at least B. 

Accounting 510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Economics 515 Price System &. Resource Allocation (3) 
Finance 517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Management 516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Management 518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Manag Sci 513 Statistical Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 515 Management of Information in the Corporate 
Environment (3) 

Marketing 519 Marketing Management (3) 

Business Admin 590 Issues in Policy-Management- 
Environment (3) 


A list of equivalent undergraduate courses is available from the 
graduate adviser. In many cases, students with a recent bachelor’s 
degree in business administration from an accredited university 
will be able to waive all foundation courses. 

Advanced Courses 

All seminars in this group must be taken at the graduate level. 
Students with a concentration in international business are re- 
quired to take only five of the following courses: 

Accounting 511 Sem in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Note: Students who have satisfactorily completed a course in 
cost accounting must substitute Accounting 521 Sem in Ad- 
ministrative Accounting (3). 

Econ 521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Note: Economics 521 is not open to students with credit in 
intermediate macroeconomics. 

Finance 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Mgmt (3) 
Management 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and 
Administration (3) 

Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Manag Sci 514 Decision Models for Business and 
Economics (3) 

or Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and 
Experimental Design (3) 

or Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) 

Concentration Courses (except international business) 

12 units in one area of concentration: 

Accounting Management 

Business Economics Management Science 

Finance Marketing 

At least 6 units of the concentration courses must be taken at the 
500- level. Concentration courses are to be approved by the de- 
partment chair concerned, or designee within the department, 
and the Associate Dean, Graduate Programs, School of Business 
Administration and Economics. 

Note: Students choosing the accounting concentration may have 
to take Accounting 301A,B, Intermediate Accounting, and/or 
Accounting 308, Concepts of Federal Income Tax Accounting, 
as prerequisites to their concentration courses. 

Concentration Courses International Business 

Five of the following courses (15 units) are required, including at 
least 9 units at the graduate (500) level. ( Note that students with 
an international business concentration take only five of the 
courses listed above under Advanced Courses.) 


Business Administration 227 


Accounting 518 Seminar in International 
Accounting (3) 

Economics 41 1 International Trade (3) 

Finance 570 Seminar in International Financial Mgmt (3) 
Management 547 Comparative Management (3) 

Marketing 445 Multinational Marketing Strategies (3) 

Elective (3 units) to be approved by the international business 
advisor. Recommended electives include selected courses in His- 
tory, Political Science, Communications, Geography and Chi- 
cano Studies. 

Terminal Requirements 

Business Admin 591 Strategy and Organization (3) 
Comprehensive Examination 

Completion of the individual project in Business Admin 591 
with a grade of 44 B” or better may serve as an option to the 
comprehensive exam. 

In exceptional cases, a thesis (Business Administration 598, 
Thesis) may also serve as an option for the comprehensive exami- 
nation. See the graduate adviser for details. 


Business Administration 
Courses 

For information about Business Administration 301, consult the 
Coordinator, Business Writing Program, in the Business Writing 
Office, Modular Unit 209 or Mobil Unit 302. For information 
about Business Administration 590 and 591 , consult the graduate 
adviser in the Business Advising Center, LH-700. 

301 Business Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practices in various forms of business writing. Case studies. In- 
structional fee required. Satisfies the classroom portion of the 
upper-division writing requirement for business and economics 
majors. Students may not receive credit for both Bus Ad 301 and 
Bus Ad 30 1W. 


30 1W Business Writing Workshop (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101 or equivalent (with a grade of C or 
better). Principles of effective writing in business. Extensive 
practice in various forms of business writing. Case studies. Uses 
word processing facilities in computer lab. Satisfies the classroom 
portion of the upper-division writing requirement for business 
and economic majors. (2 hours lecture: 2 hours activity.) Stu- 
dents may not receive credit for both Bus Ad 301 and Bus Ad 
30 1W. 


499 Independent Study 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified students 
desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


590 Issues in Policy-Management-Environment (3) 

Focuses on importance of monitoring changes in environment(s) 
facing business and incorporating social, economic, and techno- 
logical change into corporate decision-making process. Empha- 
sizes use of analysis tools from other MBA classes with focus on 
data sources and methods for effective environmental scanning 
and emphasis on business ethics and social responsibility, inter- 
national competitiveness, and changes in legal environment. 


591 Strategy and Organization (3) 

Studies complex business problems and solutions. Builds skills in 
integrating knowledge from functional areas and applying them 
in an original and organized form to a range of business problems 
arising from changing technology, competitive market condi- 
tions, social changes, government actions. Includes article anal- 
ysis, case analysis, a research project, individual and group re- 
ports and oral and written presentations. The individual project 
or an optional comprehensive exam will fulfill the terminal de- 
gree requirement. 


598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of associate 
dean. Individual research under supervision. See “Theses and 
Projects" in this catalog for university requirements. 


228 Business Administration 


Department of 
Economics 

Department Chair: Anil Puri 
Director, Center for Economic Education: 

John Lafky 

Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 702 
Center for Economic Education: 

Langsdorf Hall 530 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 
Bachelor of Arts in Economics 
Minor in Economics 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Business Economics 

Master of Arts in Economics 
Faculty 

Robert Ayanian, Victor Brajer, Kwang'wen Chu, James Dietz, 
Vincent Dropsy, Peter Formuzis, Andrew Gill, Jane Hall, 

Walter Hettich, Sidney Klein, John Lafky, Stewart Long, 
Robert Michaels, Radha Murthy, Howard Naish, Gary 
Pickersgill, Joyce Pickersgill, Anil Puri, Dipankar Purkayastha, 
Morteza Rahmiatian, Guy Schick, Eric Solberg, Murray 
Wolfson, David Wong 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admission, curriculum and graduation require' 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, all economics majors should see a 
faculty adviser in the Department of Economics for information 
on career opportunities and advanced study. Undergraduates 
should consult the department office for the name of their faculty 
adviser. Graduate students should consult the graduate coordina- 
tor, Walter Hettich. 

INTRODUCTION 

As a scholarly discipline, economics is over two centuries old, 
dating back to the French physiocrats and Adam Smith in the 
18th century. The nature of economic analysis has been de- 
scribed by John Maynard Keynes as “ . . .a method rather than a 
doctrine, an apparatus of the mind, a technique of thinking 
which helps its possessors to draw correct conclusions.” 



Economics 229 


Economic methods are used to study a basic question which faces 
all societies: how should limited resources be used to produce 
goods and how should that production be distributed? Not all 
wants can be satisfied because resources and knowledge are limit- 
ed. Therefore, societies are faced with choices. These choices are 
made in different ways: by custom; by command and centralized 
control; or by a system of markets and prices as in our mixed 
economy. Economists examine alternative solutions to the basic 
economic problem by analyzing costs and benefits of changing 
existing patterns of resource use. 

Economists work in many specialties including money and bank- 
ing, international trade and finance, labor, public finance, indus- 
trial policy, business cycles and forecasting. Social issues and 
problems such as poverty, crime, discrimination, immigration, 
aging, energy, pollution and education are typical subjects of 
faculty research. 

The faculty of the Economics Department participates in pro- 
grams leading to both undergraduate and graduate degrees. One 
undergraduate program leads to a bachelor of arts degree with a 
major in economics, which focuses on economics as a social 
science. Another undergraduate program leads to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in business administration and a concen- 
tration in business economics and requires a larger number of 
business courses. Both programs prepare the student for a variety 
of career opportunities in business and government as well as 
advanced studies in economics, business, public administration 
and law. Graduate study is offered in economics, leading to a 
master of arts degree. Alternatively, students may follow the 
Master of Business Administration curriculum, with a concentra- 
tion in business economics. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Economics offers courses which may be included in the Multi- 
ple Subjects Waiver Program; the Single Subject Waiver Program 
in Business; and in the Supplementary Authorization Programs 
in Economics and in Economics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and also is available from the Department Office for 
Elementary and Bilingual Education and for Secondary Educa- 
tion. Students interested in exploring careers in teaching at the 
elementary or secondary school levels should contact the Office 
of Admission to Teacher Education, Education Classroom 207. 

Prizes in Economics 

The Norman Tbwnshend-Zellner Award 
Wall Street Journal Student Achievement Award 
Outstanding Senior in Economics 
Outstanding Graduate Student in Economics 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

Admission to the Economics major involves two steps. Students 
who apply to the major are initially classified as Pre-economics. 
After completing the lower-division core requirements with 
grades of at least “C”, students may apply to the Economics major. 
Pre-economics students may take lower-division business and 
economics courses, but most upper-division courses are not open 
to Pre-economics students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. Students 
must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed below. 
However, a C average will be acceptable in the upper division 
economics electives. For assistance in interpreting these require- 
ments contact the Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 
700. Students should also contact their faculty adviser in the 
Economics Department prior to or during their first semester. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 201 and 202. 

Accounting 201A Financial Accounting (3) 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Economics 440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 
or Math 150B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
or Accounting 201 B Managerial Accounting (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems and 
Computer Programming (3) 

Note: Management Science 264, Computer Programming (2), 
and Management Science 263, Introduction to Information Sys- 
tems and Micro-Computer Applications (2), may be substituted 
for Management Science 265. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP). 

Bus Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 
or Bus Administration 30 1W Business Writing Workshop (3) 

Note: Bus Admin 301, Business Writing, should be taken before 
registering for any 400- level SBAE courses. 

Required Upper- Division Courses 

Economics 310 Intermed Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 Intermed Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

and 18 units of upper-division economics electives, 6 units of 
which must be 400 level. No more than 3 units of independent 
study may be used to meet the 400 level electives requirement. 


230 Economics 


Other Requirements, Grades and Residence 

Other Subjects. Complete at least 50 percent of the coursework for 
the degree outside the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. The department recommends that these courses be 
from the social sciences and mathematics. Students planning to 
do graduate work in economics are advised to take Math 1 50A,B; 
Economics 440 and Economics 441. Complete all university re- 
quirements for the bachelor’s degree. 

Grade-Point Average (GPA). Attain at least a 2.0 GPA (C aver- 
age) in all university courses and in the upper division economics 
electives. Earn at least a C grade in each course required for the 
major (other than the upper division economics electives). 

Grade Option. Take all required courses in economics, accounting 
and management science for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The 
credit/no credit grading option may not be used for these courses, 
and a grade of CR (credit) will not satisfy the requirements for 
the degree. Exception: courses in calculus may be taken under the 
credit/no credit grading option, although courses taken to meet 
general education requirements must be taken for a letter grade. 

Residence. At least 15 units of courses must be taken in residence 
at the School of Business Administration and Economics at Cal 
State Fullerton. Also fulfill university residence requirements. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Business Economics Concentra- 
tion.” 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

The economics minor covers the basics in the discipline of eco- 
nomics and gives students the opportunity to explore personal 
interests through electives. Note that a course in calculus (Math 
135 or equivalent) is prerequisite to Economics 310 and 320. 
Students must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed 
below. 

Required Lower-Division Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 201 and Economics 202. 

Required Upper-Division Courses 

Economics 315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) 
or Economics 310 Inter Microeconomics Analysis (3) 
Economics 320 Intermediate Macroeconomics Analysis (3) 
and 9 units of upper division economics electives 

Note: Students with a major in business administration and a 
concentration other than economics, who wish to minor in eco- 
nomics, must take Economics 201 and 202 (or 210) and 310 as 


part of their major. For such students, these requirements in the 
minor will be waived and the minor will consist of Economics 320 
and nine units of upper-division economics electives. Students 
with a major in business administration and a concentration in 
business economics may not also minor in economics. 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Business Economics Concentration.” 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

This program provides preparation for professional careers in 
private industry and government and provides a foundation for 
further graduate work at the doctoral level. Full-time and part- 
time students can be accommodated. Most of the courses are 
scheduled in the evening. 

The curriculum is designed for students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration or economics, and consists of 
10 courses (30 units). Provided that all prerequisites have been 
satisfied, the program may be completed in one year (full time) or 
IVi years (part time). 

The required courses progress ffom economic theory through 
economic model building and forecasting to the seminar in which 
the student prepares a thesis applying economic theory and econ- 
ometric methods to a specific area of investigation. The curricu- 
lum also includes five courses ( 1 5 units) of electives. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require classified “SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M. A. in Econom- 
ics, M.B.A., M.S. in Management Science, orM.S. in Taxation 
programs. 

Admission 

Students meeting the following requirements will be admitted to 
postbaccalaureate-unclassified standing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from appropriately accredited 
institution, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2. 5 in the last 60 semester units 
attempted, and in good standing at last college attended. 

Postbaccalaureate-unclassified students may enroll in undergrad- 
uate courses (100 thru 400 level) but are generally ineligible for 
graduate economics courses (500 level). Such students may wish 
to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet the 
requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon complet- 
ing the requirements, the student may file an Application for 
Change of Academic Objective — Graduate requesting admis- 
sion to the M.A. in Economics program. Admission tothe uni- 
versity as a postbaccalaureate — unclassified student does not 
constitute admission to the program, does not confer priority, nor 
does it guarantee future admission. Students planning to apply for 
admission to the program should confer with the graduate adviser 
in the Department of Economics. 


Economics 231 


Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted with conditionally classified standing: 

3. Overall undergraduate GPA of at least 2.5. 

4. An average score of 500 on the Graduate Record Examination 
(G.R.E.). 

Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
courses at the graduate level, subject to the approval of the 
graduate adviser of the Department of Economics. Students are 
expected to advance promptly to classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they are qualified. 

5. Completion of the following courses at Cal State Fullerton (or 
equivalent courses at other institutions) with a grade-point 
average of at least 3.0 (B average). The course in calculus 
must have a grade of at least C. 


Principles of Microeconomics (3) 
Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 
Intermediate Microeconomic 

Intermediate Macroeconomic 


Economics 201 
Economics 202 
Economics 310 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 320 
Analysis (3) 

Economics 420 Money and Banking (3) 
or three units of upper-division electives 
Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Mathematics 135 Business Calculus (3) 


6. Approval of study plan. 


Curriculum 

Students are urged to meet as soon as possible with the graduate 
adviser in the Department of Economics to file a study plan and 
advance to classified standing. 

Any study plan course in which a D grade is received must be 
repeated, and must receive at least a C grade, regardless of the 
overall grade-point average of the student. 


Required Core Courses (12 units) 


Economics 440 
Economics 441 
Economics 502 
Economics 503 


Introduction to Econometrics (3) 
Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 
Adv Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Adv Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 


Area & Elective Courses (15 units) 

Area courses require nine units chosen from the student’s field of 
interest. Coursework may focus on the follow ing areas: (1) envi- 
ronmental and natural resource economics (Economics 416, 462, 


590), (2) international economics and finance (Economics 411, 
590), and (3) applied economic analysis involving course work 
related to industrial organization and labor (Economics 505, 410, 
412, 413, 446) or the public sector (Economics 505, 416, 417, 
420, 421). 

Among field and elective courses, six units must be taken at the 
500 level and at least six units must be in economics. The re- 
maining units in the student’s program can be chosen from course 
offerings in Economics or related areas of study. 


Terminal Evaluation (3 units) 
Economics 598 Thesis Research (3) 


Economics Courses 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

The application of economics to the problems of unemployment 
and inflation, the distribution of income, competition and mo- 
nopoly, the role of government in the economy, and other policy 
issues. Not open to prebusiness, business administration majors 
or minors, economics majors or minors, or international business 
majors. 


201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Principles of individual consumer and producer decision-making 
in various market structures; the price system; market perfor- 
mance and government policy. (CAN ECON 4) 


202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 201. Principles of macroeconomic anal- 
ysis and policy; unemployment and inflation; financial institu- 
tions; international trade; economic growth; comparative sys- 
tems. (CAN ECON 2) 

210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: Open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 201 and 
202.) Economic analysis and policy. The central problem of 
scarcity, economic institutions of the United States, resource 
allocation and income distribution, economic stability and 
grow th, the role of public policy, and international applications. 


310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 or 210 and Mathematics 135; core- 
quisite Management Science 361. Rational decision-making be- 
havior of consumers and firms and price and output determina- 
tion in markets. Primarily for Economics majors, but open to all 
students who qualify. 


232 Economics 


315 Intermediate Business Microeconomics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 or Economics 210 and Mathemat- 
ics 135. Corequisite: Management Science 361. Analysis of busi- 
ness decisions in alternative market structures with special em- 
phasis on problem solving in a business context using economic 
concepts and methods. Not open to Economics majors. Students 
may not receive credit for both Economics 310 and 315. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210 and Math 135; Corequisite: 
Management Science 361. The determinants of the level of na- 
tional income, employment and prices, and monetary and fiscal 
policies. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Alternative econom- 
ic systems; their theoretical foundations, actual economic insti- 
tutions, and achievements and failures. Contrast between social- 
ist and capitalist systems. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The structure and 
performance of the Soviet economy; the problems of allocating 
scarce resources and sustaining economic growth in a planned 
economy. 

332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The natural re- 
sources, population, agricultural, industrial, transportation, 
communications, monetary, banking, etc. problems of Asia, 
(i.e., China, Japan, and the Asian subcontinent). The relation 
of non -economic problems to the economy. 

333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 
Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The processes of 
economic growth with references to developing areas. Capital 
formation, resource allocation, relation to the world economy, 
economic planning and institutional factors, with case studies. 

334 Economics of Latin America and the Caribbean (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Examines regional 
economic problems within an international context: depen- 
dence, industrialization and the international corporation; agri- 
culture; regional cooperation; inflation; trade and debt problems. 
Major economic thinkers will be discussed. 

335 The International Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The theory, practice 
and institutions of the international economy. International 
trade and investment; European economic community; balance 
of payments; foreign exchange rates; multinational enterprise; 
trade with developing countries; East- West trade; international 
economic policy. 


340 The Economics of Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The laws pertaining 
to regulation and the implications for each regulated industry. 
Industry studies; the effects of regulation on price, output, inno- 
vations, etc. 

350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The development of 
American economic institutions; economic problems, economic 
growth and economic welfare. 

351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. The evolution of 
European economic institutions and their relation to the devel- 
opment of industry, commerce, transportation and finance in the 
principal European countries. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Theory and analysis 
of the urban economy, urban economic problems and policy. 

362 Environmental Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 2 10, or consent of instruc- 
tor. Economic analysis of environmental problems and related 
issues: externalities, property rights, social costs and benefits, 
user cost, rent and decisionmaking under uncertainty. 

363 The Economics of Energy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 201 or 210. Economic theory 
applied to energy problems, the impact of energy development on 
economic structure, and the role of government in allocating 
energy resources and influencing their use. 

410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 301 or 
the equivalents. Business organization, conduct and perfor- 
mance; the rationale and impact of public policy on business and 
business activities, including the regulated industries, sick indus- 
tries and antitrust policy. 

41 1 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or 31 5 and Business Administration 
301 or the equivalents. The theory of international gains from 
free trade, effects of tariff and non-tariff barriers, and conduct of 
commercial policy. The balance of payments, the theories of 
exchange rate determination, and other international economic 
issues. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 and Business Administration 301 or 
the equivalents. Labor supply and demand, labor force participa- 
tion, employment, unemployment, human capital, wage differ- 
entials, disadvantaged labor market groups, discrimination and 
wage-related income transfers. 


Economics 233 


413 Law and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 315. An economic analysis of 
the common law — property, contract, and tort — focusing on 
the use of microeconomic theory to study the economic efficien- 
cy characteristics and effects of these laws. An emphasis will be 
placed on the analysis of specific legal cases. 

416 Benefit Cost and Microeconomic Policy Analysis (3) 
Prerequisites: Economics 310 or consent of instructor; Business 
Administration 301; or the equivalent. Application of microe- 
conomic models and welfare economics to public policy. Con- 
cepts of economic efficiency, economic surplus and equity. Mea- 
surement of policy effects, including benefit-cost analysis, with 
applications to selected policy areas such as education and envi- 
ronmental programs. 

417 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310 or consent of the instructor, Busi- 
ness Administration 301 or the equivalent. Government finance 
at the federal, state and local levels; the impact of taxation and 
spending on resource allocation, income distribution, stabiliza- 
tion and growth. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 and Business Administration 301 or 
the equivalents. The money supply process and the impact of 
monetary policy on economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320 and Business Administration 301 or 
the equivalents. The techniques of monetary and fiscal policy; of 
their relative roles in promoting economic stability and growth. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210), Manag Sci 361 and Busi- 
ness Administration 301 or the equivalents. Economic measure- 
ment: specification and estimation of econometric models; statis- 
tical methods in economic research. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 202 (or 210) and Math 135 or equiv- 
alent. Economic theory, from microeconomics and macroecono- 
mics. Content varies; constrained optimization problems and 
rational decision-making. 

442 Economics of Conflict and Defense (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320, or consent of instructor, 
and Business Administration 301 or equivalent. The economic 
approach to public goods, arms race and other models of arms 
competition, game theory, nuclear deterrence and arms control, 
and the effects of U.S. defense spending on the U.S. and interna- 
tional economy. Applications to U.S. -Soviet Relations. 


446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 315, and Management Science 
361. An application of microeconomic analysis and economic 
measurement to decision making at the individual firm level. 
The influence of the macroeconomic environment and market 
structure on the decisions of the firm. Applications and case 
studies. 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 320 and Business Administra- 
tion 301. Major schools of thought and of leading individual 
economists as they influenced economic thought and policy. 

462 Natural Resource Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 315 and Business Administra- 
tion 301, or the equivalents. Concepts and principles in the 
application of economics to issues in natural resource economics. 
Issues will include uncertainty and risk in investment, depletion 
over time, cartelization, the role of technological innovation and 
government intervention related to fuels, water, land, etc. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major with Business Administration 
301, Manag Sci 361, Economics 310 (or 320) (or the equiv- 
alents) or international business major with Business Adminis- 
tration 301, Economics 202 and 335, Manag Sci 361 (or the 
equivalents); and consent of the department internship adviser, 
at least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence 
at the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May 
be repeated to a total of six units credit. Credit/No Credit grading 
only. 

496 Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, Economics 310 
and 320, Business Administration 301 , senior standing, 3.0 GPA 
and consent of department chair. Student learns through teach- 
ing (tutoring) other students enrolled in principles and interme- 
diate economics courses. Consult “Student-to-Student Tutorials" 
in this catalog for more information. May not be used to satisfy 
the elective requirements for the major or concentration in eco- 
nomics. Credit/No Credit grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, Economics 3 10 
and 320, Business Administration 301 (or the equivalents), sen- 
ior or graduate standing, and consent of instructor and depart- 
ment chair. Directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for 
credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and classified SBAE status or consent 
of instructor. An advanced treatment of rational decision-making 
behavior of consumers and firms, the price system, and resource 
allocation in partial and general equilibnum settings. Topics include 
preference theory, welfare economics, gains from trade, monopoly 
power, external costs and benefits, public goods, factor markets, 
intertemporal decisions, risk and uncertainty. 


234 Economics 


503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 320 and classified SBAE status or con- 
sent of instructor. The determination of employment, fluctu- 
ations o 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 320 and classified SBAE status or con- 
sent of instructor. The determination of employment, fluctu- 
ations of real and money income, and the forces underlying 
economic growth. 

505 Economic Models and Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440 and classified SBAE status or con- 
sent of the instructor. Statistical methods of econometric estima- 
tion and forecasting. Practical solutions to problems in model 
specification, estimation by regression, time series analysis and 
forecasting. 

515 The Price System and Resource Allocation (3) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and Math 135 or the equiv- 
alent. Microeconomic analysis and policy under mixed capital- 
ism. The economic environment and institutions, markets, con- 
sumer choice, production and resource allocation. Monopoly 
power and government intervention. (Not open to M.A. Eco- 
nomic candidates.) 

516 Economics and Benefit-Cost Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 201 (or 210) and classified graduate 
status in environmental studies or public administration. Eco- 
nomics and benefit-cost analysis of public projects. Consumer 
demand and the estimation of benefits; the nature of cost in a 
market economy; price controls, unemployment and inflation; 
and criteria for choice, for multi-year projects. For elective credit 
in the M.S. Environmental Studies or M.PA. 

517 Economics of Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 515 (or 516) and classified graduate sta- 
tus in environmental studies, public administration, business ad- 
ministration, or taxation. Economics of federal, state and local 
governmental spending, taxation and borrowing. Major taxes, 
their effects on market prices, income distribution, employment 
and inflation, and evaluation of reform proposals. (For elective 
credit in the M.S. Environmental Studies, M.PA., M.B.A., or 
M.S. Taxation.) 


521 Macroeconomic Theory and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 or 515 and classified SBAE status. 
National income determination and macroeconomic models. In- 
flation and unemployment. Monetary and fiscal policies. Inter- 
national trade and foreign exchange (Not open to M.A. Eco- 
nomics candidates or students with credit for Economics 320.) 

522 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 515 or 310 and classified SBAE status. 
Analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic problems of 
scarcity, development, fiscal and monetary policy, planning and 
poverty. (Not open to M.A. Economics candidates.) 

590 Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320; classified SBAE status or 
consent of instructor. Contemporary research in areas such as: 
resource economics; history of economic thought; international 
monetary systems; forecasting; economics of planning; human 
resource economics. May be repeated for credit. 

595 Current Research in Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: classified graduate status in Economics or Econom- 
ics 440, a 3.25 or better grade-point average and permission of 
the instructor. Students attend the departmental research semi- 
nar where faculty and outside speakers present papers dealing 
with recent and ongoing research. Students read material rel- 
evant to presentations and write analytical reports covering five 
seminar meetings. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent in- 
quiry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

598 Thesis Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503 and classified SBAE status. 
Corequisite: Economics 505. Selection and approval of topic; 
outline; methodology; literature survey; data collection and anal- 
ysis; presentation of results. Award of the grade is contingent 
upon the completion and acceptance of the thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 440, 502 and 503; classified graduate 
status; and consent of instructor and department chair (or desig- 
nee). Directed advanced independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 


Economics 235 


Department of Finance 


Department Chair: John Emery 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 556 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Finance 
Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Finance 

Faculty 

Albert Bueso, Su Chan, Caroline Chang, Donald Crane, John 
Erickson, Albert J. Fredman, Daniel Lee, Peter Mlynaryk, 
Dennis O’Connor, R James Stickels, Richard Stolz, Marco 
Tonietti, Blaine Walgreen, Ko Wang 


Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, registration and grading procedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, advising on curriculum content 
and career opportunities may be obtained from the chair of the 
Finance Department or from: 

Financial Management Marco Tonietti 

Personal Financial Planning Donald Crane 

Real Estate Peter Mlynaryk 

Securities and Investments Albert Fredman 


INTRODUCTION 

Finance is the study of the methods by which a firm provides itself 
with cash to nin its daily operations and its long-range expan- 
sion. 



In choosing their course work students may elect one of four areas 
of emphasis within the finance concentration of the major in 
business administration: financial management; financial institu- 
tions; investments and financial planning; and real estate. A 
financial management emphasis may lead to employment in a 
hank or savings and loan association. An investment and finan- 
cial planning emphasis may lead to employment in a brokerage 
firm or a financial planning firm. A real estate emphasis may lead 
to employment in the real estate industry. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Finance offers courses which may he included in the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business and in the Supplementary 
Authorization Program in Economics and Consumer Education. 


236 Finance 


Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and is also available from the Department Office for 
Secondary Education. Students interested in exploring careers in 
teaching at the elementary or secondary school levels should 
contact the Office of Admission to Teacher Education. 

Prizes in Finance 

The Wall Street Journal Award 
Edward D’Cunha Finance Award 
Financial Management Association Award 
Investment Trust Award 
Jack Nichols Scholarship Award 
Outstanding Finance Student Award 
Outstanding Service Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Finance Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Finance Concentration." 


Finance Courses 

310 Personal Financial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources and 
planning expenditures. Housing, insurance, installment buying, 
medical care, savings and investments. (May not be used to fulfill 
the concentration requirement in finance.) 

320 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 20 IB; corequisite: Management Sci- 
ence 361. Financing business enterprises; financial planning and 
control; analysis of alternative sources and uses of combinations 
of shorty intermediate-and long-term debt and equity. Cost of 
capital. Study of capital investment decisions; capital budget 
analysis and valuation; working capital and capital structure 
management; relative impact on the international environment 
of financial decisions. 

331 Financial Management and Computer Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Analysis of working capital manage- 
ment and policy. Use of available software programs and financial 
models in computer-aided analysis of working capital manage- 
ment, financial forecasting, financial planning, capital budget- 
ing, leasing problems, investments and other financial issues. 

33 1L Financial Management Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Finance 331. Laboratory in computer assisted finan- 
cial analysis Instructional fee required. 


332 Theory of Corporate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Risk and 
return analysis. An introduction to the capital asset and arbitrage 
pricing models. Analysis of capital budgeting, capital structure, 
dividend policy, leasing, mergers and divestitures. 

340 Introduction to Investments (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 (may be taken concurrently). Institu- 
tional characteristics of securities markets, security valuation and 
trading methods, fundamental and technical analysis, selection 
and management of securities, introduction to the capital asset 
pricing model, role of options and futures markets, portfolio 
analysis and mutual funds. 

351 Real Estate and Urban Land Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Real estate 
principles, practices and investment decisions. Equity invest- 
ment, finance, legal aspects, practices, principles, property de- 
velopment, real estate administration in the public sector, real 
estate market analysis, valuation. 

360 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: junior or senior status. Life, casualty and liability 
insurance, individual and group insurance programs; methods of 
establishing risks and rates. 

370 International Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320 or consent of instructor. Financing 
problems of international business. The international financial 
environment, taxation of foreign income, international capital 
and money markets, problems of risk in foreign investments, and 
financial techniques for the operation of a multinational firm. 

410 Theory & Practice of Personal Financial Planning (3) 
Prerequisite: Finance 320. Developing, implementing and moni- 
toring comprehensive personal financial plans. Includes risk 
management, investments, taxation, retirement and estate plan- 
ning, as well as professional practices. 

411 Retirement and Estate Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Development of retirement objec- 
tives, needs and financial condition. Forecasting retirement in- 
come from employer based retirement plans, IRAs, insurance 
policies, social security, investment programs. Medicare, medi- 
cal, group life and health benefits after retirement. Property 
titling, wills and transfers in contemplation of death. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution 
Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. The solution of financial institution 
problems. Major financial intermediaries and the decision-mak- 
ing problems they face. Regulation and its effect on management 
operations. Group problems and case studies. 


Finance 237 


432 Financial Forecasting and Budgeting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331. Forecasting in financial management; 
construction and interpretation of economic forecasts for the 
economy, industry and the firm; construction and interpretation 
of financial plans; evaluation of capital acquisition decisions un- 
der certainty and uncertainty conditions. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 332. Case studies. Group problems of esti- 
mating funds requirements, long-term financial planning, con- 
trolling and evaluating cash flows, and financing acquisitions and 
mergers, capital budgeting, and cost of capital. Group problems 
and case studies. 

440 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 320. Capital and money markets in the 
American economy; markets for new corporate and government 
issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial institutions; 
factors influencing yields and security prices. 

442 Advanced Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 340 and Management Science 361. Secu- 
rities markets and company analysis, security valuation models 
the CAPM and the APT option pricing, and portfolio models. 
Practical application of investment theory and recent literature 
will be emphasized. 

444 Options and Futures (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 340. Put and call options, option pricing 
theory and models. Financial futures pricing, hedging strategies 
and models. Institutional characteristics of futures trading. Op- 
tions and futures on stock indices. Options on futures, theoretical 
relationship between options and futures. 

451 Real Estate/Land Use Law — Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real estate law. Cases provide illustra- 
tions of specific legal situations; financial institutions, property 
rights, zoning, land use law and environmental impact require- 
ments. 

452 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Financial institutions and real estate 
credit. Sources and uses of capital (funds) in financing real estate 
transactions. Money and capital markets and their effect on 
credit availability. Instruments in real estate finance. Investment 
methods and decisions. Group problems and case studies. 

453 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Real property value, historical evolu- 
tion of valuation principles, approaches in urban and real proper- 
ty appraisals, alternative methods and techniques for property 
valuation. 


454 Real Estate and Urban Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Factors and influences of urban 
growth and development. Economic factors and real estate supply 
and demand. Location theory and urban growth patterns. Public 
policy as a factor in real estate development. Analysis of real 
estate markets. 

455 Real Estate Investment Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Alternative analytical techniques in 
evaluating real estate investments. Tax aspects, measurement of 
investment returns, application of computer models to invest- 
ment decisions. Lecture, discussion and case analysis of major 
investment types — raw land, apartment houses, commercial and 
industrial uses. 

456 Property Development and 
Real Estate Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 351. Decision making process in the prop- 
erty development process — from raw land to retail marketing of 
completed product. Policy formulation and implementation, 
project feasibility analysis, financial analysis, computer assisted 
analysis; case studies. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 331 or 332, a concentration in finance, 
consent of department internship adviser, junior standing, 2.5 
GPA and one semester in residence at the university. Also open 
to international business majors. Planned and supervised work 
experience. May be repeated for credit up to a total of six units. 
Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chair. 
Open to undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed inde- 
pendent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not open to stu- 
dents on academic probation. 

517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510 and classified SBAE status. The 
methodology of financial management. The primary tools for 
financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, valuation and 
working capital management. International applications. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 5 1 7 and classified SBAE status. The analy- 
sis of the financial decision-making process through case studies 
and seminar presentations. Current financial theory and models. 
International applications. Instructional fee required. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified SBAE status. Optimal 
financing and asset administration; advanced techniques of cap- 
ital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the adminis- 
tration of the finance function of the business firm. 


238 Finance 


540 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified SBAE 
status. Structure and operation of major financial institutions; 
portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and market behav- 
ior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrelation of fi- 
nancial institutions and markets. 

541 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified SBAE 
status. Problems of investment and portfolio management; con- 
cepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of inter- 
est rate movements; investment valuation and timing; regulation 
and administrative problems of the industry. 

551 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or equivalent and classified SBAE 
status. Problems of real estate investment; concepts of evaluation 
and investment criteria; analysis of real property values; real 
estate development and financing. Case studies. 


570 Seminar in International Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or consent of instructor and classified 
SBAE status. The financial problems of the multinational firm. 
International financing instruments, capital investment decisions, 
and constraints on the profitability of multinational businesses. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
approval by department chair. May he repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 






Finance 239 


International Business 
Program 


Program Coordinator: Irene Lange 
Program Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 

Program Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in International Business 

Program Council 

Peng Chan (Management) 

Linda Andersen (Foreign Languages) 

Dennis O’Conner (Finance) 

Irene Lange (Marketing) 

Doris Merrifield (German) 

Vincent Dropsy (Economics) 

Marcial Prado (Spanish) 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, registration and grading procedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. Additional advising on curriculum content 
and career opportunities is available from the International Busi- 
ness Program: 

International Business: 

French: 

German: 

Japanese: 

Portuguese: 

Spanish: 

Other languages: 

INTRODUCTION 

The international business curriculum covers the fundamentals 
of business administration, with an emphasis on international 
business. Foreign language courses are required and stress the use 
of the language in international business. The program also in- 
cludes an internship with an international business. This curricu- 
lum prepares students for entry level positions in international 
business. Opportunities exist in contracts, distribution and sales 
and may lead to general management positions. Since Southern 
California is a major international business center, there are 
career opportunities with internationally oriented firms in this 
area. Other career opportunities may involve international travel 
or overseas assignments. 


Irene Lange 
Linda Andersen 
Doris Merrifield 
Keiji Matsumoto 
Ronald Harmon 
Marcial Prado 
Eva Van Ginneken 


\ 

\ 





Language concentrations are offered in French, German, Japa- 
nese, Portuguese, and Spanish. Other concentrations may be 
developed in the future. The program is offered jointly by the 
School of Business Administration and Economics and the De- 
partment of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 


240 International Business 


Prize In International Business 

The Dennis Rippin-International Marketing Association 
Scholarship 

Preparation For The Major 

Students who expect to complete this program in the usual four- 
year period should realize that the total requirements, including 
general education courses and prerequisites, can exceed 124 se- 
mester units. Intermediate level competency in a foreign lan- 
guage, equivalent to courses numbered 204 in the Department of 
Foreign Languages and Literatures, is prerequisite to the required 
concentration courses. It is therefore strongly recommended that 
students complete a minimum of three years of foreign language 
study while in high school. Similarly, algebra and geometry are 
necessary for many required business courses. The equivalent of 
three years of high school mathematics, including a second 
course in algebra, is the prerequisite for the required Mathemat- 
ics 135, Business Calculus. Students without the necessary back- 
ground will need to enroll in Mathematics 115, College Algebra. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL 
BUSINESS 

Admission to the International Business major involves two 
steps. Students who apply to the major are initially classified as 
Pre-intemational business. After completing the lower-division 
core requirements with grades of at least M C M , and demonstrating 
satisfactory progress toward intermediate competency in a foreign 
language, students may apply to the International Business major. 
Pre- international business students may take lower-division busi- 
ness courses, but most upper-division courses are not open to Pre- 
international business students. 

All of the following requirements must be met for the degree. 
Students must earn a grade of at least C in each course listed 
below. However, a C average will be acceptable in the required 
concentration courses. For assistance in interpreting these re- 
quirements, contact the Business Advising Center, Langsdorf 
Hall 700. 

Required Lower- Division Core Courses 

Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomics (3) 

Economics 202 Principles of Macroeconomics (3) 

Note: Economics 210, Principles of Economics (5), may be sub- 
stituted for Economics 201 and 202. 

Math 135 Business Calculus (3) 
or Math 130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 
or Math 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4) 
Accounting 201 A, B Accounting (3,3) 

Management 246 Business Law (3) 

Manag Sci 265 Introduction to Information Systems and 
Computer Programming (3) 


Intermediate competency in the appropriate foreign language is 
prerequisite to the required concentration courses. If necessary, 
students should enroll in French, German, Japanese or Spanish 
101 , 102, 203 and/or 204, or, for students with previous study of a 
romance language, Portuguese 101 and/or 102. Students may 
enroll at any point in this sequence of courses for which their 
previous study and/or experience have prepared them. Normally, 
two or three years of high school language study are counted as 
the equivalent of 10 units of college language study. Students 
should consult an adviser in the Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures before enrolling in their first foreign lan- 
guage course. 

English Proficiency Requirement 

Cal State Fullerton Examination in Writing Proficiency (EWP) 

Business Administration 301 Business Writing (3) 
or Business Administration 30 1W Business Writing 
Workshop (3) 

Note: Business Administration 301 should be taken before regis- 
tering for any 400-level SBAE courses. 

Required Upper-Division Core Courses 

International business majors shall not enroll in any required 
upper-division core course until they have completed all of the 
required lower-division core courses with a grade of at least M C” in 
each course. Students desiring to enroll in required upper-divi- 
sion core courses while concurrently completing the last of their 
required lower-division core courses may select only Business 
Administration 301, Economics 335 and/or Manag Sci 361. 

Economics 335 International Economy (3) 

Finance 320 Business Finance (3) 

Finance 370 International Business Finance (3) 

Management 339 Principles of Management & Operations (4) 
Management 340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Manag Sci 361 Probability and Statistical Methods in 
Business and Economics (4) 

Marketing 351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Marketing 445 Multinational Marketing Strategy (3) 

And a minimum of three units chosen from among the following 
electives. It is recommended that students take up to 12 units of 
electives, if possible. 


Anthropology 414 Economic Anthropology (3) 
Anthropology 412 Culture Change (3) 

Comp Lit 453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 
Geography 333 Latin America (3) 

Geography 336 Europe (3) 

Geography 344 Africa (3) 

Geography 360 Economic Geography (3) 

History 350 History of Latin America Civilization (3) 
History 429 Europe Since 1914 (3) 


International Business 241 


History 453 Modern Mexico (3) 

Philosophy 312 Business and Professional Ethics (3) 

Poli Sci 430 Government/Politics of a Selected Nation* 

State (3)* 

Poli Sci 431 Government/Politics of a Selected Area (3)* 

Poli Sci 457 Politics of International Economics (3) 

Speech Comm 320 Intercultural Communication (3) 

Required Concentration 

(choose one of the following concentrations) 

Concentration in French: 

French 310 French in the Business World (3) 

French 311 French for International Business (3) 

French 315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

French 325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 

Concentration in German: 

German 310 German in the Business World (3) 

German 311 German for International Business (3) 

German 315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 
German 325 Current Trends in Culture of German Speaking 
People (3) 

Concentration in Japanese: 

Japanese 310 Japanese for Business (3) 

Japanese 31 1 Japanese for International Business (3) 

Japanese 315 Introduction to Japanese Civilization (3) 
Japanese 316 Modern Japan (3) 

Concentration in Portuguese: 

Portuguese 310 Portuguese in the Business World (3) 
Portuguese 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 
Portuguese 320 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and 
Civilization (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

One of the following courses may be substituted for Portuguese 
320 or 325: 

Spanish 310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 

Spanish 311 Spanish for International Business (3) 

Concentration in Spanish: 

Spanish 310 Spanish in the Business World (3) 

Spanish 31 1 Spanish for International Business (3) 

Spanish 315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Spanish 316 Intro to Spanish-American Civilization (3) 


’When topic is appropriate. 


Note: Students may substitute one of the following for Spanish 
315 or 316: 

Spanish 415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Spanish 416 Contemp Spanish-American Culture (3) 

Concentrations in Other Languages 

Students may pursue concentrations in other languages by devel- 
oping an approved program of study. In order to exercise this 
option, students must meet with, discuss and gain prior approval 
of their study plan from the Chair, Department of Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literature and Chair, International Business Pro* 
gram. In some cases, students will he required to complete 
coursework on other university campuses. 

Required Internships 

Foreign Languages 495 Internship (3) 
and one of the following: 

Economics 495 Internship (3) 

Finance 495 Internship (3) 

Management 495 Internship (3) 

Management Science 495 Internship (3) 

Marketing 495 Intership (3) 

All students are required to spend a minimum of four months in 
full-time employment with a faculty-approved firm having inter- 
national dealings and in which daily use of a foreign language is 
normal procedure. (Highly qualified students, i.e., those having 
a 3.2 GPA in their upper-division core and concentration 
courses, will be aided in finding six-month positions abroad). 
Simultaneous enrollment in the two required internships is 
therefore expected, and students normally will not take any other 
course work during this period. 

Other Requirements 

Other Subjects: Complete at least 50 percent of the coursework for 
the degree in subjects other than business administration or eco- 
nomics. Complete all university requirements for the bachelor’s 
degree. 

Grade Point Average (GPA): Attain at least a 2.0 GPA (C aver- 
age) in all university courses and in the concentration courses. 
Earn at least a C grade in each course required for the major 
(other than concentration courses). 

Grade Options: Take all required core and concentration courses 
for a letter grade (A,B,C,D,F). The credit/no credit grading 
option may not be used for these courses, and a grade of CR 
(credit) w ill not satisfy the requirements of the degree. Excep- 
tions: Calculus (Math 130, 135 or 150A) and Internship may be 
taken under the credit/no credit option, although courses taken 
to meet general education requirements must be taken for a letter 
grade. 

Residence: At least 12 units of upper-division core courses, 6 units 
of upper-division concentration courses and 6 units of internships 
must be taken in residence at CSUF. 


242 International Business 


Department of 
Management 



Department Chair: Thomas E. Maher 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 640 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Management 

Faculty 

Farouk Abdelwahed, Michael Ames, Thomas Apke, Mei 
Liang Bickner, Peng Chan, Ellen Dumond, Gamini 
Gunawardane, Ghasem Haj-Manoochehri, Cheong Han, 
Dorothy Heide, Granville Hough, Richard Houston, Thomas 
Johnson, Geoffrey King, Brian Kleiner, Elliot Kushell, Thomas 
Maher, Thomas Mayes, Leland McCloud, Kent McKee, Tai 
Oh, Hamid Tavakolian, Gustavo Vargas, Edward Zilbert 


Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Management Department 
provides advising on career opportunities and on the emphases 
within the Management Concentration: 


Contract Manag. 
Entrepreneurial Manag. 
General Manag. 

Human Resource Manag. 
Law 

Operations Manag. 
Organizational Behavior 
and Organizational 
Development 


Geoffrey King/Thomas Maher 

Michael Ames 

Farouk Abdelwahed 

Thomas Johnson 

Thomas Apke 

Gustavo Vargas 

Thomas Mayes 


INTRODUCTION 

Managers are needed in a wide variety of different types of organi- 
zations — business and nonbusiness, large and small, foreign and 
domestic. In all of these organizations, managers need technical, 
human and conceptual skills to help achieve organizational goals. 


Management courses are designed to teach the fundamental prin- 
ciples underlying organizations, to emphasize education which 
will improve students’ thought processes, to provide familiarity 
with the analytical tools of management, and to develop in the 
student an ability to use the techniques involved in analyzing and 
evaluating managerial problems and making sound decisions. 


Management 243 


Students may pursue a wide variety of academic and career inter' 
ests through six different emphases. These emphases include: ( 1 ) 
contract management, (2) entrepreneurial management, (3) 
general management, (4) human resource management, (5) pro- 
duction and operations management, and (6) organizational 
behavior. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Management 
Department offers courses which may be included in the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business and in the Supplementary 
Authorization Program in Economics and Consumer Education. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and is also available from the Department of Secondary 
Education. Students interested in exploring careers in teaching 
at the elementary or secondary school levels should contact the 
Office of Admission to Teacher Education. 

Prizes in Management 

The Gus Berger Award/Operations Management 
The H. Peter Guertin/APICS Orange County Chapter 
Scholarship 

The Orange County Industrial Relations Research Association 
(OCIRRA) 

The PERMA Scholarship 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Concentration”. 


Management Courses 

246 Business Law (3) 

Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business and society. 
Functions of courts and attorneys, case studies in areas of con- 
tracts and on the law relating to sale of goods. (CAN BUS 8) 

339 Principles of Management and Operations (4) 

Prerequisites: all lower division business core courses or instruc- 
tor’s consent; corequisite Management Science 361 . Administra- 
tive processes in utility-creating business operations: decision- 
making; planning; controlling; organizing; staffing; supporting 
business information systems; measuring and improving effec- 
tiveness; production processes, production operations and insti- 
tutions in American and worldwide business. Uses the Produc- 
tion Lab. Includes taking the Cal State Fullerton Examination in 
Writing Proficiency (feecharged). 


340 Organizational Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: general education in social sciences. Social and 
cultural environments of business; corequisite: Management Sci- 
ence 361. Business ethics. Communication, leadership, motiva- 
tion, perception, personality development, group dynamics and 
group growth. Human behavior and organizational design and 
management practice in American and world wide business. Uses 
the Behavioral Lab. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339 or consent of instructor. The per- 
sonnel function, its activities, and its opportunities. Manage- 
ment’s responsibilities for selection, development and effective 
utilization of personnel. Open to non-business majors. 

344 Introduction to Management Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Manag Sci 265, Management 339, Management 340 
and passing grade on MIS qualifying exam. Organizational founda- 
tions of information systems, systems concepts, contemporary ap- 
proaches to building information systems, managing information 
resources, issues in information technology management. 

345 Small Business Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, Management 339, Marketing 
351. Practical applications of business administration techniques 
to the planning and operation of small businesses. Casework, 
research, and field work with selected local small businesses. 

347 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Philosophy, insti- 
tutions and role of law in business relationships. Business ethics. 
Case studies in areas of agency, partnerships, corporations, bank- 
ruptcy, unfair competition and trade regulation. 

348 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. The philosophy, 
institutions and role of law in commercial and personal transac- 
tions: case studies in personal property, bailments, commercial 
paper, secured transactions, real property, mortgages, trusts, 
community property, wills, estate administration and insurance. 

349 Law for Small Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. The philosophy, institutions, 
and role of law and their practical applications in the areas of 
interest to the small businessperson. Product liability, consumer 
rights, worker’s compensation and other topics. 

410 Information Resources Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 344. This course recognizes the ex- 
panding role of information systems in the overall strategy and 
management of organizations. The management of the organiza- 
tion information resources includes personnel, planning and 
control, technological trends, management implications, man- 
aging the MIS department. 


244 Management 


421 Operations Systems Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Manag Sci 362. Managerial problems associated 
with designing an operations system, including product and pro- 
cess design, facilities planning, capacity choice, job design, auto- 
mation, quality management and maintenance. 

422 Production and Inventory Control (3) 

Prerequisites: Manag Sci 362. Planning and controlling of pro- 
duction activities and inventory levels. Identification of key 
problem areas. Presentation of applicable techniques and sys- 
tems, and organizational and managerial concepts. Utilization of 
computer decision models. Instructional fee required. 

431 Women in Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340. (For men and women.) Increas- 
ing participation in the management of organizations. Employ- 
ment and earnings, affirmative action, understanding male-fe- 
male and female-female work relationships, dual careers, and 
learning how to increase one’s effectiveness in organizations. 

433 Advanced Topics in Human Resource Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 343. Contemporary concepts and pro- 
cedures in compensation and staffing. Current topics and contro- 
versial issues in human resource management are also covered. 

436 Government Contracts (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246. Advertised and negotiated pro- 
curement and the role of contract manager. Fiscal and regulatory 
limitations. The nature of changes, disputes and termination. 
Contract terms and conditions and administration. 

439 Organizational Change and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 340 or equivalent; senior or graduate 
status. Utilizing behavioral science knowledge to improve orga- 
nizational effectiveness. Diagnosing organizational problems; de- 
signing planned change; individual-, group- and organizational - 
level interventions; overcoming resistance to change and issues 
in the consultant-client relationship. 

440 Emerging Issues in Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339 and 340 or consent of instructor. 
For upper-division and graduate students. Business and manage- 
ment in America. The interrelationships of technological, eco- 
nomic, political and social forces with the business enterprises 
and their ethical obligations to owners, employees, consumers 
and society at large. Open to nonbusiness majors. 

441 Labor- Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 339. Impact of labor- management re- 
lations upon labor, management, and the public. Proper griev- 
ance procedure, collective bargaining and settlement of disputes. 
Uses the Behavioral Lab. 


442 Grievance Handling and Arbitration (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 441 or consent of instructor and 
Management 340. In-depth study of the grievance procedures 
and the arbitration process and procedure in the private sector. 
Topics include discipline, contract interpretation, arbitrable is- 
sues, management right issues, such as subcontracting and em- 
ployee rights. Uses cases and simulations. 

443 Group Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 339, 340 or consent of instructor. 
Case studies and current literature on human problems of work 
situations. Developing self-knowledge; manager motivation; 
communicator strengths; improving interaction skills; and im- 
proving interaction processes in groups. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

444 Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: management and management science core and 
other 300 level management courses in student’s concentration. 
Technology for managing business and other enterprises as cyber- 
netic systems. The design and control of systems appropriate for 
product, project and program levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours activity) Uses Production Lab. Instructional fee required. 

445 Operations Policy & Strategy (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 421, Management 422, and Manag 
Sci 362. Long term planning issues in operations and integrating 
operations strategy into corporate strategic planning. Covers 
planning facilities, processes, capacity, support and control sys- 
tems. Case studies and projects. Uses production and computer 
labs. Instructional fee required. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Management 449, 
or consent of instructor. A simulation of an oligopolistic industry. 
Statistics and other analytical tools to make managerial decisions 
in management. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

448 Seminar in Small Business Consulting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, Management 339, Marketing 
351 and senior standing. A seminar. Planning and working in a 
consulting relationship with small local businesses. Lectures, re- 
search and field work. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours field work) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration and 
Economics core courses and departmental approval. Integrative 
cases from top management viewpoint. Administrative pro- 
cesses, ethical-legal-economic implications of business decisions, 
international applications; organization theory and policy formu- 
lation. Individual and team efforts. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 


Management 245 


454 MIS Analysis and Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 344, Manag Sci 408 and Manag Sci 
409. Case-oriented seminar focusing on tools and techniques for 
systems analysis and design including communications structure 
and techniques, computer aided software, models and modelling, 
and project management; systems development life cycle and 
other types of systems development; strategic and administrative 
concepts and techniques. 

490 Seminar in Management Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: 300-level business core courses, Accounting 302, 
Management 344, 444 (or 454), and Manag Sci 309. Senior 
seminar and applications in the design, implementation and use 
of management decision/information systems. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division management courses, 
including Management 339, major in management or interna- 
tional business, consent of department internship adviser and at 
least junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at 
the university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be 
repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit 
only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and 
approval by faculty sponsor and department chair of proposed 
statement of work. Open to qualified students desiring to pursue 
directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of 
Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Manag Sci 514 (may be 
taken concurrently), Accounting 510, Economics 515. Modern 
organization theory and application in utility-creating oper- 
ations. Interpersonal behavior, planning, control, organizing, 
directing, communication, production and information systems, 
and measures of effectiveness. International applications. Busi- 
ness ethics and relationships to society and politics. Graduate 
discussion and research reports. 


518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status. Law applicable to business 
institutions and inherent in business decisions with consider- 
ation of the ethical, social and political influences as they affect 
business organizations and operations both here and abroad; na- 
ture and sources of law, the judicial system and case studies in 
areas of enforceable agreements, products liability, employment, 
business organizations and trade regulation. 

524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior & Administration (3) 
Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 518 
or equivalent. Human behavior in organizations, studies in orga- 
nizational theories, and administrative action. 

535 Production/Operations Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 516 and Management Science 514. 
An in-depth study of selected POM topics. Discussions of the 
operations function role and its importance, identification of the 
problem areas, and reviewing of the related concepts and tech- 
niques, including computer applications. Emphasizing the cur- 
rent POM topics of interest to top management. 

542 Seminar in Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 518. 
A seminar that focuses on various aspects of the labor-manage- 
ment relationship, issues in collective bargaining, the laws gov- 
erning the relationship, contract administration, grievance han- 
dling, dispute settlement and arbitration. Negotiation simulation 
and case analyses. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, Management 516 and 518, or 
equivalent. Cases, problems and significant personnel administra- 
tion literature in personnel administration and human relations. 

547 Comparative Management (3) 

Management practices and processes in five geographical areas; 
market-structures and management characteristics different from 
those in the United States. Constraints which vary between 
countries because of cultural, legal, economic and/or political 
differences. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 


246 Management 


Management Information 

Systems 

Coordinator: Eugene Corman 
Coordinator's Office: Langsdorf Hall 362 



Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 

Concentration in Management Information Systems 
Minor in Management Information Systems 

Committee 

Eugene Corman (Accounting) 

Bharat Lakhanpal (Management Science) 

Andrew Luzi (Accounting) 

Sorel Reisman (Management Science) 

Hamid Tavakolian (Management) 

Gustavo Vargas (Management) 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require' 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, advising about curriculum con' 
tent and career opportunities is available from the coordinator 
and the committee members listed above. 

INTRODUCTION 

Management information systems are computer based informa' 
tion systems. These systems aid management in making decisions 
and assist in implementing and controlling management policies. 
Management information systems are used in business, industry 
and government operations. Applications include airline reser- 
vations, banking transactions, crime prevention networks, elec- 
tion returns, real estate assessment, tax records, newspaper data' 
bases, sports statistics and computer assisted learning. 


Management information systems incorporate the use of data 
processing equipment, such as computers and their peripherals. 
Computer software is used to create, maintain and retrieve infor' 
mation. Techniques include mathematical modeling and statis' 
tics, integrated with modern computer technology. These meth' 
ods are applied to systems management, programming design, 
analysis of information flow, decision support, database organiza- 
tion, small business problems, data communication networking 
and distributed processing. 


Prizes in Management Information Systems 

Outstanding Management Information Systems. Undergraduate 
Award 


Management Information Systems 247 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Information Sys- 
terns Concentration.” 

MINOR IN MANAGEMENT INFORMATION 
SYSTEMS’ 

This minor surveys modern computer methods and the develop- 
ment of information-systems. Emphasis is placed on systems 
which aid management decision-making. Students must earn a 
grade of at least C in each course listed below. 

Accounting 201 A Financial Accounting (3) 

Management Science 265 Introduction to Information 
Systems & Computer Programming (3) 

Management Science 270 File Concepts and COBOL 
Programming (3) 


Management Science 309 Elements of Information Systems 
Design (3) 

Management 344 Introduction to Management Information 
Systems (3) 

Management Science 408 Data Base Management 
Systems (3) 

Note: Manag Sci 265, 270 and/or 408 may he waived for students 
who have taken these courses, or their equivalents, as part of 
their major. However, students must complete a minimum of 12 
units for the minor, so that if all three courses are waived, 3 units 
of electives (to be approved by the MIS Program Coordinator), 
must be added. Recommended electives include Management 
Science 365, 370, 409, 411, 415 and 418. 


‘Students with a major in business administration may not minor in management 
information systems. Such students should consult the Business Administration 
curriculum for concentration in management information systems. 


248 Management Information Systems 


Department of 
Management Science 



Department Chair: Zvi Drezner 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 540 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Science 
Master of Business Administration 
Concentration in Management Science 
Master of Science in Management Science 

Concentration in Management Information Systems 
Concentration in Operations Research 
Concentration in Statistics 

Faculty 

Shu-Jen Chen, Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, Ben Edmondson, 
Nicholas Farnum, Daryoush Farsi, Zvi Goldstein, S. 
Hanizavareh, William Heitzman, Bhushan Kapoor, Ramesh 
Kumar, Mabel Kung, Bharat Lakhanpal, William Lau, John 
Lawrence, George Marcoulides, Do Le Minh, Barry 
Pasternack, Sore! Reisman, Herbert Rutemiller, Joseph Sherif, 
Sohan Sihota, Ram Singhania, La Verne Stanton, Ronald 
Suich 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments; registration and grading procedures; residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Management Science Depart- 
ment provides advising about curriculum content and career op- 
portunities: 

Graduate Program: Zvi Drezner, John Lawrence 

Statistics: George Marcoulides, Sohan Sihota, La Verne Stanton, 

Ronald Suich 

Information Systems: Mabel Kung, Bharat Lakhanpal, William 
Lau, Sorel Reisman, Ram Singhania 

Operations Research: Roger Dear, Zvi Drezner, John Lawrence, 
Barry Pasternak 


Management Science 249 



INTRODUCTION 

Management Science is the application of the scientific method 
to decision-making in business and government. In practice, 
nearly all management science problems involve solutions using 
computers. Three of the major disciplines in management sci- 
ence are operations research, statistics and information systems. 
Operations research uses mathematical and simulation models to 
provide decision-makers with quantitative information pertain- 
ing to complex business situations. Statistics assists decision-mak- 
ers by using techniques designed to draw inferences from experi- 
mental and sampling data. Information systems focus on the appli- 
cation of modern computer technology to provide accurate and 
relevant data to aid decision-making. 

Situations that require operations research techniques arise in all 
areas of business: accounting, finance, production, marketing, 
and research and development. Among the problems addressed 
by operations research techniques are the determination of in- 
ventory strategies, the allocation of scarce resources and the 
design of service systems. Others include bidding in competitive 
environments, selection of equipment replacement strategies and 
scheduling the completion of large projects. 

The statistician is often involved in activities such as sales fore- 
casting, quality control and financial analysis. Statistics is also 
concerned with model building and the design of experiments 
dealing with product testing, surveys and sampling. 

Information systems is concerned with the management of large 
databases and the efficient reporting of timely information to 
decision makers. It relates to both the data processing hardware 
and the computer software. The hardware includes the computer 
and its peripheral equipment. The software is used to create, 
maintain and retrieve information. Information systems methods 
integrate mathematical modeling and statistics with modem in- 
formation and computer technology. These methods are applied 
tosystems management, analysis of information flow, and pro- 
gramming design. 

Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Management Science offers courses which may be included in 
the Single Subject Waiver Program in Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Credential Programs section of this 
catalog and is also available from the Department of Secondary 
Education. Students interested in exploring careers in teaching 
at the elementary or secondary school levels should contact the 
Office of Admission to Teacher Education, Education Classroom 

207. 

Prizes in Management Science 

Outstanding Management Science Undergraduate Award 
Outstanding Management Science Graduate Student Award 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Science Concentra- 
tion.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Management Science Concentra- 
tion.’ 1 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 

The Master of Science in Management Science program provides 
the conceptual understanding and technical competence for a 
career in management science. Emphasis is placed on the use of 
scientific method to allocate resources so as to maximize profit or 
minimize cost. Specializations include operations research, man- 
agement information systems and statistics. These techniques are 
widely used in both private business and public enterprise. Em- 
ployment opportunities include positions such as management 
analyst, data processing manager, statistician and forecaster. 

The M.S. in Management Science program is scheduled espe- 
cially for students who are employed full time. Courses are offered 
during the late afternoon and evening. 

The curriculum should appeal to students with undergraduate 
degrees in business administration, computer science, mathemat- 
ics, engineering or science. For students with an undergraduate 
degree in business administration, the 10-course (30-unit) cur- 
riculum may be completed in 2*/2 years (part time). In addition to 
a three-course survey of management science methods, the cur- 
riculum includes management science applications, electives, 
and a terminal research project. Students with a bachelor’s de- 
gree in a field other than business administration must first com- 
plete the eight M.B. A. Foundation Courses (26 units) or equiv- 
alent undergraduate courses. 

Cal State Fullerton is the only university in Orange County 
accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Busi- 
ness. This assures a rigorous program, a well-qualified faculty, 
high standards for students, and access to an extensive library 
system. The qualifications of the M.S. in Management Science 
faculty include advanced degrees in operations research, statistics 
and applied mathematics; extensive computer experience; and 
practical experience in business, industry and government. Cal 
State Fullerton is the only campus within The California State 
University offering an M.S. in Management Science. 

Most graduate courses in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics require “classified SBAE status” and are open 
only to students with classified standing in the M.S. in Manage- 
ment Science, M.S. in Taxation, M.A. in Economics, M.B. A. 
or M.S. in Accountancy programs. 


250 Management Science 


Students meeting the following requirements will he admitted to 
postbaccalaureate unclassified standing: 

1. Acceptable bachelor’s degree from an institution accredited 
by a regional accrediting association, or equivalent. 

2. Grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the last 60 semester 
units attempted and in good standing at last college attended. 

Postbaccalaureate unclassified students may enroll in undergrad- 
uate courses (100 through 400 level) but are generally ineligible 
for graduate business courses (500 level). Such students may wish 
to take undergraduate courses which are necessary to meet the 
requirements for classified standing (see below). Upon complet- 
ing the requirements, the student may file an “Application for 
Change of Academic Objective Graduate” requesting admission 
to the M.S. in Management Science program. Admission to the 
university as a postbaccalaureate unclassified student does not 
constitute admission to the M.S. in Management Science pro- 
gram, does not confer priority, nor does it guarantee future admis- 
sion. Students planning to apply for admission to the M.S. in 
Management Science program should confer with the graduate 
adviser in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
admitted to the M.S. in Management Science program with 
conditionally classified standing: 

3. Combination of grade-point average and score on the Gradu- 
ate Management Admission Test (GM AT) sufficient to yield a 
score of at least 950 according to one of the following formu- 
las. Due to limited facilities and resources in the School of 
Business Administration and Economics, a higher score may be 
required of all applicants. 

A. If overall undergraduate GPA is at least 2.5 and GMAT is 
at least 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT. 

B. If overall undergraduate GPA is below 2.5 or GMAT is 
below 450, then score = (GPA x 200) + GMAT - 50. 

C. If GPA is based on the last 60 semester units of course 
work,* then score = (GPA x 200) 4* GMAT -100. 

Conditionally classified students may take a limited number of 
graduate courses (500 level) subject to the approval of the gradu- 
ate adviser of the School of Business Administration and Eco- 
nomics. Students may take whatever courses are necessary to 
fulfill requirement 4 (below) while enrolled as conditionally clas- 
sified students. In addition, a maximum of 9 units (three courses) 
from the M.S. in Management Science curriculum may be taken 
while in conditionally classified standing. 

Students meeting the following additional requirements will be 
advanced to classified standing. Such students are eligible to take 
graduate courses for which they are qualified. 


4. A bachelor’s degree with a major in business administration 
which meets the requirements stated in this catalog for such 
degrees. The degree must include calculus and computer pro- 
gramming equivalent to passing Mathematics 135, Business 
Calculus (3 units), and Management Science 264, Introduc- 
tion to Computer Programming (2 units), with grades of at 
least C. Courses in the major are to be no more than seven 
years old, and must have at least a 3.0 (B) grade-point aver- 
age. Courses with grades lower than C must be repeated. 
Applicants with a bachelor’s degree in a field other than Business 
Administration may meet this requirement by passing the 
courses in calculus and computer programming (above) with 
grades of at least C, and also the Foundation Courses within 
the curriculum of the Master of Business Administration (27 
units, including Accounting 510; Business Admin 590; Eco- 
nomics 515; Finance 517; Management 516, 518; Manage- 
ment Science 513, 515 and Marketing 519). 


* All work within any given quarter or semester must he included even though that 
will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to he included in the last 60 
semester units may come only from the following: ( I ) work taken in posthaccalaur- 
eate status during the last seven years toward fulfilling M.S. in Management Science 
course work requirements; (2) units taken under a prescribed remedial program 
agreed to by the Associate Dean. School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics^) units earned prior to the bachelor’s degree. 

5. Approval of study plan. 

Curriculum 

The curriculum requires 30 semester units of course work beyond 
the baccalaureate degree. At least 18 of the 30 units required for 
the degree must be at the graduate level. A grade-point average of 
3.0 (B) is required. Any study plan course in which a D is 
received must be repeated and must receive at least a C grade 
regardless of the overall GPA of the student. 

The requirement for a concentration is to satisfactorily complete 
at least 1 5 units of courses (required and/or elective) in a specified 
field: Management Information Systems, Operations Research or 
Statistics. A concentration is not required for the degree. 

Required Courses (9 units) 

Manag Sci 526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis and 
Experimental Design (3) 

Manag Sci 550 Special Topics on Information Systems 
Design and Data Communication (3) . 

Manag Sci 560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
or Manag Sci 561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 

Management Science Applications and Electives (18 units) 

Courses to be selected in consultation with, and approved by, the 
student’s adviser from the following: 

Applications m Business and Economics (3 units) 

Accounting 511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Note: Students with credit for cost accounting may substitute 
Accounting 521, Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 


Management Science 251 


Economics 502 Adv. Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Finance 523 Sem in Corporate Financial Management (3) 
Management 444 Project Management (3) 
or Marketing 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Electives (15 units) 

Courses may be chosen from one or more of the following fields: 


Operations Research: 

A general approach to decision-making based on scientific method. 


Manag Sci 560 
Manag Sci 561 
Manag Sci 580 
Manag Sci 585 
Business and 


Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 
Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 
Linear Programming (3) 

Queueing and Stochastic Processes in 
Economics (3) 


Management Information Systems: 

Computer methods for collecting, analyzing and reporting data 
to aid in management decision making. 


Manag Sci 408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 
or Manag Sci 555 Data Structures and Data Base 
Management (3) 

Manag Sci 409 Distributed Data Processing (3) 

Manag Sci 41 1 Data Process with Small Computers (3) 
Manag Sci 415 Decision Support and Expert Systems (3) 
Manag Sci 416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 
Manag Sci 418 Privacy, Security and Data Process (3) 


Statistics: 

Collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data. 


Manag Sci 420 
Manag Sci 422 

(3) 

Manag Sci 461 

(4) 

Manag Sci 467 
Manag Sci 472 
Manag Sci 475 


Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Surveys and Sample Design and Applications 

Statistical Theory for Management Science 

Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Design of Experiments (3) 

Multivariate Analysis (3) 


Variable Topic: 

Manag Sci 590 Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Terminal Evaluation 

Manag Sci 576 Business Modeling and Simulation 
Comprehensive Exam 


Management Science Courses 

263 Introduction to Information Systems and Micro- 
Computer Applications (2) 

Concepts of micro and mainframe computers and peripheral 
equipment; hardware and software concepts; representation of 
Data; auxiliary storage and file organization; data communica- 
tions. Hands-on examples of business applications in micro-com- 
puter classroom. Students may not receive credit for both Man- 
agement Science 263 and 265. 


264 Introduction to Computer Programming (2) 

Computer programming in the BASIC language, including file 
processing and other applications to business data processing. 


265 Introduction to Information Systems and Computer 
Programming (3) 

Introduction to information systems; computer organization and 
problem-solving concepts; computer programming in the BASIC 
language, including file processing; applications to business data 
processing. Micro Computer applications and hands-on exam- 
ples in a microcomputer classroom. Instructional fee required. 


265L Computer Programming Lab (1) 

Corequisite: Management Science 265. Hands-on computer pro- 
gramming experience for common business problems using 
spread sheets, word processing, BASIC, data base management 
and graphics software. 


270 File Concepts and COBOL Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 264 or 265 or Computer Sci- 
ence 1 12 or equivalent. Structured COBOL; multiple-level table 
handling, subscripting and indexing; file organization documen- 
tation; report generation; sequential file updating. 


309 Elements of Information System Design (3) 

(Formerly 300) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 270. Passing grade on MIS 
qualifying exam. Data management, operating systems, sorting 
and searching techniques, use of storage devices, interface equip- 
ment, random access and sequential titles, data structures; CO- 
BOL project required. 


361 Probability and Statistical Methods in Business and 
Economics (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 135 and Management Science 265 or equiv- 
alents. Probability concepts; expectations; descriptive statistics; dis- 
crete and continuous random variables; sampling; estimation; hy- 
pothesis testing; simple and multiple regression; time series; fore- 
casting; nonparametric statistics. Instructional fee required. 


252 Management Science 


362 Management Science Methods in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 (may be taken concur- 
rently). Mathematical methods and their application to business 
and economic problems, e.g., production control, scheduling, 
inventory control, PERT, decision and network analyses, simula- 
tion and queueing. Elementary mathematical optimization and 
production models. Instructional fee required. 

365 Advanced BASIC Programming (3) (Formerly 333) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 265, passing grade on MIS 
qualifying exam. Advanced BASIC features: sequential and rela- 
tive files, sorting and searching, error checking and business 
system design. 

370 Advanced COBOL Programming (3) (Formerly 310) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 270 or consent of the instruc- 
tor. Advanced COBOL features: Indexed and direct file process- 
ing, report writer, sort feature, declarative and linkage sections, 
segmentation. Overlay structure, survey of job control language, 
libraries. Direct access. Hardware devices. 

408 Data Base Management Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 309. Integrated data base 
systems; logical organization; data description language (DDL); 
data manipulation language (DML); data independence; rela- 
tional data bases; selected data base management systems 
(DBMS). 

409 Telecommunications & Business Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 309. Communications de- 
sign, concepts and hardware, telecommunications protocol, Net- 
work Architectures and Configurations, LANs security and con- 
trol, communication services, voice and electronic mail. 

411 Advanced Microcomputer Concepts & Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 365 or 370. This course focus- 
es on contemporary issues in end user computing characterized by 
microcomputer work statistics. Current hardware/software trends 
will be analyzed within an industry and systems perspective. 

415 Decision Support and Expert Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 309. Principles and proce- 
dures related to the design and use of expert systems and decision 
support systems principles in management decision making; de- 
velopment of expert systems using shells. 

416 Computer Performance Evaluation (3) 

(Same as Computer Science 416) 

418 Privacy and Security (3) 

Corequisite: Management Science 309. Security and privacy 
problems associated with the use of computer systems; ways to 
minimize risks and losses. 


420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Statistical methods ap- 
plied to problems in business and industry; practical multiple 
regression models with computer solutions; basic techniques in 
time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and seasonal components; 
correlation of time-series and forecasting with the computer. 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Principles for designing 
business and economic surveys. Applications in accounting, 
marketing research, economic statistics and the social sciences. 
Sampling; simple random, stratified and multistage design; con- 
struction of sampling frames; detecting and controlling non-sam- 
pling errors. 

440 Deterministic Models in Management Science (4) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Deterministic math- 
ematical modeling and solution techniques, including intermedi- 
ate linear programming, network models, integer programming, 
dynamic programming. 

441 Probabilistics Models in Management Science (4) 
Prerequisite: Management Science 362. Probabilistic mathemat- 
ical modeling and solution techniques for business, including 
quality control and forecasting models, Markov processes, inter- 
mediate queueing theory, probabilistic inventory models. 

448 Computer Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 264 and 361 (or equivalents) 
and Management Science 362. Computer generation of discrete 
and continuous random variables, their use in computer simula- 
tion. Applications include queueing, communications, comput- 
er systems, economics, gaming, inventory, scheduling and other 
management science topics. 

461 Statistical Theory for Management Science (4) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361 . Review of mathematical 
topics needed for statistical theory. Distribution, theory, moment 
generating functions, central limit theorem. Estimation theory, 
maximum likelihood, least squares estimation. Hypothesis test- 
ing, Neyman- Pearson Lemma. Likelihood ratio tests. Use of sta- 
tistical software packages. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Control charts for varia- 
bles, percent defective and defects. Tolerances, process capacity; 
special control charts, acceptance sampling and batch processing 
problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

472 Design of Experiments (3) (Formerly 572) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361. Experimental design. 
Analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested designs, con- 
founding and factorial replications. 


Management Science 253 


475 Multivariate Analysis (3) (Formerly 575) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361. The least squares prin- 
ciple; estimation and hypothesis testing in linear regression; mul- 
tiple and curvilinear regression models; discriminant analysis; 
principle components analysis; application of multivariate analy- 
sis in business and industry. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, and major in 
management science, or Management Science 309 and major in 
management information systems or a major in international 
business, consent of department internship adviser, and at least 
junior standing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at the 
university. Planned and supervised work experience. May be 
repeated for credit up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit 
grading only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 361 and 362, senior stand- 
ing, and approval by the department chair. Open to qualified 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be 
repeated for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

513 Statistical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 135, Management Science 264 (or equiv- 
alents) and classified SBAE status. Basic probability and descrip- 
tive statistics; sampling techniques; estimation and hypothesis 
testing; simple and multiple regression, correlation analysis; 
computer packages and other optional topics. 

514 Decision Models for Business and Economics (3) 
Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Linear programming; inventory; PERT-CPM; queueing; sim- 
ulation, computer application, forecasting; time series, and other 
optional topics. 

515 Management of Information in the Corporate 
Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Classified SBAE status. Review and application of 
management information systems in business. System planning, 
system design and analysis, use of files, decision support systems, 
expert systems, and implementation of management information 
systems. 

526 Forecasting, Decision Analysis, and Experimental 
Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Time Series Analysis. Trend, cyclical and seasonal compo- 
nents. Statistical decision theory. Fundamental principles of ex- 
perimental design; interaction. Software packages. 

550 Special Topics on Information Systems Design and Data 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE stand- 
ing. Information storage requirements; disk timing considerations; 
file organization and processing characteristics; data structures; 
modem data communication systems; computer networks. 


555 Data Structures and Data Base Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 550 and classified SBAE 
standing. File structures. Multiple-key retrieval file organiza- 
tions; Data Description Language (DDL) and Data Manipulation 
Language (DML); Data independence; hierarchial, network and 
relational data bases. Students may not receive credit for both 
Management Science 408 and 555. 

560 Advanced Deterministic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE 
standing. Advanced linear programming, dynamic program- 
ming, integer programming, non-linear programming, business 
applications. Software packages and computer utilization. 

561 Advanced Probabilistic Models (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 514 and classified SBAE 
standing. Stochastic processes, Markov processes, advanced 
queueing and inventory models. Reliability. Software packages 
and computer utilization. 

576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 513 or equivalent. Theory 
and application of modeling and simulation methodology. Proba- 
bilistic concepts in simulation; arrival pattern and service times; 
simulation languages and programming techniques; analysis of 
output; business applications. 

580 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 514. Theory and applications 
of linear programming and extentions. Problem formulation and 
solution, simplex method, duality, sensitivity analyses, network, 
transportation and assignment models, and efficient computing 
techniques for specially structured problems. 

585 Queueing and Stochastic Processes in Business and 
Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 513 and 514. Single and 
multichannel queueing systems of Markovian and general arrival 
and departure streams; birth-death processes, cost models and 
optimization of queues; Markov analyses; introduction to renewal 
theory; reliability. 

590 Seminar in Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Management Science 526 and 560 and classified 
SBAE status. Selected advanced topics and/or case studies in 
operations research, statistics, and/or management information 
systems, varying from semester to semester. May be repeated for 
credit with consent of instructor. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status and consent of department 
chair. May be repeated for credit. Not open to students on aca- 
demic probation. 


254 Management Science 




Department of Marketing 



Department Chair: Irene Lange 
Department Office: Langsdorf Hall 626 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration 
Concentration in Marketing 
Master of Business Administration 

Concentration in Marketing 

Faculty 

Robert Barath, Grady Bruce, Tom Buckles, Scott Greene, 
Katrin Harich, Paul Hugstad, Robert Jones, Irene Lange, 

Lance Leuthesser, John Ronchetto, Cliff Scott, James Taylor, 
Robert Zimmer 

Advisers 

The Business Advising Center, Langsdorf Hall 700, provides 
information on admissions, curriculum and graduation require- 
ments, registration and grading procedures, residence and similar 
academic matters. In addition, the Marketing Department pro- 
vides advising on curriculum content and career opportunities. 

INTRODUCTION 

Marketing is a basic business function, covering a wide range of 
activities. It includes studying markets, planning products, pric- 
ing them, promoting them, selling them, and then delivering 
these products to customers. People in wholesaling, retailing, 
advertising agencies, research firms and transportation compan- 
ies are all working in the marketing area. Any firm which is 
reviewing its product policies needs marketers to identify the 
market, choose the products, find where they can be sold and 
decide on a price for them. 


Credential Information 

For students interested in a teaching credential, the Department 
of Marketing offers courses which may be included in the Single 
Subject Waiver Program in Business. 

Further information on the requirements for teaching credentials 
is found in the Teaching Programs section of the catalog and is 
also available from the Department of Secondary Education. 
Students interested in exploring careers in teaching at the ele- 
mentary or secondary school levels should contact the Office of 
Admission to Teacher Education. 


Marketing 255 


Prizes in Marketing 

The Michael T. Ashton Memorial Scholarship for Outstanding 
Leadership 

The Gordon S. Fyfe Memorial Award for Outstanding 
Academic Achievement 
Outstanding Marketing Student Award 
International Marketing Association Award 
The Robert M. Olsen Scholarship Fund Award 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concentration.” 

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

See “Business Administration, Marketing Concentration.” 


Marketing Courses 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 202 or 210; corequisite: Management 
Science 361. Analyzes how managers of business enterprises can 
effectively market goods and services domestically and interna- 
tionally to target customers. Covers marketing research, new 
product development, brand management, pricing, promotion, 
and distribution channels. The role of marketing is critically 
examined from the consumer, economics, legal, political and 
ethical/social responsibility perspectives. 

353 Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Management Science 361; corequisite: Marketing 
351 with a grade of “C” or better. Examination of information 
sources and applications for the marketer. Emphasis on trans- 
forming data into business plans. Topics include use of computer- 
ized data bases, sales forecasting, interpretation of survey data 
and the creation of marketing presentations. Extensive computer 
applications. Instructional fee required. 

370 Buyer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 and 353 with a grade of “C” or 
better. Consumer buying patterns, motivation and search behav- 
ior. The consumer decision-making process. Interdisciplinary 
concepts from economics, sociology, psychology, cultural anthro- 
pology and mass communications. Case analyses and research 
projects. 

379 Marketing Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, 353 with a grade of “C" or better 
and Management Science 361. Marketing research process: 
problem formulation, identifying sources, selecting data collec- 
tion, analysis techniques, preparing research reports. Selecting 
marketing problems for research. Instructional fee required. 


401 Professional Selling (3) (Formerly 356) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C" or better. Salesmanship as an interpersonal influence pro- 
cess. Selling using principles of human behavior. Selling skills 
and techniques. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

405 Managing Advertising (3) (Formerly 454) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Examines the management of the advertising func- 
tion within the overall marketing task. Emphasis is given to 
managing distribution, managing the budget and managing cre- 
ativity. Advertiser, advertising agency and media relationships 
are considered. International advertising is reviewed. 

415 Managing the Sales Force (3) (Formerly 455) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. The sales manager’s role in the organization; re- 
cruiting and selecting sales people; sales training; formulating 
compensation and expense plans; supervising and stimulating 
sales activities; morale; sales planning; evaluating sales people; 
and distribution cost analysis. Uses the Behavioral Lab. 

425 Retail Marketing Strategy (3) (Formerly 456) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Examines the retailer’s role in the marketing sys- 
tem from a management perspective; developing integrated mar- 
keting and financial strategies; positioning the retail offer to 
convey meaning to target customers; merchandise management 
and control; and addressing changing market conditions — do- 
mestic and international. 

435 Business Marketing Management (3) (Formerly 469) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Examines the decision making implications in the 
business and organizational market as they apply to market seg- 
mentation, marketing planning and overall strategy formulation. 
The substrategies of product, price, promotion and distribution 
are discussed. International implications are considered. 

445 Multinational Marketing Strategies (3) (Formerly 458) 

Prerequisites: Marketing Majors: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 
379 with a grade of “C” or better. International Business Majors: 
Marketing 351 with a grade of “C” or better, Economics 335 and 
Finance 370. Theories of international trade and role of market- 
ing decisions across national boundaries and markets. Focuses on 
concepts and principles of marketing strategies in multinational 
organizations from market assessments, entry alternatives, posi- 
tions of global interdependence, marketing problems and ethical 
implications. Integrative cases, individual and team efforts em- 
phasized. 

465 Managing Services Marketing (3) (Formerly 460) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C” or better. Explores the differences between marketing ser- 
vices and marketing products. Also examines organizational re- 
quirements ot firms that market services in contrast with market- 
ing products. Considers the implications of marketing services 
internationally. 


256 Marketing 


475 Export Marketing Strategies (3) (Formerly 451) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353, 370 and 379 with a grade of 
“C" or better. Increases the student’s awareness of international 
trading trends, the importance of trade worldwide. Emphasis is 
on entrepreneurial aspects and organizational structure to ap- 
praise markets, evaluate alternative export strategies and under- 
stand planning process. Includes documentation, financial con- 
siderations, government regulations. 

489 Developing Marketing Strategies (3) (Formerly 459) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, 353, 370, 379 and one 400-level 
marketing course, all with “C" grade or better and senior stand- 
ing. Focuses on analysis of a wide variety of business situations. 
Analysis is followed by the development of a variety of possible 
marketing strategies. Extensive international orientation. Relies 
heavily on case studies and group interaction. 

495 Internship ( 1-3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division marketing courses, includ- 
ing Marketing 351, major in marketing or international business, 
consent of department internship adviser, and at least junior stand- 
ing, 2.5 GPA and one semester in residence at Cal State Fullerton. 
Planned and supervised work experience. May be repeated for credit 
up to a total of six units. Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing and ap- 
proval by the department chair. Open to undergraduate students 
desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated 
for credit. Not open to students on academic probation. 

519 Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, Economics 515, Manag Sci 513, 
514, Management 516, 518 (may be taken concurrently) and 
classified SBAE status. Concepts, principles and techniques used 
in the administration of the marketing variables. The role of 
marketing within the context of society and the business firm, 
social responsibility of business and international marketing. 


525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified SBAE status. Utilizes 
major marketing concepts: product development, market analy- 
sis, demand determination, pricing decisions, promotion activi- 
ties, distribution channels and organizational requirements. Stu- 
dents develop analytical skills by working with marketing and 
business problems from domestic and global perspectives. Lecture 
and case method. 


555 Marketing Strategy and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Classified SBAE status. Analysis of business situations 
and development of marketing strategy to gain competitive advan- 
tage. Uses strategy development tools such as experience curves, 
PLC, BCG grid, GE business policy directional matrix among oth- 
ers. Extensive use of case analysis and decision making. 


596 Contemporary Topics in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent; classified SBAE sta- 
tus. Topics in areas such as marketing of services, public policy 
and consumer issues and strategic planning. May be repeated for 
credit. 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified SBAE status. Directed independent inqui- 
ry. Not open to students on academic probation. 


599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified SBAE status, consent of instructor and 
approval by department chair. May be repeated for credit. Not 
open to students on academic probation. 


Marketing 257 


ai •ff.nimor ?$l 

a •• -\< vkmuM i,.-' % * ♦ i iA • . ; t m ; : v ?i ti f ) & ,.*h: r i • >i*l 

■: 


\ -■ ') **i#0 ntxpta 

M* i'.i'v ’ht'A Q&a hn®.f$il . ^ * K ; 

*■ ‘ #?vr< ' .'. f ,a^r» »nifci.. 

•*/, •• o • : 0’ ■ ■ - , ' i,.'-*-j'>ntno>if«K> no 

'< W • t! t • j\B 

nro / : .1 - - -oaf". *& 
•* .'h-^rto 5 }? • :■ ' fctiri© nwM PH* 

I 

i .- • • >i •• fu ipppfiv*. at ; t. /*|i02«£«Rfli 

' .up ^ xie l/ v . *, 01 -tl« 

.f -.fi. n«> -a* ktm ot .raqo K ’ rtb*i » id 










School of 
Communications 



Dean: David Sachsman 
Associate Dean: Robert Emry 

Programs offered 

Bachelor of Arts In Communications 

Concentrations in: Advertising 
Journalism 

Photocommunications 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television-Film 

Bachelor of Arts in Communicative Disorders 
Bachelor of Arts in Speech Communication 
Master of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations in: Advertising 
Journalism 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television-Film 

Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Clinical Rehabilitative Services Credential (CRSC) with Spe- 
cial Class Authorization (SCA) 

Master of Arts in Speech Communication 

Minor in Speech Communication 

Waiver Program for the Single Subject Credential 

The School of Communications is committed to advancing a 
democratic society by preparing students to function in a wide 
variety of communication professions. With a strong tradition in 
the liberal arts and social sciences, the academic programs of the 
School share a common theoretical base which identifies the 
elements of human communication and the principles governing 
their use in all communicative processes essential to contempo- 
rary society, namely, the spoken and written word and visual 
images. Specialized programs in advertising, communication the- 
ory and process, intercultural, interpersonal, organizational com- 
munication, communication studies, communicative disorders, 
news-editorial, photocommunications, public relations, and ra- 
dio-television-film make up the basic curricula of the School. 
These programs of study lead to traditional academic degrees for 
undergraduates and graduates, to state credentials and licenses, 
to professional certification, and to entry into graduate and pro- 
fessional degree programs. 


School of Communications 261 



Academic programs in the School of Communications prepare 
students to function as communication professionals in the fields 
of business, education, government, and the health-related pro- 
fessions. Undergraduate and graduate degrees are offered in Com- 
munications, Communicative Disorders, and Speech Communi- 
cation. Ancillary education experiences are available through 
the campus daily newspaper, television facilities, forensics pro- 
gram (debate), speech and hearing clinic, and internships in 
professional settings. 

The School also serves as a locus for the surrounding professional 
community in which leaders in the communication professions 
provide and receive advice and counsel on matters related to 
public interest, curricular development, career interests, and op- 
portunities for service to the greater good of the community as a 
whole. 

The School is dedicated to the principles of academic excellence 
and sees its fundamental mission as preparing citizens to function 
as effective communicators who practice their disciplines in ac- 
cordance with the highest ethical codes of professional and per- 
sonal conduct. 

Advisement 

Undergraduate students may call their department office for the 
name of their adviser, who will assist in developing a program of 
study. University policy requires students to see an adviser each of 
their first two semesters and every year thereafter. Three critical 
times for advising are before registering for the first semester, 
when selecting electives for the study plan, and two semesters 
before graduation for a graduation check. 

Graduate students should make contact with their department 
graduate adviser to arrange for advisement prior to entry into the 
master’s degree programs. 

Student Organizations 

The School of Communications supports a large number of stu- 
dent organizations and activities which provide a wide variety of 
pre-professional opportunities for academic advancement. They 
include: the Advertising Club: National Student Speech- 


Language- Hearing Association; Association of Speech Commu- 
nication Students; Broadcast Production Association; Communi' 
cations Week; Daily Titan; Debate (forensics); International Asso- 
ciation of Business Communicators; Latino Communications So- 
ciety; National Press Photographers Association; Photography 
Club; Public Relations Student Society of America; Society of 
Professional Journalists; and Women in Communication, Inc. 

Accreditation 

The Department of Communications is accredited by the Ac- 
crediting Council on Education in Journalism and Mass Commu- 
nications. The Communicative Disorders program in the Depart- 
ment of Speech Communication is accredited by the American 
Speech-Language-Hearing Association. 

Internships 

A wide variety of student internships are available throughout 
Southern California. In the Department of Communications, 
students are required to complete an internship, unless specifical- 
ly waived from doing so, normally as the culminating undergrad- 
uate experience. The Speech Communications internship is nor- 
mally taken sometime in the junior or senior year. 

Scholarships and Awards 

Some $30,000 in scholarships and awards is presented annually 
to students in the School of Communications. Among the spon- 
sors of scholarships are the Advertising Club of Orange County, 
the Business/Professional Advertising Association of Orange 
County, the Hearst Foundation, the Orange County chapter of 
the Public Relations Society of America. Awards annually are 
presented to students who excel in academic and pre-professional 
activities in the two departments. 

Facilities 

The School of Communications is equipped with modem labora- 
tory facilities including a sophisticated speech and hearing clinic; 
large and comprehensive photography darkroom and studio fa- 
cility; two 20-station computerized writing laboratories; a Mac- 
intosh-based graphics laboratory; a television studio, control 
room, and video editing bays; a film editing laboratory; and a 
daily newspaper newsroom and production area. 


262 School of Communications 


Department of 
Communications 

Department Chair: Terry Hynes 

Vice Chair: Rick Pullen 

Department Office: Humanities 230 

Daily Titan Newsroom: Humanities 213 

Daily Titan Business Manager: Humanities 22 5 A 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations: Advertising 

Journalism 

Photocommunications 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television Film 

Master of Arts in Communications 

Concentrations: Advertising 

Journalism 
Public Relations 
Radio-Television Film 


Faculty 

James Alexander, Jay Berman, Carl Burrowes, Fenton 
Calhoun, Wendell Crow, J. Nickolas DeBonis, David DeVries, 
Ronald Dyas, Tony Fellow, Edward Fink, Joanne Gula, Terry 
Hynes, Carolyn Johnson, Paul Lester, Sirish Mani, George 
Manross, George Mastroianni, Norman Nager, Patrick 
O’Donnell, Coral Ohl, Wayne Overbeck, Robert Pickard, 
David Pincus, Rick Pullen, Robert Rayfield, Tony Rimmer, 
Marvin Rosen, Ted Smythe, Don Sunoo, Edgar Trotter, Larry 
Ward, Fred Zandpour 

Advisers 

Undergraduate: All faculty serve as undergraduate advisers. Stu- 
dents may find their assigned adviser posted on the bulletin board 
outside Humanities 230. 

Graduate: Tony Rimmer 

INTRODUCTION 

Effective ethical communications are essential for the well-being 
of a democratic society. Thus, there is a need for persons trained 
in the theory and practice of informing, instructing, and persuad- 
ing through communications media. The educational objectives 
of the programs leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Communica- 
tions are: (1) to ensure that all majors receive a broad liberal 
education; (2) to provide majors with a clear understanding of 
the role of communications media in society ;and (3) to prepare 
majors desiring communications-related careers in the mass me- 
dia, business, government and education by educating them in- 
depth in one of the specialized sequences within the department. 



Communications 263 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

A communications major is required to take 1 1 units of core 
requirements in addition to 23 units in a chosen concentration. 
The department offers five concentrations: advertising, journal- 
ism, photocommunications, public relations, and radio-televi- 
sion-film. Students may substitute a broadcast journalism pro- 
gram shared between the journalism and radio-television-film 
concentrations. The major totals 34 units. 

Collateral requirements: Twelve units of upper-division course 
work in other departments approved by the adviser are also re- 
quired. Collateral courses for each concentration are recom- 
mended by the concentration coordinator. 

Every major must take a minimum of 90 units outside communi- 
cations out of the 124 units required for graduation. Of this 90 
units, 65 must be in the traditional liberal arts, humanities & 
sciences. Consult your department adviser and the School of 
Communications Advisement Center early in your course work 
to be sure you meet these requirements. 

Communications Core 

The communications core provides background and perspective 
appropriate to all the departmental concentrations and an under- 
standing of the role of communicators and their contribution to 
the development of high standards of professionalism. 

Eight units of required course work: 

Comm 233 Mass Comm in Modern Society (2) 

Comm 407 Communications Law (3) 

Comm 425 History and Philosophy of American 
Mass Communication (3) 


Plus three units selected from the following: 

Comm 410 Principles of Comm Research (3) 

Comm 426 World Communication Systems (3) 
Comm 427 Current Issues in Mass Comm (3) 
Comm 428 Communications and Social Change (3) 
Comm 43 1 Mass Communications in Communist 
Systems (3) 

Comm 480 Persuasive Communications (3) 


Communications Concentrations 

Every communications major must select and complete 23 units 
of course work in a major concentration. 

Advertising 

The objective of the advertising concentration is to prepare stu- 
dents for entry level positions in one or more of the four basic 
advertising activities: creative (copy, layout design), media, re- 
search, and management. Students are provided with knowledge 
and skills needed for work with an advertiser, advertising agency, 
the print and broadcast media, or support service industry. 


Comm 101 
Comm 350 
Comm 352 
Comm 353 
Comm 358 
Comm 439 
Comm 450 


Writing for the Mass Media (3) 
Principles of Advertising (3) 
Advertising Media (3) 

Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 
Graphics Communications (3) 

Mass Media Internship (2) 
Advertising Comm Management (3) 


Plus three units selected from the following: 
Comm 217, 301, 361, 362, 381, 410, 451 


And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond gen- 
eral education which must be selected from the following list of 
approved courses: American Studies 301, 318, 345; Economics 
310; English 301; Managment 340; Marketing 351, 401, 370, 
379; Philosophy 312; Political Science 310; Psychology 351, 361; 
Sociology 345, 372, 436; Speech Communication 320, 333. 
Courses not listed must he approved in advance by an adviser. 

Journalism 

Hie principal objective of the journalism concentration is to pro- 
vide the skills and practice necessary for careers in the print media. 
Specifically, the concentration objectives are: ( 1 ) to provide experi- 
ence in writing various types of news stories, and to develop skills in 
reporting and news gathering techniques; (2) to develop critical 
acumen necessary to check news stories for accuracy and correct- 
ness; (3) to develop skills in graphics or photography that comple- 
ment the journalistic writing skills; (4) to provide actual on-the-job 
experience by working on the campus newspaper and through an 
internship, and (5) to add breadth and depth to the professional’s 
specialized skills through collateral courses. 


Comm 101 
Comm 201 
Comm 332 
Comm 335 
Comm 338 
Comm 439 


Writing for the Mass Media (3) 
Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 
Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 
Public Affairs Reporting (3) 
Newspaper Production (3) 

Mass Media Internship (2) 


Plus three units from: Communications 217 or 
Comm 358 (with adviser’s consent). 


And three units from: Communications 334, 430, 435, 436. 

Students who want to pursue broadcast journalism may substitute 
the above concentration requirements with the following courses: 
Communications 101, 302, 335, 371, 372, 382, 390, and 439. 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses in four dif- 
ferent departments which must be selected from the following list 
of approved courses: Economics 330, 335, 350, 361; English 300, 
303, 305, 462, 463, 464; History 475, 476, 484, 485B; Political 
Science 300, 310, 315, 340, 350, 375, 440, 443, 451, 457, 461, 
473; Sociology 301, 341, 345, 348; Philosophy 300, 301, 304, 
345. Courses not listed must be approved in advance by adviser. 
Students may substitute a University-approved minor with advis- 
er’s consent. 


264 Communications 


Photocommunications 

The photocommunications concentration provides a compre- 
hensive study of the aesthetics, theories, and practices of con- 
temporary photography for professional careers in magazine and 
newspaper photojournalism, and advertising/commercial 
photography. 

Comm 101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Comm 217 Introduction to Black and White 
Photography (3) 

Comm 319 Photojournalism (3) 

Comm 321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Comm 311, 326, 338, 340, 358, 409, 460. 

Plus one of the following classes: 

Comm 301, 334, 362. 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond gen- 
eral education which must be selected from the following list of 
approved courses: American Studies 333; Anthropology 306; 
Philosophy 311; Political Science 300; Biology 411; Chemistry 
301 A,B; Physics 411; Art 312 and 470; Finance 310; Poli Sci 
310; Psychology 303 and 351; Sociology 345. Courses not listed 
must be approved in advance by an adviser. 

Public Relations 

This concentration provides preparation in both theory and prac- 
tice of two-way communication and management counsel for 
prospective professional public relations careers in business, in- 
dustry, agency, government, and nonprofit sectors of society. 

Comm 101 Writing for Mass Media (3) 

Comm 361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Comm 362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Comm 464 Public Relations Management (3) 

Plus one writing course from among the following: 

Comm 301, 334, or 338 

Plus six units selected from the following: 

Comm 217, 350, 358, 363, 410, 467, 497 

And twelve collateral units of upper division courses beyond 
general education which must be selected from the following: Art 
323A; Economics 310, 320, 410; Finance 320, 340; Manage- 
ment 339, 340, 343; Marketing 351; Management Science 422; 
English 301, 360; Geography 370; Health Education 407; Politi- 
cal Science 309, 413, 415; Psychology 351, 391, 453, 472; Soci- 
ology 341, 345, 348, 473; Speech Communication 300, 320, 
324, 333, 334, 420, 425. Courses not listed must be approved in 
advance by an adviser. 


Radio-Television-Film 

Courses in this concentration are designed for an understanding 
of the history, theory and practice of radio-television and film. 
Students are prepared for entry level positions in business, educa- 
tion, and the broadcasting, cable and film industries. 

Comm 301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 

Comm 382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Comm 390 Introduction to Video Production (3) 

Comm 402 Advanced Writing for Radio, TV and 
Film (3) 

Comm 439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Plus nine units selected from the following: 

Comm 290 A, 290B, 311, 345, 375, 378, 411, 478, 479, 
484 or 488 

And twelve collateral units of upper-division courses beyond gen- 
eral education which must be selected from the following list of 
approved courses: Economics 320, 340, 350; English 322, 463, 
465; History 476, 485; Management 339, 340, 343, 441 ; Market- 
ing 351, 401; Political Science 315, 410, 414; Psychology 350, 
351, 391; Sociology 348, 371, 436; Speech Communication 320, 
324, 325, 333; Theatre 364. Courses not listed must be approved 
in advance by an adviser. 

Students who want to pursue broadcast journalism may substitute 
the above concentration requirements with the following 
courses: Communications 101, 302, 335, 371, 372, 382, 390 and 
439 as well as the collateral course requirements listed under the 
journalism concentration. 

Writing Requirements 

A communications major must satisfy both departmental and 
university writing requirements. English Usage Test (EUT): The 
EUT is a prerequisite to Communications department writing 
courses. It is administered free in January, April, August and 
October. Students are allowed three attempts to earn a passing 
score, but all attempts must be completed within one year of the 
initial attempt. The test should be taken prior to declaring a 
major in communications or immediately following enrollment 
in communications classes. Only students who have earned a 
baccalaureate degree or who have equivalent EPT, SAT or ACT 
scores are exempt from the EUT requirement. 

University Writing Requirement: The course work portion of the 
university’s upper-division baccalaureate writing requirement for 
communications majors may be met by satisfactory completion of 
anyone of Communications 301, 334, 335, 338, 353, 362, 371, 
and 402. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

The degree is designed to provide advanced study in communica- 
tions theory and research plus some concentration in one of the 
department’s sequences: advertising, journalism, public rela- 
tions, or radio-television-film. 


Communications 265 


The program prepares the graduate to apply advanced communi- 
cations concepts, research and development skills, and theories 
relevant to the use of communications media for a wide variety of 
purposes. Such study may serve those whose careers involve the 
use of print, broadcast and film media of communications to 
inform, instruct and persuade. Communications skills are highly 
applicable to a wide range of careers in business, industry, govern- 
ment, education and the mass media. 

Students completing the Master of Arts in Communications are 
eligible for journalism teaching positions in community colleges. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Normally, an applicant must meet grade-point average require- 
ments of 3.0 in the undergraduate major and 2.75 in the last 60 
semester units of undergraduate course work, meet the university 
requirements, and satisfactorily complete the Graduate Record 
Examination General Test prior to admission. Students must also 
submit three letters of recommendation and an essay (approxi- 
mately 1000 words) outlining reasons for pursuing the masters 
degree. Consult department for details regarding additional ad- 
mission requirements. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student admitted in conditionally classified standing may he 
granted classified standing upon the development of an approved 
study plan and satisfactory completion of prerequisite course 
work. Satisfactory coursework or its equivalent in the following 
may be taken concurrently with degree requirements if not com- 
pleted prior to classification: 

(a) communications writing (Comm 201, 301, 353, 

or 362) 

(b) an introductory course in the area of specialization 

(Comm 332, 350, 361 or 382) 

(c) Comm 410 Principles of Communication 

Research 

Study Plan 

The student is required to complete 30 units of approved studies 
with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 including 15 units in 
500-level communications courses. Six of the 1 5 units of 500- 
level courses will be in thesis or project. The remaining units will 
be comprised of upper division or 500-level courses appropriate to 
the communications sequence. 

The candidate shall develop a program of study in consultation with 
a sequence adviser and the graduate adviser of the Department of 
Communications. The candidate shall plan the thesis or project 
topic with a committee. The committee will include at least two 
faculty members from the Department of Communications. 


Study plan requirements include the following: 

Core Courses (6 units) 

Comm 500 Theory and Literature of 
Communications 

Comm 508 Humanistic Research in 
Communications 

or Comm 509 Social Science Research in 
Communications 

Sequence-Related. Courses (18 units) 

Comm 515 Professional Problems in Related Fields 
or approved 500-level alternate 
Comm 520A, B or C Communications Practicum 
or approved alternate 

Consult the Communications Department Master’s Pro- 
gram bulletin for additional sequence requirements. 

Electives (0-6 units) 

Project/Thesis/ Exam (0-6 units) 

Comm 597 Project (3) 
or Comm 598 Thesis (6) 
or Comprehensive Exam 

For further information and advisement, please consult the grad- 
uate program adviser. 


Communications Courses 

101 Writing for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage Test; 
typing ability. Principles and practices of writing for major types 
of mass communications media. Content, organization, concise- 
ness and clarity. (CAN JOUR 2) 

201 Reporting for the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, 
Communications 101 or equivalent; typing ability. Development 
of expertise in the use of news reporting techniques combined 
with development of ability to compose complex journalistic 
writing forms for possible publication. 

217 Introduction to Black and White Photography (3) 

Cameras, accessories, materials, exposure, processing, printing, 
finishing, composition, filters, flash, studio techniques, and spe- 
cial subject treatments and applications. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 


266 Communications 


233 Mass Communication in Modern Society (2) 

Newspapers, magazines, films, radio and television; their signifi- 
cance as social instruments and economic entities in modern 
society. (CAN JOUR 4) 

290 A, B History and Aesthetics of the Motion Picture (3,3) 

The study of motion picture as a global influence in mass commu- 
nications and entertainment. Examination of film movements, 
the rise and fall of the studio system, and social influences. A — 
Origins to 1945; B — 1945 to present. Film screenings on and off 
campus. (2 hours lecture; 3 hours activity) 

301 Writing for Broadcasting and Film (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications Department English Usage Test; 
typing ability. Theory and principles of writing in the broadcast 
and film media. 

302 Writing Broadcast News (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, 
Comm 101 or equivalent; typing ability. Intensive journalistic 
writing and reporting for radio and television. Emphasis on writ- 
ing assignments for both audio and video tape. Lecture/discussion 
of issues and responsibilities facing broadcast journalists. 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Theory and practice of motion picture photography and film 
production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

319 Photojournalism (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 217 or equivalent. Photography for publica- 
tion in print media. News, advertising, feature, sports, lifestyle, 
photo essay and documentary applications. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

321 Advanced Color Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: Junior standing and Comm 319 or consent of in- 
structor. Positive and negative color film processing sensitometry, 
and color printing. Creative and effective use of color in publica- 
tions photography. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

326 Communications Photography (3) 

Prerequisites: Junior standing and Comm 321, or consent of 
instructor. Photographs and photographic communications pro- 
duced with the large format camera for the mass media, business, 
education, government, industry and science. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test 
and Comm 201 or equivalent. Principles and practice of newspa- 
per editing: copy improvement, headline writing, news photos 
and cutlines, wire services, typography, copy schedules and con- 
trol, page design and layout, law and ethics. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 


334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test 
and Comm 101 or equivalent. Nonfiction writing for newspapers 
and magazines; sources, methods and markets. 

335 Public Affairs Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications ITepartment English Usage Test, 
Comm 101 and 201, or consent of instructor; and junior stand- 
ing. Comm 407 recommended. Reporting public interest news 
such as courts, education, finance, government, police and ur- 
ban problems. 

338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, 
Comm 201 or equivalent or consent of instructor. Members of 
the class constitute the editorial staff of the university newspaper. 
Meets four hours per week for critiques in news reporting, writ- 
ing, editing and makeup, followed by production. May be repeat- 
ed for a maximum of six units of credit. (More than 9 hours 
laboratory) 

340 Photography in Advertising and Public Relations (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and Comm 326 or consent of in- 
structor. Advertising and public relations photography. Materials 
and techniques for producing photographs with visual impact 
suitable for photo reproduction. Students will prepare a portfolio 
of photographs. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours activity) 

345 The Language of Film and Television (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 233 or consent of instructor. Critical and 
theoretical analysis of film and television as communication. 
Examines the manner in which an organized sequence of images 
and sounds communicates meaning using literature in semiology 
and visual communications. 

350 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Advertising in America. The language and art of advertising and 
its role in marketing. 

352 Advertising Media (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 350 and junior standing. Planning, execu- 
tion and control of advertising media programs. Basic data and 
characteristics of the media. Buying and selling process, tech- 
niques, and methods in media planning process. Audience mea- 
surement and media analysis. 

353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test 
and Comm 101, 350 or consent of instructor; and junior stand- 
ing. Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, based on study 
of sales appeals, attention factors and illustrations. (2 hours lec- 
ture, 2 hours activity) 

358 Graphics Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. Printing processes, publication for- 
mats, copy preparation, copy-fitting techniques, layout princi- 
ples, paper selection and distribution methods. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours activity) 


Communications 267 


361 Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing- The social, behavioral, psychologi- 
cal, ethical, economic and political foundations of public rela- 
tions, and the theories of public relations as a communications 
discipline. 

362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test; 
Comm 101 or consent of instructor; typing ability; junior stand- 
ing. Communications analysis, writing for business, industry and 
nonprofit organizations. Creating effective forms of public rela- 
tions communication. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

363 Publications Editing (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 361 and six units of communications writ- 
ing or consent of instructor; and, junior standing. Editing func- 
tions and techniques involved in creative development of publi- 
cations for business, industry and nonprofit organizations and 
institutions. Magazines, newspapers, newsletters and brochures. 

371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, 
Comm 101, 302, 382 and 390; typing ability required. Covering 
news events and public affairs for radio and television. (2 hours 
lecture, 3 hours lab) 

372 Advanced TV News Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 371 or consent of instructor. Writing, pro- 
duction and evaluation of television newscasts for local cable TV 
distribution. Lecture-discussion sessions on advanced reporting 
techniques and special problems in broadcast journalism. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Purpose, development, current trends, critical analysis and pro- 
duction requirements of the documentary film. Future of the 
medium in business, government, education, and television. 

378 Introduction to Audio Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications majors only. Audio production as 
it pertains to radio broadcasting, commercial production, and 
recording, television and film audio. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

381 Broadcast Copywriting (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 350 and junior standing. Writing of advertis- 
ing copy for radio and television, based upon study of unique 
media and audience characteristics, costs and coverages. (2 hours 
lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

382 Broadcasting in America (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications major or consent of instructor. 
The foundation course of the telecommunications sequence. Ra- 
dio and television from a professional perspective. Economic, 
historical, regulatory aspects and the social effects of these 
media. 


390 Introduction to Video Production (3) 

Production of programs for broadcast stations and other video 
materials for cable, business, industrial, and instructional appli- 
cations. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

402 Advanced Writing for Radio, Television and Film (3) 
Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test 
(EUT), Comm 301, and junior standing. An advanced writing 
class concentrating on the long form of broadcast and film writ- 
ing, including documentaries, features, special news, commen- 
taries, and analysis. 

407 Communications Law (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. The Anglo- 
American concept of freedom of speech and press; statutes and 
administrative regulations affecting freedom of information and 
publishing, advertising, and telecommunication. Libel and slan- 
der, rights in news and advertising, contempt, copyright, and 
invasion of privacy. 

409 Advanced Photojournalism (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 32 1 and junior standing or instructor’s con- 
sent. Advanced press photography. Extensive use of cameras for 
photographic reporting; evaluation and preparation of pictures 
for publication. Field/laboratory experience in black and white 
and color. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

410 Principles of Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Research methods 
used to assess the effects of print, broadcast, and film communi- 
cations on audience attitudes, opinions, knowledge, and behav- 
ior. Research design and data analysis in communications re- 
search. 

411 Advanced Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 301, 371, or consent of instructor. Theory, 
procedures and practice in film production: motion picture (si- 
lent and sound), scriptwriting, transfer and mixes, production, 
distribution and financing. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours lab) 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. American mass 
communication; newspapers and periodicals through radio and 
television; ideological, political, social and economic aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Major mass com- 
munication systems, both democratic and totalitarian, and the 
means by w hich news and propaganda are conveyed internation- 
ally. 

427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233, 407 and 425 and junior standing. 
Exploration of current issues which cross department sequences. 
Controversial and changing concepts of the function and role of 
the mass media. 


268 Communications 


428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. How innovations 
ideas, products, and practices perceived as new — are communi- 
cated to members of a social system. The roles of adopters, opin- 
ion leaders, change agents and communications in the diffusion 
of innovations and consequent changes in social systems. 

430 Newspaper Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor and junior standing. Organi- 
zation, operation and administration of a newspaper’s depart- 
mental activities: advertising, business, circulation, mechanical, 
news-editorial and promotion. (3 hours lecture, field trips, de- 
tailed study of one selected newspaper department) 

431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Junior standing. Mass media in Communist soci- 
eties; the U.S.S.R. , the People’s Republic of China, Poland and 
Yugoslavia. The mass media, people and party. 

435 Editorial and Critical Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, 
upper division writing course and junior standing. Editorial and 
critical writer and opinion columnist roles. Techniques of editori- 
al writing and aspects of critical thinking. (2 hours lecture; 2 
hours lab and fieldwork) 

436 Investigative and Specialized Reporting (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications Department English Usage Test, 
Comm 332, 335 and 407; and junior standing. Investigative and 
interpretive reporting of complex or specialized subjects. 

439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

Prerequisites: Senior standing, communications major and con- 
sent of instructor. Supervised internship, according to sequence, 
with newspaper, magazine, radio or television station, press asso- 
ciation, public relations firm or advertising agency. Application 
must be made through department coordinator one semester pri- 
or to entering program. (Credit/No Credit only) 

450 Advertising Communications Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 350 and 352 and junior standing. Theory 
and techniques for planning, directing and evaluating advertising 
programs with emphasis on media-message strategies. Managerial 
approach with case studies to the solution of advertising commu- 
nications problems. 

451 National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 350, 352 and 353 and junior standing. 
Advertising campaigns and utilization of mass media, such as 
television, newspapers and magazines, in national advertising 
programs. Design of complete campaigns from idea to production 
readiness. 


460 Advanced Studies in Professional Photography (3) 
Prerequisites: Comm 326 and junior standing or instructor’s con- 
sent. Analysis and execution of contemporary photographic con- 
cepts. Students will refine aesthetics and techniques culminating 
in a portfolio for professional entry into photojournalism or com- 
mercial media photography. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

464 Public Relations Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 361 and 362 and junior standing. Analysis 
of systems and strategies for planning public relations campaigns 
and solving/preventing problems. Individual, team case studies, 
in corporate development of proposals; actual use of tools in 
addition to role playing presentations to management. 

467 Public Relations Agency Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 101, 361 and junior standing. Seminar fo- 
cuses on psychology and functions of client counseling, proposal 
writing, new business development, agency management, servic- 
ing clients, evaluation of methods, reporting results, and legal 
and ethical concerns. 

478 Management in the Broadcasting & Film Industries (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced standing, Comm 382 or consent of in- 
structor. The study of management of the broadcasting, cable-TV 
and film industries with attention to financial structures, pro- 
gramming and government regulation. 

479 Advanced Video Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 390 or consent of instructor. Producing pro- 
grams for broadcast and other applications for cable, business, 
industrial and instructional use. Emphasis on location shooting 
and post production including electronic editing. (2 hours lec- 
ture, 3 hours laboratory) 

480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 233 and junior standing. Persuasive com- 
munications applied to mass communication. The communica- 
tor, audience, message content and structure, and social context 
in influencing attitudes, beliefs and opinions. 

484 Documentary Production (3) 

Prerequisites: B average in Comm 390 and 479 or 488 and con- 
sent of instructor. A lecture/laboratory course in which students 
write and produce radio, television and film documentaries. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

488 Production Workshop for Cable Television (3) 
Prerequisites: B average in Comm 390 and 479 or consent of 
instructor. Students produce informational and sport programs 
for cable TV systems and radio stations. May be repeated once for 
credit; only three units may apply to major. (9 hours laboratory) 


Communications 269 


496 Student-to-Student Tutorial (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor and previous superior perform 
mance in a similar or equivalent course. Under faculty supervi- 
sion, student provides tutorial assistance in a communications 
course. May involve small group demonstrations and discussions, 
individual tutoring and evaluation of student performance as 
appropriate. May he repeated to a maximum of four units either 
separately or in combination with Comm 499. 

497 Seminar in Public Communications Practices (3) 
Prerequisite: Comm 464, junior standing and consent of instruc- 
tor. Operationalizing public relations management principles. 
Role of public relations in contemporary society. Ethics, social 
responsibilities and trends in the emerging profession. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of department chair. Individually super- 
vised mass media projects and research on campus and in the 
community. May involve newspaper and magazine publishers, 
radio and television stations and public relations agencies. May 
he repeated up to a maximum of four units either separately or in 
combination with Com. 496. 

500 Theory and Literature of Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: Conditional classified status. Theories and research 
on communication processes and effects; source, media, message, 
audience and content variables. Types, sources and uses of com- 
munication literature. Graduate seminar. 

508 Humanistic Research in Communications (3) 
Prerequisites: Comm 410, 500 or concurrent enrollment and 
classified status. Humanistic methods of study in communica- 
tions: historical research and critical analysis applied to prob- 
lems, issues and creative works in communication. Graduate 
seminar. 

509 Social Science Research in Communications (3) 
Prerequisites: Comm 410, 500 and classified status. Social-scien- 
tific research design and analysis and the study of communication 
processes and effects. Graduate seminar. 

515 Professional Problems in Specialized Fields (3) 
Prerequisite: Comm 500. Selected topics and issues in the field of 
mass communications. Subjects vary each semester. May he re- 
peated for a maximum of six units. 


517 Ethical Problems of the Mass Media (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 500. This course will study criticisms of specific 
functions of the mass media and public relations. The course will 
consist of three sections: the history of criticism; problem areas of 
the media; and practitioner response to criticism. 

519 Communications and Governance in America (3) 
Prerequisite: Comm 500 or consent of instructor. The course will 
study relationships between systems of communications, particu- 
larly new communication technologies, and governmental insti- 
tutions and processes within the American setting. It will explore 
how technological change relates to patterns of decision-making, 
management, and the content and flow of information among 
public officials. 

520A,B,C Communications Practicum (3,3,3) 

Prerequisites: Comm 500 and six units of study-plan courses in 
area of specialization. Under supervision of a faculty member, 
students plan, design, conduct and evaluate a team project in 
their field of specialization: A — News-Editorial, B — Radio- 
Television-Film, C — Public Relations. 

525 Advanced Communications Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 500. The course is designed to provide the 
student with an up-to-date assessment of general management 
and communications management techniques, and to help equip 
the student for management positions in advertising, journalism, 
public relations and broadcasting. 

550 Advertising in Modern Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Comm 500. Assessing the impact of advertising on 
society, the culture and economy. Philosophical rther than tech- 
nical examinations of critical issues and problems such as eco- 
nomic and social effects of advertising, effects of value and life 
styles, ethics and regulation. 

597 Project (3) 

Completion of creative project in a sequence beyond regularly 
offered course work. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis in a sequence beyond regularly offered 
course work. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually super- 
vised mass media projects or research for graduate students. May 
be repeated. 


270 Communications 


Department of Speech 
Communication 

Department Chair: Joyce Flocken 
Department Office: Education Classroom 199 
Speech & Hearing Clinic: Education Classroom 190 

Programs Offered 

Bachelor of Arts in Communicative Disorders 
Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders 

Clinical Rehabilitative Services Credential (CRSC) with Spe- 
cial Class Authorization (SCA) 

Bachelor of Arts in Speech Communication 
Minor in Speech Communication 
Master of Arts in Speech Communication 
Waiver Program for the Single Subject Credential 

Faculty 

Daniel Canary, K. Jeanine Congalton, Daniel Crary, Michael 
Davis, Robert Emry, George Enell, Joyce Flocken, Robert 
Gass, Kaye Good, William Gudykunst, Ruth Guzley, Mary 
Blake Huer, Lucy Keele, Kurt Kitselman, Edith Li, Emmett 
Long, Norman Page, John Reinard, Glyndon Riley, Terry 
Saenz, Stella Ting-Toomey, Arden Thorum, A. Lynn Williams, 
Richard Wiseman, Toya Wyatt. 

Advisers 

Undergraduate: Norman Page 
Graduate: Edith Li 

INTRODUCTION 

Majors in the Department of Speech Communication study hu- 
man communication as part of a liberal arts and social sciences 
education, and in preparation for a variety of career choices. 
Students with communication background studies and training 
are: prepared to understand the roles communication plays in 
human interaction; skilled in facilitating and analyzing individ- 
ual, small group, and public communication processes; exper- 
ienced in planning and managing programs that improve the 
quality of communication; sensitized to cultural and pathological 
differences that influence communication effectiveness; and 
equipped to apply scientific methods and technical procedures to 
the study of communication improvement and competencies. 

The Department of Speech Communication offers two under- 
graduate and two graduate degree programs in communicative 
disorders and in speech communication. 



Speech Communication 271 


Instruction in Communicative Disorders has four specific goals: to 
discover relationships among human communication and other 
human behaviors; to provide students with an understanding of 
the communication process so they can evaluate normal and 
abnormal deviations; to provide theoretical understanding and 
functional skills which enable the clinician-in-training to diag- 
nose and treat disorders of speech, voice, language and hearing; 
and to develop graduate professional practitioners of speech pa- 
thology capable of serving in clinics, community centers, hospi- 
tals, private practice and school settings. 

Instruction in Speech Communication has four specific goals: to 
discover relationships among human communication and other 
human behaviors; to provide students with an understanding of 
the communication process enabling them to evaluate and affect 
their communication environments; to improve the quality of 
human communication; and to facilitate intellectual, social and 
political maturity by applying principles of communication. Stu- 
dents are prepared for careers as communication specialists in 
business, public relations, education and other professions re- 
quiring a high level of communication competencies such as the 
law and the ministry, and for doctoral level studies in speech 
communication. 

PROFESSIONAL INFORMATION 
Accreditation 

The Communicative Disorders program is fully accredited by the 
American Speech-Language-Hearing Association (ASHA). 
Graduate study in this program leads to certification with 
ASHA. 


These awards provide recognition and/or financial assistance to 
outstanding students majoring in Speech Communication or 
Communicative Disorders. 

The Seth A. Fessenden Award 

The Herbert W. Booth Award 

The Herbert W. Booth Outstanding Senior Award 

The Philip J. Schreiner Award 

The Lee E. Granell Award 

The Wayne Brockriede Award 

Graduate Assistantships and Fellowships 

The following appointments are awarded to outstanding graduate 
students in the form of competitively selected assistantships and 
lectureships: 

Clinical Graduate Assistants 
Graduate Assistants in Forensics 
Graduate Assistants in Research 
Lecturers in Speech Communication 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIVE 
DISORDERS 

Basic requirements: 42 units minimum 

Lower Division Requirements (3 units) 

Speech Comm 102 Public Speaking (3) 


Licensure 

Graduate study in Communicative Disorders leads to licensure 
with the California State Board of Medical Quality Assurance. 

Credential Information 

As an addition to the degree in Communicative Disorders, the 
Speech Communication Department offers credential programs 
in Clinical Rehabilitative Services and in Clinical Rehabilitative 
Services with a Special Class Authorization seal approved by the 
Commission for Teacher Credentialing (CTC). 

The Speech Communication Department offers course work 
leading to a waiver in the area of Language Arts for the Single 
Subject Credential Program (Secondary Education). Interested 
students should seek advisement from the department single sub- 
ject waiver adviser. 

Awards in the Department of Speech Communication 

The following awards were established by family, friends and 
colleagues of the designees in memory of their commitment and 
contributions to students engaged in the study of human commu- 
nication. 


Upper Division Requirements (33 units) 

Speech Comm 300 Introduction to Research in 
Speech Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 324 Small Group 
Communication (3) 

or Speech Comm 332 Processes of Social 
Influence (3) 

or Speech Comm 334 Persuasive Speaking (3) 
Speech Comm 341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 
Speech Comm 342 Introduction to Communicative 
Disorders (3) 

Speech Comm 343 The Neurology of Speech and 
Hearing (3) 

Speech Comm 344 The Anatomy and Physiology of 
Speech and Hearing (3) 

Speech Comm 441 Dysarticulation and Stuttering (3) 
Speech Comm 444 Childhood Language Disorders and 
Adult Aphasia (3) 

Speech Comm 451 Diagnostic Methods in 
Communicative Disorders (3) 

Speech Comm 452 Therapeutic Procedures in 
Communicative Disorders (3) 

Speech Comm 463 Audiology (3) 


272 Speech Communication 


Electives: additional units from among the following courses 
(6 units) 


Speech Comm 302 Introduction to Manual 
Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 308 Quantitative Research Methods (3) 
Intermediate Sign Language (3) 
Communication and Aging (3) 
Advanced Phonetics (3) 
Speech/Language Development (3) 
Communicative Disorders of the 
Bilingual/Bicultural Child (3) 

Speech Comm 443 Voice Disorders & Cleft Palate (3) 
Speech Comm 453 The Speech/Language and Hearing 
Clinician as a Counselor (3) 

Speech Comm 464 Audiometry (3) 

Speech Comm 465 Aural Rehabilitation (3) 


Speech Comm 312 
Speech Comm 345 
Speech Comm 402 
Speech Comm 403 
Speech Comm 404 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN 
SPEECH COMMUNICATION 

Basic Requirements: 42 units minimum 


Lower-Division Requirements (9 units) 


Speech Comm 102 
Speech Comm 200 
Speech Comm 235 
Debate (3) 


Public Speaking (3) 

Human Communication (3) 
Essentials of Argumentation and 


Upper-Division Requirements (24 units) 

Core Courses (9 units) 

Speech Comm 300 Introduction to Research in Speech 
Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 308 Quantitative Research Methods (3) 
Speech Comm 420 Communication Theory (3) 

Concentration Courses ( 1 5 units of adviser approved coursework 
reflecting a thematic focus in advocacy, interpersonal communi- 
cation, intercultural communication, organizational communi- 
cation, or rhetoric taken from among the following courses) 


Speech Comm 138 
Speech Comm 220 
Management (3) 
Speech Comm 254 
Speech Comm 320 
Speech Comm 324 
Communication 
Speech Comm 325 
Practices (3) 
Speech Comm 332 
Influence (3) 
Speech Comm 333 
and Industry (3) 
Speech Comm 334 


Forensics (2) 

Interpersonal Conflict 

Nonverbal Communication (3) 
Intercultural Communication (3) 
Small Group 

(3) 

Interviewing: Principles and 
Processes of Social 
Communication in Business 
Persuasive Speaking (3) 


Speech Comm 335 Advanced Argumentation (3) 
Speech Comm 338 Intercollegiate Forensics (2) 
Speech Comm 415 Interpersonal 
Communication Theory (3) 

Speech Comm 425 Organizational Communication 
Dynamics (3) 

Speech Comm 430 
Speech Comm 432 
Theory (3) 

Speech Comm 437 
Communication (3) 

Speech Comm 438 
Criticism (3) 


Classical Rhetorical Theory (3) 
Contemporary Rhetorical 

Internship: Speech 

Principles of Rhetorical 


Electives (9 units of adviser approved coursework in Speech 
Communication) 


MINOR IN SPEECH COMMUNICATION 

Basic Requirements: 21 units of adviser-approved courses in 
speech communication. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIVE 
DISORDERS AND IN SPEECH COMMUNICATION 
The Master of Arts in Communicative Disorders (speech- language 
pathology and audiology), accredited by the Education and 
Training Board of the American Boards of Examiners in Speech 
Pathology and Audiology since 1969, is designed: (1) to provide 
students with graduate, professional level studies covering the 
broad field of communicative disorders; (2) to provide students 
with opportunities to observe, learn and serve communicatively 
impaired clients within a wide range of clinical facilities, both 
on-campus and off-campus; and (3) to train students to assess, 
diagnose and prescribe therapy plans, and to function as thera- 
pists for selected types and populations of the communicatively 
impaired. 

The Master of Arts in Speech CommunicatUm is designed for 
students who have exceptional interest in and aptitude for study 
in the area of communication theory and process. The objectives 
of the degree include the following: to improve the student’s 
academic and professional competence, to prepare the student 
for advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree, to devel- 
op the student’s research capabilities, to contribute to improve- 
ment in teaching or clinical skills, and to increase the student’s 
knowledge in the specializations appropriate to the particular 
profession. The student is expected to demonstrate a high degree 
of intellectual competence and scholarly discipline, to evaluate 
critically, and to demonstrate mastery of the field of concentra- 
tion. 

Admission to Graduate Standing: 

Conditionally Classified 

Applicants must meet the university requirements for admission 
to conditionally classified graduate standing: a baccalaureate 
from an accredited institution and a grade-point average of at 
least 2.5 in the last 60 semester units attempted. 


Speech Communication 273 


Applicants for Communicative Disorders Program must have a 
baccalaureate in communicative disorders or the equivalent. The 
equivalent consists of a prescribed list of courses which total 30 
semester units and which form an appropriate background for 
graduate studies. Applicants for Speech Communication are re- 
quired to have a baccalaureate in speech communication or an 
allied field or complete nine units of approved background studies 
in speech communication. 

In addition, the following factors will be taken into consideration 
by the Graduate Committee in determining who shall be admit' 
ted to the program: 

1. Grade-point average. 

2 . Letters of recommendation ( preferably on department forms) . 

3. Professional objectives as presented in a student letter of 
intent. 

Graduate Standing: Classified 

A student who meets the requirements for conditionally classi- 
fied graduate standing, as well as the following requirements, may 
be granted classified graduate standing upon the development of 
an approved study plan: 

1 . Enrollment in Speech Comm 500, Research in Speech Com- 
munication, is required within the first nine units of graduate 
work included on the study plan. 

2. Completion of the study plan with 30 units of studies 
approved by an adviser and the Department Graduate 
Committee. 

Study Plan 

Requirements for the Master of Arts degree in either Communi- 
cative Disorders or Speech Communication consists of (1) a 
minimum of 30 units of study approved by the department Gradu- 
ate Committee, (2) at least 1 5 units in one of the major areas, (3) 
successful completion of comprehensive examinations and a the- 
sis (six units) or a directed graduate study research project (three 
units), and (4) may include up to six units of adviser-approved 
elective course work outside the department. 

Students in the Communicative Disorders program must com- 
plete one course in research methods (Speech Comm 500), two 
courses in language (Speech Comm 542 and 543), two courses in 
speech disorders (Speech Comm 570, 571, 573 or 574), and one 
course in either developmental or childhood language disabilities 
(Speech Comm 575 or 577). 

Students in the Speech Communication program must complete 
one course in theory (Speech Comm 536), one course in research 
methods (Speech Comm 500), and a minimum of three addition- 
al courses in 500-level seminars. 


For further information, consult the Department of Speech 

Communication. 

CLINICAL REHABILITATIVE SERVICES 
CREDENTIAL 

The credential is awarded by the State Department of Education 

and requires the following coursework: (85 units minimum) 

I. B.A. degree in Communicative Disorders or equivalent 
preparation as approved by the department Graduate 
Committee. (See Core Requirements for the B.A. in 
Communicative Disorders: 36 units). Electives to be se- 
lected from the generic program (see III below). 

II. Admission to the graduate program in communicative 
disorders. 

III. Generic program and advanced specialization program in 
speech, language and hearing disorders will include but 
not be limited to the following: 

Basic Requirements (21 units) 

Speech Comm 403 Speech/Language 
Development (3) 

Speech Comm 443 Voice Disorders and Cleft 
Palate (3) 

Speech Comm 453 The Speech/Language and 
Hearing Clinician as a Counselor (3) 

Speech Comm 464 Audiometry (3) 

Speech Comm 465 Aural Rehabilitation (3) 

Speech Comm 542 Neurophysiologic Bases of 
Speech and Language (3) 

Speech Comm 577 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Childhood Language Disorders (3) 

Electives (6 units) 

Speech Comm 571 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Stuttering (3) 

Speech Comm 573 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Voice (3) 

Speech Comm 574 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Articulation (3) 

Speech Comm 575 Seminar in Communicative 
Disorders: Developmental Disabilities (3) 

Related Areas Requirements (9 units) 

Special Ed 371 Exceptional Individual (3) 

Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology (3) 
Linguistics 402 Advanced Phonetics (3) 
or Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 


274 Speech Communication 


Clinical Practicum and Public School 
Practicum (13 units) 

Speech Comm 458 Basic Clinical Practice (3) 

Speech Comm 489A Public School Practicum in 
Communicative Disorders (4) 

Speech Comm 490 Seminar: Speech and Hearing 
Service in the Schools (2) 

Speech Comm 558 Interm Clinical Practice (2) 

Speech Comm 559A Adv Clinical Practice (2) 

CLINICAL REHABILITATIVE SERVICES 
CREDENTIAL WITH SPECIAL CLASS 
AUTHORIZATION 

This credential with special class authorization is awarded by the 
State Department of Education and requires the following: 

I. Completion of all requirements for the Clinical Rehabili- 
tative Services Credential (see above 85 units). 

II. Completion of the following: (15 units) 

Reading 480 The Teaching of Reading (4) 

Special Ed482A Exceptionality: Curriculum and Methods 
for the Learning Handicapped (3) 

Speech Comm 410 Perceptual and Cognitive 

Problems of the Severe Language Handicapped Child (3) 
Speech Comm 489B Public School Practicum in the Spe- 
cial Class (4) 


100 Introduction to Human Communication (3) 

Process variables crucial to the outcome of communication trans- 
actions. Purposes and impact of communication, attitude forma- 
tion, cognitive message elements and affective message elements. 
Participation in research projects. 

102 Public Speaking (3) 

Theory and presentation of public speeches, including an analy- 
sis of determinants of comprehension and attitude formation; 
selection and organization of speech materials, development of 
delivery skills and evaluation of message effectiveness. Student 
presentations required. Participation in research projects. (CAN 
SPCH 4) 

138 Forensics (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Investigation and practice in 
the background, format procedures and evaluation criteria of the 
various forensic events. Students must participate in at least two 
intercollegiate speech tournaments. May be repeated for credit. 
(More than 6 hours of classwork for each unit of credit) 


200 Human Communication (3) 

Theories and competencies in interpersonal, small group, public, 
organizational and intercultural communication. Variations in 
communication process across contexts is investigated. 

220 Interpersonal Conflict Management (3) 

Examination of the nature, causes and structure of interpersonal 
conflict; communication strategies exhibited in conflict; and in- 
tervention principles for conflict management. Conflict manage- 
ment theory will be applied to conflicts within marriages, small 
groups, organizations and intercultural relationships. 

235 Essentials of Argumentation and Debate (3) 

Introduction to methods of critical inquiry and advocacy. Identi- 
fying fallacies in reasoning, testing evidence and evidence 
sources, advancing a reasoned position, and defending and re- 
futing arguments. Analysis and evaluation of oral and written 
arguments. (CAN SPCH 6) 

254 Nonverbal Communication (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 254) 

300 Introduction to Research in Speech 
Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, open only to speech 
communication majors. Understanding and using professional 
literature in speech communication and using that literature to 
generate a formal research paper. A passing grade fulfills the 
course requirement of the university upper division baccalaureate 
writing requirement for speech communication majors and com- 
municative disorders majors. 

302 Introduction to Manual Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The basic principles of man- 
ual communication and sign language systems; fingerspelling and 
the development of basic sign language vocabulary in Pidgin Sign 
English (PSE). 

303 Biology of Human Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: Biology 101 or Psychology 101. The exploration of 
the biology and evolution of speech and language. Includes 
speech production, evolution and development; speech percep- 
tion; language, hemispheric specialization, clinical studies; cur- 
rent methods in neurolinguistics; and plasticity and aging. 

305 Liberal Studies in Communication Processes (3) 
Introduction to interdisciplinary study and its relationships to 
communication theory. How communication occurs in various 
disciplines. Theories about the nature of language and how this 
influences the pursuit of learning. No credit for speech communi- 
cation majors. 

308 Quantitative Research Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200. Current perspectives in 
empirical research methodology in the discipline of Speech Com- 
munication. Experimental designs, common statistical tests and 
the use of the computer as a research tool. 


Speech Communication Courses 


Speech Communication 275 


312 Intermediate Sign Language (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 302 or consent of instructor. A re- 
view of basic sign language. Additional sign vocabulary acquisi- 
tion and improvement of basic expressive and receptive skills in 
the simultaneous method of communication, utilizing traditional 
and SEE signs. 

314A Student Ambassador Program Training (1) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 100 or 102 and consent of instruc- 
tor. An intensive training course in which selected students func- 
tion as public spokespersons for CSUF. Topics include: interper- 
sonal and public communication; research and speech writing; 
team building; interviewing; and image management. 

320 Intercultural Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100. Communication problems that 
result when members of different cultures communicate. How inter- 
personal communication can overcome differences in cultures’ per- 
ceptions of communication’s functionality, value orientations, non- 
verbal behavior, language, epistemologies and rhetorics. 

324 Small Group Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200. Application of small 
group and interpersonal communication theory and behavioral 
research findings. Communication facilitation among individ- 
uals in task realization, including interpersonal needs, leader- 
ship, norms, roles, verbal and nonverbal messages, and group 
systems and procedures. 

325 Interviewing: Principles and Practices (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or consent of instructor. Princi- 
ples and practices of interviewing processes. Consideration of 
appraisal, counseling, employment, exit, journalistic, persuasive 
and survey types of interviews. Case analyses, simulations and 
community fieldwork required. 

332 Processes of Social Influence (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200. Major theories of com- 
munication concerned with influence and persuasion in society. 
Communication effectiveness through strategic application of 
theory to affecting change and evaluating appeals for change by 
others. 

333 Communication in Business and Industry (3) 
Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200. Human behavior, struc- 
tural demands and communication within organizations. Appli- 
cation of theory and behavioral research as a framework for 
generating managerial communication competencies such as in- 
terviewing, briefings, conference leadership and intergroup 
coordination. 

334 Persuasive Speaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 102 or equivalent. Strategies and tac- 
tics appropriate to leading social policy persuasive campaigns. Em- 
phasis on analysis of receiver variables, progressive use of persuasive 
materials, question and answer techniques, and the development of 
personal influence. Student presentations required. 


335 Advanced Argumentation (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 235 or consent of instructor. Argu- 
ment as applied to advocacy; logic and evidence as related to 
analysis of significant issues. 

337 Communication in the Legal Arena (3) 

Prerequisite: an upper-division writing requirement course. The 
influence of communication behaviors on civil and criminal judi- 
cial processes. A review and evaluation of research into commu- 
nication variables and legal practices, from interviewing to clos- 
ing arguments. Courtroom observation required. 

338 Intercollegiate Forensics (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Directed activity in debate 
and other forensic events. Participation in intercollegiate speech 
competition is required for credit. May be repeated for credit. 
(More than 6 hours of classwork for each unit of credit.) 

341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, or consent of instructor. 
The analysis and classification of phonemes of American English; 
the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet; and the study of 
factors influencing articulation and pronunciation. Work in lan- 
guage laboratory required. 

342 Introduction to Communicative Disorders (3) 

An overview of content areas and principles of communicative 
disorders; classification of speech and hearing disorders; profes- 
sional role at public school, hospital, and clinical sites. Lecture, 
observation, films, and demonstration. 

343 The Neurology of Speech and Hearing (3) 

Prerequisite: Biology 101 or Psychology 101. Anatomy and 
physiology of the nervous system as they relate to speech, lan- 
guage, and hearing processes. Emphasis on neuroanatomical 
bases of vision, audition, swallowing, and speech functions. In- 
troduction to higher cortical functions also will be included. 

344 The Anatomy and Physiology of Speech and 
Hearing (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Anatomy and physiology of 
the speech and hearing mechanisms; respiration, phonation, re- 
sonation, articulation and hearing. Normal functioning as a 
frame of reference for understanding disordered functioning. 
Laboratory experience. 

345 Communication and Aging (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or consent of instructor. Com- 
municative changes found in older adults including normal and 
pathologic changes in the physiological and behavioral aspects. 
Topics include diagnosis, rehabilitative strategies, social implica- 
tions, and health care systems. 


276 Speech Communication 


402 Advanced Phonetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 341 or consent of instructor. Analy- 
sis of human speech sound production and narrow transcription. 
Sounds beyond the range of American English. Taped materials 
and introduction to phonetics lab including spectrographic anal- 
ysis. (Same as Linguistics 402) 

403 Speech/Language Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, or consent of instructor. 
Phonology, morphology, syntax and semantics of speech and 
language development from birth through childhood. Meets the 
language and speech development and disorders requirement for 
specialized preparation to serve as teachers of exceptional chil- 
dren. (Same as Linguistics 403) 

404 Communicative Disorders of the Bilingual/Bicultural 
Child (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 403. A comparative analysis of nor- 
mal vs. different, delayed, and deviant language development 
(phonology, morphology, syntax, semantics, and pragmatics) of 
the bilingual/bicultural child. Review of current research, assess- 
ment, and treatment strategies with the emphasis on the avoid- 
ance of biases. 

410 Perceptual and Cognitive Problems of the Severe 
Language Handicapped Child (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in communicative disorders or con- 
sent of instructor. Philosophies and strategies used in training 
severe language handicapped children to have competencies in 
basic reading, language and numerical concepts. Classroom 
management. 

415 Interpersonal Communication Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 100 or 200, 308, 324, 420 or consent 
of instructor. The behavioral and humanistic approaches to the- 
ories of interpersonal communication. Functions of communica- 
tion which influence interpersonal relationships, including com- 
municator characteristics, information exchange, situational de- 
mands and interpersonal evaluations. 

420 Communication Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 200, 300, 308, or graduate stand- 
ing, or consent of instructor. Analysis of various theories and 
perspectives on human communication. Attention is paid to 
understanding basic forms of theories and to developing students’ 
theoretical perspectives on human communication. 

422 Applications of Intercultural Communication (3) 

Prerequisite: Speech Comm 320. Nature and effects of intercul- 
tural communication within multicultural/multinational organi- 
zations. Examination of intercultural leadership, negotiation, 
decision-making, and communication competence. Analysis of 
and practice in a number of intercultural training approaches. 


425 Organizational Communication Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 308 and 333. The interrelation- 
ships between management and communication theories. The 
microsystems and macrosystems within an organization are em- 
phasized in terms of intrapersonal, interpersonal, small group and 
organizational communication theories. 

430 Classical Rhetorical Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper division coursework in Speech 
Comm including Speech Comm 300. Significance of rhetoric 
and oratory in Greek and Roman intellectual life from the 4th 
Century B.C. to 300 A.D. Contributors include Protagoras, Soc- 
rates, Plato, Aristotle, Cicero, Quintilian, and Augustine. 

432 Contemporary Rhetorical Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: six units of upper-division courses in communica- 
tion theory and process to include Speech Communication 300. 
The nature of rhetorical theory in the 20th century. 

437 Internship: Speech Communication (3) 

Prerequisites: any two of the following courses: Speech Comm 
305, 324, 333, 420, 425 or consent of instructor. Onsite involve- 
ment with communication frameworks as they function in on- 
going organizational settings. Working in an organization and 
seminar activities. Application for internship must be submitted 
prior to enrollment. 

438 Principles of Rhetorical Criticism (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of upper-division communication theory 
and process courses to include Speech Comm 300. Explanation 
and evaluation of rhetorical experience. Historical modes of 
criticism, issues in rhetorical criticism, criticism in various con- 
texts and experiences in criticism. 

441 Dysarticulation and Stuttering (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300 or graduate standing, 341, 342, 
344, or consent of the instructor. Dysarticulation and stuttering 
studied with emphasis on descriptive and treatment principles 
which emerge from current theory and practice. 

443 Voice Disorders and Cleft Palate (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300 or graduate standing, 341 , 342, 
343, and 344, or consent of instructor. Etiologic, diagnostic, and 
management aspects of communicative disorders associated with 
oromaxillofacial and laryngeal dysfunction or pathology. 

444 Childhood Language Disorders and Adult Aphasia (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300 or graduate standing, and 
Speech Comm 341, 342, 343, 344 and 403. Communicative 
disorders involving language impairments in children and adults. 
Emphasis on relationship of language impairments to cognition, 
central nervous system operations and environmental influences. 

451 Diagnostic Methods in Communicative Disorders (3) 
Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300, 341, 342, 343, 344, and 441. 
Lecture and supervised demonstrations; techniques and proce- 
dures for the assessment of communicative disorders. 


Speech Communication 277 


452 Therapeutic Procedures in Communicative 
Disorders (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 300, 341, 342, 343, 344, and 441. 
Lecture and supervised demonstrations; techniques and proce- 
dures for the treatment of communicative disorders. 

453 The Speech/Language and Hearing Clinician as a 
Counselor (3) 

Prerequisites: Speech Comm 342, 441, 463, or consent of in- 
structor. The dynamics of conferencing and counseling. Effective 
use of numerous relational and communication approaches in 
parent, family and client counseling. Increased self-awareness 
and the guidance of those exhibiting communication disorders. 
Making appropriate referrals. 

458 Basic Clinical Practice: Communicative Disorders (3) 
Prerequisites: Speech Comm 341, 342, 343, 344, 441, 451 and 
452; senior or graduate standing and approved application prior 
to semester of practicum. The application of diagnostic a